Drilling Operations Manual Combined - V5Feb2015' PDF

Drilling Operations Manual
Prepared by Well Engineering Partners
Approved by:
Publication date: Feb 2015
Your partners in value creation

Your partners in value creation
Table of Contents, Glossary & Abbreviations
Prepared by: Well Engineering Partners
Approved by:
Version: Feb 2015

2
Objective of this Drilling Operations Manual is to provide checklists, best practices & lessons
learnt, step by step operational programming and background engineering data for the
common drilling and well construction activities.
The key users for whom this document is written are Petrom wellsite staff and in particular the
drilling supervisor and wellsite drilling engineer who will manage and supervise these
operations.
This document is endorsed by the Petrom Drilling Manager to standardise drilling operations.
Well Engineering Partners (WEP) B.V.

Toldijk 17-19
PO Box 612
7900 AP Hoogeveen
The Netherlands
Tel: +31-528-227710
[email protected]
www.we-p.nl

Table of Contents, Glossary & Abbreviations | Version Feb 2015 /
3
1 HSE, Roles & Responsibilities, Reporting

4
2 Wellhead and BOP Testing Requirements

5
3 Tophole including shallow gas

6
4 Well control

7
5 Directional Drilling & BHA

8
6 Drill Bits

9
7 Drilling Practices & window milling

10
8 Drilling Fluids

11
9 Hole cleaning, Tripping, Preventing stuck pipe

12
10 Casing and Liner running

13
11 Casing and Liner Cleanout

14
12 Cementing

15
13 Formation Integrity Test

16
14 Well Logging

17
15 Fishing and Backing Off

18
16 Conventional coring procedures

19
17 Plug and abandonment

20
Glossary and abbreviations list
Annular pressure
Fluid pressure in the annulus between tubing and casing or between two strings of casing.
Annular velocity
The speed at which drilling fluid or cement moves in the annulus. It is important to
monitor annular velocity to ensure that the hole is being properly cleaned of cuttings,
cavings and other debris while avoiding erosion of the borehole wall.
Azimuth
The compass direction of a directional survey or of the wellbore as planned or measured
by a directional survey. The azimuth is usually specified in degrees with respect to the
geographic or magnetic north pole.
Bottom Hole Assembly

The lower portion of the drillstring, consisting of (from the bottom up in a vertical well)
the bit, bit sub, a mud motor (in certain cases), stabilizers, drill collars, heavy-weight
drillpipe, jarring devices ("jars") and crossovers. The bottomhole assembly must provide
force for the bit to break the rock and provide the driller with directional control of the
well.
Bit breaker
A special tool used by the rig crew to prevent the drill bit from turning while the bit sub on
top of it is tightened or loosened. Bits have noncylindrical shapes, so the conventional
wrenches used by the rig crew to tighten cylindrical shapes like pipes do not fit the bits
properly. In addition, some bits, such as PDC bits, have a wide range of unusual and
asymmetric shapes or profiles. The bit breaker must match the bit profile or the bit may
be ruined before ever being used.
Bit record
A historical record of how a bit performed in a particular wellbore. The bit record includes
such data as the depth the bit was put into the well, the distance the bit drilled, the hours
the bit was being used "on bottom" or "rotating," the mud type and weight, the nozzle
sizes, the weight placed on the bit, the rotating speed and hydraulic flow information. The
data are usually updated daily. When the bit is pulled at the end of its use, the condition
of the bit and the reason it was pulled out of the hole are also recorded. Bit records are
often shared among operators and bit companies and are one of many valuable sources of
data from offset wells for well design engineers.
Bleed off
To equalize or relieve pressure from a vessel or system. At the conclusion of high-
pressure tests or treatments, the pressure within the treatment lines and associated
systems must be bled off safely to enable subsequent phases of the operation to
continue.
Break circulation
To establish circulation of drilling fluids after a period of static conditions. Circulation may
resume after a short break, such as taking a survey or making a connection. The
operation is of more concern to drillers and well planners with longer static intervals,
since immobile drilling mud tends to become less fluid and more gelatinous or semisolid
with time.
Break out
To unscrew drillstring components, including tool joints and other threaded connections.

21
Buoyancy
The upward force acting on an object placed in a fluid. The buoyancy force is equal to the
weight of fluid displaced by the object. Buoyancy can have significant effects in cases in
which the wellbore and tubing string contain liquid and gas. Any change in the relative
volumes or fluid levels will change the buoyancy forces.
Caliper log
A representation of the measured diameter of a borehole along its depth. Caliper logs are
usually measured mechanically, with only a few using sonic devices. The tools measure
diameter at a specific chord across the well. Since wellbores are usually irregular
(rugose), it is important to have a tool that measures diameter at several different
locations simultaneously. Such tools are called multi-arm calipers.
Casing shoe
The bottom of the casing string, including the cement around it, or the equipment run at
the bottom of the casing string.
Centralizer
A mechanical device to position casing concentrically in the wellbore. A centralizer is
usually used during cementing operations to provide a constant annular space around the
casing, rather than having the casing lying eccentrically against the borehole wall.
Centrifuge
An item of solids-removal equipment that removes fine and ultrafine solids. It consists of
a conical drum that rotates at 2000 to 4000 rpm. Drilling fluid is fed into one end and the
separated solids are moved up the bowl by a rotating scroll to exit at the other end.
Choke line
A high-pressure pipe leading from an outlet on the BOP stack to the backpressure choke
and associated manifold. During well-control operations, the fluid under pressure in the
wellbore flows out of the well through the choke line to the choke, reducing the fluid
pressure to atmospheric pressure.
Circulation loss
The loss of drilling fluid to a formation, usually caused when the hydrostatic head
pressure of the column of drilling fluid exceeds the formation pressure.
Close-in
To close a valve to stop or isolate fluid flow. The term is most commonly applied to
"closing-in the well," meaning isolation of the wellbore.
C-plate
Plate with C-shape that can be put around the pipe to support the casing string which is in
the hole preventing it to fall down in the hole. A C-plate can be used for backup in case of
failure of the slips. It cannot be used for flush pipe.
Crossover (X-over)
A short subassembly used to enable two components with different thread types or sizes
to be connected.
Cuttings
Small pieces of rock that break away due to the action of the bit teeth. Cuttings are
screened out of the liquid mud system at the shale shakers and are monitored for
composition, size, shape, color, texture, hydrocarbon content and other properties by the
mud engineer, the mud logger and other on-site personnel. The mud logger usually
captures samples of cuttings for subsequent analysis and archiving.

22
Dogleg Severity
A particularly crooked place in a wellbore where the trajectory of the wellbore in three-
dimensional space changes rapidly. While a dogleg is sometimes created intentionally by
directional drillers, the term also refers to a section of the hole that changes direction
faster than anticipated or desired, usually with harmful side effects. Higher doglegs may
create problems , such as key seating or damage to the drillstring.
Drilling break
A sudden increase in the rate of penetration during drilling.
Elevator
A hinged mechanism that may be closed around drillpipe or other drillstring components
to facilitate lowering them into the wellbore or lifting them out of the wellbore.
Equivalent Circulating Density

For circulating wellbores, the BHP (Bottom hole pressure) increases by the amount of fluid
friction in the annulus. This pressure may be back-calculated as an apparent mud density
called the Equivalent Circulating Density. The ECD should exceed the formation pressure
gradient to avoid an influx of formation fluid into the wellbore. On the other hand, if ECD
is too high, a weak formation may fracture and cause a loss of wellbore fluids. The loss of
fluid to one formation may be followed by the influx of fluid from another formation.
Fines
Very small particles, either in a mud or a mud additive sample.
Float collar
A short length of casing fitted with a check valve. This device may be a flapper-valve
type, a spring-loaded ball valve or another type. The float collar prevents the cement
slurry placed in the annulus to U-tube, or reverse flow back into the casing. The greater
density of cement slurries than the displacement mud inside the casing causes the U-tube
effect.
Fracture gradient
The pressure required to induce fractures in rock at a given depth.
Gauge hole
A wellbore that is essentially the same diameter as the bit that was used to drill it.
Hole cleaning
Synonyms: Cuttings transport, cuttings lifting. Good hole cleaning means the cuttings are
efficiently removed from the wellbore by the drilling fluid.
Junk
Anything in the wellbore that is not supposed to be there. The term is usually reserved for
small pieces of steel such as hand tools, small parts, bit nozzles, pieces of bits or other
downhole tools, and remnants of milling operations.
Junk basket
A tool run into the wellbore to retrieve junk from the bottom of the hole.

23
Kelly
A long square or hexagonal steel bar with a hole drilled through the middle for a fluid
path. The kelly is used to transmit rotary motion from the rotary table or kelly bushing to
the drillstring, while allowing the drillstring to be lowered or raised during rotation. The
kelly goes through the kelly bushing, which is driven by the rotary table. The kelly
bushing has an inside profile matching the kelly's outside profile (either square or
hexagonal), but with slightly larger dimensions so that the kelly can freely move up and
down inside.
Kelly bushing
An adapter that serves to connect the rotary table to the kelly. The kelly bushing has an
inside diameter profile that matches that of the kelly, usually square or hexagonal. It is
connected to the rotary table by four large steel pins that fit into mating holes in the
rotary table.
Landing joint / Landing string

Joint that is used to pull or land the hanger.
Lost Circulation Material

Solid material intentionally introduced into a mud system to reduce and eventually
prevent the flow of drilling fluid into a weak, fractured or vugular formation.
Make up
Tighten threaded connections.
Mud
Synonym for drilling fluid.
Neutral point
The point on a string of tubulars at which there are neither tension nor compression
forces present. Below the neutral point, there will be compression forces that build toward
the bottom of the wellbore. Above the neutral point, tensile forces build to a maximum
applied at the hanger or as hook load.
Offset well
An existing wellbore close to a proposed well that provides information for planning the
proposed well.
Pack off
To plug the wellbore around a drillstring. This can happen for a variety of reasons, the
most common being that either the drilling fluid is not properly transporting cuttings and
cavings out of the annulus or portions of the wellbore wall collapse around the drillstring.
When the well packs off, there is a sudden reduction or loss of the ability to circulate, and
high pump pressures follow
Pick up weight
Maximum weight when pulling the string upwards and the complete string is in motion.
Includes string weight and frictional drag.
Pill
Any relatively small quantity of a special blend of drilling fluid to accomplish a specific
task that the regular drilling fluid cannot perform. Examples include high-viscosity pills to
help lift cuttings out of a vertical wellbore, freshwater pills to dissolve encroaching salt
formations, pipe-freeing pills to destroy filter cake and relieve differential sticking forces
and lost circulation material pills to plug a thief zone.

24
Pipe dope
A specially formulated blend of lubricating grease and fine metallic particles that prevents
thread galling (a particular form of metal-to-metal damage) and seals the roots of
threads. The American Petroleum Institute (API) specifies properties of pipe dope,
including its coefficient of friction. The rig crew applies copious amounts of pipe dope to
the drillpipe tool joints every time a connection is made.
Reverse circulation
The intentional pumping of wellbore fluids down the annulus and back up through the
drillpipe.
Rheology
The science and study of the deformation and flow of matter. The term is also used to
indicate the properties of a given fluid, as in mud rheology. Rheology is an extremely
important property of drilling muds, drill-in fluids, workover and completion fluids,
cements and specialty fluids and pills. Mud rheology is measured on a continual basis
while drilling and adjusted with additives or dilution to meet the needs of the operation.
In water-base fluids, water quality plays an important role in how additives perform.
Temperature affects behavior and interactions of the water, clay, polymers and solids in a
mud. Downhole pressure must be taken into account in evaluating the rheology of oil
muds.
Round trip
The complete operation of removing the drillstring from the wellbore and running it back
in the hole.
Running tool
A generic name for a tool or device that is used in the placement or setting of downhole
equipment such as permanent packers or plugs. The running tool can be retrieved after
the operation or setting process.
Saver sub
A short length of drill collar that has male threads on one end and female on the other. It
is screwed onto the bottom of the kelly or topdrive and onto the rest of the drillstring.
When the hole must be deepened, and pipe added to the drillstring, the threads are
unscrewed between the saver sub and the rest of the drillstring, as opposed to between
the kelly or topdrive and the saver sub. This means that the connection between the kelly
or topdrive and the saver sub rarely is used, and suffers minimal wear and tear, whereas
the lower connection is used in almost all cases and suffers the most wear and tear. The
saver sub is exchangeable and does not represent a major investment.
slack off weight

The weight reading when the pipe is moving downwards.
Space out
To assemble components to ensure that all critical length dimensions are met, as is
required to ensure that the production tubing can be landed in the wellhead and
production packer with the desired weight distribution.
Spud mud
Mud used to drill a well from surface to a shallow depth.
Squeeze job
The careful application of pump pressure to force a treatment fluid or slurry into a
planned treatment zone.

25
Stab-in
To guide the end of a pipe into a coupling when making up a connection.
Stand
Two or three single joints of drillpipe or drill collars that remain screwed together during
tripping operations.
Swab
To reduce pressure in a wellbore by moving pipe, wireline tools or rubber-cupped seals up
the wellbore. If the pressure is reduced sufficiently, reservoir fluids may flow into the
wellbore and towards the surface. Swabbing is generally considered harmful in drilling
operations, because it can lead to kicks and wellbore stability problems.
Tally
A list that records the total length of pipe, casing, or tubing that is to be run in a well.
Tell tale
Terminology used to describe a screen that, when packed off by gels, will give a pressure
rise at the surface, thereby telling the tool operator that the gel has reached a certain
location.
Trip chart, Road map.

Chart that shows the moments and durations of tripping.
Trip out
To remove the drillstring from the wellbore. Synonyms: POOH (Pull out of hole).
Twist-off
Parting or breaking of the drillstring downhole due to fatigue or excessive torque.
Underbalance
The amount of pressure (or force per unit area) exerted on a formation exposed in a
wellbore below the internal fluid pressure of that formation. If sufficient porosity and
permeability exist, formation fluids enter the wellbore.

26
Abbreviations
AH Along Hole
ALARP As Low As Reasonably Possible
API American Petroleum Institute
BHA Bottom Hole Assembly
BHP Bottom Hole Pressure
BOP Blow Out Preventer
BOSIET Basic Offshore Satey Induction and Emergency Training
B/U Bottoms-Up
CR Clearance Ratio
DC Drill Collar
DD Directional Driller
DDR Daily Drilling Report
DLS Dogleg Severity
DP Drill Pipe
DSV Drilling Supervisor
ECD Equivalent Circulating Density
EOWR End Of Well Report
ERD Extended Reach Drilling
FIT Formation Integrity Test
HC Hydro Carbons
HCR High Closing Ratio
HWDP Heavy Weight Drill Pipe
IADC International Association of Drilling Contractors
ID Inner Diameter
MU Make Up
MW Mud Weight
MWD Measure While Drilling
NRV None Return Valve
LCM Lost Circulation Material
LOT Leak Off Test
OD Outer Diameter
OH Open Hole
PDC Poly Diamond Crystalline
PDM Positive Displacement Motor (mud motor)
POOH Pull Out Of Hole
RD Rig Down
RIH Run In Hole
RKB Rotary Kelly Bushing
ROP Rate Of Progress
RPM Rotations Per Minute
RSS Rotary Steerable System
RU Rig Up
RIH Run In Hole
SF Safety Factor
Spec Specifications
SIMOPS Simultaneous Operations
SPM Strokes Per Minute
TD Total Depth
TVD True Vertical Depth
UBHO Universal Bottom Hole Orientation
WOB Weight On Bit
WOC Wait On Cement
WSDE Well Site Drilling Engineer
XO Cross Over

Prepared by WEP
Author:
Version: September 2014
Verified:
2
1 HSE, Roles & Responsibilities, Reporting ............................................................... 3

1.1 HSE policy.................................................................................................. 3
1.2 Rig site roles & responsibilities...................................................................... 5
1.3 Health ....................................................................................................... 8
1.4 Safety ....................................................................................................... 9
1.4.1 Occupational safety ............................................................................... 9
1.4.2 Process safety ...................................................................................... 9
1.5 Environment............................................................................................. 10
1.6 HSE Meetings ........................................................................................... 11
1.7 Permit to Work ......................................................................................... 13
1.8 Specific HSE aspects for various high risk operations ..................................... 13
1.8.1 Perforating and handling explosives or radioactive material ...................... 13
1.8.2 Handling radioactive material ............................................................... 14
1.8.3 Simultaneous operations (SIMOPS) ....................................................... 14
1.8.4 Drills ................................................................................................. 15
1.8.5 Audits ............................................................................................... 15
1.9 Reporting ................................................................................................. 16
1.9.1 Daily reporting ................................................................................... 17
1.9.2 Ad hoc / Incident reporting .................................................................. 18
1.9.3 Operations reporting and After Action Review (AAR)................................ 18
1.9.4 End of well report (EOWR) ................................................................... 19
1.10 Project start ............................................................................................. 20
1.10.1 Pre-Spud Meeting / Drill the well on paper DWOP ................................... 20
1.10.2 Drilling equipment requirements and inspections .................................... 20
1.10.3 Downhole equipment ........................................................................... 21
1.10.4 Surface equipment .............................................................................. 21
Appendix 1 Meeting structure and contents ......................................................... 22
App. 1.1 Pre-operations meeting .......................................................................... 22
App. 1.2 Operations meeting ................................................................................ 23
App. 1.3 Toolbox meeting .................................................................................... 24
App. 1.4 Workplace safety meeting ....................................................................... 25
App. 1.5 HSE meeting ......................................................................................... 26
Appendix 2 Petroms daily drilling report ............................................................. 27
Appendix 3 Example After Activity Review (AAR) .................................................. 29
Appendix 4 Job safety analysis (JSA) Instructions .............................................. 30
Appendix 5 When a permit to work is required + Example ..................................... 35

1 HSE, Roles & Responsibilities, Reporting | Version:September 2014
3
1.1 HSE policy

Company policy
It is Petroms policy that in the conduct of their activities foremost consideration is given
to the Health and Safety of all persons and safeguarding of the Environment. The Health,
Safety and Environment (HSE) objectives have equal status in relation to other Petrom
primary business objectives. Line management and Petrom well site supervisory staff
shall therefore be responsible for ensuring full implementation of HSE policies.
HSE golden rules

4
HSE programme
For drilling operations, the specific safety related requirements shall be stipulated in the
yearly revised HSE programme. Any deviation from the policy requirements shall be
identified and does require management approval for acceptance.
Process safety
Process safety is important topic for our operations. It is about management of Major
Accidents Hazards (MAH) and prevention of such incidents like well control events leading
to blow-outs, subsequent explosions, fires, collapsing structures, significant

5
environmental and surrounding impacts. We have to ensure that all our Major Risks are
known, assessed, recorded and controlled to As Low As Reasonably Practicable (ALARP)
Level. Process Safety in wells is also about maintaining Well Control Barriers (for more
see Section 1.4). All drilling MAH risk assessments are reflected and recorded in OMV
Petrom Drilling HSE Case.
Quality
The objective for the Drilling Department is to produce a quality, fit for purpose wellbore,
drilled in accordance with agreed specifications, the standard practices and procedures
and at a competitive cost.
The criteria for a fit for purpose wellbore include:

No well control incidents which cause injury to personnel, damage to equipment or
harm to the environment.
Penetrate hydrocarbon bearing intervals without formation impairment which will
affect logging and production.
Provide hole conditions that will allow attainment of high quality logs, cores,
cuttings, etc., over areas of interest.
Meet the planned trajectory of the well.
Attain the required bottom hole position without deviating from the planned
trajectory.
Good cementation to avoid cross flow across selective zones, gas percolating to
the surface and contamination of the fresh water aquifer.
1.2 Rig site roles & responsibilities

It is the responsibility of everyone to STOP the operation whenever a risky situation
occurred. It is the responsibility of the drilling contractor to drill the well to the correct
specification. The quality of work must be monitored and controlled primarily by the
Toolpusher with support from the Drilling Supervisor (DSV) and the contractors project
team to ensure that the well objectives are not compromised.
The primary responsibilities of the DSV are:

Serves as the primary liaison between Petrom and Drilling Contractor and will
provide supervision of all operations performed on Petroms wells;
Responsible for overseeing the technical aspects of the work and ensures that
the drilling program is being executed as planned;
Ensures that all company Safety Rules and HSEQ Regulations are followed and
implemented
Will work with Drilling Engineers and Service Providers to see that modern and
proven practices are followed;
DSV act as RSES (Responsible for Safety and Environment on Site)
Responsibilities for the implementation, supervision, verification and control of drilling

operations are tabulated in Table 1.

6
Action Party Responsible For Party

Execution Responsible For
QC
Call-Out Company supplied equipment Toolpusher DSV
Call-Out Contractor supplied Toolpusher DSV
equipment
Conduct drills Toolpusher DSV
Inspect tubulars Toolpusher DSV
Inspect and test BOP Toolpusher DSV
Monitor well track DSV DSV
Programme and monitor drilling DSV DSV
parameters
Monitor drilling costs versus plan DSV DSV
BHA design and bit selection DSV/Directional Driller DSV
Measure and tally tubulars Toolpusher DSV
Safe and proper operation of rig Toolpusher DSV
equipment
Well control Toolpusher DSV
Decide when to conduct check trips Toolpusher DSV
Carry out flow checks Toolpusher DSV
Maintain Trip Sheets in and out of the Toolpusher DSV
hole
Report drilling problems Toolpusher DSV
Maintain adequate mud, chemical, Mud Engineer & DSV
LCM & cement stocks Cementing Engineer
Table 1, Responsibilities for the implementation, supervision, verification and control of
drilling operations
On the rigsite, the Petrom DSV is specifically responsible for the following HSE
matters:
Implementation of HSE procedures:

1. To ascertain and respect the legislations provisions in the area of health and
safety at work, protection against fire and civil protection.
2. Ensuring that Petroms HSE policies, standards, programmes and procedures are
implemented to allow a work environment and work conditions without risks for
safety and health;
3. To ensure that PPE standard is properly implemented;
4. To ensure that safety and security devices are functioning correctly, are correctly
used, are not altered, changed or removed from the rig site;
5. Instructing Sub-Contractor personnel to observe the Rig Contractors safety
program;
6. Safe Shift Handover (two way communication, face-to-face, recorded, sufficient
time allocated);
7. Ensure that all visitors and persons with more than 3 month absence from well site
receive Site Specific HSE Induction;
8. Communication and ensuring compliance with 8 HSE Golden Rules;

7
9. Minimum HSE training requirements are met.
Incident / accident reporting:

1. Reporting any hazards to the appropriate Drilling Contractor supervisors when
situations exist where safety has been compromised and to ensure that
appropriate action has been taken to correct the situation.
2. To inform the line manager and/or the employer about any incidents and accidents
occured; immediate verbal notification followed by written Incident Notification
within 24 hours;
3. To provide to assigned persons all known data and information concerning
occurred work incidents and accidents.
4. To communicate immediately to the employer and/or assigned employees any
situation on which he/she have serious reasons to consider as a danger for the
safety and health of the employees, as well as any malfunctioning of the protection
system;
5. Follow up Petroms reporting procedure related to incidents / accidents.
Simultaneous Operations (SIMOPS):

See section 1.8.3 for further details
1. Co-ordinating activities in order to avoid conflicts in safety matters, in particular
when in a Simultaneous Operations situation where drilling is on the same location
as production activities.
Emergency response:
1. to act, according to the procedures established at the work place, in case of
occurrence of any imminent fire danger or other emergency situation;
2. Provide emergency contingency plans and co-ordination of outside third party
groups such as oil spill response, rig evacuation, etc.
3. DSV has final decision on abandon rig in case of emergency situation. (Acts as
RSES)
Audits & drills:

1. Carrying out audits and drills to ensure that Petroms, Drilling Contractors and
(sub-) contractors HSE responsibilities are fully adhered to.
2. Boots on for safety program DSV to spend minimum 3-4 hours auditing Well
Site Areas.
The Drilling Contractor shall be responsible for following HSE matters:

1. Implementing a management strategy directed at providing a safe work site.
2. Preparing and implementing an on-site safety programme.
3. Develop and implement HSE on job training (OJT) programme.
4. From assistant driller upwards, supervisory staff shall have a valid IWCF certificate
(WellCap accepted for offshore assets).
5. Safety of Drilling Contractor and sub-contractor personnel,
6. Control of work and health conditions on the well site.
7. Providing contractor personnel with necessary protective and safety equipment
and necessary training in the use of such equipment.

8
8. Ensuring that all contractor furnished machinery and equipment is maintained in

safe running order and inspected regularly to ensure a safe continuous operation.
9. OPITO approved Bosiet certificate for offshore operations.
10. Station Bill should be in place together with proper training provided for entire
team.
11. Emergency contingency plans for major events such as blow out, fire/explosion,
toxic material release, severe weather, etc. that do not require third party
personnel or equipment.
12. Full compliance with all applicable laws and regulations.
13. Full compliance with Petrom safety guidelines, policies and procedures.
14. Conducting emergency drills, as per schedule.
15. Achieving all the safety targets mutually agreed upon by both company and
contractors,
16. Having available on the well site a HSE manual containing the following:
HSE Policy statement.
HSE organisation.
HSE programs and campaigns to continuously improve Worksite safety.
HSE rules and practices.
Work permit system. Refer to attachment 5 for a list showing when a permit to
work is required.
Accident reporting and investigation procedures.
Emergency response
Any 3rd party equipment shall be inspected and approved by TP before utilising
it.
17. Collecting and analyzing wellsite HSE data (incidents, START-cards, trainings etc.)
18. Ensure proactive full participation in Start-card program
19. Full compliance with HSE Golden Rules
1.3 Health
All personnel must strive to prevent all occupational diseases and promote the health of
all employees.
Improvement of occupational health standards shall be implemented in accordance with
the HSE Plan. The required actions which are published in the plan shall be undertaken by
all Petrom, Drilling Contractor and Sub-Contractor personnel.
Specific ways in which improvement of health and hygiene shall be implemented at the
well site are summarised as follows:
Pre-employment and periodic medical checks conducted for all worksite personnel
All rigs must be sound mapped and areas designated for hearing protection.
All Contractors shall provide hearing protection for their personnel.
All rigs shall have a hazardous materials register.
Regular sanitary checks of food and potable water quality
Radioactive sources will be checked regularly, markings verified, and a permit to
work system is mandatory for storing and handling RA sources.

9
Location should have an agreed Muster point in case of emergencies and

designated smoking areas.
Locations of first aid facilities have to be clearly marked and should be known by
personnel.
When mixing chemicals minimum PPE set to include: rubbers gloves, rubber
aprons, safety goggles, boots and dust masks have to be worn. Consult MSDS for
correct type of PPE for each chemical.
Rig medic must give a monthly health presentation.
1.4 Safety
To avoid incidents and accidents, and to work safely on the rigsite is the top priority.
Two aspects are to be considered:
1. Occupational safety
2. Process safety
1.4.1 Occupational safety

Specific Occupational safety regulations applicable to drilling operations are:
HSE Golden rules compliance
Worksite Minimum PPE set: Hard Hat with chin strap; Coveralls (Fire Retardant and
Antistatic); boots with protection toe; gloves; safety glasses
Safety meetings are held for every major operational step. Specific hazards related
to each operation have to be discussed.
All personnel must wear proper, valid PPE.
Always conduct proper housekeeping in particular in hazardous areas such as on
the rig floor and around the pipe handling areas.
All non-essential personnel are to be cleared from the rig floor.
Drops prevention campaign shall be developed.
JSA conducted for every task
Apply permit to work for special operations, see section 1.7:
o Lock-out/Tag-out (LOTO) procedure in place and implemented
o Works at height / man riding operations
o Fire watcher/Stand by person considered for every Hot Work Activity
o Entry in confined spaces
1.4.2 Process safety

In general Process Safety means the management of hazards that can give rise to major
accidents involving: multiple fatalities, release of potentially dangerous materials, release
of energy (such as fire or explosion) or both.
Drilling Process Safety requires any operator undertaking to drill and complete a well, to
take all necessary precautions to keep the well under control at all times., and yet also
includes monitoring, accounting, and communicating the combination of factors which
together indicate probable consequences and thus able to assess the current dynamic
status of risk to make prudent decisions as to operations and also to decide the minimum
qualifications of personnel required to make such operational decisions.

10
In essence Drilling Process Safety is assessment of dynamic risk so as to affect conduct in

a process that has its first priority as keeping a well under control and subordinates even
the priority of personal safety in extreme circumstances and balances focus appropriately
with operational and personal safety objectives.
Main Process Safety Elements:

Design risks (ALARP)
We maintain the hardware barriers (Preventative Maintenance System)
We work within the operational barriers and not exceeding the limits
Leaders play an important role in avoiding process safety incidents and must
demonstrate visibility
The following important actions should be applied and followed:

Always maintain 2 independent physical barriers to ensure that well is under
control.
All equipment should only be used as intended, and maximum ratings should
never be exceeded (operational envelope).
All equipment must be certified and in good working condition.
Comply with Manufacturer recommendations.
Third party equipment arriving on location shall not be put in function without
DSVs approval.
DSV is responsible for checking relevant certification for such equipment.
Any deviation from Drilling Program or rig modification should follow approved
Management Of Change (MOC) Procedure.
Conduct regular exercises and drills to ensure quick and effective response as per
contractual agreement.
Report and investigate any well control event (kick, swabbing, ballooning etc.)
Ignition sources control for Zone 1, 2, and ATEX compliance.
1.5 Environment
All personnel must strive to prevent damage to the environment. Improvements to
environmental protection standards shall be implemented in accordance with Petrom HSE
Plan. The required actions, which are published in the plan, shall be undertaken by the
Drilling Contractor as well as Petrom personnel. Specific ways in which improvement of
environmental protection must be implemented at the well site are summarised as
follows:
Waste Management concept Reduce-Reuse-Recycle applied on site.
Mud/brine/cuttings discharge must be monitored.
All hydrocarbon spills must be reported.
Auditing of domestic, industrial and scheduled waste disposal must be carried
out.
Scrap metal must be segregated.
Paper must be separated from waste.

11
Waste oil drums must be labelled.

Chemical waste must be minimized.
Quarterly diesel fuel usage must be reported.
Environmental topics must be included in well site HSE meetings.
Minimum number of oil spill kits in place together with oil spill emergency plan
as per contractual agreement.
1.6 HSE Meetings

Recommendations and critical comments must be passed directly to superiors or senior
management.
To preserve smooth function of the system, HSE meetings are divided into different
categories:
Toolbox meeting
Weekly HSE meeting
Workplace safety meeting
Pre-job or Pre-tour meeting
Quarterly HSE-meeting
Annual HSE meeting
Safety Team Meeting
Special meetings (i.e. prior to execution of special operations)
Any time there is a threat to operations or people safety STOP the Work and perform
Time out for Safety (TOFS)
Toolbox meeting
Toolbox meetings are held prior start of operations. The meeting is organised by either
Petrom or the drilling contractor. Service companies involved in the planned operations
are participating. The organising party establishes the minutes of the meeting including
the names of the participants and the subjects discussed. The meetings are documented
by the driller in the DDR.
Weekly HSE meeting

The weekly HSE meeting discusses all relevant subjects related to HSE and operations. It
evaluates respective action taken by the departments with the following participants:
Rig/ Operations manager
QHSE manager
Drilling Supervisor
Toolpusher
Driller
Assistant Driller
Crew members
Service Companies members

12
Workplace safety meeting

The workplace safety meeting cares about safe working places. The members meet every
five or six weeks with the following participants:
QHSE Manager
Drilling Supervisor
Toolpusher
Safety Delegates
Crew representative
Contractor representative
3rd party representative.
Pre-Job or Pre-Tour Meeting

At the beginning of each shift pre-job meetings are held to promote a safe working place.
Agencies and 3rd party personnel are also participating. The meetings are held 15-30
minutes before start the shift.
Quarterly HSE meeting

The quarterly HSE-meeting discusses working risks and safety measures. Purpose of this
meeting is the discussion of accidents/incidents, critical situations as well as procedures
and other issues. Participants are:
QHSE Manager
Drilling Supervisor
Toolpusher
Driller
Mechanic
Electrician
Annual HSE meeting

This inspection is to demonstrate to all employees the commitment of management to the
HSE objectives. The contractors are invited to attend these meetings. Participants are:
General Manager
Rig/ Operations Manager
QHSE Manager
Drilling Supervisor
Safety Delegates
Contractor representative

13
Safety Team Meeting

The work safety team discusses safety at work. The following participants meet quarterly:
General Manager
QHSE Manager
RIG/ Operations Manager
Drilling Supervisor
Toolpusher
External Company Physician
Safety Delegates
1.7 Permit to Work

A permit to work (PTW) is required for a lot of activities on the well site. A list showing
when a PTW is required can be found in appendix 5.
The purpose of a PTW is to accomplish the following:

1. Control the work activities in order to prevent incidents resulting from uncontrolled
work interfaces.
2. Communicate information clearly in order to avoid an inadequate understanding of
work task hazards.
3. Ensure the management and control of:
Risk relating to individual operations and work tasks.
Procedures relating to safety of individual and installations.
1.8 Specific HSE aspects for various high risk operations

Prior to operational activities, but in particular prior to High Risk Operations, a Job Safety
Analysis (JSA) must be conducted (see appendix 4). The JSA is a simple procedure to
review a:
specific work plan in order
to define single working steps,
identify actual and potential hazards and
to eliminate or mitigate the residual risk for all involved parties to ALARP.
1.8.1 Perforating and handling explosives or radioactive material

Explosive materials shall be stored in a dedicated container.
A pre-job toolbox meeting must be held prior to all perforation operations.
A Work Permit shall be issued for all perforating operations.
Safe gun loading and handling must be observed at all times.
Warning signs shall be placed around the area where explosives are in use and the
number of people within that area shall be kept to a minimum.
To eliminate the risk of accidental application of power, surface equipment shall be
shut-off and grounded prior to running and pulling the guns.
During transfer of explosives, the rig floor shall be cordoned off with suitable signs.
All non-essential personnel shall stay a safe distance away such as mess room, in
accommodation or Muster Point.
Same strict regulations apply and radio silence is mandatory when arming
explosives and when going through wellhead and riser or when pulling out. Take in
account 100 meters below ground level or sea bed as a safe depth for radio
silence.

14
There shall be clearly labelled storage boxes available for primary explosives
(detonators and igniters) and secondary (charges) explosives.
The Job Supervisor is the only one who is allowed to arm or disarm any tool using
explosives.
If guns are retrieved unfired, they shall be disarmed immediately.
Firefighting equipment is to be operational and placed in appropriate locations on
the rig floor
Radio silence
Radio Silence must be enforced from the time immediately prior to arming
explosives until the tool is 100 meter below ground level. Prior to retrieval of the
tool (whether fired or not) above 100 m below ground, Radio Silence Procedures
shall again be enforced. All radio transmitters within a 500m radius of the well
shall be shut down. This also applies to welding and cathodic protection systems
are shut-down to eliminate possible stray voltages.
1.8.2 Handling radioactive material

In addition to those mentioned above for perforating, when handling RA material, one
should:
During transfer of radioactive materials, the rig floor shall be cordoned off with
suitable signs. All non-essential personnel shall stay a safe distance away such as
mess room, in accommodation or Muster Point.
The radioactive sources must be stored in clearly marked approved storage
containers on the rig.
Radioactive sources must be transferred in special, locked storage boxes.
Transportation shall be limited as much as possible.
1.8.3 Simultaneous operations (SIMOPS)

For simultaneous drilling and production operations the Simultaneous Operations Guide
shall be adhered to.
All key personnel on the well site from Driller upwards shall be conversant with the
content of this document and a SIMOPS presentation shall be conducted before the
commencement of SIMOPS.
Key items are:
Procedure for entrance to the location
Emergency Shut Down (ESD) system: location of ESD buttons and ESD alarm
Emergency Evacuation organisation and drills
Overall alarms and signals
Production Supervisor to be informed of any potential interference with other
wells. Normally Petroms Permit to work system should cover this. In particular
hotwork or heavy lifting in immediate vicinity of production system needs to be
managed via Work Permits
Location layout drawing(s) with clear indication of exits, firefighting equipment, Go
and No Go areas, muster point(s). For H2S locations several muster points have to
be designated
Line of command
Safeguarding of producing wells
Heavy and Complex lifts and crane operations

15
1.8.4 Drills
The following drills shall be conducted by the Drilling/Rig Contractor(s)
Emergency Drill Requirements
Drill Frequency Personnel
Kick Drills Weekly All Drill Crews
Stripping Drills After each All Drill Crews
casing
Muster drill Weekly All
Alternative Evacuation Fortnightly All
Fire Fighting Drill Fortnightly Fire Teams
Breathing Apparatus Drill Monthly All Possible Users
Emergency Equipment Drill Monthly All Possible Users
Casualty Handling Drill Monthly Emergency Teams, First Aiders
First Aid Drill Monthly First Aiders
H2S drill Weekly (if All
applicable)
The aim for the kick drills is to measure and improve the well control alertness of the rig
teams. The benchmark for a good kick drill is as follows:
Time to recognize kick (during kick drill) : less than 1 minute
Time to close in well (after recognizing kick) : less than 2 minutes
1.8.5 Audits
At least one technical safety audit shall be carried out by the Company, either just before
or after start-up of the first well to be drilled by the drilling rig.
Rig Acceptance Audits are conducted in accordance with annually approved schedule and
dependent from previous audit scoring:
Less than 80% compliance against rig site check list at the beginning of each
well;
In between 80-90% compliance against rig site check list - once at 3 months;
Over 90% compliance against rig site check list - once at 6 months.
Audit findings with the Auditor and verify the categorization of each finding classified as
the following:
Critical: systems that do not comply with OMV Policy and Standards and the
condition of which presents a risk of major accident. The Subsidiary shall not
accept the unit on contract or commence operations until the Critical non-
conformances are rectified and risk reduced to ALARP levels.
Major or Minor: observations concerning systems that generally comply with
OMV Policy and Standards and present no risk of major accident. This category
may contain items that require to be addressed at the discretion of the OMV
Subsidiary in the interests of operational efficiency.

16
1.9 Reporting
Good communication is a key factor for optimal performance in a drilling operation. To
facilitate this, the large quantity of data needs to be reported consistently and correctly.
The same applies to raising and tracking actions points.
Reporting and analysis play an important part in a quality management system. Accurate
reporting is a prerequisite for effective analysis which, in turn, lays the foundation for the
feedback loop. The purpose of feedback is two-fold, it must:
Ensure continuous improvement in efficiency and effectiveness.

Avoid mistakes being repeated.
Establish a data base for planning new wells.
Provide understanding of well behaviour during the production phase.
Ensure future workover, sidetrack and abandonment planning has a good
information database as reference.
It is important that the events are reported as accurately as possible as the information
will be used by the Company for planning and designing future well activities. The main
source of information is from the wellsite with additional analysis being performed in the
office. The information data base is an important company asset which must be complete
and contain good quality and accurate information.
Reports should be kept concise while conveying essential information. Reporting between
the well site and the Petrom office is the responsibility of the DSV.
All routine reports submitted by the rig to the drilling department shall use standard
formats approved by Petrom and be submitted daily.
Reporting should be build up per hole section, the same applies for cost overviews.
To be clear when a hole phase is finished and the next starts to following rule is drawn:
The next hole phase commences from the moment the next diameter drill-bit
deepens the hole from the previous bit-size or cellar floor. From geological TD of
whole well the next phase commences from rig-down of logging"
For example:
Situation as follows: the previous 12 hole final bit depth at 1000 meters, casing shoe
at 998 meters. Float collar at 978 meters, cemented to surface successfully.
The time / costs related to make up 8 assembly, RIH, drill shoe track, pressure test
casing, drill out rat hole and perform FIT go to 12 - 9 5/8 phase-section.
The moment the rotating bit takes weight at 1000+mts all reporting, costs KPI's etc go to
8 1/2" phase.
Possible exception: previous mud displaced must be credited to the previous hole
section/phase and new displacement mud should be credited to the new hole
section/phase.
All reporting from the wellsite will use following units:

Depth m BDF (Below Derrick Floor) or RKB (Rotary Kelly Bushing)
Depth m TVD (True Vertical Depth)
Total Gas Percent (%), 1%=10.000 ppm
H2S Parts per Million (ppm)
Rate of Penetration (ROP) Meters Per Hour (m/hr)
Torque Newton Meter (Nm)

17
Hook load/WOB Metric Tons (tonnes)

Temperature Degrees Celsius (C)
Pressure Bar (bar)
Gradients Bar/10 meter (Bar/10 m)
Mud Density s.g. (Specific Gravity)
1.9.1 Daily reporting

Daily progress and planning ahead shall be discussed in the daily operations meeting on
the rig. The discussion shall be minuted by the Wellsite Drilling Engineer (WDE) and
added to the daily report. A template of the Petrom daily drilling report is given in the
attachment.
No Report Frequency Description Originator

1 Drilling Report Daily Detailed summary of all Toolpusher
drilling activities for the
past 24 hours, including
mud, survey, lithology,
BHA, bit etc., weather and
operating conditions.
2 Estimated Daily Daily Summary of cost of the DSV
Well Cost well on any particular day.
3 Current Position Daily Update of the drilling Toolpusher
Report activities from 0600-1500
hours.
4 5 day operations Daily 5 day look ahead plan DSV
forecast
Table 2, Daily reports
No Report Frequency Report Description Originator

1 Statement of Each Record of consumable Logistics
Delivery delivery / items received by the rig Supervisor
shipment as delivered by the supply
vessel.
2 Materials/Services Each Request of materials and Toolpusher
Requisition form request services by the rig to
Drilling Department.
Table 3, Materials and Logistics Reports

18
Minimum Stock Requirements

The following minimum stock requirements shall be on board prior to spud and shall be
maintained at all times. The approval of the Project Manager is required to continue
operations if these stocks are not available.
Item Minimum Requirement
Weighting Sufficient stocks of weighting material shall be kept on hand to raise
material the density of the entire active system by 0.2 sg over the mud weight
in use. Actual stocks and type of weighting material will be outlined in
the drilling fluids program.
Cement Cement and cement additives to set 2 x 100 m open-hole cement plugs
with 50% excess.
Chemicals Sufficient stock of acid soluble and non-soluble LCM material shall be
kept on site to mix 50 m3 LCM pills. If losses are expected a separate
program must be prepared addressing the method to be employed as
dictated by the severity of the losses.
Note: The Senior Drilling Superintendent shall approve the use of LCM
material in the reservoir section
Reserve Kill 300bbls (47.69 m) of 10.0 ppg (11.89 kg/l) mud if potential for
Mud shallow gas exists. Otherwise 2 ppg above the active system mud
weight.
Table 4, Minimum Stock Requirements
1.9.2 Ad hoc / Incident reporting

Listed in table 5 are all ad hoc reports including health, safety and environment (HSE)
reports. The HSE reports shall be submitted by the Drilling Supervisor to the QA/HSE
Department within 24 hours (for Accident Report) and 72 hours (for Investigation
Report). Serious accidents however shall be reported immediately by telex/facsimile.
The equipment failure report shall be submitted to the Company.

1 Accident Report Ad hoc Details of the accident that QA/HSE Dept.
happened on the rig and the
treatment received by the
victim.
2 Investigation Ad hoc Finding by the investment team QA/HSE Dept.
Report on any accident/incident.
3 Equipment Failure Ad hoc Report on equipment failure DSV
Report
Table 5 Ad hoc reports
1.9.3 Operations reporting and After Action Review (AAR)

After each section has been drilled or each major phase of the well has been completed, a
report will be written and an after action review is conducted on the wellsite where all key
players look back at the actual execution of that phase when compared to the plan.
Objective is to identify improvements for how equipment is used and how procedures can
be improved. The DSV facilitates this session and ensures a balanced view is maintained.
The WSDE/DSV reports and ensures all learnings are captured.
An overview of the improvements will be made available such that it can be easily
accessed for future similar operations.

19
No Report Frequency Description Originator

1 Casing/Tubing After each Recording measurements of WDE
Tally casing/tubin casing/liner/tubing and
g running accessories as it is run in the
job hole. Prepared for each size
of tubular, data includes OD,
Weight/ft, Grade and
Connection Type.
2 Casing/Liner After each Details of cementing slurry WDE
Cementation casing/tubin design, additives and
Report g cementing accessories used during
job cementing operations. Also
includes mud properties and
current and previous
hole/casing data.
3 Wireline After each Investigations made; WDE
Logging wireline job Intervals.
Report
4 Well Testing After each Daily report including data WDE
Daily Report well testing sheets
job
Table 6 Operation reports
1.9.4 End of well report (EOWR)

Listed in Table 7 are drilling improvements reports. These reports shall be submitted at
the end of the well to the Company for inclusion in the End of Well Report.

1. Bit Performance End of Well
Post mortem on the DSV
Record performance of each type of
bit run in the particular well.
2. Drilling Time End of Well 24 hours breakdown of the DSV
Analysis time spent on each drilling
activity including
Non-productive Time (NPT)
3. Contractor End of Well Review of the Contractors DSV
Performance performance with respect to
Evaluation equipment, services and
Report personnel provided on any
well. Includes suggestion for
improvement.
4. Bit Record End of Well Summary of bit runs for a DSV
well including dull grading
and running environments
(mud, pressure etc.)
5. BHA Record End of Well Record of BHA length, DSV
connection, OD, ID and fish
necks.
Table 7, End of well drilling Improvement reports

20
1.10 Project start

Documentation required on the rig prior to commencing the operations, the DSV shall
ensure that the following documentation is on site:
Notice of Operations.
Drilling programme
Project Specific Drilling Optimisation Plan, which is prepared by the Toolpusher and
DSV.
Procedures for Simultaneous Operations (SIMOPS).
Emergency Response Manual.
Wellhead Manual.
Drilling Operations Manual (DOM).
Well Design Manual.
Technical specifications for all tools and equipment to be run into the well.
The well shall not be spudded or re-entered without approval. No changes shall be made
outside the drilling programme windows unless approval from the companies obtained in
accordance to the change of control requirement.
1.10.1 Pre-Spud Meeting / Drill the well on paper DWOP

Pre-spud meetings shall be conducted both in the office and location. The office pre-spud
meeting shall be co-ordinated by the Project Manager with attendance from the prime
contractors, the company representatives, geologists, and geophysicists involved in the
project. Aim of the meeting is to find potential improvements and avoidance (mitigation)
of drilling risks and hazards. The topics to be discussed in this meeting are:
Overall geological and geophysical prognosis of the location.
A general overview of the total drilling programme.
Overview of the drilling programme for the first well.
Areas of concern and critical success factors.
After the office pre-spud meeting, the DSV and Toolpusher shall then conduct another
pre-spud meeting on the rig with all relevant personnel directly or indirectly involved with
the operations. For the first meeting, the WDE shall be required to attend as well as
relevant service contractor engineers. The following topics shall be discussed along with
any well or rig specified hazards identified when planning the well.
Notice of Operations for the well - highlighting special procedures and anticipated
problems / hazards and their possible solutions.
Lines of responsibility and communication.
Project Specific Drilling Optimisation Plan.
General safety and personal safety requirements for all personnel.
Diverter drilling, BOP drills and Well Control procedures.
The requirement to conduct safety meeting with all personnel before all
operations.
Procedures and responsibilities relating to shallow gas, especially for monitoring
the shallow gas during top hole drilling.
Emergency rig move procedures.
Proactive approach to equipment checks detailing any special items.
1.10.2 Drilling equipment requirements and inspections
The DSV shall ensure that all standard requirements for availability and management of
equipment are adhered to in accordance with the Toolpusher and other contractor staff,

21
prior to the commencement of drilling activities and at all times the drilling activities are
in progress. The DSV shall ensure that the following requirements are met prior to
commencement of drilling activities and at all times activities are in progress.
1.10.3 Downhole equipment

The drilling tools and equipment, including all the required cross-overs for each
hole section shall be on hand, inspected and in serviceable condition prior to
commencement of casing drill out operations.
The relevant personnel required for the drilling phase shall be called out in ample
time to enable full preparation of their equipment or provision of services.
Items used continuously in the hole shall be checked periodically on trips (i.e., DP
and DC connections). Drillpipe tool joints shall have smooth hardfacing only.
Ditch magnets shall be installed in the flow line to monitor casing wear.
All lifting equipment shall have current certification.
All fishing tools required to be run in hole shall be available on call-out basis.
The DSV shall ensure that the Toolpusher and contractors team-members maintain
records of equipment usage and inspections and that records are available on the
rig (i.e., drilling line ton miles, DP, DC, jar rotating hours, and pump hours).
1.10.4 Surface equipment

Prior to commencement of work, an acceptance test shall be conducted on all rig
equipment to certify that it is in working condition.
Rig surface equipment requirements shall be as per the Drilling Rig contract.
All rig floor equipment, including Top-drive, Crown-O-Matic, gauges, recorders,
and alarms shall be functioning properly.
Solids control equipment shall be serviced and cleaned immediately upon
shutdown.
All mud pumps and mud circulation system shall be inspected daily.
Rig maintenance personnel shall ensure that records of all scheduled maintenance
is kept. Daily inspections shall be made on all major equipment and the DSV shall
be informed of all ongoing and planned work at the daily meeting.

22
Appendix 1 Meeting structure and contents

App. 1.1 Pre-operations meeting
Meeting Pre-Operations Meeting

Character of the meeting Meeting concerning starting up and executing the project.
Agenda 1. Opening
2. Project contents & planning
3. Specific needs & demands
4. Quality, HSE
5. Safety plans
6. Work permits
7. Other subjects
8. Questions before closure of the meeting
9. Closure
Chairman Rig/ operations manager
Minutes Yes, by the Rig/ operations manager
Present Rig/ Operations manager Toolpusher
Drilling Supervisor Technical Support
Engineer
QHSE-manager Well Engineer
Participants
Frequency At the beginning of a project
Time Still to be determined
Place Office

23
App. 1.2 Operations meeting
Meeting Operations Meeting

Character of the meeting Meeting concerning the aspects involving operational matters.
Agenda 1. Opening.
2. Go through the minutes/actions of previous meeting.
3. Current work/ matters.
4. Project planning.
5. Work permits.
6. Occupation personnel/ division of work
7. Materials/ Resources
8. Quality, HSE
9. Actions
10. Other subjects
12. Closure
Chairman Rig/ Operations Manager
Minutes Yes, by the Toolpusher
Present Rig/ Operations Manager Driller
Toolpusher Assistant Driller
Drilling Supervisor Rig mechanic/
electrician
QHSE-manager Participants
Roughneck
Frequency Weekly
Place Project location

24
App. 1.3 Toolbox meeting
Chairman driller
Participants all crew members and contractor staff
Project :
Date meeting : Start : hr
Rig : Finish : hr
Subjects & Discussion
Name Company Signature

25
App. 1.4 Workplace safety meeting
Meeting Workplace safety meeting

Character of the meeting Meeting concerning the working conditions and safety at the
workplace.
Agenda 1. Opening.
2. Go through the minutes/actions of previous Workplace
safety meeting.
3. Working conditions/ Safety at the workplace.
4. If applicable:
Evaluation incident reports (complaints, deviations,
damage, accidents, etc.)
Evaluation actions Workplace safety inspections.
5. Other subjects (additional current subjects)
7. Closure
Chairman QHSE-manager
Minutes Yes, by the Rig/Operations Manager
Present Rig/ Operations Manager Driller
Toolpusher Assistant Driller
Drilling Supervisor Rig mechanic/ electrician
QHSE-manager Participants
Roughneck Contractors
Frequency Once per six weeks

Place Project location

26
App. 1.5 HSE meeting
Meeting HSE-meeting
Character of the meeting During this meeting the risks and the defined safety measures
concerning HSE will be discussed and evaluated.
Agenda 1. Opening
2. Go through the minutes/actions of previous HSE-meeting.
3. Risk Inventory & Evaluation
4. Task-risk Analysis
5. Safety measures
6. Other subjects (additional current subjects)
8. Closure
Chairman Manager
Minutes Yes, by the QHSE-manager
Present Rig/ Operations Manager QHSE-manager
Drilling Supervisor Participants
Toolpusher
Driller
Mechanic
Electrician
Frequency Four times a year, or on demand

Place Project location or at the office

27
Appendix 2 Petroms daily drilling report

28
Remarks:
Contractor POB 11 Costs [RON]: AFE Daily Cost Cum. Cost 12

PETROM / Site: 0 Location 0 0 0
Drilling contractor: I Mob & Demob Rig 0 0 0
Drlg. Contr. services: II.I Rig Cost 0 0 0
Drilling fluids services: II.II Tangible Equipment 0 0 0
DD, MWD, LWD: II.III Drillstring & Tool rentals 0 0 0
Mud logging: II.IV Drilling Fluids 0 0 0
Cementing: II.V Cementing & Pumping 0 0 0
Casing running: II.VI Directional Drilling 0 0 0
Plant operator: II.VII Services 0 0 0
Logging: II.VIII Formation Evaluation 0 0 0
Drlg. string tech.: II.IX Engineering & Support 0 0 0
Completion & testing: II.X Completion Equipment 0 0 0
Special Tech. / Eng.: II.XI Plug and Abandonment 0 0 0
Others: II.XII Production Installation 0 0 0
Dayshift total: 0 II.XIII Production Testing 0 0 0
Cum man-hour: 0 Day man-hours: 0 1 = RON Total Cost: 0 0 0
Deviation Surveys: Ref System: Stereo 70 13 Gas in drilling fluid by volume%: 14

MD [m] Incl. [] Azim.[] MD [m] Incl. [] Azim.[] Conn. gas Trip gas Bkgr. gas C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 H 2S
Additional Directional, Mud and/or Gas Information: 15
Targets MD [m] TVDRT [m] Displacement [m] Azimuth [] Tolerance 16

Target 1:
Target 2:
Strategic Material Stocks: 17 BOP configuration: 18
Material Unit Delivered Prev 24hrs Used Remaining Size [inch] Press. [bar] Last press.test
1 Reserve Mud m 3 0,0 Annular:
2 Barite to 0,0 Upper Ram:
3 LCM to 0,0 Middle Ram:
4 Brine m3 0,0 Blind Ram:
3
5 Water m 0,0 Lower Ram:
6 Fuel Oil L 0,0
7 Other 0,0
Drillstring: 19
Type Size [in] Length [m] Weight [kg/m] Grade Tooljt. OD [in] Tooljt. ID [in] Connection Hardbanding Coating Last Insp.
BHA tools: Fish 20

Description Length [m] S/N Work hrs OD [in] Min.ID [in] Connection Last Insp. Up [ton] Down [ton] Comment
Hydraulic Jar
Accelerator
Shock-Sub
Motor Bent []:
Stabiliser
Stabiliser
Stabiliser
Sonic Vision
ARC
AND
Hydraulics: 21
Pump Motor Bit Annular Velocities
Press. [bar] Flowrate [l/s] p mot [bar] his Jet vel [m/sec] HHP [% ] DP [m/min] DC [m/min] DC crit. [m/min]
Solids Control: 22 Last FIT / LOT: 23

Shaker # Amount Size [API] Losses [m3] TVD [m]:
1 Surface: MAASP [bar]:
2 Downhole: FIT [SG]:
3 LOT [SG]:
4
5
Offshore data: 24

29
Appendix 3 Example After Activity Review (AAR)

TASK WHAT WE DID LEARNING WHAT TO DO WHO
TO
TELL
Drill Drilled to 3208m Size 210 and 175 screens Axiom recommends
12 used on the shakers. With ~ 175s to handle
hole ROP was controlled to flow rate 3.2 to 3.5 flow, SS screens to TP, DE,
to avoid mud run off m3/min large amounts of control sands. DSV
~2800 across shakers. cuttings were coming out (Es are what we
of the shakers. havesturdier).
Shakers are
Noted: Amount of steel apparently tilted too
recovered is less due to much. Try to lessen
different hard facing XT tilt on one of the
300 shakers as an
experiment.
Slow drilling at 2660 Vibrations due to damage
m and 2705m with sustained by bit. See dull
associated stick-slip grading below
vibration.
When drilling deeper, Observed stick-slip occurs Coordinate driller
reduced WOB to when downlinking. and Sperry Sun
minimise stick-slip. downlink to allow
Stick-slip gradually more time to
became worse - from reduce WOB thus
moderate to severe, in avoid stick-slip.
particular when
drilling sand fm.
Increased MW in MW was increased for Need to increase Mud
stages from 0.118 to overbalance. the frequency of Engr.,
0.126 bar/m as per Discrepancies were calibration of mud Mud
plan. observed among MW balances (once a logger
measured by mud balance, week) and mud
electronic sensor and ECD. loggers equipment.
Pressure drop of 3200 Barite was not dispersed Check agitator at
kPa caused by barite evenly in the mud as the closer intervals.
blocking pump agitator was not working Consider use of
strainers. Cleaned properly. Amp meters.
strainers out while
circulating, rotating
and reciprocating
string.

30
Appendix 4 Job safety analysis (JSA) Instructions

1. Introduction.
In drilling and work-over operations for the oil and gas industry, many incidents and
injury cases are reported every year. The most are pro-active Near Miss reports or minor
First Aid Cases. The reason why personnel under our supervision are still getting hurt is
because there are various potential hazards incorporated in every day's work. Although
they are identified and known by the workforce, injuries are still happening. They are
mostly related to:
Improper job planning and definition of responsibilities

Missing communication in group of people executing the work
Failure to identify job hazards by single individuals and
Deviation from existing procedures and work instructions
This instruction is a proactive approach and a proven successful tool to directly prevent
incidents. Multiple approaches have been taken in the past to name, define and set up
JSAs.
PETROM defines the JSA as its procedure to perform effective on-the-job risk
evaluation and protection.
This chapter explains the required Job Safety Analysis (JSA) for drilling and work-over
operations. It is applicable to any non-routine job and any job identified as containing
potential hazard(s). Any job must be performed under PTW system.
It is also recommended, if the planned routine workplan has been changed (management
of change: MOC). The performing authority (PA) for the JSA is the supervisor responsible
for the execution of the work scope. He assembles all personnel appointed to the work for
a joint "step-by-step" work plan discussion and risk analysis before the job will be started.
Subcontractors to PETROM shall be included.
The JSA is a simple procedure to review a

specific work plan in order to
define single working steps,
identify actual and potential hazards and to
eliminate or mitigate the residual risk for all involved parties to ALARP
2. The JSA procedure.
Procedure: Responsibility:
STEP 1. Select the personnel assigned to the work Work site supervisor
STEP 2. Explain the main job, which is planned Work site supervisor
STEP 3. Describe every single step ("Step-by-step") All involved persons
to execute the work, (begin description
with an active verb, such as disconnect,
check, assemble, etc.), (number each step)
STEP 4. Identify the hazards associated with each All involved persons
single job, (consider accident causes such
as strain, sprain, cut, slip, fall), (consider
environmental hazards)
STEP 5. Decide on actions necessary to eliminate, All involved persons; superseded
reduce or control potential hazards, by work supervisor, if in doubt.
(Recommended safety measures)

31
3. Potential Hazard and Hazard Effect consideration table.

The key words to a.) Potential Hazards and b.) Hazard Effects for the execution of a JSA.
Subject: a.) Hazard Consideration

People 1.) New, inexperienced personnel
2.) Visitor, unauthorized personnel
3.) Inadequate communication
4.) Insufficient number of personnel
5.) Competence / Training
Equipment 1.) Scaffolding, ladders
2.) Incorrect use of tools
3.) Stability, collapse, failure
4.) Maintenance
5.) Damages
Materials 1.) Hazardous substances

2.) Radioactive substances
3.) Flammable
4.) Explosive
5.) Dimension, weight
6.) Waste
Working Environment 1.) Confined spaces

2.) Working at height
3.) Noise
4.) Temperature
5.) Lighting
6.) Ventilation
7.) Vibration
8.) Adverse weather
Process 1.) Emergency arrangements
2.) Incorrect procedure
3.) Inadequate SMS (Safety Management System)
4.) Inadequate planning
5.) Lack of training
6.) Lack of information, instructions, supervision

32
Type of Effect b.) Hazard Effect

1.) Personnel injury Slips, trips and falls
Fire
2.) Environmental Impact Exposure to hazardous substances: toxic, corrosive,
irritant, carcinogenic, sensitizing
3.) Equipment, Property Exposure to noise
damage Explosion
Burns
Hypothermia
Shock
Struck by object
Caught in by machinery
Exposure to ionizing radiation
Impact
Crush
Cuts, abrasion
Entrapment
Contact to electricity
Asphyxiation
Drowning
Stress
Pollution
Contamination
Financial liability
Dropped objects
Work overboard
Working on live equipment
4. Direct benefits of the JSA procedure.
It identifies potential (inherent) job hazards

It develops workers involvement in work planning and it creates "Safety
Sensibility"
It develops the individuals' sense of ownership
It promotes team work and increases communication
It facilitates training on the job
It defines job responsibilities
It identifies improvements to establish job methods
5. Indirect benefits.
Reduction of accidents
Generation of safety initiatives
Supports continuous improvement in productivity and quality
Building of teams at work
Shows that each team member is important
Increase of job satisfaction
Everyone recognizes the job expert
Creates an individual database on site for further use for job planning
A JSA procedure is required to comply with health protection legislation and mining law.
Column 3 of the JSA "Recommended safety measures" list can be used by management
as an HSE Audit Checklist.

33
6. Guideline when and where a JSA is required.
Frequency of Job (note: less frequent jobs normally are more critical)
Injury potential of job
Non-routine job preparation
Deviation from common working procedure (MOC)*
The supervisor is doing the completion of the JSA form and he files it in the JSA register
on site for further reference. In the header of the form it is possible to indicate, if the
form is done for a new work or done to revise an existing work plan and its JSA.
* Deviation usually requires a signed deviation request form
7. Framework for successful JSA execution
The commitment of senior management and supervisory personnel must be

present to support the execution of JSAs whenever applicable;
When implementing this procedure superintendents shall give a positive and
convincing example to cascade the use of the JSA form down to drilling supervisors
for use
Allocation of sufficient time for doing the JSA is guaranteed
Explain the benefits of this program to the crews
General Safety Philosophy: Informed crews are motivated crews

34
15 Job Safety Analysis (JSA ) NEW REVISED

Rig: Main Job: Register No:
Location Working Area: Date:
Detailed working sequence Potential Hazards Recommended safety measures
Seq. No T he steps involved in doing the job What could go wrong & what could the effect be? How can the hazard be prevented?
Signature:

35
Appendix 5 When a permit to work is required + Example
Note: Any PTW must be made together with JSA.

Heavy lifts (> 5 MT)
Complex lifts:
o Lifts over live plant or equipment;
o Lifting Personnel;
o Proximity with Electrical Power Lines;
o Unknown or difficult to estimate centre of gravity;
o Use of two or more items of lifting equipment (Tandem Lifts);
o Environmental conditions liable to affect operations;
o Non-standard rigging or equipment;
Rigging up and rigging down drilling rig at location with existing wells or
production equipment
Heavy lifts adjacent to existing wells and existing production equipment
Rig approach to offshore structure
Welding, burning, chipping or grinding outside of dedicated area/workshop
Using hand-held drill
Establishing electric isolation
Establishing mechanical isolation
Entry to confined spaces
Man-riding in mast/derrick
Working at height (above 2 m from ground)
Working above open water
Erecting and removing scaffolding
Using radioactive tools for logging or NDT
Using explosive materials
Using web slings for CRA tubulars
Acidizing
N/U, N/D BOPs
Running TCP guns
Handling chemicals
Working on live equipment
Coring (use of casing stabbing board)
Diving adjacent to rig
Excavation
Well testing (production or DST)
Billy Pugh (or other) personnel transfer
Work on Life Saving Equipment (maintenance, replacement, etc)
Bypassing / repairs of critical safety devices (i.e. BOP control, gas detectors,
ballast pumps, etc)
Running spark potential equipment within hazardous areas
High pressure testing
Transfer of NAF (non-aqua fluid) between rig and supply vessel.
Skidding rig
SIMOPS

36
Example of permit to work system

2 Wellhead and BOP pressure testing
Prepared by WEP
Author:
Version: Feb 2015
Verified:
2
2 Wellhead and BOP Testing Requirements .............................................................. 3

2.1 Testing requirements................................................................................... 3
2.2 Guidelines for function and pressure tests ...................................................... 4
2.3 Prior to installation ...................................................................................... 5
2.4 After installation of wellhead and BOP assembly prior to drilling ........................ 6
2.5 Two-weekly tests ........................................................................................ 6
2.6 Conduct function test on well control equipment after build up / nipple up ......... 6
2.7 Conduct function test on well control equipment during operations.................... 7
2.8 Test for accumulators .................................................................................. 8
2.9 Required accumulators operating pressures and volumes (bottle calculation) ..... 9

2 Wellhead and BOP pressure testing | Version:Feb 2015
3
2 Wellhead and BOP Testing Requirements

The objective of BOP tests is to ensure that all hydraulic operating lines are hooked up
correctly and that the BOP is holding pressure as per design criteria. The PETROM Drilling
Supervisor must ensure that the wellhead, BOP control equipment and associated
supporting components (choke and kill manifold, choke and kill lines, standpipe manifold,
kelly and kelly cock valves, Gray valve and safety valves) are suitable for the expected
tasks of maintaining well integrity and inspected as per Petrom procedures. BOPs can be
limited by: high pressure, high temperatures, low temperatures, produced fluids, drilling
fluids, water depths, the control system, the wellhead system.
Wellhead integrity shall be assumed to be maintained when the following elements are
achieved:
All valves are capable of being opened and closed.
All valves shall be leak-tight when closed.
All adjustable choke valves shall be operable within their design limits.
All clamps and bolts of BOP stack/wellhead components shall be tightly secured.
2.1 Testing requirements

All well control equipment shall be function and pressure tested and be in satisfactory
condition prior to drill out of surface casing. The tests shall be documented and approved
by the Drilling Supervisor. The pressure testing of the wellhead BOPs and all associated
pressure supporting components shall be carried out as follows:
Surface tested prior to use, to be done offline prior to the spud of the well as per
manufacturer working pressure rating specification for the rigs where a test stump
is available.
At two week intervals
After installation of wellheads and BOPs, for all connections that were not tested
offline and for connections between casing and wellhead.
Before drilling out each casing string. All components can be tested at the
maximum anticipated surface pressure that is expected for the next section that
will be drilled (but limited by the maximum working pressure of the BOP stack and
casing rating, except for surface tests prior to use which will be performed to
manufacturer working pressure rating specification).
Prior to drilling a suspected high pressure zone, if the well is declared to be a HPHT
well.
Prior to the opening of DST tools.
After any component has been changed. All components need to have the same
pressure rating as the entire BOP stack.
Note: Ensure that two safety barriers are present during change out of any
component of the BOP stack, when in use.
After any repairs to BOP and/or associated components.

4
2.2 Guidelines for function and pressure tests

Prior to installing the BOPs, all surface tests shall be conducted with water and
with steel pressure sealing ring gaskets.
A low 35 bars test for 5 minutes will be done in order to check the tightness of the
system.
Bleed off pressure
Perform a full working pressure test for 10 minutes. A pressure drop of up to 2%
within the first 5 minutes is acceptable, provided the pressure then remains
constant for the remaining 5 minutes.
The test results shall be recorded in a table as well as on pressure graph by both
the PETROM Drilling Supervisor and the rigs Toolpusher. After the pressure test
operation is finished it is mandatory that the Drilling Company representative
issues a copy of the test results to the Petrom SDSV.
Equipment Low Duration High Pressure Duration

Pressure (mins) Test (bar) (mins)
Test (bar)
Choke manifold all
valves
Pipe rams, Blind
rams, HCR
Annular Preventer
Kelly Cocks
FOSV
Gray valve
Kill Line Valves
Annulars shall be function tested as per the manufacturers recommended

operating pressure. Rams and hydraulic operated valves shall be function tested as
per manufacturers recommended operating pressure. A standard field operating
range is 90 100 bars for rams and valves.
All surface equipment shall be visually inspected by each Driller prior to starting of
each work shift.
A BOP function test shall be performed during each round trip but no more than
weekly.
The valves on the BOP stack, choke manifold and kill and choke lines shall be
function tested at least once per week.
The kick control circuits (lines, choke manifold, etc.) shall be flushed with clean
water or base oil, where practically possible.
Should any equipment indicate faulty operation, it will be corrected when
operations permit, but ASAP.
Al connections, valves, fittings etc. subject to well pressure must be be flanged,
clamped or welded and have a minimum working pressure equal to the rated
working pressure of the preventers.
The full BOP control system shall be pressure tested to its rating at least once
every 3 months. This pressure test shall ensure that the BOP and BOP control

5
system are capable of withstanding the full hydraulic pressure required to shear
pipe.
The BOP closing equipment shall be tested two weekly and its performance
checked for closure time of the preventers and remote controlled valves,
accumululator recharging time and volume pumped.
All function tests must fall within API standards for closing of each element of the
BOPs. For example, closing time for 13 5/8 BOPs and smaller is 30 seconds, for
larger BOPs this is 45 seconds. Recharge time of the accumulator unit needs to be
less than 5 minutes.
In freezing conditions, the BOP control system should be properly prepared with
anti-freeze. Choke and kill lines will be displaced with anti-freeze fluid.
Each and every valve and BOP shall be pressure tested from direction of flow from
the wellbore according to:
Equipment Test pressures

All well control Full working testing (NDT for critical parts, pressure and
equipment function tests) when a rig is first taken on contract and yearly
interval.
All well control Full pressure test before spud the well as per manufacturer
equipment working pressure rating specification.
All well control The lowest of the following criteria prior to drilling out each
equipment, casing string:
excluding annular Maximum anticipated surface pressure + 10%margin.
BOPs
80% of casing burst pressure.
Wellhead rated pressure.
Annular BOPs A minimum of 70% of its working pressure, as per API Reg 53,
or same test pressure of the Ram BOPs, whichever is the
lower.
Note:
1. A complete inspection (NDT for all critical parts, function and pressure tests) will
be performed by a third party Company in their work-shop. This inspection will be
applied to all components of BOP stack after every 5 year working.
2. As per API RP 53 - the components which can be subjected to pressure have to be
tested on location. The first test is an initial pressure test of high pressure. The
following tests are called Next pressure tests
3. Next pressure tests could be done at the maximum anticipated surface pressure
that may exist in the well (but limited by maximum working pressure of BOP
stack).
2.3 Prior to installation

The complete BOP operating unit shall be pressure tested to its rated working
pressure in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
Associated pressure supporting components such as choke and kill manifold,
standpipe manifold, Kelly valves and safety valves shall be tested to low 35 bars
test for 5 minutes followed by a full working pressure test with water for 10
minutes. Bleed off the pressure in between tests.

6
2.4 After installation of wellhead and BOP assembly prior to

drilling
The wellhead, untested BOP parts, choke and kill manifolds shall be subjected to pressure
tests.
All pressure tests must follow API standards for closing of each element of the BOPs.
In freezing conditions, the BOP control system should be properly prepared with anti-
freeze liquid as per API RP 53 recommendations. Choke and kill lines will be displaced
with anti-freeze fluid.
Each and every valve and BOP shall be pressure tested from the direction of flow from the
wellbore in line with details below.
2.5 Two-weekly tests

Two-weekly tests of the BOPs and associated pressure supporting components shall be
tested to pressure tests as detailed in the drilling program.
2.6 Conduct function test on well control equipment after build up

/ nipple up
The preparations for the function test are to ensure that:
All rams, annular and valves are open
Hydraulic lines are connected
No pipe is in the BOP
All handles, switches, indicator lights are in correct starting position
The steps to conduct a function test are:

Close and open blind / shear rams from hydraulic control unit.
o Visually check that the correct function has occurred and check that the
same correct function has taken place at each of the remote panels.
o Verify the blind rams have fully closed.
o Ensure the spindle locking mechanism is functioning.
Close and open all pipe rams from hydraulic control unit.
Close and open annular preventer after DP has been installed.
o Use 600 - 900 psi.
Close and open HCR valve.
Repeat all functions from all remote panels.

7
o Ensure pipe has been removed from BOP before operating blind/shear
rams.
Close and open all manual valves.
o Visually check that the correct function has occurred
At the end of the function test the result should be reported and recorded on daily tour
sheets and the Blowout Prevention Equipment Checklist.
2.7 Conduct function test on well control equipment during

operations
The preparations to perform the function test during the drilling phase with pipe in
hole are:
Ideally stop running in hole at the casing shoe or pull to casing shoe and space out
tool joints correctly
Perform flow check to check and ensure that the hole is full and static

Close and open all pipe rams
Close and open annular preventer
o Use 600 - 900 psi.
Open and close HCR valve.
Ensure all rams, annular and valves are in drilling position
Then continue with normal operations.
The preparations to perform the function test in operating mode without pipe in hole
are:
Perform flow check to check and ensure that the hole is full and static

Close and open the blind / shear rams.
o Verify the blind rams have fully closed.
Close and open all pipe rams.
o Ensure the spindle locking mechanism is functioning

8
Close and open annular preventer after DP has been installed.

o Use 600 - 900 psi.
Open and close HCR valve
Conduct function test on all kelly cocks. Including manual lower kelly cock and Upper and
Lower IBOP on top drive system
Conduct function test on Gray valve.
2.8 Test for accumulators

The accumulator performance test shall be performed after initial installation of the BOPs.
The accumulator pre-charge pressure must be checked prior to drilling out cement and
thereafter at regular intervals. The accumulator unit performance test is made by
operating all BOPs on the stored energy in the accumulator, i.e. the pressure and the
volume available without recharging.
The preparations for the accumulator function test are:

Make sure all rams and annular are open
Ensure HCR (if applicable) or a remotely operated side outlet valve is closed
Position a properly sized joint of drill pipe or a test mandrel in the BOPs
Ensure accumulator is pumped up to working pressure
Record pressure and reservoir fluid level
To start shut down all chargers, electric as well as the air supply, connected to the
accumulator.
Operate all BOP functions once and record the closing time and remaining accumulator
pressure after every BOP functioning.
Close annular
Close all ram BOPs (except Blind / Shear rams)
o Do not operate shear / blind rams with joint in the BOP stack.
Open one ram BOP
o To simulate the closing of the Blind / Shear rams
Open HCR Valve
Operate all BOP functions a second time and record closing time and pressures
Open annular
Close one ram BOPs
o To simulate the opening of the Blind / Shear rams

9
Open all ram BOPs (except Blind / Shear rams).

Close HCR Valve
Operate all BOP functions third time and record closing time and pressures
Close annular
Close all ram BOPs (except Blind / Shear rams)
Open one ram BOP
o To simulate the closing of the Blind / Shear rams
Open HCR Valve
Then record the final remaining pressure on the accumulator. This shall be greater than
the minimum pre-charge pressure plus 200 psi. (Acceptable pre-charge pressure range as
per API RP53 recommendations)
Continue by switching on all chargers and record the time required to build up
accumulator pressure back to full working pressure. If longer than 15 minutes is required,
check for the following possible problems:
Low pre-charge on one or more accumulator units
Internal leak in the system
Pump(s) not functioning at full efficiency
Rectify faults and repeat test until unit is functioning at full efficiency.
Cycle the annular preventer and check that the pumps will automatically start when the
closing unit pressure has decreased to less than 90% of the accumulator operating
pressure. This should be checked with only the electric pumps operative.
Should an emergency control system be employed, this should also be tested at the same
time as the accumulator unit.
2.9 Required accumulators operating pressures and volumes

(bottle calculation)
The minimum allowable operating pressure is equal to the maximum closing pressure
required by the BOP stack when the well bore pressure inside it is equal to its rated
working pressure. The units making up the BOP stack will usually have different closing
pressures due to their different closing ratios; the highest of these closing ratios must be
used for calculating the minimum operating pressure.
There are three pressures which have to be known:

P1 = Pressure of the accumulator when completely charged to its working pressure
P2 = Minimum allowable operating pressure
P3 = Nitrogen pre-charge pressure

10
There are four volumes which have to be known:

V1 = Volume of Nitrogen in the accumulators rated at working pressure
V2 = Volume of Nitrogen in the accumulators at minimum allowable pressure
V3 = Total accumulator volume (Nitrogen + hydraulic fluid) i.e. volume of Nitrogen in the
accumulators at pre-charge pressure
VR = Total usable hydraulic fluid required
The total accumulator volume required can be calculated using Boyles Law:
P1 x V1 = P2 x V2 = P3 x V3 (assuming an isothermal expansion)
and, by definition VR = V2 - V1
Thus, VR = ( P3 x V3 / P2 ) - ( P3 x V3 / P1 ) = V3 ( P3 / P2 ) - ( P3 / P1 )
According to Petrom Drilling Standards (September 2008), number of Koomey bottles has
to be according to API.
API RP53:
1. Close all BOPs (no closed in wellhead pressure) and have 50% remaining pressure
in bottles available for reserve.
2. The pressure of the remaining stored accumulator volume after closing of all BOPs
must exceed the minimum calculated (using BOP closing ratio) operating pressure
required to close any ram (excluding shear ram) at the maximum rated wellbore
pressure of the BOP stack.
Examples of API RP53 calculations for both scenarios are given below.

11
According to API RP53

API RP 53:
The BOP control system should have a minimum stored hydraulic fluid volume, with pumps inoperative, to satisfy the greater of the following two requirements:
1) Close from a full open position at zero wellbore pressure, all of the BOP's in the BOP stack, plus 50% reserve.
2) The pressure of the remaining stored accumulator volume after closing all off the BOP's should exceed the minimum calculated (using the BOP closing ratio) operating
pressure required to close any ram BOP (excluding the shear rams) at the maximum rated wellbore pressure of the stack.
Example Stack
13 3/8" 10 K
Close Open
1 Annular 17.90 USG 14.20 USG
1 Upper Ram 5.80 USG 5.50 USG
1 Blind Shear Ram 10.90 USG 10.50 USG
1 HCR 0.82 USG 0.57 USG +

34.60 USG 30.20 USG
1) Volume required (V3)

Close All 34.60 USG
Open HCR 0.57 USG
Close RAM +
V3 35.17 USG
P1 3000 PSI 35.17 USG

P2 1200 PSI V3 = Vr V3 = 0.833 - 0.333 V3= 70.34 USG
P3 1000 PSI P3 - P3 V3 +50% = 105.51 USG
P2 P1
Effective working volume per bottle 12.55 USG

Number of bottles required 8.41 8

12
According to API RP53

API RP 53:
The BOP control system should have a minimum stored hydraulic fluid volume, with pumps inoperative, to satisfy the greater of the following two requirements:
1) Close from a full open position at zero wellbore pressure, all of the BOP's in the BOP stack, plus 50% reserve.
2) The pressure of the remaining stored accumulator volume after closing all off the BOP's should exceed the minimum calculated (using the BOP closing ratio) operating
pressure required to close any ram BOP (excluding the shear rams) at the maximum rated wellbore pressure of the stack.
Example Stack
13 3/8" 10 K
Close Open
1 Annular 17.90 USG 14.20 USG
1 Upper Ram 5.80 USG 5.50 USG
1 Blind Shear Ram 10.90 USG 10.50 USG
1 HCR 0.82 USG 0.57 USG +

34.60 USG 30.20 USG
2) Volume required (V3)

Close All 34.60 USG
Open HCR 0.57 USG
Close RAM 5.80 USG +
V3 40.97 USG
Closing ratio 7.0 : 1

P2 10000 / 7.0 = 1429.00 PSI
P1 3000.00 PSI 40.97 USG

P2 1429.00 PSI V3 = Vr V3 = 0.700 - 0.333 V3= 111.80 USG
P3 1000.00 PSI P3 - P3
P2 P1
Effective working volume per bottle 12.55 USG

Number of bottles required 8.91 9

3 Top hole including shallow gas
Prepared by WEP
Author:
Verified:
2
3 Top hole including shallow gas ............................................................................ 3

3.1 Conductor operations .................................................................................. 3
3.1.1 Conductor preparation procedures .......................................................... 3
3.1.2 Cleanout conductor & run Gyro ............................................................... 3
3.2 Shallow gas and diverter procedure ............................................................... 4
3.2.1 Tasks and responsibilities....................................................................... 4
3.2.2 Diverter pre-job checklist ....................................................................... 4
3.2.3 Best practices for shallow gas, pilot hole and surface diverter ..................... 5
3.2.4 Diverter procedure ................................................................................ 5
3.3 Top hole drilling and anti-collision ................................................................. 8
3.3.1 Top hole pre-job checklist ................................................................... 8
3.3.2 Top hole - hole cleaning best practices: ................................................... 8
3.3.3 Top hole tripping best practices: .......................................................... 8
3.3.4 Top hole drilling - step by step ............................................................... 9
3.3.5 Spud mud ............................................................................................ 9
3.4 Anti-collision .............................................................................................. 9
3.4.1 Anti-collision - pre-job checklist .............................................................. 9
3.4.2 Anti-collision best practices .................................................................. 10
3.4.3 Drilling procedure anti-collision .......................................................... 11
3.4.4 Anti-collision - engineering background ................................................. 13

3 Top hole including shallow gas | Version:September 2014
3
3 Top hole including shallow gas
3.1 Conductor operations
3.1.1 Conductor preparation procedures

1. Rig-up for conductor operations.
2. Hold toolbox meeting as required.
3. Rough cut conductor at approximately 10cm above correct height for wellhead or
riser. Confirm height with wellhead installation engineer.
4. Install 4 valve approx. 0.5m above cellar bottom, for offshore as close as possible to
spider deck (platform).
5. Fine cut conductor height & dress off cut.
6. Lay off cut pieces of conductor.
7. When installing a diverter: install flow riser with seals.
8. Install and function test diverter.
3.1.2 Cleanout conductor & run Gyro

Suggested cleanout BHA:
Description Inches Comments
OD ID
26 (or 24) rock bit 26 - To clean out 30 conductor.
16 (or 14) rock bit 16 - To clean out 20 conductor.
Bit Sub 9 1/2 3 1/16
UBHO sub or TOTCO
8 2.50 To land Gyro in
Ring
2x 8DC 8 2.81 Determine to use double or stand
X/Over 8 2.81
16 HWDP 5 7/8 -
1. M/U conductor Clean-out assembly, as suggested in above table.

2. RIH & clean out conductor to 1 m above conductor shoe with (sea)water and gel
sweeps:
o Do not allow bit to go out of the shoe
o Max 50 RPM (to avoid damage to conductor / hole opener)
o Max 10 t WOB
o Circulate at max rate, aim for 2500 3000 lpm.
Conductor shoe ID is usually smaller than conductor joint; ensure bit cannot get stuck in
shoe joint.
3. Sweep hole with 10 m3 of HiVis pill and circulate clean with water or mud.
4. Drop Gyro to UBHO sub.
5. POOH and rack back clean out assembly.
6. Retrieve Gyro from UBHO sub or TOTCO ring.
Note: Based on conductor hammering report, if there is not risk of collapse of the shoe /
conductor, the cleanout of conductor will be performed with the BHA planned to be used
for drilling the section below the conductor shoe.

4
3.2 Shallow gas and diverter procedure

Shallow gas is defined as gas encountered at shallow depths close to the surface or
mudline for which the fracture gradients are low. It can occur in open holes below
conductor or surface casing, or behind surface casing caused by gas migration.
Shallow gas presents particular difficulties to drilling operations as it is encountered in the
earlier stages of a hole before it is possible to have a blowout preventer (BOP) installed.
A key parameter dealing with shallow gas is the small tolerances between formation
pressure overbalance with the fracture gradient. Due to low overbalance margins,
relatively moderate amounts of swabbing or drilled gas can easily reduce the overbalance
and thus initiate gas flows that result in a blowout.
Main principle: a shallow gas kick shall never be shut-in but always diverted. By pumping
mud at a high rate, the well is dynamically killed prior to displacing the well to kill mud.
When suspecting shallow gas, drill a pilot hole (8 1/2 or smaller). The smaller hole size is
easier to keep full and to achieve a dynamic overbalance while circulating gas out.
A surface diverter is used to divert shallow gas before the installation of a BOP. The flow
diverter has to be installed on the conductor when drilling:
1. All exploration and appraisal wells, if they are placed too far away from known
structures and not enough data is available in order to estimate presence / absence
of shallow gas.
2. The first well on a production platform/jacket
3. All consecutive wells on a platform/jacket, if presence of shallow gas is established
Diverter systems should comply with API RP 64 (Diverter Systems Equipment and
Operations).
3.2.1 Tasks and responsibilities

Person
Tasks Person to Check
Responsible
Conduct drills for shallow gas
Toolpusher Drilling Supervisor
kick
Ensure that emergency Wellsite Drilling
Drilling Supervisor
procedures are in place Engineer
Ensure that rigs gauges and
alarms are functioning properly
Ensure compliance with WEP Wellsite Drilling
Drilling Supervisor
diverter procedure Engineer
3.2.2 Diverter pre-job checklist

Once shallow gas flow is detected, kill mud must be pumped at a high rate to create
dynamic overbalance in the annulus (ECD) and so to kill the well. If after having pumped
the kill mud the well is still flowing, measures should be focused on safe evacuation of ALL
personnel.

5
An emergency procedure shall be put in place in the event of any shallow gas kick
or blowout, detailing positions of key staff, which diverter side to open depending
on wind direction, emergency evacuation.
Windsocks shall be visible from all points.
Consider to hold an emergency evacuation drill to familiarize personnel with their
duties.
Radios shall be placed on the drill floor and shall be fully charged at all times. A
summary of radio channels in use shall be detailed during the safety meeting.
Confirm that all required rig equipment is available and in good working condition
e.g. test all gas detectors and alarms, diverter & Koomey unit, ensure that the
valves are full opening. Before drilling begins, function test and flush diverter
system.
Ensure the diverter bag is large enough to accommodate the running of casing.
Ensure that the diverter has 2 outlets positioned 180 apart that are large enough
diameter, i.e. 10 or larger for land rigs, and is long enough to divert any fluids or
gas away from the rig.
Ascertain that all lines are straight and unrestricted, 90 bends are to be avoided.
Diverter lines are to be securely anchored, especially at bends and at end of lines.
Consider a premix mud for safety; refer to the Drilling Program. Prepare sufficient
tanks of kill mud for 2x hole volume, A minimum 200m per hour water and kill
mud supply shall be available.
Diverter control system should be capable of operating diverter from two locations.
One should be at the drillers console.
A solid, non-ported float valve shall be installed in the drillstring, as close as
possible or above the motor if a dump valve is installed.
3.2.3 Best practices for shallow gas, pilot hole and surface diverter
Automatic sequenced operation is always preferable to manual operation.
Pilot hole shall be drilled with the 8 or smaller bit size. The BHA design shall
include a solid, non-ported float valve and considerations given to deviation and
subsequent hole opening.
The pilot hole shall be logged for hydrocarbons. Only after the absence of
hydrocarbons has been proven may subsequent wells omit drilling a pilot hole.
The ROP shall be controlled to avoid overloading the annulus with cuttings.
Overbalance could be lost by inducing losses or excessive gas from drilled cuttings.
The drill string should be pumped out of the open hole, unless the absence of
hydrocarbons has been proven.
To avoid swabbing the tripping rate should be adjusted to ensure the pumped
volume is a minimum of 120% of the hole capacity of the pulled pipe length.
All losses shall be cured prior to drilling ahead.
Pump pressure shall be closely monitored and all connections shall be flow
checked.
3.2.4 Diverter procedure

The following procedures shall be followed if a shallow gas kick is encountered:
1. Inform the DSV and the Toolpusher who shall raise the muster alarm.
2. Driller to:
a. If a shallow gas kick is encountered while drilling, do not stop pumping.
b. If it is while tripping, stab in the circulation sub and pump mud at the maximum
rate allowed by the pumps.

6
3. Check wind direction, open diverter valves, close valve to shaker and close Annular /
Diverter.
4. Essential personnel shall proceed to assigned duties. Non-essential personnel shall go
to muster points and wait for further instructions.
5. Switch suction on mud pumps to heavy mud in the reserve pit. Zero the stroke
counter.
6. Pump twice hole volume of kill mud at the highest possible rate, then stop pumps and
observe returns.
7. Whilst pumping kill mud, continue appraising the severity of gas influx.
8. If gas is still flowing, continue to pump kill mud at the highest possible rate. Consider
preparing a pit with heavier mud. Do not stop pumping for as long as the well
continues to flow. If running out of mud, pump water at the highest possible rate.
9. If gas content of the mud decreases, open the diverter and take returns to the
mudpits. Continue circulating until bottoms up and observe gas readings. If not
decreasing, increase mud weight slowly and in stages until gas levels are back to
background level. Flowcheck.
10. When well is stable, conduct a wipertrip. From here onwards, pump out of hole.
Figure: Typical diverter stack. Kill line is optional back-up.

7
Start
Location Survey
Drill or drive conductor/
Indicates Risk of Shallow No (No Residual Risk)
stove pipe
Gas.
Drive Conductor to a depth sufficient to

support the installation of a diverter. Drill Surface hole without
Diverter
Yes
Install Diverter on Conductor - Minimum I.D.
(High Risk) N0 Sufficient to run H.O. and surface casing
(Residual through bore. Function Test Diverter.
Risk) Set surface casing and install
BOP stack
Yes (High
Risk) Drill 8 1/2" OD Pilot Hole to surface casing
Move Location setting depth. (To a depth sufficient to
Re-survey Indicates Risk support the installation of a BOP stack.
of Shallow Gas.
Open Pilot Hole (pilot hole may be

Shallow Gas influx logged before opening). Care should
Yes occurs while drilling Pilot be taken while drilling or opening pilot
(High Risk) Hole. hole to avoid:
No
* Insufficient Mud Weight
* Improper Hole Filling
Yes * Swabbing
* Gas Cutting (with High ROP)
* Loss of Circulation (Due to annulus
Immediately Influx is detected, switch to Kill loading - control ROP)
Mud and pump at maximum rate. At least
400bbls of 12.0 ppg kill mud to be reserve. Set Surface Casing through diverter -
Install BOP stack.
Activate Diverter - Opening downwind line &

Inform Control Room & Initiate Emergency closing diverter element.
Procedures.
Continue to pump at maximum rate - Kill
Activate Fire Monitors
Mud, Spud Mud or water - in that preferred
order.
Evacuate All Non-essential personnel & be
prepared to abandon the drilling unit/
installation
Flow
No
Diminishes
No
Yes
Continue pumping at maximum

rate
Diverter Fails or
Gas concentration around
Gas volume in returns
No installation endangers further
continues to diminish
control
operations.
Yes
Yes
Open diverter circulate returns
to mud tanks
Shut down and abandon
Installation.
Circulate bottoms-up checking

Returns gas cut No Flow check
mud returns
Evacuate all crew
Yes
Increase mud weight No Well Stable
Yes
Wiper Trip Resume Operations
Figure: Shallow gas diverter procedure jack-up rig (first well)

8
3.3 Top hole drilling and anti-collision
3.3.1 Top hole pre-job checklist

Locate formations which may cause possible risks (hydrocarbons, fault/losses).
Slow down when approaching the hydrocarbon containing layer to enable better
MWD data to determine present of HC.
Mudloggers should monitor the gas reading and inform the DSV when gas gets
above the background level.
Record hookloads up, down, and rotating with pumps off, for drag and hole
cleaning monitoring every stand. Check against the modelled curve.
If a MWD/ PWD has been installed, the PWD engineer has to continuously monitor
actual ECDs against ongoing modelled ECDs, and downhole vibration and feedback
to driller and DSV. Circulate the hole clean if ECDs deviate significantly from
modelled values.
There is no requirement to backream on connections unless authorised by head of
drilling (confirmed requirement to open tight hole). Cuttings should already be
moved above the BHA prior to making connection.
Sample catchers to record, every half hour, the cuttings amount / weight off each
shaker, and log against ROP, flowrate, pipe rotation. Monitor cuttings condition for
indications of borehole instability and for shale reactivity.
Maintain the shale inhibition parameters of the mud as per the mud programme.
3.3.2 Top hole - hole cleaning best practices:

The following are minimum considerations:
Start off with controlled ROP below the conductor shoe, observe for losses while
pumping at a high rate -> max 3000 lpm (danger for washout below shoe).
Control ROP and circulate at max flow rate and rotate the drill string with at least
120 rpm.
Adjust drilling parameters as required for optimum hole cleaning and ROP, while
monitoring torque, drag and downhole vibration or slip/stick.
Pump 2 m3 of LCM pill as the calliper pill and measure the strokes to surface to
give an indication of the hole size.
Reciprocate pipe during circulation. Pick up slow and slack off quicker. Do not
exceed swab or surge speeds.
When at TD, circulate until the shakers are clean. Look for and record the second
wave of cuttings. This will take multiple bottoms up. Record cuttings volumes at
the shakers regularly during circulation.
Observe ECD reduction on PWD data (when in use), as cuttings come out of the
mud system.
Record torque and drag and observe for reduction during circulating.
Condition mud for casing running and cementation.
Pills are not considered necessary or effective in large vertical holes.
3.3.3 Top hole tripping best practices:
The hole will have been circulated clean, so it should be possible to trip the motor
BHA in the elevators.
Maximum overpull 15 mT. When exceeding, run down 2 stands, circ hour, check
tight spot, and repeat circulate clean if overpulls indicate cuttings beds.

9
Monitor P/U hookload against the modelled curve while tripping, and record every
5 stands. Also record S/O hookload rotating string weight every 10 stands (for
friction factor back calculation).
Consider check trip if hole dictates.
3.3.4 Top hole drilling - step by step
1. Drill ahead Tophole section to section TD dependent on casing tally plus 3-5 m
rathole.
2. Circulate the hole clean, following the hole cleaning and tripping best practices.
3. POOH, using tripping best practices.
4. Break out the bit. Download MWD (when applicable). Stand back BHA.
5. M/U wearbushing running tool. Run in and retrieve wearbushing as per wellhead
manual report hang off depth. Jet the wellhead.
6. Prepare for next operations: Running casing and cementing.
3.3.5 Spud mud

When drilling top hole, vast amounts of cuttings are generated due to high penetration
rates and large hole sizes.
In view of the limited pump capacity, the carrying capacity of the mud is prime
importance. Hence a low n value (i.e. a high YP/ PV ratio) is required. Spud mud
normally consists of some 40-60 kg/m3 bentonite in fresh water. The pH is maintained at
9-10 with caustic soda. Sometimes some CMC-HV polymer is required with extra
viscosity.
General Properties
Density 1.05 1.10 sg
MK 80 100 sec
PV + 20
YP 20 -30
Fluid loss + 30 ml API
pH 9 10
In case water is used as a drilling fluid when drilling top hole, often returns are not
sufficient for proper hole cleaning. In this case slugs of rehydrated bentonite with Marsh
Funnel viscosities between 100 and 120 sec must be circulated occasionally for hole
cleaning.
3.4 Anti-collision
In particular during tophole drilling, anti-collision can become an issue due to the close
proximity of neighbouring wells.
3.4.1 Anti-collision - pre-job checklist

Planning close proximity wells involves following conditions, fully aligned with WEP Drilling
Standards:
During the well planning process, the Directional Drilling Contractor shall provide a
calculation of clearance ratio to all potential collision risk wells: all wells at 100 m
or less from each other or less at any position of their planned well path.

10
A common datum level shall be specified to which all co-ordinates shall be

referenced.
Magnetic based surveying instrument should not be used as the prime source of
well location identification within 10 m of any collision risk well.
When magnetic interference is otherwise suspected, gyro surveys should be run on
top of the MWD tool until azimuths agree within 2 degrees for a minimum of 2
consecutive surveys.
When proximity is critical and a steerable drilling assembly is used, a gyro survey
tool should be run as close to the bit as possible. This may require omission of the
MWD tool for the collision critical interval.
A full survey program shall be included in the Well Program to meet the minimum
survey requirements.
Before entering a formation with a blow-out potential, the lateral position
uncertainty of the homing-in points (i.e. the previous casing shoe and top of the
formation capable of blowout), shall not exceed 35 meter. Homing-in points for
horizontal wells shall also be the previous casing shoe and the top reservoir.
During well planning stage, the distance between the ellipsoids of uncertainty shall
be > 30m and the minimum SF shall be > 2.0 with the exception of the following:
o Wells with no natural flow the SF shall be >1.0.
o Abandoned sections are exempt provided that a wellbore collision would not
degrade the integrity of the target well abandonment.
Whilst drilling with BOP protection the well trajectory shall be controlled such that
a minimum distance of 15 m of the combined cones of error will be maintained
away from poorly cemented or poorly abandoned well sections of adjacent wells.
This prevents hydrocarbons from migrating to shallower formations or to surface
via existing wells (including abandoned or plugged back sections of wells) in case
of a loss of primary well control resulting in formation breakdown around the shoe
or along the well track of the newly drilled well.
Check shot surveys shall be taken at the established benchmark depth each trip
into the hole. The check shot surveys shall meet the accuracy specification given
below, failure to meet this specification shall require the MWD to be replaced prior
to drilling ahead.
Inclination Accuracy
Azimuth Accuracy 0-2 degrees Not applicable
2-6 degrees 6 degrees
6-12 degrees 3 degrees
> 12 degrees 2 degrees
Inclination Accuracy 0.4 degrees at any hole inclination
3.4.2 Anti-collision best practices

The following practices must be rigidly applied when drilling collision critical hole sections:
Returns must be monitored continuously for the presence of cement.
A minimum of two ditch magnets will be installed in the flowline and possum belly
for detection of significant increases in the presence of metal shaving returns.
These must be monitored continuously.
The drilling operation shall be conducted at a reduced ROP to minimise the
potential for damage should a collision occur. The drilling parameters must be
constantly monitored for any sudden changes in ROP, drilling torque or other
irregularities. If detected, drilling shall stop immediately and the irregularity
investigated before drilling is recommenced.

11
When doubt exists as to the accuracy of magnetic based survey information, these
must be checked with a gyro based tool before drilling ahead.
Proximity calculations and projections shall be performed at regular intervals, the
interval depending on the collision risk. A minimum frequency of twice daily is
mandatory, however when drilling within a clearance ratio of less than 1.5, the
frequency shall be increased to every joint drilled.
The following precautions shall be taken when the clearance ratio falls below 2.0 with a
well with natural flow:
Clearance Actions
Ratio
The clearance ratio, for each collision risk well, projected 60m ahead of
the bit shall be calculated at every survey station or every stand drilled.
< 2 .0
The clearance ratio shall be reviewed by the Drilling Manger prior to
drilling ahead
A constant surveillance of wellhead and casing pressures shall be
<1 .5
maintained.
The existing well shall be closed in and de-pressurized from a depth
<1 .25 greater than the deepest potential collision depth by either wireline
plugs or the sub-surface safety valve.
Drilling shall stop and shall only be recommenced if the well bores are
1.0
diverging otherwise the well shall be plugged back.
3.4.3 Drilling procedure anti-collision

The following procedure shall be rigidly applied when drilling collision critical hole sections.
When well paths are identified as converging and the proximity scan indicates a CR of less
than 2.0 the following procedure shall be applied:
The last survey station shall be calculated, plotted and agreed by the Directional
Driller, the DSV and the Drilling Engineer.
The last survey station shall be extrapolated along hole depth corresponding to the
bit position after drilling next single.
A position uncertainty ellipsoid shall be plotted around the extrapolated bit
position.
A check shall be made that this ellipsoid does not overlap the ellipsoid(s) of
uncertainty for the neighbouring well(s)
A clearance ratio shall be calculated.
In the event that a proximity scan reveals a clearance ratio of less than 1.5, the Drilling
Engineer shall order drilling to cease and shall enact the following:
Notify the Senior Drilling Engineer and request suspension of the appropriate
collision risk well(s).
Review corrective actions required in consultation with the Directional Drilling
Engineer, Toolpusher and the Drilling Engineer.
Drilling shall only be resumed when all of the above actions have been performed
and written verification of completion of collision risk well shut in(s) have been
received.

12
A proximity calculation and projection to all collision risk wells shall be performed
at each survey station before drilling ahead is recommenced. The survey shall be
reported to Drilling Engineer (and directional contractors office) for immediate
back up calculation and confirmation.
In case of discrepancies, the rig shall be contacted by the Drilling Engineer (or
directional driller) to resolve the discrepancy at the earliest opportunity. If the
discrepancy cannot be resolved, the Drilling Manager shall be notified immediately.
Returns shall be monitored regularly for the presence of cement.
The annuli on the collision risk well shall be pressured and monitored regularly for
sudden pressure changes. Where available, the alarm facility shall be set and
monitored accordingly.
The drilling operation shall be conducted at a reduced ROP to minimise the
potential for damage should a collision occur. The Driller and Directional Driller
shall constantly monitor drilling parameters for any sudden changes in ROP,
drilling torque or other irregularities. If detected, drilling shall be immediately
ceased and the irregularity investigated before drilling is recommenced.
In the event the proximity scan reveals an overlap of ellipsoids (a CR of less than 1), the
following shall be enacted:
When the CR to any collision risk well is projected to be less than 1.0, the Rig
Superintendent shall be informed and drilling operations shall cease immediately.
A plan of action shall be formulated after considering the following options:
o Re-survey the current well with a more accurate survey tool to reduce the
radius of uncertainty and increase the projected CR to an acceptable level.
o If unable to increase the CR to an acceptable level, plug the well and side
track at a depth where the well can be safely re drilled.
Operations shall be resumed after the proposed corrective actions have received
documented management approval.
Reinstatement of collision risk wells and reestablishment of normal drilling procedures

shall only be performed when all of the following criteria are met:
CR is restored to 1.5 or greater.
The current well is below the deepest Critical Vertical Depth for all of the collision
risk wells and the well paths are diverging.

13
3.4.4 Anti-collision - engineering background

A full survey program shall be included in the Well Program to meet the minimum survey
requirements given in the table below:
Hole Sections Survey Type Notes
Vertical Conductor or Tele drift type or TOTCO A tie-in point shall only
Surface Sections survey conducted as a be based on Gyro, EMS
vertical survey, with a or MWD surveys, or on a
position uncertainty combination thereof.
governed by the angle A tie-in point shall not
measured during the be based on the
survey provided tie-in wellhead position.
requirements can be
met.
All other sections Definitive multi-shot The minimum survey
survey providing angle interval shall be 30m
and azimuth (MWD , but may be increased or
Gyro, EMS, GPIT or decreased based on
combination). Local Best Practice
Wells planned for GMS or MWD survey (subject to any
sidetrack available from surface legislative requirements)
The survey program shall ensure that the following requirements are met:
Avoidance of collision with other wells.
To provide accurate well path information for correlation of geological, geophysical
and electric logging data parameters between wells.
To accurately locate the well path in the event that a relief well is required.
To identify doglegs which may affect casing or completion plans.
To accurately determine wellbore position versus the planned well trajectory.

14
Figure: Anti-collision definitions.
The separation factor is defined as:
3Ddist
SF =
3Ddist IBseparation
Where:
3Ddist =3D centre to centre well distance
IB separation =the inter-boundary distance between the envelopes of the borehole
position uncertainty
Collision avoidance
The following criteria are used in the analysis of well-bore proximity and form the basis of
the decision making processes and policies defined by the company to ensure
maintenance of safe operations whilst drilling in proximity to existing wells. The vertical
section view below illustrates graphically the definitions.
Clearance Ratio:
The Clearance ratio uses the minimum distance between the ellipse of uncertainty of the
two wells at the requested depth. The Clearance Ratio is (CR) defined as:
Clearance Ratio (CR) = Centre - To - Centre Distance (Well A - Well B)

Well A Ellipse Radius Of Uncertainty + Well B Ellipse Radius Of Uncertainty
The CR is used to define the conditions under which anti-collision procedures, well
suspensions and plug-back operations are enacted. CR shall never be allowed to be less
than 1.0, at this point the two ellipse of uncertainty (the ellipse of the new well and the
ellipse of the existing well) are touching.

15
Figure: Collision Avoidance Criteria cones of uncertainty.
Centre To Centre Distance:

The Centre-To-Centre Distance is the closest approach in meters between the centres of
the current well being drilled/planned and the collision risk well being considered. (It is
not necessarily a horizontal line).
Clearance Distance:
The Clearance Distance is the distance in meters between the ellipse radius of uncertainty
of the planned well (Er) and the existing collision risk well (Eo) along the line of closest
approach.
Ellipse Radius Of Uncertainty:

The Ellipse Radius of Uncertainty (Eo and Er) is the radius of a circle along the line of
closest approach at a specific depth which is considered to contain the well path. It is a
cumulative calculation based on the uncertainty factors of the survey instruments used to
that depth.
Critical Vertical Depth(s):

The Critical Vertical Depth (CVD) is any true vertical depth or range of TVDs where the
planned CR to a particular collision risk well is less than 1.5.

16

4 Well control
Prepared by WEP
Author:
Version: May 2014
Verified:
2
4 Well control ...................................................................................................... 3

4.1 Tasks and responsibilities ............................................................................. 4
4.2 Fundamental causes of well control situations................................................. 4
4.3 Pre-job checklist ......................................................................................... 4
4.4 Kick drill procedure ..................................................................................... 8
4.4.1 Kick drill while drilling............................................................................ 8
4.4.2 Kick drill while tripping .......................................................................... 8
4.4.3 Kick drill while out of hole ...................................................................... 8
4.5 Early detection / Recognition of a kick ........................................................... 9
4.6 Flow check ................................................................................................. 9
4.7 Kick tolerance ........................................................................................... 10
4.8 Drilling and tripping precautions ................................................................. 10
4.9 Shut in procedures .................................................................................... 10
4.9.1 Kick while drilling with a surface BOP stack ............................................ 10
4.9.2 Kick while tripping with a surface BOP stack ........................................... 11
4.10 Well kill methods ...................................................................................... 11
4.10.1 Selection of well kill method ................................................................. 12
4.10.2 Well kill plan ...................................................................................... 13
4.10.3 Preparation for Drillers method ............................................................ 14
4.10.4 Drillers method execution.................................................................... 15
4.10.5 Preparations for Volumetric control ....................................................... 21
4.10.6 Preparations for stripping ..................................................................... 22
4.10.7 Execution of volumetric stripping operations .......................................... 25
4.11 Well control data requirement..................................................................... 29
4.12 Surface BOP and related equipment requirements ......................................... 29
4.12.1 BOPs ................................................................................................ 29
4.12.2 Closing unit ........................................................................................ 30
4.12.3 Accumulator unit ................................................................................ 31
4.13 Other secondary well control equipment ...................................................... 31
4.13.1 Choke and standpipe manifold .............................................................. 31
4.13.2 Safety valves ..................................................................................... 31
4.13.3 Inside BOP (IBOP) .............................................................................. 32
4.13.4 Float subs .......................................................................................... 33
4.13.5 Kelly cocks ......................................................................................... 34
Appendix 1 Well kill sheets for surface BOP stack ................................................. 35
App. 1.1 Surface BOP kill sheet Vertical well (SI units) ......................................... 35
App. 1.2 Surface BOP kill sheet Deviated well (SI units)........................................ 37

4 Well control | Version: May 2014
3
4 Well control
All well control principles rely upon an understanding that good planning and early
recognition and the well closed in, is the best form of Well Control. Not all kicks are
swabbed kicks; many wells are drilled into unknown formations.
There are two methods of well control:
1. Primary Well Control: Involves the use of fluids of sufficient quantity and density to
maintain an overbalanced hydrostatic head in the wellbore, thus preventing influx
of formation effluents. The programmed mud gradients shall exceed the expected
pore pressure gradient of the exposed permeable formations by a trip margin as
specified in the PETROM Drilling Standards.
PETROM Drilling Standards:

Primary well control shall be maintained at all times. To allow for a trip margin
(Overbalanced), the programmed mud gradient shall exceed the highest pore
pressure gradient of the exposed permeable formations by:
from 0-1,500m the overbalance to be of 3.5 to 7 bar at the expected top of any
potentially productive formation.
from 1,500-3,000m, the overbalance to be at least 10 bar.
deeper than 3,000m the overbalance to be at least 14 bar.
For HPHT wells an overbalance in the range of 20 bars shall be used.
When completing the well or during well servicing activities, if the well is
perforated or if open hole is exposed, brine weight needs to include an
overbalance at top perforations of 3.5 to 7 bar.
2. Secondary Well Control: Is the proper application of suitable and approved surface
blowout prevention equipment to control the well in the event that primary well
control is lost or cannot be maintained.
Conventional well killing procedures are based on the assumption that all of the well
control equipment operates as designed and the wellbore is able to withstand the imposed
pressures. However problems can arise due to other factors such as mechanical problems
and formation fracturing.

4
4.1 Tasks and responsibilities

Tasks Person Responsible Person to Check
Ensure all preparations,
personnel certification and drills Rig manager, Toolpusher Drilling Supervisor
meet PETROM requirements
Ensure well control equipment
Rig manager, Toolpusher Drilling Supervisor
tested and fully functional
Ensure all personnel are
informed of their pre-assigned Rig manager, Toolpusher Drilling Supervisor
tasks
Identify and shut-in well kick Driller, Toolpusher Drilling Supervisor
Monitor shut-in & record kick
data
Perform calculations and plan
kill procedure
Preparation of kill mud Mud engineer Drilling Supervisor
Hold a pre-kill meeting with key
personnel
Supervise rig crew during kill Toolpusher Drilling Supervisor
Co-ordinate activities between
the rig and PETROM
4.2 Fundamental causes of well control situations

Failure to ensure that the hole is taking the proper amount of fluids or keeping the
hole full. This may result from either improper filling of trip sheets or swabbing.
Lost circulation and failure to act quickly and properly.
When the mud weight is too low.
Improper casing setting depths with too low kick margins.
Unprepared to drill into high pressure and permeable zones.
Failure to detect a kick in time or properly shut-in the well after a kick.
Failure to properly test BOP equipment or improper BOP installation.
Surge pressures while tripping in hole too fast.
Failure to replace ECD margin when tripping out. If trip margin (Overbalance) is
not ensured by hydrostatic pressure but we have Overbalance due to ECD the mud
weight should be increased to have Trip margin during tripping (including pull out
for run casing)
Failure to properly flow check and determine shut-in pressures.
4.3 Pre-job checklist

Key personnel (such as PETROM Drilling Supervisor, Asst Drilling Supervisor, Tool
pusher, Driller) shall hold a recognised well control certificate (IWCF or IADC).
Ensure that the crews are adequately trained and that key personnel are informed
of their pre-assigned tasks in case of an emergency.
The hard shut-in shall be used to close in the well.

5
Ensure that all Kick drills are performed in accordance with PETROM Drilling
Standards. These are:
o Weekly kick and trip drills to confirm readiness of rig crew response to
alarms
o Well shall be shut-in prior to drilling out casing and circulated through BOP
to familiarize rig crew on proper circulating techniques
Note: Before this operation is mandatory to clean the drilling fluid from any debris,
cement hard or soft (could block choke manifold line and poor boy) circulate a
volume bottom/up before close BOP.
o The drills shall include the full sequence of shutting in a well.
o Stripping drills are also recommended where appropriate.
o Out-of-hole drills may be conducted at any time when out of hole with no
tools or wireline through the BOP stack.
Ensure that the well control equipment is tested and in fully functional condition.
Before drilling out casing shoe, a Kill Sheet needs to be completed and then
updated every 150m or at least once per shift.
Obtain slow circulation rates (SCR) when drilling ahead. Take new SCRs every
shift, for every new BHA, when mud properties (mud weight) have changed and
after change out of pump liners.
A solid (non-ported) float valve shall be installed in the drill string at all times. This
helps to prevent back flow into the drill string during tripping or making
connection.
A full bore Kelly cock shall be installed at the base of the Kelly or top drive.
It is mandatory to have FOSV and Gray valve on rig floor and ready to be picked
up and installed on the string.
Formation Integrity Tests (FIT) shall be performed, refer to Chapter FIT. The
Maximum Allowable Annular Surface Pressure (MAASP) shall then be calculated
using the fluid density used for drilling below the shoe.
A pre-spud checklist related to well control shall be filled in and signed by the PETROM
Drilling Supervisor.

6
DSV TP
Item Comments
Initial Initial
BOP function /pressure test successfully completed,
including all rams and body
Wellhead SOVs and connection to BOP successfully
tested
Accumulator test successfully completed according to
including control hoses (date of last full working
pressure test)
Kelly cocks and Gray valves successfully tested from
below
Kelly cocks and Gray valves on rig floor, including all
crossovers for other connections
Top drive, successfully tested from below
Standpipe manifold and kill lines successfully tested
Choke manifold and choke lines successfully tested
Cementing manifold and lines successfully tested
Automatic choke panel function tested
BOP stack up configuration covering all pipe sizes
planned to be run in hole
Ram space out to allow landing off drill pipe and
shearing above tool joint
Kick detection equipment and alarms such as flow
meters, level indicators and associated gauges,
alarms, recorders and controls working correctly
BA sets charged and ready for use in dedicated
locations
All well control equipment used from original
equipment manufacturer
All well control equipment within certification and
inspection frequency
Sufficient chemicals and weighting materials available
on site (offshore rigs) to increase the fluid gradient of
the active system to the maximum expected kill
gradient
Signed and agreed: Signed and agreed:
PETROM Drilling Supervisor Rig Tool Pusher
Figure: Pre-spud checklist part 1

7
DSV TP
Item Comments
Initial Initial
Strip drill performed /planned dates (including all
crews)
Trip drill performed /planned dates (including all
crews)
Pit drill performed /planned dates (including all crews)
Confirmed latest valid copy of Drilling Programme
available and used by all on site
Basis of required fluid gradient in programme
reviewed and agreed
Fluid gradient in line with specifications in programme,
including correct overbalance to highest planned
pressures and risk assessed and plans in place for
encountering highest anticipated formation pressures
Kill methods and scenarios discussed and agreed
(including Drillers and Assistant Drillers)
MAASP protection on automatic choke disabled
Close-in and choke manifold set-up (hard shut-in)
agreed and displayed
What-if scenarios in relation to well control discussed
with all parties, agreed and documented
Structure of command and roles and responsibilities
agreed and in line with HSE Cases and Company and
Contractor requirements
Any discrepancies identified in structure of command
and roles and responsibilities? Are these documented
and agreed with Rig Manager and PETROM Drilling
Supervisor?
All critical staff comply with minimum well control
training and competency requirements
HSE Cases reviewed for HSE Critical Activities and
Positions
Communications equipment checked and in good
working order
Emergency Response Procedures available and
understood by all
CPRA Procedures available and understood by all
Any specific conditions or procedures (HPHT, UBD,
Bullheading,) considered and understood. Do they
impact well control response?
Signed and agreed: Signed and agreed:
PETROM Drilling Supervisor Rig Tool Pusher

Figure: Pre-spud checklist part 2

8
4.4 Kick drill procedure
4.4.1 Kick drill while drilling

The following procedure shall be followed:
1. Kick alarm
2. Stop rotary
3. Position drill string
4. Stop pumps
5. Close pipe rams or annular
6. Open HCR
7. Ensure well is closed in
Visually check rams/annular is closed
Ensure flow has stopped
Close ram lock
Circulate over trip tank, above closed preventer
8. Monitor and record data
9. Record time to perform drill
4.4.2 Kick drill while tripping

1. Kick alarm
2. Position drill string
3. Install FOSV
4. Close FOSV
5. Close pipe rams or annular
6. Open HCR
Close ram lock
8. Connect TDS
9. Open FOSV and iBOP
4.4.3 Kick drill while out of hole

1. Kick alarm
2. Close blind/shear rams
3. Open HCR
Visually check rams are closed

9

Close ram lock
4.5 Early detection / Recognition of a kick

The warning signs tabulated below indicate that well is about to kick in.
All require immediate action: flow check to detect if it is kick; any indication of a kick in
progress, shut in well & observe pressures.
# Warning Remarks
Signs
Increase in Pit This is the definitive indicator of a kick. When pit volume alarm
1
Volume goes off: shut well in !
This is often the first positive indicator that a kick is occurring,
Increase in
2 however an influx from a low permeability formation may be
Relative Flow
difficult to identify.
Incorrect Hole
3 If this happens, the formation fluids may be entering the wellbore.
Fill
An increase in mud gas level may signify that formation gas has
flowed into the well which could lead to an undesirable reduction in
4 Gas Cut Mud
mud weight. Gas readings will significantly deviate from
background level.
Reduced Mud Mud weight reduction (or any significant change in other mud
5
Weight properties) may indicate a dilution of the mud by formation fluids.
A drilling break is due to a change in formation drilling
characteristics, and may indicate increases in formation porosity,
6 Drilling Break
permeability and pore pressure. Breaks may be positive or
negative.
A large influx of formation fluids reduces the hydrostatic pressure
in the annulus. The mud in the drill string can then U-tube into the
Decrease in
annulus and the result is a reduction in pump load and pressure.
7 Pump
The pressure reduction can cause the pumps to speed up.
Pressure
Normally if this indicator is seen, a serious kick has occurred and
other indicators should be associated with it.
4.6 Flow check

Once an indication is seen that the well might have kicked-in, a flow check must be
performed immediately. The circulation / rotation is stopped and the bit pulled off bottom.
The well is then checked for flow. If flow continues after the circulation has been stopped,
then close the well in. Sometimes the flow check is replaced by closing in the well
immediately, particularly where kick tolerance is low.

10
4.7 Kick tolerance

Planning, or continuing an operation with a kick tolerance less than 5 m3 shall require a
dispensation.
A detailed ongoing assessment of the actual kick tolerance shall be conducted. Drilling will
stop when the kick tolerance is less than 1m3. The decision to exempt shall be taken by
the Drilling Manager and based on:
The type of rig.
The influx detecting equipment available.
The possibility of over-pressured zones being encountered.
4.8 Drilling and tripping precautions

The following well control precautions shall be observed during drilling and tripping:
Ensure pit level indicators/ alarms are properly set and fully operational.
Check for flow at each connection and drilling break.
Make frequent visual checks on pit levels.
Avoid swabbing or pressure surging on running/pulling pipe.
Ensure the hole is filled up constantly via the trip tank and that the hole always
takes the correct amount of fluid every time. Keep a trip sheet and monitor
volumes accurately. When noticing a discrepancy or when in doubt, flow check.
Watch the hole carefully for signs of loss or flow while under static conditions.
Pump trip pill / heavy slug in open hole, unless previous trip out from similar depth
showed hole cleaning problems. Do not pump a slug in an unknown field or if no
accurate information about the specific situation is known.
After POOH string to surface, close blind rams. Check for pressure before opening
and ensure full opening of blind rams.
4.9 Shut in procedures

The immediate actions to be performed in case of a kick during drilling and tripping are
discussed below.
4.9.1 Kick while drilling with a surface BOP stack

Points 1 to 5 will be done by Driller, without the need to ask for permission and as fast as
possible to limit the volume of kick.
1. Stop rotary
2. Position drill string to ensure no tool joint is opposite the pipe ram
3. Stop the pump(s)
4. Close the pipe ram
5. Open HCR (the remotely operated choke line valve)
6. Inform Drilling Supervisor, Toolpusher and crew members.
Close ram lock

11
8. Record the casing and drill pipe pressures and the pit gain.
Note: In the case of high pressure wells, where the expected surface pressures during the
well kill exceed the normal circulation system rating, a designated kill assembly should be
used. The kill assembly consists of a high pressure pump, manifold and connection that
are rated to sufficient pressure. To install: close the lower kelly cock or top drive internal
BOP, break the Kelly or topdrive connection to the drillstring, install and test the kill
assembly, pressure up to the closed-in drill pipe pressure and open the kelly cock or top
drive internal BOP.
4.9.2 Kick while tripping with a surface BOP stack

1. Position drill string to ensure no tool joint is opposite the pipe ram and set in slips
2. Install FOSV
3. Close FOSV
4. Close the pipe ram
5. Open HCR (the remotely operated choke line valve)
6. Inform Drilling Supervisor, Toolpusher and crew members.
Close ram lock
8. Connect TDS
9. Open FOSV and iBOP
10. Record the casing and drill pipe pressures and the pit gain
4.10 Well kill methods

Different methods exist and can be divided between Circulating and Non-Circulating
methods.
Three methods of circulating out an influx and restoring the minimum overbalance, while
keeping bottom hole pressure constant are:
1. Drillers method. With the Drillers method, the influx is first circulated out with the
original drilling mud while applying backpressure on the well and thereafter
increasing the mud weight to restore the minimum overbalance. The main
advantages of this method are that circulating out the influx can be started
immediately, the influx is removed soonest and only a minimum of information is
required prior to start of circulation. The disadvantages are (i) that higher annular
pressures result and (ii) the well is longer under pressure.
2. Wait-and-weight method. With the Wait-and weight method a kill mud of the
correct density is prepared prior to circulating out the influx under reducing
backpressure at the choke. The main advantages of this method are lower wellbore
pressures and a minimum on-choke circulating time. The disadvantages are (i)
that there is considerable waiting time to observe the well and weight up the mud,
allowing migration of the influx and (ii) lack of uniformity in mud weight if a major
increase is required.

12
3. Concurrent (circulate and weight) method. With the Concurrent method, the influx
is circulated out, with mud that is being weighed up in stages. It is in fact a
combination of the previous two methods, Drillers and Wait-and-weight. The main
advantages of the Concurrent method are that circulating out the influx can be
started immediately and it will create lower annular pressures than the Drillers
method. The disadvantages are (i) that at any one time the wellbore will have
zones of different weights of mud being circulated, making the calculations for
choke pressures more difficult and (ii) increasing the possibility of mistakes during
an already stressful / difficult situation.
Other methods, applicable for different situations are:

Bullheading. With this method the influx is forced back in the formation by
pumping from surface. Used with an influx that may exert too high casing and
surface pressures or in case of poisonous substances e.g. H2S. Bullheading is a
non-standard operation and should only be undertaken situation permitting and
after approval by the DSV and considering influx properties (H2S, sour oil or gas
kick), position of last cemented casing shoe, casing burst strength and
wellhead/BOP pressure rating, strength and permeability of the formations and
position of the influx.
Volumetric method. With gas percolating up the well and an inability to circulate or
strip in, the closed-in annular pressure will keep rising. This means the bottom
hole pressure is rising as well, which can lead to further problems. To stop the
pressure from increasing and keep a constant bottom hole pressure, the gas influx
shall be allowed to expand while it is percolating up the wellbore.
Stripping in. After shutting in the well with the bit of bottom and the influx beneath
the bit, it is necessary to get the bit to bottom, below the influx in order to
circulate the influx out. Without specialized equipment, this can only be done in
pipe heavy condition. After the string has been stripped in below the suspected
depth of influx, the influx can be circulated out by any of the three circulating
methods described above.
Volumetric Stripping. With this method Stripping the pipe back into the hole when
possible, i.e. pipe not stuck, plugged or washed out is combined with the
Volumetric method.
4.10.1 Selection of well kill method

An influx should be circulated out without delay using the Drillers method unless the
actual well conditions or the Drilling Programme dictates otherwise.
Influx conditions may be encountered requiring alternative kill methods such as wait-and-
weight method, concurrent method, volumetric method, stripping, volumetric stripping
and bullheading.
After assessing the actual well and influx conditions, the use of the Drillers method shall
be reconfirmed or determined whether an alternative killing methods is required.
Drillers method when bit is on / near bottom, pressures during circulation will
stay under the limit of wellbore / shoe and circulation is possible.
Wait-and-weight method when bit is on / near bottom, a lower wellbore/shoe
pressure is required and circulation is possible.

13
Concurrent (circulate and weight) method when bit is on / near bottom, a lower
wellbore/shoe pressure is required, but mud with kill weight cannot be mixed in
one go and circulation is possible.
Volumetric method when gas is percolating up the well, circulation or stripping in
is not possible.
Stripping in when insufficient pipe in hole after shut-in and circulation is possible.
Volumetric Stripping when insufficient pipe in hole after shut-in, gas percolating
up the well will increase the pressures to above the limit and circulation is possible.
Bullheading when an influx will exert too high casing and surface pressures if
circulated out or in case of poisonous substances e.g. H2S in the influx and
circulation is possible.
4.10.2 Well kill plan

The well kill plan shall identify:
1. How to act when the well is closed in and gas is migrating upwards and the choke
pressure rises accordingly.
2. The preferred kill method while taking into account the following:
Kick taken while tripping or when no pipe is in the hole.
Maximum predicted annular pressure for surface equipment (well control
equipment pressure rating), sub-surface equipment (casing burst pressure) and
shoe or formation strength (weak spot).
Responses when the MAASP would be exceeded during a well kill.
Consequence of annular friction loss for casing shoe and or any weak point,
formation, in open hole.
The specification in the drilling programme.
A possible requirement for a stop-start procedure during the well kill.
Presence of sour gas or possible sour gas influx and requirements for handling
sour gas at surface when decided to circulate out the influx.
Handling capacity of gas flows through the mud-gas separator (MGS) and how
to adjust the maximum circulating rate to remain within the working envelope
of the MGS.
Presence of dissolved gas in a OBM system (i.e. gas coming out of solution at
pressures below the bubble point whereby choke pressures become irregular
and circulation rates will need to be adjusted to maintain a constant dynamic
BHP.
3. Anticipation of potential problems during the well kill operation, including:
Induced losses.
Partially plugged drill string / bit or nozzles / choke.
Washed out drill string / choke.
Kill pump problems (washed out liners, opened relief valves, etc.) and HP-line
surface leaks.
Formation of ice/hydrates.
4. Maximum predicted kill pressure, standpipe pressure
Selection of HP circulating system, maximum pressure rating.

14
Selection of kill pump and pressure rating (setting of pressure relief valves
(PRV)).
5. Installation of a non-return valve (NRV) in high pressure line to prevent an influx
trough the drill string if no sub-surface NRV is installed
4.10.3 Preparation for Drillers method

The first step is to update the kill sheet with all available data. Once the Shut In Drill Pipe
Pressure (SIDPP) and Shut In Casing Pressure (SICP) are constant this data will be added
to the kill sheet as well.
Note: The kill sheets can be found in the appendix.
Before any circulation can be started the poor boy degasser should be lined up to deal
with the influx once it reaches surface. While circulating, the expansion of the gas will
lead to an increase in surface volume. Until the gas reaches surface, more mud will
coming out of the well than is being pumped in. One must ensure enough storage volume
is available to deal with this. At the same time heavier kill mud will have to be available,
needing a separate tank as well. Confirm that exposed formations and casing can support
the higher pressures.
The pressure required on the drill pipe for start of circulation of the well can be calculated
with the following formula:
= +
= [] []
= [] []
= [] []
The next step is to prepare the kill mud needed to regain overbalance in the wellbore.
For the Drillers method the kill mud is only needed during the second circulation, for the
concurrent method the mud weight will increase throughout the kill operation, reaching
the kill mud density at some point and for the wait-and-weight method the circulation will
only start once the kill mud is ready.
In any case the kill mud density will have to be calculated and the mud engineer will have
to prepare and start to mix kill mud to the required volume and properties. The kill mud
density can be calculated with the following formula.
For SI units:

= +
0.0981
= [/]
= [/]

15
= []
= []
For oilfield units:

= +
0.052
:
= []
= []
= []
= []
4.10.4 Drillers method execution

The situation at the start of the first circulation is as follows.
The influx is at bottom
Shut in casing pressure (SICP) is higher than Shut in drill pipe pressure (SIDPP)
Initial circulating pressure has been calculated, ICP = SCR + SIDPP
Figure: Drillers method: first circulation with influx at bottom
At the start of the first circulation the pump stroke counter will be set to zero, in order to
keep track of how much mud has been pumped down the drill pipe. The pump will be
started slowly, while at the same time the choke will be opened slowly. While bringing the
pump up to kill speed (SCR), the choke should be adjusted so that choke pressure will
equal SICP. With the pump up to kill speed the pressure read at the drill pipe side should
be equal to ICP. In case of a big difference between calculated and recorded ICP, the
reason for this should be investigated. Once kill rate has been achieved the choke
operator will now adjust the choke to keep the drill pipe pressure equal to ICP. Continue
to circulate at kill speed, until all of the kick fluid has been circulated out, while adjusting
the choke as to keep drill pipe pressure at ICP. The annular pressure will rise as the influx
rises. The highest annular pressure will be once the influx reaches surface. If the amount

16
of gas coming out of the well is too much for the poor boy degasser to handle, it might be
necessary to lower the kill speed. When doing this, the new SCR pressure will need to be
calculated and the difference between old and new SCR pressure will have to be deducted
from the ICP to determine the new ICP to which the drill pipe pressure will be held by
operating the choke.
The formula for the new SCR pressure is:
2
=

= [] []
= [] []
= [/]
= [/]
After the influx has been circulated out the well will be shut in again by shutting down the
pump slowly and closing the choke simultaneously. Monitor the SIDPP and SICP. SIDPP
after first circulation should be equal to the SIDPP before circulation. SIDPP and SICP
should be equal (with the pumps off) because there is the same hydrostatic head in both
the drill pipe and the annulus. In case SICP is higher than SIDPP there is still an influx in
the well and circulation should be continued. If SIDPP equals SICP, but both are slightly
higher than the SIDPP before circulation, this means that there is some trapped pressure
in the well, most likely caused be closing the choke completely before the pumps were off.
This is not a problem and the well kill can continue with the next step.
The situation at the end of the first circulation is as follows.
The influx is circulated out
Shut in drill pipe pressure (SIDPP) equals Shut in casing pressure (SICP)
SIDPP after 1st circulation equals SIDPP before 1st circulation
Figure: Drillers method: first circulation with influx circulated out

17
The following preparations should be carried out before continuing with the drillers
method:
Enough volume of kill mud with the correct density and properties shall be
prepared before the second circulation can begin. The suction lines should be lined
up to the tank with the kill mud.
A kill graph, representative for the situation should be prepared. A kill graph for a
vertical well is straight forward, a kill graph for a deviated well needs some more
input.
In case of a vertical well the following steps are needed to prepare the kill graph.
Calculate the final circulating pressure (FCP) by using the following formula.

= ( )

:
= [] []
= [] []
= [] []
= [/] []
= [/] []
Obtain number of strokes from surface to bit, which can be found on the pre-
recorded data sheet.
Plot ICP at zero strokes, FCP at strokes from surface to bit. The drill pipe pressure
must decrease from the ICP to the FCP over the number of strokes required to
pump the kill mud from the surface to the bit.

18
Figure: Drillers method: kill graph of second circulation
In case of a deviated well the following steps are needed to prepare the kill graph.
Calculate the final circulating pressure (FCP) by using the following formula.

= ( )

:
= [] []
= [] []
= [] []
= [/] []
= [/] []
Calculate dynamic pressure loss at KOP. DPL at KOP = DPL + [ (FCP - DPL) * (MD
kop / MD td) ]
Calculate remaining SIDPP at KOP. SIDPP at KOP = SIDPP - [ (kill mud density -
original mud density) * 0.052 * TVD kop]
Calculate circulating pressure at KOP. CP at KOP = DPL at KOP + SIDPP at KOP
Calculate dynamic pressure loss at EOB. DPL at EOB = DPL + [ (FCP - DPL) * (MD
eob / MD td) ]
Calculate remaining SIDPP at EOB. SIDPP at EOB = SIDPP - [ (kill mud density -
original mud density) * 0.052 * TVD eob]
Calculate circulating pressure at EOB. CP at EOB = DPL at EOB + SIDPP at EOB
Obtain number of strokes from surface to KOP, which can be found on the pre-
recorded data sheet
Obtain number of strokes from surface to EOB, which can be found on the pre-
recorded data sheet
Obtain number of strokes from surface to bit, which can be found on the pre-
recorded data sheet
Plot ICP at zero strokes. The drill pipe pressure must decrease from the ICP to the
FCP over the number of strokes required to pump the kill mud from the surface to
the bit.
Plot CP at KOP at strokes from surface to KOP
Plot CP at EOB at strokes from surface to EOB
Plot FCP at strokes from surface to bit
Set up a graph and step down chart. Make step-down chart in order to always stay
above the ICP-FCP line. Typical steps are 100 strokes.
The situation at the start of the second circulation is as follows:

The influx is circulated out
Shut in drill pipe pressure (SIDPP) equals Shut in casing pressure (SICP)
SIDPP after 1st circulation equals SIDPP before 1st circulation

19
Kill mud is ready to be pumped

The kill graph has been prepared
At the start of the second circulation the pump stroke counter will be set to zero, in order
to keep track of how much mud has been pumped. When the kill mud starts to go the drill
pipe, i.e. the surface line volume has been displaced, the pump stroke counter is reset to
zero again.
The pump will be started slowly, while at the same time the choke will be opened slowly.
While bringing the pump up to kill speed (SCR), the choke should be adjusted so that
choke pressure will equal SICP after the first circulation. With the pump up to kill speed
the pressure read at the drill pipe side should be equal to ICP. In case of a big difference
between calculated and recorded ICP, the reason for this should be investigated. Once kill
rate has been achieved the choke operator will now adjust the choke to let the drill pipe
pressure follow the kill graph. Continue to circulate at kill speed, until the kill mud has
reached the bit. At this point the drill pipe pressure should be the FCP.
Figure: Drillers method: string displaced to kill mud
Continue circulating to displace the annulus to kill mud while adjusting the choke as to
keep drill pipe pressure at FCP.

20
Figure: Drillers method: displacement of annulus with kill mud
Once the kill mud has reached surface the well will be shut in again by shutting down the
pump slowly and closing the choke simultaneously. Monitor the SIDPP and SICP. These
should be zero (0 psi / 0 bar). If drill pipe and casing pressures are not zero, bleed-off the
pressures and check for trapped pressure. Perform a flow check through the choke line to
the trip tank. If the well is not dead, resume circulation to ensure a uniform weight of kill
mud throughout the wellbore.
The situation at the end of the second circulation is as follows.

SIDPP equals SICP, both are zero
Flow check shows the well is dead
Figure: Drillers method: end of second circulation; displaced well with kill mud

21
Once the well is confirmed to be dead, the well can be circulated conventionally. In order
to this the preventer(s) that were closed shall be opened and the HCR valve closed. Set
all back pressure manifold valves to normal operating position and resume normal
circulation, while checking for losses. If required add a suitable overbalance to the mud
weight and circulate the hole clean.
Overbalance:
When drilling from 0-1,500m the mud has an overbalance of 3.5 to 7 bar at the
expected top of any potentially productive formation.
When drilling from 1,500-3,000m, the overbalance to be at least 10 bar.
When drilling at depths greater than 3,000m the overbalance to be at least 14 bar.
4.10.5 Preparations for Volumetric control

Any time a well is closed-in due to signs of a possible influx observed while POOH and if
this influx contains gas the influx will start to migrate to surface.
An increase of pressure will be observed in time. This increase in pressure should be

monitored closely and be controlled, to prevent any possible fracturing of the exposed
formation and / or around the previous casing shoe. This should be done while the Rig
team prepares for the well kill.
How to control this increasing pressure, while maintaining a constant bottom hole
pressure to prevent any further escalation (i.e. a 2nd influx), is described under
volumetric control. Other applications for this method are:
Pipe is near surface and the weight of string is insufficient to perform stripping
operations.
Pipe is completely out of the hole pre-empting a stripping operation.
Annular BOP is damaged and stripping through pipe-rams is not an option (no
double set of pipe-rams or spacing for tool joint is not sufficient)
Circulation through the drill string is not possible due to plugged nozzles, forgot to
open FOSV when stripping had commenced, etc.
The first step in the preparation is to determine the choke pressure by using the following
formulas.
First calculate the Ffactor

1
= 1

:
= [/] [/]
= [/] [/]
= [/] [/]
= [/] [/]
= [/ ; 0.22 ] [
/ ; 0.1 ]
Then calculate Ps

22
= [] []
= [] []
= [/] [/]
And then calculate Pch

= + +
= [] []
= [] []
= [] []
= [; 3 ] [ ; 50 ]
The next step in the preparation is to determine the bleed off volume with the formula.
;

=

:
= [] []
= [; 3 ] [ ; 50 ]
= [/] [/]
= [/] [/]
4.10.6 Preparations for stripping

Preparation for stripping is divided in two main parts, firstly equipment, secondly
calculations.
The equipment requirements for Stripping pipe during a low pressure Well Control event
while performing a roundtrip can be split into 3 groups:
1. A fluid-discharge system from the Wellhead (BOP) to a dedicated and calibrated
tank, to allow a controlled, pressure & volume, bleed-off of mud.
2. A pressure regulation system to respond fast and guarantee sealing of a Bag-type
preventer when a Tool Joint is stripped through the sealing element of a Bag-type
preventer.
3. Additional equipment to ease the operations.
For the fluid discharge system, ensure the following is in place;

Ensure fluid discharge system from BOP is lined up to trip tank. A fluid-discharge
system from the wellhead (BOP) into a dedicated and accurately calibrated tank, in
order to allow controlled bleed-off.
Ensure stripping/trip tanks are calibrated
Ensure pressure gauges are calibrated
Ensure stripping surge bottle for annular BOP is installed and operational to
dampen pressure pulses as tool joint passes through packing element

23
Ensure that the choke line and manifold are properly aligned to discharge bled off
liquid into the trip tank
Ensure the trip tank is approximately 1/3 full
A schematic overview of the fluid discharge schematic system is given below:
For the pressure regulation system, ensure the following is in place;

24
Ensure the BOP control system allows fast response and guarantees a seal when a
tool joint is stripped through the sealing element.
A schematic overview of the regulator system to control the closing pressure of the
annular preventer is given below.
The other preparations, besides equipment preparation, are detailed below.
Before stripping can start a stripping schedule (Plan of action) should be prepared. For
this the following should be calculated;
Calculate how much wellbore pressure can be allowed before the pipe is pushed
out

25
:
= []
= []
= []; 15000

= 2
:
= [2 ]
= []

=

:
= []
= [2 ]
Calculate the closed end displacement of the pipe to be stripped in.
1 =
:
1 = []
= 1 [/],
= []
Regardless of the method used to strip pipe into the hole, to enable effective pressure
control, it is important to measure all the fluid movements on surface and from the
wellbore accurately. Influxes that have entered the well could be gas and migration may
take place. If there is no migration it could mean that a fluid, oil or formation water is
swabbed but it also could mean that conditions are such that gas is still in liquid phase
and can break-out higher up the hole. As long as we face a liquid phase, as pipe is
stripped in, the volume of mud released from the wellbore should equal to the closed-end
displacement.
To minimise wear, the pipe should be lubricated and the closing pressure applied to the
preventer should be kept to a minimum whilst avoiding leakage. Additionally, drill
pipe/casing protectors should be removed and the drill pipe (and tool joints) surface to be
smoothened from tong & slip marks.
4.10.7 Execution of volumetric stripping operations

The situation at the start of volumetric stripping is as follows.
The end of the pipe is not on / near bottom.
The well is shut in with the annular preventer and FOSV.
Pipe in hole is heavy enough to withstand being pushed out by well bore pressure.
The shut in casing pressure is rising.

26
The stripping operation starts by:

Reduce the closing pressure on the annular preventer. Allow a small amount of
leakage, when stripping through the annular preventer, to lubricate and reduce
wear on the sealing element.
Open the surge accumulator bottle
Install a grey valve above the FOSV
CLOSE the grey valve
OPEN the FOSV
At this point it might be useful to circulate for a short time to confirm that the pipe in the
hole is not plugged before beginning to strip in.
The next step is to prepare a stand of drill pipe. Make up a stand of drill pipe to the pipe
in the hole and make sure of the following.
Ensure that casing protectors are removed
Ensure tong and slip marks are smoothened
Ensure tool joints are lubricated
Now the first stand can be stripped in. Slowly lower the drill pipe and move the tool joints
slowly through the preventer, avoiding excessive pressure surges. Monitor the closing
pressure of the annular BOP while tool joints are being stripped through, to ensure that
the regulator is functioning correctly. Then fill the stand with fluid from the active system.
After stripping the entire stand in the hole, measure the mud which leaked past the
annular preventer. Then bleed the closed end displacement volume minus the leaked
volume into the stripping tank.
Let the shut in (casing) pressure rise till it reaches the choke pressure as calculated. This
pressure will be Pchoke1. Then release the calculated bleed off volume at choke, while
maintaining the choke pressure constant (=Pchoke1). Collect the bled off fluid in the trip
tank and close the choke once the required volume is bled off.
While stripping in pipe, allow Pchoke1 to build up by a Pw (usually 50 psi) step to

Pchoke2, i.e.: Pchoke1 + Pw, and release the calculated bleed off volume at the choke.
Continue stripping in while increasing Pchoke in steps of Pw and keep releasing the bleed
off volume until gas reaches surface or until pipe on bottom.
If gas reaches surface before the bottom is reached continue by lubricating the well. This
process starts by pumping the calculated volume of mud in the well and allowing it time
to fall through the gas bubble. Then bleed off gas pressure equal to Pw by opening the
choke and letting pressure drop to Pchoke new.
Pchoke new = Pchoke old Pw

27
After the choke pressure has dropped, close the choke, pump the required volume of mud
and continue this process until all gas is replaced with mud. Then continue stripping in to
bottom.
If bottom is reached, then the initial circulating pressure (ICP) should be obtained. Bring
the pump to kill rate while keeping the casing pressure constant. The drill pipe pressure is
the required ICP. Now refer to either Drillers method or Wait-and-weight method to
circulate the influx out and kill the well.
The situation at the end of stripping is as follows.

The end of the pipe is on / near bottom.
The well is shut in and the influx can still be in the well.

28
Form for pressure and volume records during Volumetric Stripping Method (use of Annular
only)

29
4.11 Well control data requirement

The accuracy and availability of certain pre-recorded well data is critical to the success of
well control operations. These data include:
SCR Pressure/ Rate Data: Shall be recorded every shift, when changing BHA or
when mud properties have changed (mud weight) and shall be reported on the
IADC tour report and posted at the Drillers cabin.
FIT Data: The Formation Integrity Test value shall be used to establish the
maximum allowable annular shut-in pressure (MAASP) for well control procedures.
This value shall be equal or higher than the required formation strength. If the FIT
result is less than the required value, then operational adjustments have to be
made to minimize the size of any kick.
ECD Data: The Equivalent Circulating Density (ECD) is important when the
pressure margins between pore pressure, mud weight and fracture gradient are
small. The Daily Mud Report shall show the current estimate for the ECD.
Well Control Worksheet: A pre-kick sheet shall be completed and updated by the
PETROM Drilling Supervisor every 24 hours / 150 m drilled.
DRILL PIPE CASING DRILL STRING PIT PUMP

PRESSURE PRESSURE WEIGHT LEVEL S.P.M.
LOSS OF CIRCULATION
CHOKE PLUGS NO CHANGE
BIT NOZZLE PLUGS NO CHANGE NO CHANGE NO CHANGE
BIT NOZZLE WASHES OUT NO CHANGE NO CHANGE NO CHANGE
PUMP VOLUME DROPS NO CHANGE NO CHANGE NO CHANGE
HOLE IN DRILL STRING NO CHANGE NO CHANGE NO CHANGE
GAS FEEDING IN NO CHANGE
CHOKE WASHES OUT NO CHANGE
GAS REACHES SURFACE NO CHANGE THEN NO CHANGE
SYMBOLS: INCREASE DECREASE MAJOR MINOR
Figure: Summary of Well Indicators while Circulating out a Kick
4.12 Surface BOP and related equipment requirements
4.12.1 BOPs
The requirements for different types of BOPs are listed below according to their working
pressures. The choice of a given BOP depends on the maximum expected surface
pressure that could encounter during drilling and workover operations.

30
1. 2M BOPs:
One annular preventer.
Two ram type preventer.
One choke line and one kill line outlet.
Ring gaskets will be of metal to metal sealing.
2. 3M and 5M BOPs:
One annular preventer.
Two ram type preventers.
One choke line outlet. One kill line below shear rams, with 2 valves per outlet.
Ring gaskets will be of the metal to metal sealing type.
3. 10M and 15M BOPs:

One 5M annular preventer.
Three 10M or 15M ram type preventers.
One choke line outlet. One kill line outlet below shear rams, with 2 valves per
outlet.
Ring gaskets will be of metal to metal sealing type.
Figure: Common Surface BOP Stack Arrangements
4.12.2 Closing unit

The closing unit will be an independent automatic accumulator unit with a rated
working pressure of 3000 psi (200 bars).
It shall have a control manifold that visibly shows open and close of all BOP
functions.

31
Regulator valves of 3000 psi (200 bars) shall be fitted with manual overrides and
fail-safe close features.
The unit should be positioned in a safe area away from the wellbore to allow
operation of the unit in an uncontrolled well situation.
The unit should be fitted with 4-way valves that will be kept in the open or closed
position during the operations.
The unit shall have two remote panels and each panel clearly marked with Open
and Close for all functions.
4.12.3 Accumulator unit

The accumulator will be pre-charged to about 1000 psi (70 bars).
The accumulator volume will be sized to have a minimum working pressure of
1200 psi (83 bars) after opening and closing all functions and closing the annular,
depending on the maximum expected pressure and the closing ratio.
The control unit should be fitted with one electric and two backup air pumps for
accumulator charging.
4.13 Other secondary well control equipment
4.13.1 Choke and standpipe manifold

The choke manifold shall have a working pressure equal to or greater than the working
pressure of the rams. (all components of BOP stack will have same category of pressure).
The choke manifold must be sized correctly and in good working order. It is the
responsibility of the Driller to ensure that the choke manifold is lined up correctly at all
times. All open valves of annular line from BOP stack to poor boy will be painted in a
white color to see direction of fluids from annulus to surface. The Driller must check the
line up at the start of his shift.
According to API it is recommended to have two chokes; one manual and the other
remotely-operated.
The choke and standpipe manifolds should have two isolation valves and have an option
to be lined up with the cementing unit.
4.13.2 Safety valves

A full opening safety valve and closing handle must be present on the drill floor at all
times. There must be sufficient crossovers to fit this safety valve to all drill string
components. Examples of full opening safety valves are: TIW, Hydril Kelly Guard, and
SMF.

32
Figure: Safety valve
4.13.3 Inside BOP (IBOP)

An inside blowout preventer should be available for use when stripping the drill string into
or out of the hole. This can be of string stab-in type or a drop-in type. Examples of these
are: Gray valve and Hydril drop-in dart sub.
The Gray valve will be stabbed into the top of the drill string and made up above a safety
valve. The valve will be stored in the open position. The Hydril dart sub will be installed in
the drill string just above the BHA.

33
Figure: Gray valve
4.13.4 Float subs

It shall be field practice to run float subs in all hole sections. They are positioned just
above the bit and serve the following purpose:
Prevent influx into the drill string.
Prevent backflow of annulus cuttings from plugging the bit.
There are two types of float valves; the flapper type and the spring-loaded ball or dart.
The main advantage of the flapper-type is that it offers a full opening approximately the
same as the ID of the tool joint. The advantage of the spring-loaded type is that it gives
an instantaneous and positive shut-off of backflow through the drill string.

34
Figure: Float valve
4.13.5 Kelly cocks

These are safety valves fitted to the drill string. One is positioned above the kelly or just
below the top drive. The upper kelly cock fitted with a kelly is manually closed with a
wrench. The upper safety valve on the top drive is a remote activated one. The lower
kelly cock for a kelly has the same features as a full opening safety valve. It is manually
activated by a wrench. The lower safety valve on the top drive is a manually activated
valve.

35
Appendix 1 Well kill sheets for surface BOP stack

App. 1.1 Surface BOP kill sheet Vertical well (SI units)

36

37
App. 1.2 Surface BOP kill sheet Deviated well (SI units)

38

39

40

5 Directional drilling and BHA
Prepared by WEP
Author:
Version: May 2014
Verified:
2
5 Directional drilling and BHA ................................................................................. 3

5.1 Pre-job guidelines ....................................................................................... 3
5.1.1 Preparations ......................................................................................... 3
5.1.2 Making up the BHA ............................................................................... 4
5.2 Check list DP-HWDP-DC ............................................................................... 4
5.3 Drilling considerations ................................................................................. 5
5.3.1 Considerations for using steerable systems .............................................. 5
5.3.2 Depth Referencing ................................................................................ 5
5.3.3 (Rotary) BHA ........................................................................................ 6
5.3.4 Stabilization ......................................................................................... 6
5.3.5 Steerable mud motor systems vs. hole cleaning........................................ 8
5.3.6 Steerable motor operating practices ........................................................ 9
5.3.7 Rotary steerable BHA without mud motor .............................................. 11
5.3.8 Rotary steerable BHA + mud motor....................................................... 12
5.4 Use of heavy weight drill pipe and drill collars ............................................... 12
5.5 Jar and accelerator placement .................................................................... 14
5.6 Trajectory control drilling engineering ....................................................... 17
5.6.1 Vertical holes ..................................................................................... 17
5.6.2 Kick off and build ................................................................................ 19
5.6.3 Tangent ............................................................................................. 19
5.6.4 ERD well requirements ........................................................................ 20
Appendix 1 Drillstring failure prevention .............................................................. 22

5 Directional drilling and BHA | Version:May 2014
3
5 Directional drilling and BHA

Directional Strategies
The recent trend within the industry has been to aim for a shoe to shoe philosophy. This
has become possible due to increased reliability in downhole equipment, the advancement
in PDC technology and the drilling the limit approach. The downside to this philosophy is
that the best BHA for the build/drop section is not necessarily the best BHA for the
tangent section. Optimising well planning and establishing a clear drilling strategy will not
only result in drilling faster from shoe to TD, but will minimize the stuck pipe risks.
Drilling the plan

The directional plan is a guideline for the DSV & directional driller. It is not meant to be
stuck to rigorously. When the directional driller and/or DSV decide to drill on the line
with a motor assembly they will:
Increase the amount of sliding.
Increase the tortuosity of the wellbore
Increase the torque and drag.
Reduce the hole cleaning efficiency.
Common sense and local knowledge needs to be incorporated to drill the well as effective
as possible.
5.1 Pre-job guidelines
5.1.1 Preparations
Ensure that drilling objectives and anticipated drilling conditions for the next bit
run are reviewed and understood prior to make up of BHA.
Check that the depth referencing and grid correction is correct.
Check if surface coordinates and bottom hole coordinates are the same as per
directional drilling plan. Confirm surface coordinates with the Final Survey for the
well cellar with conductor
Check that the survey procedures are known and that the correct grid is selected.
Verify available Weight on Bit for drilling operations, ensuring the drill string is not
in compression.
Directional Company to ensure there are sufficient Nonmagnetic drill collars in the
string for surveying purposes for the section to be drilled.
Verify that all drill pipe, drill collars, crossovers, jars, etc, have been recently
inspected and are in useable condition.
Ensure that the mud pump dampeners have the correct pressure.
Check X-O and connection types of the various down hole tools.
Check that the flow ranges of the various down hole tools are compatible with the
anticipated flow rate.
Ensure that all BHA components are callipered for OD & ID and that a schematic is
prepared, including lengths, prior to running in the hole.
Select the correct fishing tools, based on measurements of BHA components.

4
Ensure that the torque sensor is pumped up and the torque gauge is calibrated
(use iron roughneck and tong load sensor).
5.1.2 Making up the BHA

Review handling practices with rig crew, to discuss rotary bushings, slips, tongs,
slip setting, housekeeping, equipment pick-up and make-up order etc.
Have dog collars available.
Ensure that the gripping elements in the slips are not worn.
Ensure that the sleeves, saver subs and tool joints are made up to the correct
make-up torque.
Ensure BHA connections are properly cleaned before applying dope and making up.
Use a calibrated make-up torque gauge.
Ensure an adequate supply of the correct type doping compound is available.
Thread protectors must be used when laying down drill collars and drill pipe.
Calliper ODs of all stabilizers prior to running them down hole, record fishing neck.
Check that the float valve is placed properly and opens.
Gauge the bit and check nozzle sizes; ensure that nozzles are properly installed in
the bit.
If a Steerable Motor assembly is used, make sure that the bend is properly scribed
to the MWD orientation point.
o If an UBHO is used, make sure the Sleeve is set in the right direction and
the sleeve is properly torqued up.
o If a fixed collar MWD is used, check that the offset is calculated and stored
in the inititals of the job (depends on which directional drilling company is
used).
Perform surface test prior of running the BHA down hole. Also record standpipe
pressures at different flow rates.
5.2 Check list DP-HWDP-DC

Below a list is given for checks to be performed on DP-HWDP-DC prior of picking them up.
DP & HWDP checks:
o Caliper OD's, ID's & lengths of several tool joints to record for future
capacity calculations. (Use Go-NoGo gauge for DP)
o Check ID for obstructions. Rabbit all joints at least when picking them up
from outside of the derrick.
o Monitor condition of plastic coated ID.
o Monitor condition of tube body.
o Monitor condition of tool joints.
o Visual check hard-band condition.
o Check that HWDP has API bore back stress relief groove on box end and
API stress relief groove on pin end.
o Only use casing friendly DP, no abrasive hard bending
DC checking, as follows:
o Measure actual OD's & IDs, caliper all, record fishing neck.
o Does box end have API bore back stress relief groove

5
o Are straight crossover subs a minimum of 36 overall?

o Are tapered crossover subs a minimum of 48 overall with a minimum
fishing neck of 32?
o Is bit sub (when applicable) recessed for a float valve?
API RP 7G shows the recommended make-up torques for commonly used tool-joints in
Premium Class. For OD's between those shown, estimate the make-up torque (torque
proportional to diameter) or use 60% of torsional yield.
New joints
Make up new tool-joints very slowly and torque to minimum specified torque. Then
break out, clean thoroughly, and inspect for minor damage. Re-lubricate and make
up to operational torque.
Pipe recovered in a fishing operation should be replaced or, as a minimum,
inspected before it is run in the hole again.
5.3 Drilling considerations
5.3.1 Considerations for using steerable systems

Have optimised bit selected. (see chapter 3 for more details). For steerability the
following needs to be taken into consideration:
o Bit type (Roller cone bit vs. Fixed cutter bit)
o Gauge length (Shorter gauge enhances steer ability)
o Active gauge
o Cutter size and number of blades (more blades and smaller cutters
enhances the steer ability)
o Specific bit features for each particular RSS (point / push the bit).
Spiral vs. Straight-blade stabilizers
All stabilizers should have short blade, barrel profiles to reduce wall contact. The
difference between spiral and straight blades is formation dependent.
High flow rate in 17 and 12 holes.
The hole cleaning requirements for deviated wells when drilled at high penetration
rates are such that the MWD must be capable to cope with the anticipated flow
rate.
High attention must be given to hole cleaning for borehole inclination between
40-60 to avoid cutting avalanching phenomenon.
High Speed Vs. Low Speed Motors. In general there is little ROP improvement with
High Speed motors. The shorter, high torque, low speed motors enhance
steerability and provide a longer bearing life.
5.3.2 Depth Referencing

All depths (along hole or true vertical) shall be referred to the Rotary Kelly Bushings
(RKB) of the rig which initially drilled the well (original derrick floor, ODF).
These depths below the Rotary Kelly Bushings (RKB) are in turn referred to a universal
datum level, for instance Mean Sea Level.

6
On side track wells depths shall similarly be recorded below actual RKB but shall also be
referenced to the original derrick floor elevation.
For reservoir engineering purposes the depths shall be reported below a universal datum.
5.3.3 (Rotary) BHA

The BHA controls the well bore trajectory. The design of BHA can vary from very simple
(bit, drill collars, drill pipe) to a complex system (bit, shock sub, RSS, roller reamers,
stabilizers, non-magnetic drill collars, steel drill collars, crossover subs, extension subs,
jars, heavy weight drill pipe and drill pipe).
All BHAs cause a side force at the bit that affect hole inclination:
positive side force: Fulcrum effect : build inclination
zero net side force: Lockup BHA: no change in inclination
negative side force: Pendulum effect: a drop in inclination
Additional directional behaviour (bit walk) can result from specific rotary BHAs and
drilling parameters, such as WOB and RPM.
5.3.4 Stabilization
It is important to understand the effect the stabilisers have on directional behavior.
If the near-bit stabilizer is under-gauge this results in a loss of bit side force. For a build-
up BHA the build rate is thus reduced. For a locked-up BHA, a drop in inclination is the
result.
The more under-gauged, the greater the effect. For drop-off BHA's, the use of an under-
gauged near bit stabilizer is recommended in "S" wells at the drop-off.

7
If the second stabilizer is under-gauge it becomes easier to get a tangency point below it:
it becomes easier to build angle. The more under-gauge this second stabiliser is, the
greater the effect. For holding (locked) BHA's, an under-gauge second stabilizer is usually
deliberately included in the BHA. The objective is to reach a condition of zero net side
force at the bit.

8
The figure above provides the general idea of the effect in the drilling tendency for the
various stabilizer sizes (full gauge vs. under gauge) and stabilizer placement.
Stabilized BHA can be designed to build, hold or drop inclination. Critical elements:
Stabilizer gauge & position
Drill collar OD/weight/moment of inertia
Hole inclination
WOB, RPM, flow rates
Hole gauge
Bit Type
Prediction issues (formation effects, bit walk, hole washout)
5.3.5 Steerable mud motor systems vs. hole cleaning

The majority of directional wells around the world are still being drilled with conventional
steerable assemblies rather than Rotary Steerable Systems.
No String Rotation When Sliding

Pipe rotation has a huge impact on the hole cleaning efficiency. Unfortunately
conventional steerable assemblies cannot be rotated whilst steering and the result of this
is a cuttings build-up in the annulus during this period. This disadvantage has been one of
the main drivers behind the development of rotary steerable systems i.e. able to rotate
when sliding hence cutting beds are stirred up and cannot collect and build up between
stabilisers.
Bend Setting and the effect on string RPM.

To avoid fatigue failure of the bearing housing, RPM restrictions are imposed with
increasing bend setting. The limited RPM might not be high enough to clean the hole.
Conventional steerable design is driven by the dogleg requirements of the trajectory. This
translates to:
Higher dogleg = higher bend setting = greater restriction in RPM.
In some instances the maximum allowed Surface RPM is well below what is required for
cuttings agitation. To compensate for the lack of rotation,do:
1. Increase the flow rate. (In most cases we wont be able to increase the flow rate to
a sufficient rate that would make up for the lack of rotation).
2. Ensure rotation of sufficient speed is achieved in the tangent section after the
build-up section. This only applies if there is a tangent section after the build.
3. Change the trajectory. This means reducing the build rates so that a lower bend
setting can be used.
4. Putting in dedicated hole cleaning procedures and measures. This could involve
reducing ROP if drag increases due to cuttings build-up or to perform clean-up
trips during the build-up section and having dedicated assemblies for different
parts of the section i.e. one assembly for the build-up and a different assembly for
the tangent section.

9
Tight annular clearance between the wellbore and the motor sleeve or integral stabilizer
can also easily cause cuttings to build up.
5.3.6 Steerable motor operating practices

The following practices should be applied to ensure efficient steerable motor operations:
Pre-job checks
Check if the motor speed range is suitable for the type of bit in use.
Compatibility of stator elastomer with drilling fluid system (NADF or WBM).
Compatibility of motor temperature rating with circulation temperature, in
particular internal fit and resulting performance.
Compatibility of flow range of the MWD tools with the anticipated drilling flow rate.
Gauge the bottom stabilizer on the motor and ensure it is in accordance with the
planned under-gauge requirements.
Check bent housing setting to ensure it is able to achieve the dog legs required by
the wellbore trajectory.
Make up the motor, MWD and bit. Test the motor and MWD at two or 3 different
flow rates and record the circulating pressures and rates.
Make up the MWD, aligning the scribe mark on the motor with that of the MWD.

10
Running in the hole

Check the string is full every 10 to 15 stands, or if a float is used, fill the drill pipe
every 10 to 15 stands.
Care should be taken when running in open hole. Damage to the motor bearings or
bit may occur when hitting hard formation ledges.
Take a check MWD benchmark survey where low directional change happens.
Wash down the last stand, gently tag bottom and establish the required tool face
before commencing with drilling.
While taking survey the MWD sag correction must be applied.
Tripping out of the hole

Field experience and research has shown that it is very difficult to get a deviated hole
100% clean. Therefore we have to assume that there is a cuttings bed lying on the low
side of the hole when we trip. The height of this bed will depend on how efficient hole
cleaning has been. In order to successfully trip out of the hole, the cuttings must pass
around the BHA without increasing the bed height e.g. a steady state situation.
However, if the bed height increases, cuttings will build up around the BHA and the risk of
pack-off and stuck pipe incidents increase. The three main factors that influence this are:
The height of residual cuttings bed, or, how clean the hole is prior to tripping out.

11
Clearance between downhole drilling equipment and wellbore and number & type
of stabilisers.
Pulling speed.
Motor back at surface

Inspect the body for signs of wear and damage.
Gauge all stabilizers and record gauge and locations of wear.
Check the play in the bearing section by manipulating the bit box on the motor to
evaluate bearing wear based on the play and determine if the motor is to be re-
run.
Test the motor at the same flow rates as in the surface test and compare resulting
circulating pressures. It is normal to see some reduction in pressure as the
motor/stator clearance has become bigger due to wear on the stator.
5.3.7 Rotary steerable BHA without mud motor

One of the most important advantages that a rotary steerable system has over a
conventional motor system is continuous rotation of the string at speeds over 120 rpm. It

12
is important to stress that a rotary steerable system alone will not solve your hole
cleaning problems unless the other key parameters are optimized.
Push the bit steering principle
The main advantages with the use of rotary steerable systems are:
1. Continuous rotation maximizing hole cleaning efficiency and ROP.
2. Full inclination and azimuth control for wide range of dogleg capabilities.
3. Not limited by weight stacking and buckling issues, as is the case with motors.
4. Minimises tortuosity in the wellbore. Smooth wellbore aids further torque and drag
reduction.
Consideration when running the RSS (rotary steerable system)

1. Planned dogleg severity: maximum dogleg is 6.0 6.5 deg/30m, but can be less in
softer formations.
2. Allows the tool reaming & back reaming? Does the whole system rotate? Some
types have non-rotating parts that can cause problems when POOH and reaming.
3. Will there be an increase in ROP? If so, is the flow rate sufficient to clean the hole?
5.3.8 Rotary steerable BHA + mud motor
The additional advantage of a RSS system that includes a motor is its performance
capability. The motor increases usable torque and rotation speed at the bit. Due to the
higher torque available more WOB can be given, this all results in higher ROPs. In
addition of that the casing wear is decreasing due to low string rotation.
Typical applications:
High-performance directional drilling.
High rate of penetration in hard-rock drilling applications
Rigs with low torque capacity.
5.4 Use of heavy weight drill pipe and drill collars

The number of heavy weight drill pipe (HWDP) that is normally run in a drill string ranges
between the 15 and 24 joints. There are typically two approaches towards the use of
HWDP vs. the use of drill collars;
1. use of conventional DC HWDP BHAs.
2. BHA using no DC at all and only run HWDP.

13
The use of the extreme heavy 9 1/2 DCs should be avoided since pipe handling and
making up is too risky.
First a distinction needs to be made between vertical wells and deviated wells. For the
vertical wells the approach stays unchanged with the use of DC, to keep the string in
tension and the available weight is supplied by the DC and the neutral point in the Drill
collars.
For deviated wells there are two approaches 1) the use of conventional BHAs having
150 200 m drill collars in the BHA and 2) omitting the Drill collars all together.
The main advantages of omitting drill collars in deviated wells are:

HWDP assemblies are lighter. This reduces the drag, provokes less stick slip.
HWDPs result in less internal pressure drop. Hence more pressure becomes
available for hole cleaning and bit drive.
HWDP connections are far less prone to fatigue failures than drill collar
connections.
Rig handling of HWDPs is faster and safer than drill collars.
HWDPs have less contact area than drill collars and therefore have a smaller risk
on becoming (differentially) stuck.
HWDPs will result in less ECD due to the larger annular clearance.
Omitting the DC and providing all the weight by the HWDP gives no significant effect on
directional tendencies when drill collars are replaced by HWDP. Furthermore the HWDP
assemblies do exhibit less shocks and stick-slip.
Calculating the available weight on bit
Available weight:
= cos
Where:
is the hole inclination in degrees
w is weight per unit length
L is the length of DCs below the Tangent
BF is the buoyancy factor
(/)
= 1
7.85
Neutral point
Drill pipe must not be run in compression in a non-horizontal well. To ensure that the drill
pipe is always in tension, the neutral point must be either in the HWDP or in the DC's.
Obviously, the lower the WOB, the closer the neutral point is to the bit. Therefore, the
BHA must be designed to account for the worst case (i.e. when maximum WOB is
applied).

14
A 10% Safety Factor (SF) should be used in the calculation for the required BHA weight.
For tapered drill strings, the WOB calculation is done as follows:
= ( ) (cos )

=
cos
SF = Safety Factor (usually 10%)
Circulating Subs
A circulating sub shall be run into the drill string under the following circumstances:
1. When tools or restricted flow paths are in the drill string (e.g. MWD, core barrels,
downhole motors, turbines, fishing tools).
2. When drilling in areas of expected lost circulation so that LCM can be pumped
without plugging the MWD or bit. In this case it is preferred to run large or open
jets. However, this may not be desirable for bit hydraulic.
3. When changing mud situations. This could result in high viscosities, high gel
strength or the settling out of barite.
Notes:
Ensure that ID of the circulating sub does not restrict running wireline tools (e.g.,
FPI, String shot, Severing tool).
Opening the circulation sub in open hole is not recommended while drilling.
5.5 Jar and accelerator placement

In general jars can be run in tension or in compression but should not be run around the
neutral point in order to avoid stroking of the jar. This should be checked for the
minimum and maximum weight-on bit since the neutral point in the BHA will move up and
down when drilling off.
For the default assemblies the jar is run below the neutral point whereby the jar will be
extended (opened position) when running-in the hole.
For the optimum position of the jar and accelerator follow the recommendations of the jar
supplier.
To avoid jarring down when tagging bottom the following procedures need to be
followed:
Wash down the last stand, gently tag bottom, establish the required tool face
before commencing with drilling.
Continue to slowly lower string weight after tagging bottom allowing the jar to
completely close and move through detent without causing an impact. A slight
movement of the weight indicator might be detectable as the jar exits the detent.
Now additional weight can be added.
The time to close the jar without firing will vary depending on the wear of the jar
and the down hole temperature.

15

16
The above assumes that the neutral point moves up from below to above the jar when
WOB is applied (from tension while RIH to compression after set down).
In order to avoid jarring-up when making a connection or tripping out of the hole with the
jar in compression, the procedure below should be followed:
Slowly raise string off bottom, allowing the jar to open and move through detent
without causing an impact. Again the slight movement of the weight indicator
needle will be observed as the jar exits the detent. Now the jar is in the open
position and normal practices of pulling out can continue.
The impact created by the jar is the result of a complex pattern of compressive and
tensile stress waves that travel through the BHA. The effectiveness is usually measured
by the amplification factor which is defined as the ratio of maximum impact force over
static preload force. Jarring vendors provide services to calculate and optimize the
amplification factor by using specialized software.
Some rules-of-thumb are given below:

Normally about 5 to 6 singles of HWDP between jar and accelerator is optimal for a
maximum impact. Similarly have at least one stand of HWDP or DC above the accelerator.
It is recommended to change out the jar after 150 hrs and limit the use of jars to
250 hrs.
Jar max 5x up and 5x down to prevent for topdrive damage!
Place jar and accelerator in the string above BHA elements that are likely to
become stuck and above the hole geometry and sections that are likely to cause
sticking.
Do not run jar or accelerator in the neutral point zone. Adjust the amount of
HWDP between jar and accelerator to achieve this.
Avoid having large changes in cross sectional area in the lower BHA components,
as this will scatter and reflect the jar impacts. Tool-joints will have a similar
scattering effect so that a jar placed within the HWDP will have a reduced impact.
In case drill collars are used, always have more collars below the jar than on top of
it. This prevents the relatively weak jar being loaded by a dynamic load of twice
its impact force, caused by the stuck point reflection. The force wave reflected at
the top DC / HW transition relieves forces and should arrive back at the jar before
the stuck point reflection does.
It is important that the free stroke of the accelerator is larger than that of the Jar.
By doing so the movement within the accelerator does not reach its limit so that
the accelerator is most effectively used.
Be aware that non-pressure compensated jars will have a pump-open force.
Because of this effect a jar will have a beneficial thrusters effect when jarring up.
When jarring down the thruster effect will reduce the effective down blow of the
jar.
When the jar and accelerator pass through a local high dog-leg area such as a
whipstock it is good practice to proceed with low rotary speed and bit weight.

17
Accelerator when jarring

Jarring accelerators are used to increase the chance to recover a stuck-pipe incident. It
allows additional strain energy to be stored in the drill string and protects the derrick and
top drive from excessive shocks while jarring.
It performs the same function as the free length of drill string, which stores strain energy
during normal drilling. The difference being that the jarring accelerator stores strain
energy over significantly less length than that required for the drill string. This is
accomplished by compressing a series of springs inside the tool or compressing gas or a
compressible fluid, such as silicon, inside the tool. The result is that less energy is lost to
friction resulting in a higher impact when the jar fires.
Accelerators will effectively reflect shock waves. Hence shock loading of surface
equipment when using jars at shallow depth is minimized in case accelerators are used.
This is key to protect top-drives during a shallow jarring operation. Jarring with the top
drive connected directly to the string can cause damage of the top drive, despite the
accelerator. Jarring should be done using the elevators instead of the top drive.
It is recommend to change out the accelerator after 150 hrs and limit the use of
accelerators to 250 hrs. The name accelerator is a proprietary name of Weir-Houston
Engineers (currently owned by Smith Drilling and Completions Inc.) Other designations
are Intensifier (Griffith), Impact Enhancer (IPE, International Petroleum Equipment),
Hypulse Jar Slinger (Dailey/Weatherford).
Jarring accelerators are particularly useful when:

The overpull applied downhole to the jar is limited. This typically occurs for
inclined, ERD or horizontal wells where drillstring strength and drag are critical
issues.
There is insufficient pipe stretch. This typically applies to top-hole sections, where
there is insufficient elongation and energy stored in the drill pipe to accelerate the
collars during the free stroke of the jar.
When drilling horizontal wells (ERD) the jar/Accelerator position in the BHA is critical. For
the best jar/accelerator recommended position, ask the jar supplier.
5.6 Trajectory control drilling engineering
5.6.1 Vertical holes

Vertical holes can be drilled with BHAs according to the pendulum principle: the portion of
the assembly from the bit to the first string stabilizer hangs like a pendulum and, because
of its own weight, presses the bit to the low side of the hole.
The major design feature of the pendulum assembly is that there is either no near-bit
stabilizer or an under-gauge near-bit stabilizer. In most cases the main factor causing
deviation is the component of force at the bit on the low side of the hole. The length of
collar from the bit to the first string stabilizer must not be allowed to bend too much
towards the low side of the hole.
The effective length of the pendulum and the side force on the low side are both reduced
when the collar makes contact with the low side of the hole. This situation is undesirable

18
because the bit axis has been tilted upward in relation to the hole axis which will reduce
the dropping tendency. (In itself, this would produce a build tendency).
Careful selection of drilling parameters is required to prevent this. High rotary speed
(120-160+) helps keep the pendulum straight. Initially low weight on bit should also be
used, again to avoid bending the pendulum towards the low side of the hole. Once the
dropping trend has been established, Moderate weight can be used to achieve a
respectable penetration rate.
Recommended Practices:
Concentrate on producing a side force on the low side of the hole. This is best achieved by
running an assembly where the pendulum portion is as stiff and straight as possible. It is
also desirable that the section immediately above the first string stabilizer is also stiff and
straight. Therefore a second string stabilizer within 10m of the first is recommended.
When azimuth control is not a concern or when drilling with a PDC bit omit the
near bit stabilizer. When drilling with roller cone bit, use an under-gauge near-bit
stabilizer if azimuth control is a concern. Typically, the near bit stabilizer needs
only to under-gauge in order to produce a dropping tendency.
The assembly should have 2 string stabilizers with the second stabilizer not more
than 10m above the first.
Initially, use low WOB until the dropping tendency is established, then gradually
increase bit weight until an acceptable penetration rate is achieved.
If possible, do not plan drop sections in hard formation.
Below a graphical presentation is given showing the effect on dropping tendency of the
BHA by changing the configuration of the stabilizer placement.

19
5.6.2 Kick off and build

Kick-off and build-up sections may be performed in one bit run with a steerable assembly
or in two or more bit runs by conventional methods. The initial kick-off is made with a
mud motor-bent sub combination. Having achieved inclination, the kick-off assembly is
pulled for a rotary build assembly to continue the build-up.
Kick-off assemblies normally include an MWD tool plus a UBHO sub so that gyro single
shots may be taken until clear of the magnetic interference arising from surrounding
wells. The UBHO sub also allows use of a steering tool in case of difficulty holding toolface
using MWD. Shallow kick-off and build sections with smooth build rates are required to
minimize torque and drag in deeper critical hole sections. Problems with casing and
logging operations can also be encountered due to the presence of shallow dog-legs. All
personnel shall be aware of this requirement and potentially troublesome doglegs shall be
reamed immediately.
A dogleg severity of 1.5 deg/10 meter should not be exceeded!
Excessive doglegs or a drop in build rate have a much greater effect on torque and drag
in top hole than in deeper hole sections. Use of torque and drag analysis while drilling
should be made to assess the impact of directional variations on the overall directional
operations plan. Severe dog legs may render drilling to TD impossible and as such an
accurate analysis of the well trajectories implication of the Torque and Drag profile and
Road map charts for highly deviated wells (Pick-up/Slack-off/Rotate of bottom) at TD is
essential.
For increased build rate:

Increase WOB (increasing buckling action)
Reduce drill collar diameter
Reduce RPM
Increase distance from bit to near bit stabilizer
Increase the distance from the near bit stabilizer to the first string stabilizer
For decreased build rate:

Reduce WOB or ream
Increase drill collar diameter
Increase RPM
Reduce distance from bit to near bit stabilizer
Reduce distance from the near bit stabilizer to the first string stabilizer
Use an Under gauged near bit stabilizer
5.6.3 Tangent
The tangent section may include a drop-off interval on S - shaped wells, or may
maintain a constant inclination to the target for build-and-hold wells. With Steerable
Mud-Motor assemblies corrections can be performed as required, however the economics
of running the steerable system should be checked. With large targets, the enhanced
directional control afforded by these systems may not be required.

20
For increased drop-off in a rotary assembly

Reduce WOB
Increase RPM
Increase drill collar diameter
Re-ream the hole from higher up i.e. undercut the hole
For less drop-off, reverse the procedures.
For tangent sections a hold BHA is typically used. Prior to the bit run an estimate must
be made of the drop/walk rates required and stabilization selected accordingly. BHA
behaviour is highly field-dependent. In general, the best guide is the previous BHA but
this should be cross-referenced with offset records whenever possible.
Tripping in the hole with a stiffer assembly (i.e. locked assembly after a build assembly
and particularly any rotary assembly following a steerable mud motor run) requires
particular care to avoid becoming mechanically stuck or generating an unplanned
sidetrack. When approaching the bottom it is good practice to wash and ream the last one
or two stands even if reaming has not been required.
Once on bottom, drilling parameters should ideally be selected for optimum ROP. It is,
however, sometimes necessary to correct an undesirable directional tendency by varying
WOB and RPM. For general guidance:
WOB: increase to get more build with build and hold assemblies. Decrease to
encourage drop or maintain vertical hole with pendulum assemblies.
RPM: increase to reduce right-hand bit walk. Decrease and add WOB to
encourage walk. Individual/local experience may, however, prove otherwise.
5.6.4 ERD well requirements

The following drilling practices shall be applied when drilling the tangent section for high
angle/extended reach wells.
The choice of bit should take into account the degree of reactive torque produced. Some
aggressive PDC bits can make motor tool face control difficult resulting in not being able
to follow the planned trajectory. The use of specially designed tri-cone bits or steerable
PDC bits should be considered when a lot of steering is anticipated.
Hydraulic Requirements and Practice:

Efficient hole cleaning is essential to the success of extended reach drilling. See
the chapter on tripping and hole cleaning.
Drilling parameters should be monitored for increases in torque and drag.
Casing Wear Monitoring and Prevention:

Ditch magnets shall be installed in the flowline to monitor casing wear.
Drill pipe tooljoints should have smooth hardfacing only.
BHA Component Requirements:

All BHA components should undergo a full inspection prior to be used on extended
reach wells.

21
After completing the well, the complete BHA must be returned for further
inspection.
All components must have stress relief grooves (including non magnetic
components and jars).
Use Enhanced hydraulic (up/down) short jars in the BHA assembly.
Final Build and Horizontal Hole Section
Drill Pipe Requirements:

Drilling horizontal sections in EDR wells places high buckling and torque stresses on the
DP. Use of torque and drag analysis is essential to predict actual loads. Typically S-135 DP
is required in horizontal section and G-105 DP to surface to prevent buckling in the
drillpipe in the horizontal section.

22
Appendix 1 Drillstring failure prevention
Four basic causes of drill pipe failures are identified:

Tool joint and tube OD wear
Internal corrosion
Fatigue cracking in the slip and internal upset areas
Physical damage to the tool joint threads and shoulders, and to the tube.
Several studies confirmed that washouts occurred near the end of the shape of the
internal upset, closest to the tube body-the most highly stressed area of the drill pipe
during drilling and the most prone to fatigue failure.
Important:
Clean and visually inspect pipe & connections for damage when pipe is on the rack
Redope using PETROM approved thread compound
Re-install thread protector and leave them on when moving and picking-up pipe
When laying down:

Install thread protectors prior to placing pipe in the V-door
Wash traces & residual mud from internal and external surfaces with fresh water
Clean connections, re-dope and put protector back on when pip eis back on the
racks
Reduce drillpipe damage by:

Slip cuts cause more than 1/3 of all occurred washouts! Avoid setting the slips too
hard. This causes slip dies to make deep, sharp notches that form cracks in the
drill pipe and eventually result in a washout.
Crews can prevent drill pipe damage from overused and worn slips, dies, and
bushings with more frequent and thorough inspections and maintenance.
After a missed stab, crews must pick up the pipe to stab again, rather than kick
the pin into the box. If the pin gets hung up on the shoulder, it may damage the
shoulder faces or threads. This can cause a false torque reading, undertorqued
connections, connection failures, and possibly a fishing job.
Crews should always use two tongs to break out connections. The use of only one
tong increases the risk of damage because of unpredictable breakout torque. The
one-tong approach can bend pipe in the slips under extreme high breakout
situations, resulting in bent pipe, coating failure, and fatigue failure.
Rig-based policies for consistent redoping and the use of approved thread
lubricants ensure proper thread lubrication.
Close monitoring of torque gauge accuracy ensures proper torque application.
Tong maintenance and correct placement on the pipe facilitate proper makeup and
breakout operations.

23
Look at the condition of thread compound when breaking connections; dry or

muddy pipedope is caused by a loss of seal causing mud leakage. If not detected,
the connection will washout.
A large supply of thread protectors reduces the frequency and cost of tool joint
recutting and the subsequent loss of tool joint length.
Careful thread cleaning and fresh lubrication help prevent improper makeup
torque, thread/shoulder damage, and washouts.
Well-planned stand rotation during tripping avoids stressing the same part of the
string repeatedly and spreads out the fatigue of the string over time.
If drill pipe is to be laid down, regardless of how short the period, thread
protectors must be used.
Rotating breaks in stands while tripping prevents over torqueing the unbroken tool
joint connections, provides greater opportunity to inspect more connections during
trip inspections, and allows proper doping of connections.
Although no API specifications exist for lift sub manufacture, the lift subs must be
inspected with every drill collar inspection.
Drill pipe inspections on the rig between wells are more detailed than trip inspections.
Thus, they can reveal defects or wear otherwise overlooked. This early detection permits
lower cost repairs before extensive damage occurs. By keeping full records of these
inspections, the contractor also reduces the cost of later third-party inspections.
For the inspections between wells, the crews should at a minimum:

Evaluate the shoulder and thread condition of the pin end and cull joints requiring
refacing or recutting.
Check the straightness of the tube section and measure the outer diameter of the
middle of each joint (for example, 4.85-in. minimum for 5-in. OD, standard weight
drill pipe).
Inspect the internal plastic coating for wire line cuts, blisters, and extent of
corrosion, with special attention to coating failure at the internal upsets because
this indicates the potential for corrosion and fatigue failure.
Remove for recoating any joints with only 60-70% of the plastic coating remaining.
Examine tool joints for overall and eccentric wear and note any diameter variance
of more than 1/8 in.

24

6 Drill bits
Prepared by WEP
Author:
Version: Sep 2014
Verified:
2
6 Drill bits ........................................................................................................... 3

6.1 Bits classification and nomenclature .............................................................. 3
6.1.1 Roller cone bits ..................................................................................... 3
6.1.2 PDC and diamond bits ........................................................................... 3
6.2 Bit selection ............................................................................................... 5
6.2.1 General data ........................................................................................ 5
6.2.2 Bits to use for formations with altering soft and hard layers ....................... 7
6.2.3 Bit style for steerable motors (Rock bits vs. fixed cutter PDC bits) .............. 7
6.2.4 Bits for rotary steerable ......................................................................... 9
6.2.5 Bits for extended reach drilling ............................................................. 11
6.2.6 Drilling cement in casing ...................................................................... 11
6.3 Optimum bit hydraulics / nozzles ................................................................ 11
6.3.1 Extended and centre nozzles ................................................................ 15
6.4 Operating guidelines.................................................................................. 16
6.4.1 Pre-job checklist ................................................................................. 16
6.4.2 Running the bit ................................................................................... 18
6.4.3 Drilling-out cement plugs, float equipment and casing shoe ..................... 19
6.4.4 Reaming ............................................................................................ 20
6.4.5 Establishment of bottom hole pattern when start drilling with PDC ............ 21
6.4.6 Drill-off tests ...................................................................................... 22
6.4.7 Procedures for different applications ...................................................... 23
6.4.8 Bit related symptoms & remedies ......................................................... 24
6.5 Common problems .................................................................................... 29
6.6 How to reduce stick-slip and BHA vibrations ................................................. 31
6.6.1 Bit bouncean axial motion .................................................................. 32
6.6.2 Stick-slipa torsional motion ................................................................ 32
6.6.3 Bit (backward) whirla lateral motion .................................................... 33
6.6.4 BHA (backward) whirla lateral motion .................................................. 33
6.6.5 Lateral shocksa lateral motion ............................................................ 33
6.6.6 Vibration modal couplinginvolves all three motions ................................ 34
6.7 Making a connection .................................................................................. 34
6.8 When to pull the bit................................................................................... 35
6.9 Bi-Center PDC Bits .................................................................................... 38
6.9.1 Pre-run Checklist ................................................................................ 38
6.9.2 Drill-out recommendations ................................................................... 39
6.9.3 Reaming ............................................................................................ 40
6.9.4 Break-In Formation ............................................................................. 40
6.9.5 Drilling ahead ..................................................................................... 41
6.9.6 Bi-Center PDC Directional Tendencies .................................................... 41
6.10 The dullness grading system for used bits .................................................... 42
Appendix 1 Classification scheme roller-cone bits ................................................. 43
Appendix 2 Classification scheme PDC and diamond bits ....................................... 44
Appendix 3 PDC and diamond bits dull grading manual ......................................... 45
Appendix 4 Roller cone bits dull grading material.................................................. 56
Appendix 5 Dull condition evaluation................................................................... 61
Appendix 6 Drill-off Test Variations and Form....................................................... 73
Appendix 7 Pump-off Force Hydraulic Lift .......................................................... 77
Appendix 8 Useful Technical Data ....................................................................... 79

6 Drill bits | Version:Sep 2014
3
6 Drill bits
6.1 Bits classification and nomenclature

There are two classifications schemes, one for roller cone bits and one for fixed cutter
(PDC and diamond) bits. Both classification schemes make use of four characters. For
roller cone bits this consists of three numbers and a letter, whereas diamond bits use a
letter and three numbers (diamond and PDC bits may also use a\ letter as the third
character). The basis for the classification is however slightly different as explained below,
even though the end result is the same.
6.1.1 Roller cone bits

The system is based primarily on the formation characteristics with the first two
characters indicating the hardness of the formation for which the bit is designed, and also
indicating whether it has milled teeth or tungsten carbide inserts. The second character is
used to sub-divide the hardness classes defined by the first character.
The third and fourth characters indicate the general features of the bit itself, such as the
type of bearing, whether there is gauge protection or not and whether the bit has any
special features or whether it is intended for any special applications, such as air drilling.
The significances of these four characters are shown in attachment I.
6.1.2 PDC and diamond bits

The classification system of diamond bits is based much more on the construction and
geometry of the bit than on the explicit formation type. For this reason the manufacturers
sometimes quote not only the classification code for the diamond bit itself, but also the
code for the tri-cone bit which would be appropriate for the same formations.
The first character indicates the cutter type and the body material. The second character
indicates the profile of the cutting face of the bit. The third character indicates the design
of the bit with regards to the flow of drilling fluid across its face. The fourth and last
character indicates the size and density of the cutters.
Refer to attachment II for the classification scheme of PDC and diamond bits.

4
Figure: Example of bit numbering, source: Smith bits.

5
6.2 Bit selection

Minimum cost per metre is the main objective. Bit records and experience must be used
to estimate penetration rate and service life of each type in the formation which is
expected to encounter.
In addition to the selection of the correct bit the main factors which play a role in the bit
performance are the drilling parameters, drilling fluid properties and hydraulic factors.
6.2.1 General data

(Rules of thumb for bit selection)
Shale has better drilling response to RPM.
Limestone has better drilling response to bit weight.
Bits with roller bearings can be run at a higher RPM than bits with journal
bearings.
Bits with sealed bearings give longer life than bits with open bearings.
Milled tooth bits with journal bearings can be run at higher weights than milled
tooth bits with roller bearings.
Aggressive bits can make motor tool face control difficult resulting in not being
able to follow the planned trajectory.
Softer bits generally drill faster, in general are cheaper and must only be replaced
when strictly necessary.
It is good practise to keep more than one type ready to go.
Bits with high offset may wear more on gauge.
Bits with high offset may cause more hole deviation.
Cost-per-foot analysis can help you decide which bit to use.
Examination of dulls can also help you decide which bit to use.
Examination of offset well data will be a determining factor in bit selection.
When to use a PDC or Diamond Bit
When economics dictate.
Generally, the rate of penetration ultimately determines the economics of the bit
run.
When long intervals have to be drilled.
When rotating at high speeds. (turbine or PDM)
When high bottom hole temperatures are encountered. (approx 150C and above)
When drilling in deviated hole section requiring light bit weight.
When drilling significantly overbalanced.

6
Why to use a PDC or diamond bit

ECONOMICS: Equation provides lowest cost-per-meter
( + ) +
=

Where:
C = drilling cost / meter [RON / m]
R= rig operating cost [RON / hr]
T= trip time [hrs]
D= drilling time [hrs]
B= bit cost [RON]
F= footage drilled [m]
Additional benefits for using a PDC bit could be to stay in hole when conditions getting
worse. For example:
Avoid dangerous hole sections.
Avoid tripping in bad weather.
Reduce rig wear.
No moving parts.
Where to use PDC or Diamond products What formations?

PDC bits in:
Very weak, poorly consolidated, brittle, shallow sediments (e.g. Miocene sands,
silts, clays)
Low strength, poorly compacted, brittle, non-abrasive, relatively shallow
sediments, precipitates and evaporates (e.g. salt, anhydrite, marls, chalk)
Moderately strong, somewhat abrasive and ductile, indurated medium-depth
sediments, precipitates and evaporates (e.g. silty claystone, siliceous shales,
porous carbonates, anhydrite)
Natural / thermally stable diamond bits in:
Moderately strong, somewhat abrasive and ductile, indurated medium-depth
sediments, precipitates and evaporates. (e.g. siliceous shales, porous carbonates,
anhydrite, silty claystone)
Strong and abrasive indurated, very ductile deep sediments, precipitates and
evaporates (e.g. sandy shales, calcareous sandstones, dolomites, limestone)
Very strong and abrasive, indurated ductile and non-ductile sediments, precipitates
and evaporates (e.g. bunter sandstone, bromides, etc.)
Formations damaging for PDC and Diamond Bits
PDC bits:
Hard, cemented abrasive sandstone (e.g. sedimentary quartzite)
Hard dolomites (sedimentary or metamorphic)
Iron (e.g. pyrite metamorphic or igneous)
Chert (metamorphic or sedimentary)
Granite and basalt (igneous)
Natural / Thermally stable diamond bits:
Hard, cemented quartzitic sands that are highly fractured and abrasive.

7
6.2.2 Bits to use for formations with altering soft and hard layers
Local offset and experience would be the starting place for any recommendations. Where
these are limited or absent, it would be prudent to focus on the hardest formations that
will be accounted to limit bit damage. If the hard/ soft formation boundaries are known
with any certainty, it would be prudent to manage the drilling parameters when
approaching these intervals. Typically lowering both RPM and WOB where possible when
both entering and leaving harder formations - running into a different and significantly
softer formation with very high weights could result in damage to both the bit and BHA as
the bit takes a substantial bite of the softer formation. Typical wear mode in these
applications for PDC bits will be impact damaged resulting in chipped cutters, with the
utilization of managed depth of cut technologies, cutter damaged can be minimized as the
bit matrix affords the cutters a good deal of protection.
6.2.3 Bit style for steerable motors (Rock bits vs. fixed cutter PDC bits)
When drilling with steerable motor, power to the bit is generated by Torque (TQ) and
RPM. When sliding or steering constant flow rate will be applied this will generate a
certain RPM and TQ value.
In the majority of cases, Rollercone (RC) bits will be easier to steer than fixed cutter bits
due to the difference in cutting action. Crushing and scraping for RC bits rather than the
shearing action on a PDC bits, torque from a RC bit will most likely be less than that
generated by a PDC bit and more importantly, it is also likely to be more consistent which
will be a big aid in maintaining toolface when steering.
What type of PDC bits?

When choosing a PDC bit for use on a Motor, the bit should be dynamically stable, not too
aggressive in terms of backrake (aggressive bits will have poor toolface control and will
cause frequent motor stalls) and utilise features like a managed depth of cut to control
torque by limiting the maximum bite that each cutter can take of the formation, as
shown above. In terms of profile bits tend to have a medium to shallow cone (cone angle
somewhere between 15 and 25 degrees in most cases) and a short shoulder profile. In
many cases it will not be possible to ascertain the differences in layout, BR etc and thus
predicted performance from visual inspection or comparison. Bit hands will be able to

8
provide this and other additional information on the relative steerability of different
designs.
Fixed cutter PDC bits managed depth of cut (MDOC); the bit cant overbite in the
formation creating undesired torque fluctuations in soft and/or laminated formation.

9
6.2.4 Bits for rotary steerable

For Rollercone bits (RC) on a push the bits system requires strong and durable gage
configuration as the outer most part of the bit is forced to move laterally. On the point the
bits system the inner part of the Rollercone bit is showing most of the breakage/damage.

10
Example on dull gage breakage Push the bit RST after drilling chert and chalk
Dull on inner row breakage Point the bit RST after drilling chert and chalk

11
In most cases for fixed cutter PDC bits, the requirements for Rotary Steerable and Motor
drilling bits are actually quite similar: Directional response and vibration mitigation are
critical, so a stable cutting structure with moderate backrakes and although less critical
than on motor bits the utilisation of a managed depth of cut (MDOC). With MDOC
directional response is improved and adds effective impact protection the cutters on the
bit. Cone angle is medium to shallow and profile is short similar to that of the steerable
motor requirements as detailed above.
6.2.5 Bits for extended reach drilling

When Drilling ERD wells, ROP tends not to be the critical issue: Durability, stability and
directional performance would tend to be the key issues. Keep the bit in the hole, drilling
at a manageable rate for hole cleaning and minimising trips. These wells tend to be drilled
predominantly with Rotary steerable tools now, so the same considerations as detailed
above would also apply.
In terms of pack off, swab and surge risk when pulling out hole, bit junk slot is something
that should be considered but when looking at the application and formation to be drilled,
bit selection will be dictated by durability, stability and directional performance. We would
generally not recommend dropping blades purely because an ERD well is being drilled
rather than a conventional profile well.
Generally speaking a bit with a bigger junk slot would be preferred purely from the swab
surge risk but picking a bit solely because it has the biggest junk slots is false economy;
good ERD drilling practices will outweigh the singular benefit that such a bit may promise
to provide.
6.2.6 Drilling cement in casing

A dedicated cleanout bit for drilling long cement intervals is recommended, especially in
challenging applications where it is uncertain if the bit will reach TD or its proposed
interval length. A cleanout run will ensure the next bit goes into the hole with the least
chance of any damage and the best chance of achieving the section targets. Bit choice for
drilling cement will depend on a number of things, but if considering new bits, a mill-tooth
bit will usually offer the best compromise- offering a decent ROP potential without the
higher costs of a PDC.
6.3 Optimum bit hydraulics / nozzles

Bit hydraulics are very important in maximising performance and HSI (Hydraulic
Horsepower per square inch) is the most commonly used unit to measure Hydraulic
energy. Generally it is recommended on having an HSI of 2-4 for the majority of
applications. When HSI is too low, cuttings regrinding occurs which results in low ROP.
Hydraulic energy as supplied to the bit can be divided in three functions and dependant
on the application, lithology, rig, bit type and downhole conditions, the importance of in
terms of what is most important for bit performance does vary:
Cutting Structure Cleaning/Cooling (CSC)
Bottom Hole Cleaning (BHC)
Cuttings Evacuation (CE)

12
Figure: Hydraulic functions, Smith bits.
Generally, with HSI below 2, jet velocities will likely fall into an area where nozzle
plugging is much more common and Rollercone bits suffer from cuttings regrind (cutting
formation that has already been cut but not displaced from the hole bottom) as well as
the potential for more damage to the seal systems as cuttings get drawn towards the
bearing with cone rotation rather than efficiently evacuated up the hole away from the bit.
Good mud systems will decrease the likelihood of bits balling up in the majority of cases,
but paying attention to Hydraulics in all cases should benefit bit performance and further
minimise the tendency of any bit to ball up.
As shown on the above graph, dependant on the application, the hydraulic needs of a bit
drilling the softest formation could be quite different from a bit drilling through the
hardest of rocks and field information along with local knowledge can provide information
on recommended hydraulics for both these extremes and the areas in the middle.
Critical hydraulics functions

Cutting structure Bottom Hole Cleaning Cuttings Evacuation
Cleaning/Cooling
Prevent balling Prevents cutting redrill Prevents cuttings re-drill
Prolong cutting structure life Prolong cutting Improves ROP
through cooling and cleaning structure life
Maximize ROP Maximize ROP Extends seal life
Prevents balling
Reduces erosion
Optimizing bit hydraulics is recommended for all mud system to improve overall drilling
and bit performance.

13
Two approaches can be used either to optimise the bit hydraulic horsepower, which will
occur when Pb (bit pressure drop) is approximately equal to 2/3 Pt (total pressure
drop) or to optimise the jet impact force, which will occur when Pb is approximately
equal to Pt. Nozzles can then be chosen to achieve the required result.
Note that the relationships quoted above are approximate and are presented to give a
feeling for the order of magnitude of the values required. For a more accurate estimate of
the required Pb the properties of the drilling fluid need to be taken into account, in this
case the parameters C and N in the equation Ps= C*Q^N. The procedure below shows
how to determine these, and how to apply them to calculate the optimum nozzle sizes
corresponding to each approach.
Note also, however, that the optimisation of bit hydraulics is often compromised by other
hydraulic requirements such as hole cleaning and the pressure drop / flowrate restrictions
associated with certain pieces of downhole equipment.
Prior to pulling out of hole to change the bit, determine the following:
Symbols and units used in this section

Symbol Description Units
Pt Total pressure drop Bar
Pb Bit pressure drop bar
Ps System pressure drop bar
df Pressure gradient of drilling bar/10m
fluid
Q Flow rate m/hr
m/hr * 16.66 = l/min
l/min / 0.06 = m/hr
An Nozzle area mm
C Coefficient -
N Exponent of Q -
Jet Velocity m/s
1. Total Pressure Drop (Pt)

Observe the Pt for two or three different pump outputs (Q), close to the planned
flowrate during the drilling operations.
2. N & C Values
Find the bit pressure drop (Pb) for different values of Q.
15.7 * df * Q 2
Pb = in bar
An 2
Find the system pressure drop (Ps) for different values of Q.
Ps = Pt Pb [bar]

14
Ps1
Log
Ps 2 Ps1 Ps1
N= and C = N
= N
Q1 Q Q2
Log 1
Q2
Ps = C * Q N in bar
For these calculations it is recommended to use 1.82 for N.
3. Nozzle area (An) for optimum use of available power

a) Pt (max) should be known
b) Find system pressure drop (Ps)
Pt
To optimise Bit Hydraulic Horsepower: Ps = in bar
N +1
2 Pt
To optimise Jet Impact Force: Ps =
in bar
N +2
Ps 1 / N
Find pump output to give Ps: Qopt = ( ) in m3/hr
C
Find available bit pressure drop: Pb = Pt Ps in bar
df
So nozzle area is: An = 3.962 * Qopt in mm2
Pb
Nozzle size Nozzle Flow area of 1 Flow area of 2 Flow area of 3
number nozzle nozzles nozzles
inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm
7/32 5.5 7 0.0376 24.3 0.0752 48.5 0.1127 72.7
8/32 6.4 8 0.0491 31.7 0.0982 63.4 0.1473 95.0
9/32 7.1 9 0.0621 40.1 0.1242 80.1 0.1864 120.2
10/32 7.9 10 0.0767 49.5 0.1534 99.0 0.2301 148.4
11/32 8.7 11 0.0928 59.9 0.1856 119.7 0.2784 179.6
12/32 9.5 12 0.1104 71.2 0.2209 142.5 0.3313 213.7
13/32 10.2 13 0.1296 83.6 0.2592 167.2 0.3889 250.9
14/32 11.1 14 0.1503 97.0 0.3007 194.0 0.4510 291.0
15/32 11.9 15 0.1726 111.4 0.3451 222.6 0.5177 334.0
16/32 12.7 16 0.1963 126.6 0.3927 253.4 0.5890 380.0
18/32 14.3 18 0.2485 160.3 0.4970 320.6 0.7455 481.0
20/32 15.9 20 0.3068 197.9 0.6136 395.9 0.9204 593.8
22/32 17.5 22 0.3712 239.5 0.7424 479.0 1.1137 718.5
24/32 19.0 24 0.4418 285.0 0.8836 570.1 1.3254 855.2
28/32 22.3 28 0.6013 287.9 1.2026 575.9 1.8040 863.7
Table: Nozzle sizes and flow areas
Refer to attachment V for Reedhycalog nozzle installation procedures.
4. Jet velocity

15
As a rule of thumb (Smith bits), maintain a jet velocity of 60-85 m/sec.
6.3.1 Extended and centre nozzles

Extended nozzles (also referred to as mini jets, or mini-extended jets) on Rollercone bits
are recommended in the majority of applications. These nozzles are extremely robust and
offer a very easy way of increasing the impingement force (the Hydraulic energy
expended on the hole bottom).
Fluid Velocity (ft/sec)

0 60 120 180 240
Figure: Fluid Velocity Comparison
Figure: Impingement Pressure

16
It is not recommended to use extended nozzles during junk or cleanout runs, where larger
pieces of debris might be encountered and could damage a nozzle.
Centre jets are common on most Rollercone bits in excess of 9 7/8 typically they provide
flow to the nose area of the bit to limit the likelihood of balling in this area. In non balling
apps, a centre jet is less important and could either be blanked or given a smaller % of
the available flow by running a tighter nozzle.
Recommendations for centre jets are as follows:

Approximately 10-15% of the total flow should be programmed through the center jet
under normal conditions- more flow in balling applications
Too Much (>25%)- Cone shell and spearpoint erosion, Lost Inserts (nose & middle rows)
Too Little (<10%) Poor bit/cone cleaning, Risk of bit balling.
6.4 Operating guidelines

All guidelines are general in nature and are application and situational dependent.
6.4.1 Pre-job checklist

Before running / arriving at the rig site
Reach agreement regarding the performance objectives of the bit and the specific
operating parameters (flow rate, pump pressure, WOB, RPM, deviation control,
surveys, TFA, jetting configuration, etc.)
Ensure bit connection matches the BHA connection to be used
Ensure that all the necessary correct equipment is available. Verify proper bit
breaker, nozzles, nozzle wrenches, drill pipe screens, float, grasshoppers, etc., are
/ will be available.
Calculate hydraulics under different scenarios, different flow rates, and plugged
nozzles.
Inspect the previous bit and geolograph for any potential problems. Discuss with
customer, problems with tight spots, junk in the hole, reaming, corrosion, etc.
Make junk run or run a roller cone bit if necessary.
Review BHA local practice dictates stabilization, review gage specs on BHA, etc.
Ensure that the float/shoe and DV tools are PDC drillable, if a PDC bit is planned
for the drill-out BHA.
If a PDC bit is run in hole after a tri-cone bit run, it is recommended to perform a
junk sub run prior to run the PDC, to remove possible junk left on bottom (inserts,
gauge protectors, bearing balls and so on).
Bit Handling at the rig site

Bit cutting elements with diamond both fixed cutter and roller cone bits, are brittle
and susceptible to impact damage. Care should be taken when handling or
removing any bit containing diamond-cutting elements.
Do not drop the bit even if it is in the container.
Do not attempt to lift medium to large size bits. Matrix bodied fixed cutter bits are
considerably heavier than steel.

17
Bits placed on their pin are top heavy. Keep feet away from bit when attempting to
handle it.
Use a piece of wood or rubber under the bit face.
Bit Inspection
Inspect bit for integrity (cutting elements, pin connection and make-up shoulder).
Ensure there are no foreign objects or obstructions in the internal fluid
passageways.
Do not use a PDC gauge ring on a 3-cone bit or vice-versa. Gage the bit and verify
type of ring gauge used, as tolerances are dependent upon the bit type fixed
cutter or roller cone. See gage specifications in appendix. Ensure gage conforms to
customers casing program.
For roller cone bits, especially sealed bits, ensure that the cones do not rotate
freely (they should be difficult if not virtually impossible to rotate).
Check inserts on tungsten carbide insert bits for integrity.
Record bit size, type and serial number.
Nozzles Installation
Verify TFA on bits with fixed TFA.
Ensure O-rings are seated properly in the nozzle bore, feel them for any defects
Check for proper nozzles, these will typically have part numbers associated with
the bit size ranges. For roller cone bits place the nozzle in the bore to ensure the
right size. For any threaded nozzles inspect the threads on the nozzles, and screw
the nozzle into the bit to ensure no problems.
If different size nozzles are to be used ensure that the correct sized nozzles are in
the correct place, e.g. 12 PDC with 3x13s and 3x12s, put 3x13 in the center.
Check for proper nozzle installation tools, including nails, hammer, snap rings,
snap ring pliers and Loctite for threaded nozzles if recommended (blue coded
Loctite is typically used)
Make certain nozzle gauges are on location and gauge all nozzles.
Make certain that the bit is properly fitted with the correct size of nozzles (TFA).
Use nozzle wrench for final tightening. Excessive force is not necessary and can
damage the carbide nozzle.
If nozzle sizes below 9/32 are to be used, recommend the use of drill pipe screens
and / or a float to prevent reverse circulation plugging. Use grasshoppers if
necessary.
Make-up the bit

Ensure that the appropriate bit breaker is with the bit. Inspect to insure good
condition and that it fits properly.
Ensure that the rotary is covered to prevent anything from falling into the hole.
Remove the bit from the box and place face down on a piece of wood or rubber.
Engage the bit breaker with the bit and move them onto the rotary table.
A float above the bit should be installed, especially on extended nozzle roller cone
bits, in areas that tend to plug.

18
Engage the hanging box connection to the doped threads of the bit pin.
Proper make-up for small diameter bits is to make-up by hand for several turns,
then place in the bit breaker and make-up to the recommended torque.
Uncover the rotary and locate the bit and breaker onto the breaker holder.
Make-up, applying the recommended torque.
Make-up torque specifications are from API spec RP7G.
6.4.2 Running the bit

Tripping in the hole
Identify potential problem areas before tripping. Trip slowly through BOP, doglegs,
tight spots, ledges, casing shoes, cementing equipment, etc. Wash and or ream as
necessary. Severe problems may require a special cleanup run.
Roller cone bit legs will yield slightly and the bit can be rotated slightly in order to
pass through some tight spots. Fixed cutter bits do not yield. Bits with PDC cutting
elements are susceptible to impact damage. PDC bits are more susceptible to
damage during tripping in the hole than roller cone bits.
Certain types of fixed cutter bits with low junk slot area can create higher surge
and swab pressures than roller cone bits due to more restrictive annular space.
Local knowledge/practice will typically dictate wash down and reaming procedures.
Minimum recommendation is to wash down at least the last joint to bottom at
reaming speed with full circulation. Preference is to ream the last stand / 90 feet at
reaming speed with full circulation.
Run screens if necessary. Place screens below kelly- dont forget to move them on
each connection!
Tagging bottom
Approach the hole bottom cautiously, monitoring WOB and torque. An increase in
WOB or torque will indicate either contact with the hole bottom or fill. Fixed cutter
bits will typically show an increase in torque first. Bit is on bottom when torque
increases with the WOB. Difference between measured depth and contact point
should be depth of fill.
If fill is present, pick up above the fill and rotate to bottom with full circulation until
bottom hole contact is assured. Regardless if fill is present, the pipe should always
be reciprocated off-bottom.
On rotary assemblies, use a maximum of 500 pounds per inch of bit diameter, 40
to 60 RPM.
On motor assemblies, use a maximum of 500 pounds per inch of bit diameter and
the minimum allowable RPM.
Do not use high WOB when in fill. This could cause the bit to ball.
Circulate and rotate off-bottom (as close as possible preferably less than 6, no
more than 1 foot) enough (5 to 15 minutes, application dependent, recommend 15
min. as minimum) to ensure the hole bottom is clear of fill or junk.

19
6.4.3 Drilling-out cement plugs, float equipment and casing shoe

When using fixed cutter bits to drill out, ensure that all cementing equipment
(plugs, float collars and shoes) is PDC drillable (aluminium, rubber, nylon, plastic
or cement).
Recommend is the use of non-rotating plugs. Alternatively, it is preferable when
cementing to pump some cement on top of the plug to help prevent it from
rotating during drill out.
Using the maximum allowable flow rate to assist cleaning is preferred, but may not
be possible with motor assemblies.
Procedure
Frequently raising and lowering the bit while continuing circulation and rotation will
help keep the bit clear of debris. When ROP decreases, flush after every 1 to 2 in.
drilled while reciprocating 1 to 2 m will ensure debris is removed and new material
is being drilled. Should the penetration rate decrease suddenly, repeat this step
until it resumes.
Do not spud. Spudding (impacting on the hole-bottom) can damage cutting
structure elements on both fixed cutter and roller cone bits. It can also damage
the roller cone bearing / seal system.
Monitor pump pressure to ensure nozzles do not become plugged.
Change RPM if bouncing or erratic torque is encountered.
Fixed Cutter Bits

On rotary, use the maximum flow rate with less than 3 mT WOB and 60-100 RPM.
On motor assemblies, drill with less than 3 mT WOB and the minimum allowable
rotary RPM. Local practice will dictate flowrate as a compromise is needed between
providing adequate cleaning and minimum RPM.
Maintain low and consistent torque.
Roller Cone Bits

On rotary, drill with 1 to 1.5 mT per inch of bit diameter and 40-60 RPM.
On motor assemblies, drill with 1 to 1.5 mT per inch of bit diameter and the
minimum allowable rotary RPM. Local practice will dictate flow rate as a
compromise is needed between providing adequate cleaning and minimum RPM.
Bouncing or erratic torque may indicate locked cones. Temporarily increase the
weight to ensure cone rotation, then reciprocate the bit off-bottom while
continuing circulation and rotation to help clean the bit. Resume with original
parameters when the bouncing or erratic torque has been eliminated.
Maintain minimum WOB / torque to prevent wiper plugs from rotating. Erratic
torque may indicate a rotating plug.
Rotating Plugs
Should a plug begin to rotate, set down on plug with no RPM
Increase WOB until 1 to 1.5 mT per inch of bit diameter is reached or alternatively
an increase of 300 psi over the normal standpipe occurs.

20
Then begin rotation, ending with 40 to 60 RPM.

Repeat until penetration is achieved and wiper plug is drilled.
Alternative procedure (last resort)

Rotate bit at 20-40 rpm
Use 0.5 mT / inch of bit diameter
Alternate using no flow rate for 1 minute to full flow for 30 seconds.
6.4.4 Reaming
Ream using very light WOB and low RPM.
Use the maximum allowable flow rate.
Use lower RPM when reaming harder or more abrasive formations.
Consider reducing bit size to avoid reaming cored/undergauge sections on the last
bit run, e.g. 8 3/8 below 8 or 5 7/8 below 6.
Roller Cone Bit:

Local knowledge dictates reaming practices.
On rotary assemblies, use a maximum of 500 pounds per inch of bit diameter, 40
to 60 RPM.
the minimum allowable RPM but with maximum flow rate. Local practice will
dictate flow rate as a compromise is needed between providing adequate cleaning
and minimum RPM.
In an undergauge hole, the legs on a gage bit flex to a pinched condition.
Reaming an undergauge hole slowly ensures that the bit has opportunity to ream
to gage.
Monitor torque when reaming long abrasive sections. Torque will generally only
increase should gage rounding / breakage be severe enough that bit legs or BHA
components are contacting / cutting gage.
A hole in a slightly undergauge condition requires a lesser amount of WOB than a
hole in a greater undergage condition. For example, a hole 1/16 undergage
requires less WOB in order not to damage the bit than a hole undergauge.
Fixed Cutter Bit:

On rotary assemblies, use 1000 5000 pounds, 40 to 60 RPM.
On motor assemblies, use 1000 5000 pounds, minimum rotary 20 to 30 RPM,
maximum flow. Local practice will dictate flow rate as a compromise is needed
between providing adequate cleaning and minimum RPM.
Monitor torque when reaming long abrasive sections. Torque will generally only
increase should gage wear / breakage be severe enough that the gage pads or
BHA components are contacting / cutting gage.

21
6.4.5 Establishment of bottom hole pattern when start drilling with PDC
Bottom hole pattern break-in has to be applied when a new bit is run to achieve uniform
cutting structure loading. Proper break-in is critical to durability and ROP.
After drilling out the casing shoe, establish the bottom hole pattern. There may be
some BHA dictated WOB and RPM guidelines until the BHA is below the casing
shoe. Optimization of WOB and RPM may have to wait until the BHA or some
portion of the BHA has cleared the casing shoe.
Use extra care establishing a new bottom hole pattern when following a bit with a
substantially different bottom hole profile, e.g., a PDC bit following a roller cone bit
or vice-versa.
Roller cone bits typically drill a larger size hole than a fixed cutter bit. Be sure to
properly establish the bottom-hole pattern when following a roller cone bit in order
to insure stability.
Establishment of bottom-hole pattern can be dependent upon factors such as bit
design, BHA, etc.
Roller Cone Bits:

Break-in is done with light WOB and slow RPM and a new bottom hole pattern is
normally achieved within 3 to 6 inches (assuming no tracking or off-center
rotation).
On rotary, use a maximum of 500 pounds per inch of bit diameter with 40 to 60
RPM.
the minimum allowable RPM keep rotary rpm to a minimum 20 30 rpm.
Minimum allowable motor RPM can be formation dependent.
Soft, balling formations should be entered with full flow rate. At that point, WOB
and RPM can be gradually increased to typically operating levels or to initial drill-
off test levels. Increase WOB first then RPM.
Fixed Cutter Bits:

Although a new bottom hole pattern is created in less than a bit diameter, it is
preferred to drill 3 to 5 feet before increasing WOB and RPM.
For starting parameters, use maximum flow rate, less than 6000 lbs. WOB and 60-
100 RPM.
Maintain low and consistent torque changing operating parameters as needed. See
Bit related symptoms & remedies for optimization of torque.
Take extreme care following a coring operation or bits of different types or profiles.
A different existing profile can overload specific cutting elements potentially
causing a premature failure.

22
6.4.6 Drill-off tests

Drill-off tests are methods for determining the optimum combination of WOB and RPM
that yield the highest ROP (within other constraints).
Drill-off tests should be run after:
Formation change.
ROP change.
Torque change.
Personnel change.
Changes in other operational parameters (hydraulics, mud properties, etc.).
The following guidelines apply:

Optimization of WOB and RPM may have to wait until the BHA or some portion of
the BHA has cleared the casing shoe and or rat hole. Evaluate other factors to
ensure optimization (or when) can take place.
Optimum WOB and RPM determined are for a particular application and can only
be continuously used in a homogeneous formation. Therefore in intervals of
various formations, ROP optimization tests will not produce the optimum weight
and rotary combination. Drill off tests will be necessary anytime the formation
changes. Typically a range of WOB and RPM combinations is derived for the
interval, e.g., interbedded formations.
Starting RPM values this typically comes from offset information or the lower
end of operating parameters listed in the product literature.
Maximum practical WOB this typically comes from the upper end of the
operating parameters listed in the product literature, a realistic portion of the collar
weight available or the maximum allowed by other application criteria such as
weight below the jars, etc. When drilling, the maximum practical WOB is
application dependent, that is, determined by deviation concerns, vibration control,
etc.
On motor assemblies, monitor pump pressure to detect stalling at maximum WOB.
Typical weight increments to use in the drill-off tests 2000 pounds for harder /
slower ROP formations and 5000 pounds for softer / faster ROP formations.
If the greatest ROP occurs at several different weights or rotary speeds, always
use the lowest WOB-RPM rotary combination to optimize life providing that it does
not produce detrimental vibration effects.
Optimum WOB and RPM is when additional WOB or RPM does not increase ROP in
a linear fashion or when the torque limit is reached.
Note: Anytime WOB and RPM are changed, time is needed to allow a steady state
condition to occur in order to know the true effects. The fluctuations and minimal time
used in some drill-off tests may not allow the optimum WOB or RPM to be realized.
There are many variations of drill-off tests. All are presented in the attachment.
If the expected penetration rate is not achieved:

Drilling fluid density may be too high with respect to formation pressure.
Drilling fluid solids may need to be controlled.

23
Pump pressure or pump volume may be too low.

Bit whirl / vibration may occur which hinders ROP.
The bit used may be too hard for the formation.
Formation hardness may have increased.
RPM and weight may not be the best for bit type and formation. Perform a new
drill off test.
6.4.7 Procedures for different applications

Procedure to drill hard layers
Harder formations will require more energy to drill. The exact parameters will vary
substantially with bit type and formation for example a heavy set Rollercone will be the
opposite from an impregnated diamond bit run on a turbine wheras both can be used.
In most cases for RC and PDC bits, WOB will offer significant performance improvement in
the harder layers; whereas high RPM can be especially detrimental if formations are both
hard and abrasive. Once the complete bit is into the harder layer, weight should be
incremented up slowly with due consideration paid to the maximum weight specified for
the particular model of bit. RPM can also be varied in order to provide the smoothest
performance. NOTE that if additional weight does not improve ROP then the weight should
be reduced accordingly. In case of RC bits where bit life is in direct relationship with total
energy, loading the bit will shorten the drilling hours on RC bits. In addition running the
bit with high loads on the teeth, inserts or cutters if it yields no gain in performance also
increase the chance of breakage to the cutting elements. It is highly recommended to do
a drill off test when:
Formation change
ROP change
Torque change
Changes in other operational parameters (hydraulics, mud properties, etc.)
Drilling sidetrack in hard formation

When drilling hard rock, bit optimization or bit choice will be of critical importance. Bit
choice will be based on the requirements of the directional driller and the specific tools
that will be utilized will take precedence. Use a bit which is suited for the formation to be
drilled. Rollercone bits tend to be forgiving and offer a lower and more consistent torque
response than a PDC. When utilising PDC bits gauge length is an important consideration
(shorter allows more deflection) though as previously mentioned, this must be balanced
with the needs of the directional tools utilised and the rest of the section to be drilled
unless a dedicated sidetracking run is being performed. In many cases, a dedicated side
tracking run with a suitable Rollercone bit as the first choice or a specific side tracking bit
with a very short profile and gauge may be an effective solution, however in more and
more applications sidetracks can be successfully completed with an assembly that has the
ability to successfully drill ahead for 100s of meters afterwards.

24
Avoiding sidetrack risk whilst RIH check trip BHA

Whilst it may be an effective method of reducing the tendency of a bit to sidetrack, it is
not recommended to heat/ torch a cone to remove gage or heel row as heat will cause
severe damage to the internal components of Rollercone bits. Removing the gauge teeth
on a bit will change the loading on bits cutting action and bearing system; in combination
with the heat threat this increases the risk of losing parts downhole. A bullnose is an
effective solution and successful runs have also been reported where bits with no cones
(cones removed but legs and bearing structure retained) have been used to good effect.
6.4.8 Bit related symptoms & remedies

Formation characteristics Drilling Shale:
More responsive to RPM than WOB.
Use the upper RPM end from the recommended operating parameters from the
product literature.
Monitor and modify RPM when drilling through interbedded sections to prevent
cutting structure breakage in sands, carbonates, etc.
An over-pressured shale will typically increase the ROP (pressure dependent). ROP
3 to 4 times normal have been noted.
Maximize hydraulics through shale sections if possible.
Monitor torque to detect bit balling.
Drilling Sand:
More responsive to WOB than RPM.
Porosity in sand is a major factor in ROP. Everything else being equal, a higher
porosity sand will yield a higher ROP. An over-pressured sand can also increase the
ROP.
Depleted sands are difficult to drill due to the high differential pressure across the
face of the rock. Expect the bit to drill slowly in this situation. Also, the bit may
drill off center, which will produce an even slower ROP. Consider changing mud
properties to reduce the chip hole down pressure (mud weight, spurt loss).
Maintain minimum RPM to minimize gage wear. In known extremely abrasive
formations, monitor torque to ensure a gage hole.
Evaluate cuttings and other downhole tools to estimate degree of abrasiveness and
adjust RPM if necessary.
Drilling Carbonates:
More responsive to WOB than RPM.
Monitor for bit bouncing.
Chert nodules, often encountered in limestone and dolomite formations, can move
or roll underneath the cutting structure similar to broken formations. This can
overload cutting structure elements leading to chippage and or breakage. Ensure
excessive WOB or RPM is not used.

25
Drilling Quartz:
Use minimum RPM to reduce gage damage, but with adequate WOB to effectively
drill high compressive strength rock.
Monitor bit for torque indicating a potential undergauge condition, which dictates
pulling the bit.
Drilling Pyrite:
Pyrite is extremely abrasive and hard. Use minimum RPM to reduce gage damage,
but with adequate WOB to effectively drill high compressive strength rock.
Pyrite can move or roll underneath the cutting structure similar to broken
formations. This can overload cutting structure elements leading to chippage and
or breakage. Ensure excessive WOB or RPM is not used.
Monitor for bit bouncing.
Monitor bit for torque indicating a potential undergauge condition, which dictates
pulling the bit.
Symptoms:
The surface measurable symptoms indicating potential bit related problems are:
Decreased ROP.
Increased, Decreased or Erratic Torque (pump pressure on motor applications).
Reduced Directional Characteristics.
Decreased or Increased Pump Pressure
Please note that there are other application factors that can create the same surface
measurable symptoms.
Any deviation from accepted norms should be investigated. With no changes in current
operating parameters, the potential bit related causes of the above symptoms are:
Bit Balling.
Bit Bouncing (see also axial vibration).
Off-Center Rotation / Whirl (see also lateral vibration).
Tracking.
Cutting Structure Damage and / or Wear.
Bearing / Seal Failure.
Formation Change.
Bit Washout / Lost Nozzle / Plugged Nozzles.
Inadequate Hole Cleaning / Annulus Packing Off.
Junk.
Note that all of the symptom changes will vary in magnitude and may not be measurable
or identifiable on the surface due to many factors.
Roller cone bit symptoms are more subtle than fixed cutter bits due to the lesser amount
of torque generated per WOB.
Ensure that symptoms are indicative of problems and not just an expectation within the
run.

26

27

28

29
6.5 Common problems

COMMON PROBLEM CAUSE PREFFERED ACTION
PROBLEM
Difficulty going Previous bit undergauge Ream with roller cone bit
to bottom New bottom hole assembly When reaming to bottom, pick up
and ream section again.
If difficulty remains, check
stabilizers.
Collapsing casing Roll casing with smaller bit
Casing ID too small Use bi-centre bit or reduce bit size
Bit oversized Gauge bit with API gauge; if not in
tolerance, replace bit
Stabilizer oversized Replace with correct stabilizer
Low standpipe TFA too large Increase flow rate and correct on
pressure next bit.
Flow rate too low Increase flow rate / strokes
Change liners
Washout in drill string Check bit pressure drop, trip to
check pipe and drill collars.
(Do not pump a slug)
Pump failure Check and repair pumps
Surface leak Check for surface leaks and repair.
High standpipe TFA too small Reduce flow rate.
pressure Change TFA on next bit run.
Excessive flow rate Reduce flow rate
Bit partially plugged Check off bottom standpipe
pressure. Pull bit off bottom,
circulate full volume for 10 minutes
while rotating.
Check off bottom pressure again.
Formation change Pick up, circulate, resume drilling
at higher RPM,
Reset drill of test.
Ring out On- and off-bottom pressure test,
pull bit.
Downhole motor stalled Pull of bottom. Refer to
manufacturers hand book
Fluctuating Drilling through inter- If ROP acceptable, continue drilling.
standpipe bedded formation
pressure Formation breaking up If ROP acceptable, continue.
beneath bit Check equipment.
Try combination of lighter WOB and
higher RPM.
Check overpull.
Stabilizers hanging up Check stabilizers on next trip
Pump failure Check and repair pumps
Bit wont drill Bottom not reached Check tally

30
COMMON PROBLEM CAUSE PREFFERED ACTION

PROBLEM
Stabilizers hanging up or Check torque, overpull
too large
Formation too plastic Check pressure- increase flow rate,
decrease / increase bit weight, RPM
Establishing bottom hole Can take up to an hour
pattern
Core stump left Attempt to carefully drill ahead
with low bit weight.
Bit balled Reduce WOB and increase flowrate.
Bounce bit on bottom. Pump
detergent or brine pill or nut-plug.
Slow rate of Not enough WOB. Increase WOB. Increase/decrease
penetration (hydraulic lift) RPM
Reset drill off test
RPM too low / high Reset weight. Reset drill off test.
Plastic formation Accept ROP
Change in formation Consider pulling out of hole for PDC
bit.
Overbalanced drill fluid
Diamonds flattened off Compare beginning and present
pressure drops- new bit may be
required.
Cutters flattened Increase weight.
Pull bit
Pressure drop too low Increase flowrate new bit may be
required.
Wrong bit selection Pull bit
Excessive Excessive WOB Reduce WOB and RPM
torque Slow RPM Increase RPM
Decrease WOB
Stabilizers too large Check BHA, stabilizers should be
1/32 to 1/16 under hole size.
Hole packing off around drill Increase flow rate and work string.
collars
Bit undergauge Pull bit
Bit bouncing Slip-Stick action Change rotary weight combination
Broken formation Reduce rotary speed and WOB
Pump off force Increase WOB, decrease flowrate

31
6.6 How to reduce stick-slip and BHA vibrations

Drill string vibration has been the subject of many studies and can be classified into 3
vibration modes:
1. Lateral vibration is a lateral displacement of the drill-string in a direction

perpendicular to the drill string axis
2. Axial vibration is a vertical movement of the drill string in the same direction as
the bit axis
3. Torsional vibration is a winding up and release of the drill string
The answer on how to reduce one of the above vibration modes might be as simple as to
have attentive rig personnel who are willing to alter parameters in order to mitigate any
vibrations.
Various guides are available on how to manage vibration, however recent practical
experience and modelling with software programs (for example Smith IDEAS) has often
shown that the reverse of the established methodology to be successful. For example:
minimising stick slip - it is commonly suggested that lowering WOB and increasing RPM

32
may help, however in many cases if it is the bit that is generating this form of vibration
then increasing the weight may actually be the best course of action as this will help the
bit shear the formation more effectively and consistently.
Figure: Stability Window for Operating Parameters
Some different modes of vibration and the commonly adopted practices for mitigation:
6.6.1 Bit bouncean axial motion

Description: Large WOB fluctuations causing the bit to repeatedly lift-off and impact the
formation.
Typical Environment: Vertical wells, roller cone bits in hard rock.
Consequences: The impact loading can damage the drill bit, drillstring or hoisting
equipment.
Recommended Real-Time Actions: Decrease WOB and/or decrease RPM. If vibration
persists, stop the rotating then restart drilling under a lower WOB and/or lower RPM.
6.6.2 Stick-slipa torsional motion

Description: Non-uniform bit rotation which in extreme cases stops the bit stops rotating
momentarily at regular intervals causing the string to periodically torque up and then spin
free. This mechanism can set up the primary torsional vibrations in the string.
Typical Environment: high angle and deep (3,000 feet and over) wells or aggressive
PDC bits.
Consequences: Surface torque fluctuation > 15% of average. Stick-slip can cause PDC
bit damage, lower ROP, connection over-torque, back-off and drillstring twist-offs.

33
Recommended Real-Time Actions: Increase RPM and/or decrease WOB. If stick-slip

persists, stop the rotary and restart drilling under a higher RPM and/or lower WOB.
Recent work shows the opposite action of increasing WOB can also be beneficial in making
the bit shear the formation more consistently and efficiently
Other Solutions (Post Run): Consider using less aggressive PDC bit. Reduce stabilizer
rotational drag (change
blade design or number of blades, non-rotating stabilizer or roller reamer). Smooth well
profile.
6.6.3 Bit (backward) whirla lateral motion

Description: Eccentric rotation of the bit about a point other than its geometric centre
caused by bit/wellbore gearing (analogous to a planetary gear). The mechanism induces
high frequency lateral vibration of the bit and drillstring. Bit whirl is very difficult to be
detected on the surface.
Typical Environment: Aggressive side-cutting bit (normally PDC bit) in hard rock,
vertical wells.
Consequences: Bit cutter impact damage, overgauge hole, BHA connection failures and
MWD component failures.
Recommended Real-Time Actions: Reduce RPM. If vibration persists, stop the rotary
then restart drilling under a lower RPM.
Other Solutions (Post Run): Consider changing the bit (to dynamically stable PDC bit
or a roller cone bit), using stabilized BHA with full gauge near-bit stabilizer.
6.6.4 BHA (backward) whirla lateral motion

Description: Similar to bit whirl, the BHA gears around the borehole and results in
severe lateral shocks between the BHA and the wellbore. BHA whirl has been proven as
the major cause of many drillstring and MWD component failures. BHA whirl can occur
while rotating/reaming off-bottom and is also very difficult to be detected on the surface.
Typical Environment: Vertical or near vertical wells, pendulum or unstabilized BHA.
Consequences: MWD component failures (motor, MWD tool, etc.), localized tool joint
and/or stabilizer wear, washouts or twist-offs due to connection fatigue cracks, increased
average torque.
Recommended Real-Time Actions: Reduce RPM. If vibration persists, stop rotating,
then restart drilling with a lower RPM.
Other Solutions (Post Run): Use largest practical drill collar size and/or packed hole
assembly with full gauge stabilizers, Reduce stabilizer drag (blade design, non-rotating).
In very hard and abrasive formations, consider using a downhole mud motor.
6.6.5 Lateral shocksa lateral motion

Description: The BHA moves sideways or sometimes whirls forward and backwards
randomly (chaos). Unlike backward whirl, this non-steady-state motion often results in
MWD and downhole tool connection failures. Lateral shocks of the BHA can be induced
from either bit whirl or from rotating an unbalanced drillstring. Similar to whirl, lateral
shocks are very difficult to detect at the surface.
Typical Environment: Hard rock and unbalanced or long unstabilized drillstring.
Consequences: MWD component failures (motor, MWD tool, etc.) localized tool joint
and/or stabilizer wear, washouts or twist-offs due to connection fatigue cracks, increased
average torque.

34
Recommended Real-Time Actions: Reduce RPM to reduce the drillstring energy. If

vibration persists, stop rotating, and then restart drilling with a lower RPM.
Other Solutions (Post Run): Use largest practical drill collar size and/or a packed hole
assembly with full gauge stabilizers. Reduce eccentricity of the drillstring. In very hard
formations, avoid using an aggressive PDC bit.
6.6.6 Vibration modal couplinginvolves all three motions

Description: A coupling motion among axial, torsional, and lateral vibrations. It creates
axial and torque oscillations and high lateral shocks of the BHA. A very chaotic motion
Typical Environment: Vertical or near vertical wells, pendulum or unstabilized BHA and
hard rock.
Consequences: MWD component failures, bit cutter impact damage, collar and stabilizer
wear, wash-outs and twist-offs due to connection fatigue cracks.
Recommended Real-Time Actions: Stop rotating and pick-up off bottom; resume
drilling with modified WOB and RPM. Try a lower RPM first.
Other Solutions (Post Run): Consider changing bit style and/or modifying BHA (packed
hole assembly). Reduce stabilizer drag (blade design, non-rotating). Consider using the
downhole mud motor.
6.7 Making a connection

Consistently following the procedure below will help prevent a whirling bottom-hole
pattern from occurring.
Procedure
Reduce RPM approximately 50%. Maintain a minimum rotary of 60 to 80 RPM.
Drill off 50% of WOB.
Stop rotary and lift off bottom.
Make connection.
Start rotary at 60 to 80 RPM.
Circulate approximately 1minute off-bottom before making connection or after
connection is made.
Slowly set bit back on bottom.
Add weight slowly to attain previous weight on bit.
Increase rotary speed to previous RPM.

35
6.8 When to pull the bit

When the bit ceases to be economical through cost/foot calculations

=
( + )

When very high on-bottom torque with little WOB and a decrease in ROP occurs
(bit undergauge, abrasive formation)
When erratic torque occurs (bearing wear)
Dramatic decrease in ROP and on-bottom torque.
Note: Refer to bit manufactures recommendations on bit hours or bit revolutions and
compare with actual.
Observe changes in stand pipe pressure:

When increasing, possible cutter structure failure (ring out)
When decreasing, possible nozzle lost / washout.
Signs to look for to decide if a trip is required
Careful analysis of all drilling parameters is always recommended. Generally a flat lining/
gradual reduction of torque with an accompanying reduction in ROP will indicate a worn
bit, though the effects formation changes and stringers can often mask or confuse this.
Torque spikes and further reductions in ROP, usually also associated with increased
parameters are indications perhaps of bearing failures and cones locking. It is advised to
use spread sheets to track bit life accurately throughout the run to avoid any potential of
failed bearings and the associated dangers.
The annotated example following shows a real life example when 3 cones were lost from a
bit and despite many warning signs, no remedial actions were taken.

36

37
Advise on maximum bit revs before POOH
A common question asked is how long can I run this bit? Field run data should support bit
reliability; if not available, proceed as follows.
To go beyond a simple hours based answer we can use a combination of hours, WOB and
RPM to produce a more accurate measure of bearing life used. These measures can be
defined:
Total Energy considers WOB and RPM as well as hours showing how much work the bit
has done over the course of the run. This gives a far more accurate idea of bearing life
expended than hours on bottom does because it considers WOB and RPM, however
variations in application, bits formations and drive types do mean that usually some form
of local calibration is necessary to give really accurate numbers using total energy.
( )
=

Work Rate is best utilised as a real time calculation- this is a measure of the amount of
energy being expended by the bit at a particular WOB and RPM (Work rate shows how
hard the bit is run). Increasing WOB or RPM will increase Work Rate, decrease WOB or
RPM will decrease Work Rate. Work rate will affect the Rollercone bit life as it is an
indicator on how hard bit is run, the higher the WR to faster Total Energy consumption
will be. If bits are run above certain WR thresholds, bit life will usually be severely limited.
( )
=

RPM must be actual, WOB to be measured in Klbs.
Krevs (total bit revs) is perhaps the most frequently used method of evaluating bit life. It
is often considered less accurate than Total Energy as it does not consider what weight is
on the bit. However in highly deviated wells where surface weight cannot always be fully
transmitted to the bit Krevs is often used as Total Energy figures cannot be trusted.
= ( 0.06)
When calculating TE during an actual bit run one must consider an average WOB during
the life of the run. TE values must be carefully considered when in high angle and
horizontal applications when not all WOB (as recorded at surface) is fully transmitted to
the bit.

38
6.9 Bi-Center PDC Bits

Drilling with a Bi-Center drill bit is similar to that of a conventional PDC drill bit, but
certain steps must be undertaken to properly prepare and operate the Bi-Center drill bit.
First and foremost is preplanning of the well with all concerned parties. Depending on the
application, this can involve numerous service company personnel with the Operator.
Items of importance are:
Hydraulic Properties
Lithology
Length/depth of Interval
Directional objectives
Drilling Fluids
Stabilization/BHA
Casing design/objectives
Drilling modes rotary or positive displacement motor (PDM)
An understanding of how the Bi-Center operates and enlarges the wellbore
All of these items must be discussed and agreed upon before the application of a Bi-
Center drill bit downhole.
6.9.1 Pre-run Checklist

Hydraulic calculations must be performed to optimize the Bi-Center performance.
For oil-based and synthetic mud, typical flow should range from 30-40% in the
pilot with 60-70% in the reamer. In water-based mud it is sometimes necessary to
increase the percentage of flow to the pilot in order to prevent balling. In WBM,
typical flow should range from 40-55% in the pilot and 45-60% in the reamer.
Generally when drilling with bi-center bits in soft formations, hydraulics should be
optimized for maximum flow rate, not HSI. A high ROP environment generates a
high volume of cuttings. In this situation, hole cleaning should take top priority.
Also, a higher HSI has the potential to wash out the pilot hole causing the reamer
to drill an undersized hole. Dual Diameter bits run with less than 1 HSI have
performed very well in soft formations.
Bottom hole assembly must be agreed upon with well objectives.
This is especially important when drilling with a PDM. Confirm that largest OD tool
+/- 30ft above bi-center bit is less than the maximum tool size.
On casing drill outs followed with a vertical section application pass through size
stabilizers are recommended at 60ft and 90ft. This BHA provides flex above the bit
reducing damage in the drill-out stage.
On vertical non drill out applications pass through stabilizers are recommended at
30ft, 60ft and 90ft above the bit. This provides maximum BHA stiffness.
Confirm that the stabilizer ODs have been checked with a GO Ring Gage.
Previous bits must be inspected for gage wear, broken teeth, or junk damage.
If any previous bit is under gage, then a reaming trip must be done to insure a full
gage hole. Reaming with a Bi-Center bit is not advisable, due to the design
characteristics of the Bi-Center drill bit.

39
6.9.2 Drill-out recommendations

Drill cement inside casing
It is recommended to begin flow prior to tagging the top of the cement. In many
cases, if the cement is not fully set, it can easily ball up the bit. Once the cement
has adhered to the bit, it often is difficult to remove and will stay with the bit
throughout the run.
WOB will produce the most dramatic difference in ROP while drilling cement inside
casing. Very hard cement could take up to 50% of the maximum WOB, while soft
cement could produce no resistance at all. WOB is typically started at 4-6 klbs, and
then raised in 2 klbs increments until the expected ROP is achieved.
RPM should be held constant at 60 RPM while determining the optimum WOB.
Higher RPM, up to 120, can be used only if it is determined that higher RPM is
beneficial. RPM should be kept at or above the recommended minimum RPM (see
table 6.5.2.).
When drilling cement on a motor, flow rate is critical. The flow through the motor
should be no less than 25% above the minimum flow rate (before stall). The flow
rate will dictate the RPM of the bit and should be determined by the directional
driller. The rotary speed should be held constant at 30 RPM to reduce the
possibility of a trench on the inside of the casing. The motor should be started
before any weight is applied.
Drill-out float equipment

Due to the materials used in float equipment, they generally take longer to drill
than any other item during a drill-out. The rubber wiper-plugs, in particular, cause
the greatest difficulty. Typical float equipment, regardless of size, may take from 1
to 3 hours to drill out.
When a motor is using, flow rate will dictate the RPM of the bit. Stalling may
become common if the flow rate is too low. The flow rate through the motor should
be no less than 35% above the minimum flow arte (before stall).
WOB is typically started at 4-6 klbs, and then raised in 2 klbs increments until the
float is noticeably being drilled. The upper limit of WOB, while drilling float
equipment, is 50% of maximum WOB based on size and type.
In case of rotary drill out, should begin with ~60 RPM for the float, regardless of
WOB. This may be increased when drilling cement to a maximum of 110-120 RPM.
If motor is used, the rotary speed should be held constant at 30 rpm while drilling
float equipment.
It has proven beneficial to pick up and work the pipe at least 5 off the float
equipment every 30 minutes, to allow pieces to be worked out.
If no noticeable progress has been made in a reasonable amount of time (i.e. 0
inches in +1 hours), a last resort option could be to stop all rotation and flow, then
push on the float equipment with 80% of the maximum WOB. By doing this
several times, cuts in the wiper plug will be made, then the normal drill-out
procedures can be continued.

40
Recommended drill-out RPM (Source NOV)

Cutter size Rotary Motor + Rotary
(inch mm) (minimum RPM) Rotary RPM Min. Motor RPM Min. Bit RPM
3/8 8mm 120 40 60 140 180
0.4 10.5mm 110 40 60 130 170
13mm 110 40 60 130 170
5/8 16mm 100 40 60 120 160
19mm 100 40 60 120 160
6.9.3 Reaming
Reaming long sections of undergauged hole is not recommended, but has been
accomplished successfully with varying degrees of damage to the bit.
If reaming is absolutely necessary, observe the following guidelines:
Without a Mud Motor:
Ream with full flow
Use 40 to 60 RPM and 2,000 to 4,000 lbs. weight on bit
Ream slowly and avoid high torque
With a Mud Motor:

Ream with full flow.
In low dogleg situations, use 20 to 40 RPM
In high dogleg situations keep toolface aligned to hole direction and do not rotate
In either case, use only 2,000 to 4,000 lbs. weight on bit and ream slowly to avoid
high torque and possible sidetracking of hole
6.9.4 Break-In Formation

Circulating to bottom is preferable prior to tagging bottom. The pilot bit must be in
contact with the bottom of the hole so that it can be anchored to the formation and
the reamer section can pivot around the wellbore and enlarge the hole once
rotation is started.
Use low weight on bit (drilling conditions dictate) and a minimum 100 rpm on
rotary applications and 30 to 60 rotary on motor applications with full flow rates to
establish a new bottom hole pattern.
Record pump strokes and standpipe pressure and compare with expected vs.
actual hydraulics.
Slowly break the bit in, drilling at least three (3) feet in this manner.
Increase rotary speeds and add weight in 2,000 pound increments to determine
the optimum drilling weight on bit.
Perform drill off tests to determine optimum drilling parameters. Care should be
taken with Bi-Center drill bits of large diameters in determining maximum rpm to
avoid heat damage to the reamer section. (formation hardness dictates).

41
6.9.5 Drilling ahead

Before and after making connections, observe the following guidelines:
Check pump strokes and standpipe pressure
After connections, add weight slowly to attain the previous weight on bit and
maintain previous parameters
Rotary and weight on bit parameters should be adjusted to maintain optimum drilling
parameters as formation changes, directional requirements and hole conditions.
Recommended RPM for drilling in formation (Source NOV)

Cutter size Rotary Motor + Rotary
(inch mm) (minimum RPM) Rotary RPM Min. Motor RPM Min. Bit RPM
3/8 8mm 120 30 140 140 170
0.4 10.5mm 115 30 140 135 165
13mm 110 30 140 130 160
5/8 16mm 100 30 140 120 150
19mm 100 30 140 120 150
Generally recommended mud motor speeds have been 120+RPM. Recent testing in
vertical applications has suggested that in 30fph or slower drilling applications a slower
speed motor will increase ROP and reduce damage to the bit.
Critical: The instantaneous ROP (in ft/hr) must be limited to no more than 2.5 times the
RPM to ensure a gauge hole is drilled. For example, when running at 100 RPM, do not drill
faster than 250 ft/hr. Drilling faster than this will lead to a spiraled hole condition
(screwing the bit in the ground).
6.9.6 Bi-Center PDC Directional Tendencies

For build, hold or drop runs utilizing rotary speed to control inclination:
Optimum rotary speed for Build: 30 40 RPM;
Optimum rotary speed for Hold: 40 50 RPM;
Optimum rotary speed for Drop: 50 60 RPM;
Bi-Center Size Stabilizer Size % Drill Size

17 x 20 14-1/2 72%
14-1/2 x 17-1/2 13 74%
12-1/4 x 14-3/4 11-1/2 78%
12-1/4 x 13-1/2 10-1/2 78%
10-5/8 x 11-1/2 9-1/4 80%
10-5/8 x 12-1/4 10 82%
8-1/2 x 9-7/8 8-1/4 84%
6-1/2 x 7-1/2 6-1/2 86%
6 x 7 6 86%
Note: A high percentage of the runs this data was extracted from utilized performance
motors, which were in the 30 ft range. The more successful runs placed the stabilizer 40
to 60 ft from the bit, used a 1.75 or grater bent housing motor and a minimum motor
speed of 120 RPM (Source NOV).

42
6.10 The dullness grading system for used bits

The following information is recorded:
Distance drilled
Time taken
Averaged drilling parameters (WOB, RPM, Pump ratio)
Average drilling fluid properties (type, density, viscosity, fluid loss)
The condition of the bit when pulled.
The first four of these are objective measurements which can be obtained by reference to
the standard daily reports. The condition however is a very subjective assessment made
by the driller or directional driller. In order to provide a measure of consistency between
bit condition reports made by all drillers (world wide) a grading system has been
introduced. This system applies to roller cone bits, diamond bits and core heads. It uses
code characters for describing six categories of wear, grouped into the three sections
cutters, bearings and gauge, and adds two codes for remarks.
If a standard bit report form is being completed there are eight boxes in which the
individual codes are entered (see table below).
Cutting structure Remarks

Inner Outer Dullness Location Bearing Gauge (mm Other Reason
rows rows character or seals or 16ths) character pulled
(I) (O) (D) (L) (B) (G) (O) (R)
Table: Standard bit dull grading form
More information about dull grading can be found in the attachments. (Reference: NOV)

43
Appendix 1 Classification scheme roller-cone bits

44
Appendix 2 Classification scheme PDC and diamond bits

45
Appendix 3 PDC and diamond bits dull grading manual

The IADC dull grading system uses a system of eight codes to categorize the dull
characteristics of a bit. The codes cover cutting structure, bearing condition and gage
measurement, along with the reason the bit run was terminated. The use of the codes will
be explained below.

Inner Outer Dullness Locations Bearing Gauge Other Reason
rows rows or seal character pulled
(I) (O) (D) (L) (B) (G) (O) (R)
All PDC cutters should be graded on the condition of the visible diamond table, regardless
of cutter shape or exposure.
Wear is recorded on a linear scale as a single digit from 0 to 8. Grading numbers increase
with the amount of wear with 0 equal to no wear, 4 is equal to 50% and 8 is no usable
cutting structure remaining.
For surface set bits the percentage of diamond /TSP wear is determined by comparing the
initial visible cutter height with the amount of visible cutter height remaining.
IADC wear can be measured using a IADC PDC wear gauge. These gauges will measure
several different cutter sizes. The example shown can be used on cutters with diameters
from 13 mm to 38mm.

46
Bi-center - the inner section is considered the entire pilot section. Degrees of cutter wear
on bi-centers are the same as for PDC bits

47
Diamond bits - use a ratio of remaining-rib-height to original- rib-height. If the original-

rib-height was 0.5 inches and the remaining-rib-height is 0.25 inches, the grading would
be a 4 (50% wear)

48
Impregnated bits - have Grit Hot-Pressed Inserts (GHI), which protrude out of the ribs on
a new bit. At the point
where the GHI wear is flush with the ribs, the bit should be graded a 1. Wear after that
point is measured the same as diamond bits

49

(I) (O) (D) (L) (B) (G) (O) (R)
The code for the most prominent or primary characteristic of the dull bit should be
entered here. Any secondary dull characteristics of the bit can be entered in the chart in
box 7, Other Characteristic.

50

51

52

(I) (O) (D) (L) (B) (G) (O) (R)
Use a letter code to indicate the location on the bit face where the major dull
characteristic occurred.

(I) (O) (D) (L) (B) (G) (O) (R)
This box is for roller cone bits. Fixed cutter bits will always be designated "X".

53

(I) (O) (D) (L) (B) (G) (O) (R)
It is used to record the condition of the bit gauge. It is based upon nominal ring gauge
(ensure that a PDC and not roller cone ring gauge is used as tolerances between the two
are different).
I is used if the bit is still in gauge.
Otherwise, the amount the bit is undergauge is recorded to the nearest 1/16th of an inch.
API tolerances for fixed cutter and roller cone bits

Nominal bit size Fixed cutter bits Roller cone bits
6-3/4 and smaller -0.015 to +0.00 -0.0 to +1/32
6-25/32 including 9 -0.020 to +0.00 -0.0 to +1/32
9-1/32 including 13-3/4 -0.030 to +0.00 0.0 to +1/32
13-25/32 including 17- -0.045 to +0.00 -0.0 to +1/16
1/2
17-17/32 and larger -0.063 to +0.00 -0.0 to +3/32
Bi-Center Gauge Measurement Procedure

Measure the shank diameter with a caliper, making sure that the full shank is measured.
Do not measure inside the breaker slots. This is illustrated in figure below.

54
Next, measure the height of the longest reamer blade from the outer surface of the
shank. This can be accomplished by using a straight edge and a ruler. This step is
illustrated in next figure.

(I) (O) (D) (L) (B) (G) (O) (R)
This space is used to record secondary bit wear. This could relate specifically to cutting
structure wear or may identify wear to the bit as a whole, such as erosion. This field is in
addition to the wear identified and recorded in box three and may highlight the "cause" of
this wear. "Other characteristics" can be used to record whether a bit is rerunable "RR" or
not "NR". The codes for both "major" and "secondary" wear are the same.

55

(I) (O) (D) (L) (B) (G) (O) (R)
It is used to record the reason the bit was pulled.

56
Appendix 4 Roller cone bits dull grading material

The IADC dull grading system uses a system of eight codes to categorize the dull
characteristics of a bit. The codes cover cutting structure, bearing condition and gage
measurement, along with the reason the bit run was terminated. The use of the codes will
be explained below.

The inner and outer rows are graded using a 0-8 scale that measures the tooth height
remaining, as shown below. This includes removal of the tooth or insert for any reason,
including wear, breakage or loss.

57
1. Inner Rows
The inner rows include all of the cutting structure except those that are in contact with
the hole wall. This generally means everything except the gage row inserts.
2. Outer Row
This includes only the rows that cut gage and maintain a properly sized hole.
3. Major Dull Characteristic

This is a dull code, chosen from the table below, that best describes the wear or failure
mechanism of the cutting structure.

58
4. Location
This code indicates where on the bit the dull characteristic occurred. The location is
indicated as follows
5. Bearings
This code is used to indicate the condition of the bearings on roller-cone bits. For sealed
bearing bits, the options are:
E- Effective
F- Failed
N- Not able to grade
No other characters should be used with sealed bearing bits. However, it is preferable
when possible to indicate the condition of all three bearings separately. For instance,
when only the #2 bearing is failed and the others are effective, indicating EFE in the dull
grade is more descriptive than simply entering F.
6. Gauge.
This is a measure of how the diameter of the bit has changed during the run. Generally,
wear on the gage of the bit will eventually cause the bit to be slightly undersized. It is
also possible for the bit to be undersized due to being pinched (see PB dullgrade
characteristic in the next section). It is quite rare for a bit to be pulled after drilling and be
oversized.
The code shown indicates the amount that the bit is under-gage, in 1/16 increments. For
instance, a bit that is 3/16 under-gage would be listed as 3 in the dull grade.
To measure the gage of a bit, a standard nominal sized ring gage should be used. This
means that for 8-1/2 hole, the gage should be 8.5 in diameter.
For three-cone roller bits, gage should be measured as shown in the following
illustrations. Due to the fact that there are three points of contact, and neither are directly
opposite the other for a true diameter measurement, the actual gage of the bit is not
equal to the gap. The gap measurement should be multiplied by 2/3 to get the correct
measurement.

59
7. Other Dull Characteristics

This code is used to indicate any secondary dull conditions that may be present. The list
of possible conditions is shown below and is the same as listed for Major Dull
Characteristics, section 3 in the dull grade. For instance, a bit may have both broken
teeth (BT) and rounded gage (RG).
The characteristic that most significantly affects the performance of the cutting structure
should be listed in the Major Dull Characteristics spot and the other listed here. It is also
permissible to list more than one dull code in the Other Dull Characteristics section when
necessary by separating them by a slash (i.e. BT/RG/ER).
Same table as for 3- Major Dull Characteristic (see before) to be used
8. Reason Pulled

60
This final section of the dull grade is used to indicate the reason why the bit run was
terminated. This reason is not necessarily related to the performance of the bit and can
generally found on the bit record or on daily drilling reports. The possible reasons are
listed below.

61
Appendix 5 Dull condition evaluation

The following pages contain detailed information on each of the IADC dull codes and
shows sample photographs of each. It is important to not only identify the presence of a
particular dull condition but to understand its causes so that bit selection can be improved
on the next run. Reference: Reed Hycalog.

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73
Appendix 6 Drill-off Test Variations and Form
Drill-off Test Variations:
Drill-off Test #1 (Standard)

Pick off bottom and set the RPM and flow rate and evaluate operating parameters
Return to bottom, build to the maximum practical WOB
Lock the brake
Record the time required to "drill-off" a predetermined weight increment (typically
between 2000-5000 lbs.).
Continue until all WOB is drilled off or until the increment time starts to
significantly increase. The shortest time will indicate the optimum weight for that
rotary speed.
Incrementally increase the RPM and repeat the above procedure. For hard
formations or slow ROP conditions, increase the RPM in 5 to 20 RPM increments.
For soft formations or high ROP conditions, increase the RPM in 10 to 40 RPM
increments. Continue testing until the optimum is determined.
If the shortest time increment occurs at several different weights or rotary speeds,
use the lowest WOB-RPM (WR/D) combination.
Below is a hypothetical example of a drill off test. Note that that 45,000 to 40,000
lbs produces the optimum time at both 60 RPM and 70 RPM. Use 60 RPM, as this
would reduce the WR level in this case by 17% thus ensuring maximum durability
while still providing optimum ROP
Drill-Off Test #2
Return to bottom, building to a low starting WOB
From this WOB, increase weight in a predetermined weight increment (typically
between 2000-5000 lbs). Record the time required to a suitable footage
increment. Footage increment typically ROP based (5+ feet for higher ROPs, 1-3
feet for lower ROPs)
Calculate and plot the resulting ROP versus WOB. At some point, the ROP may
drop off or decrease with increasing WOB. The optimum WOB is just below the
weight that caused a flattening of the ROP plot.

74
Repeat the test using the optimum WOB from step 2 and increase RPM in 5-20
RPM increments. Drill a convenient time or footage interval (1 minute or 1 foot)
Calculate and plot ROP versus RPM. At some point, increasing RPM will result in a
very small or no increase in ROP. The optimum RPM is just below the RPM that
caused a flatting of the ROP plot
Continue testing until the optimum is determined.
use the lowest weight rotary combination
Drill-Off Test #3
Return to bottom, build to the maximum or selected WOB
Lock the brake
Let the bit drill-off and record the WOB every minute or suitable time interval
Calculate and plot the resulting ROP versus WOB
Repeat the test and increase the RPM in 5 20 RPM increments. Continue testing
until the optimum is determined
Drill-Off Test #4
This test is mostly used when an approximate operating WOB is known.
This can be either per time interval or per footage interval.
This method is used in areas of high ROP where WOB drills off too fast to record or in
non-homogeneous formations where the ROP fluctuates greatly.
Return to bottom, build to the maximum or selected WOB
Drill for a set time interval (typically 5 minutes) or a set footage interval (5 feet,
up to a kelly length) with constant WOB. Calculate the ROP for the interval
Repeat the test at other WOB values until the optimum WOB is found
Repeat the test and increase the RPM in 5 20 RPM increments. Continue testing
until the optimum is determined
Drill-Off Test #5
Also known as an active drill-off test
Select a mid-range WOB and RPM
Maintain RPM and record ROP over 5 minutes with varied WOB
Determine optimum WOB
Maintain WOB and record ROP over 5 minutes with varied RPM
Determine optimum ROP

75
Drill-off Test Form

76

77
Appendix 7 Pump-off Force Hydraulic Lift
The true WOB may be less than the measured weight by the amount of hydraulic lift
(pump-off force) acting beneath the bit. Hydraulic lift occurs with any type of bit that
develops pressure drop due to fluid flowing between the bit face and the rock. This force
is generally less with PDC bit than with natural diamond bits.
There are three methods for determining pump-off force:

Slack off method
Drillers method
Drill-off method
9 Step Procedure For Slack-Off Method:

1. Determine number of strokes that yield desired on bottom circulating pressure.
Pump that number of strokes while running test
2. Establish a new/fresh bottom-hole pattern
3. With pump(s) on and drill string rotating raise the bit approximately 1-2 feet off-
bottom
4. Record pump pressure and zero weight indicator
5. Lower the kelly in 1 to 2 inch increments allowing time after each step for the
weight and pressure to stabilize. Record the stabilized values. The first few values
should be relatively constant
6. Continue to lower the kelly in small steps. The pump pressure should begin to rise
rapidly once the bit moves to within 0.5 in off-bottom. Beyond this point, due to
drill string elasticity, the bit advances only a fraction of the kelly movement. Try to
obtain several data points in this region
7. Watch for pump pressure oscillations as the bit reaches the pump-off point. These
should smooth out once the applied weight exceeds the pump-off force and the bit
starts drilling. Beyond this point pump pressure rises much more gradually as
weight is added to the bit
8. Continue to add weight incrementally until the desired operating WOB is reached
9. Plot the data and locate the pump-off point. Determine the true WOB. Adjust the
applied WOB if necessary in order to obtain the desired mechanical weight
4 Step Procedure For Drillers Method:

1. Record indicated WOB and pump pressure while drilling. This is WOB-1
2. Stop rotating. Shut pumps off
3. Record indicated WOB. This is WOB-2
4. Pump-off force = WOB1 WOB2
7 Step Procedure for Drill Off Method:

1. With pump(s) on and drill string rotating raise the bit approximately 1-2 feet off-
bottom
2. Record the hook load and zero the weight indicator
3. Lower the bit to bottom and establish a new/fresh bottom-hole pattern
4. Lock the brake and allow the bit to drill-off

78
5. Record the indicated weight as the bit drills off. The data is usually recorded with
each 1000 lb decrease of indicated weight or at some regular time interval such as
5 minutes
6. End the test when it is clear that the indicated weight has stopped decreasing. The
weight indicator should give a direct reading of the pump-off force at this point.
Record this value
7. Raise the bit approximately 1 foot off bottom and check that the indicated weight
has returned to the original value. Discrepancies can arise from hole drag

79
Appendix 8 Useful Technical Data
Ring Gage Specifications:

There are no API specifications for roller cone nominal ring gages. Only for diamond and
PDC bits.
Gage specifications, per API spec 7.7 for diamond and PDC bits
Go and No Go gages should be a ring fabricated from 1 steel with and OD
equal to nominal bit size plus 1-1/2
Go gage ID should equal nominal bit size plus 0.002 (0,051 mm) clearance with
a tolerance of +0.003, -0.0 (+0,076mm, -0mm)
No Go gage ID should equal minimum bit size (nominal less maximum negative
tolerance) minus 0.002 interference with a tolerance of +0.0, -0.003 (+0mm, -
0,076mm)
If acceptable the bit should enter the Go gage (bit not too large)
If acceptable the bit should NOT enter the No Go gage (bit not to small)
Both ring gages and the bit should be within 200F (110 C) of one another
Recommended Roller Cone Bits Make-up Torque

Bit size API Pin size Recommended torque
in mm in mm ft-lbs N-m
3-1/2 to 89 to 114 2-3/8 Reg. 60.3 3.000 to 3.500 4.000 to
4-1/2 4.750
4-5/8 to 5 118 to 127 2-7/8 Reg. 73.0 4.500 to 5.500 6.100 to
7.450
5-1/8 to 137 to 187 3-1/2 Reg. 88.9 7.000 to 9.000 9.500 to
7-3/8 12.200
7-5/8 to 9 194 to 229 4-1/2 Reg. 114.3 12.000 to 16.250 to
16.000 21.700
9-1/2 to 241 to 711 6-5/8 Reg. 168.3 28.000 to 38.000 to
28* 32.000 43.400
14-3/4 to 375 to 711 6-5/8 Reg. 168.3 28.000 to 38.000 to
28* 32.000 43.400
or or
7-5/8 Reg. 193.7 34.000 to 46.100 to
40.000 54.200
18-1/2 to 470 to 711 7-5/8 Reg. 193.7 34.000 to 46.100 to
28* 40.000 54.200
or or
8-5/8 Reg. 219.0 40.000 to 54.200 to
60.000 81.300
* Makeup torque must correspond to API connection for each bit size.
Note: Some of the above bit sizes are available with alternate pin connections on special
order

80
Recommended PDC & Diamond Bits Make-up Torque

Bit size API Pin size Recommended torque
in mm in mm ft-lbs N-m
3-3/4 to 95.2 to 114.3 2-3/8 Reg. 60.3 1.800 to 3.085 2.400 to
4-1/2 4.120
4-17/32 to 117.5 to 2-7/8 Reg. 73.0 3.075 to 4.650 4.100 to
5 127.0 6.200
5-1/32 to 136.5 to 3-1/2 Reg. 88.9 5.175 to 7.660 6.900 to
7-3/8 187.3 10.230
7-13/32 to 193.7 to 4-1/2 Reg. 114.3 12.450 to 16.630 to
9-3/8 228.6 17.750 23.710
9-13/32 to 241.3 to 6-5/8 Reg. 168.3 37.100 to 49.560 to
14-1/2 368.3 38.500 51.430
14-9/16 to 374.6 to 7-5/8 Reg. 193.7 48.300 to 64.520 to
26 660.4 60.900 81.350
Total Flow Area (TFA) of Standard Nozzles (in)

Nozzle Number of nozzles
size 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
(in)
7/32 0.038 0.075 0.113 0.150 0.188 0.225 0.263 0.301 0.338
8/32 0.049 0.098 0.147 0.196 0.245 0.295 0.344 0.393 0.442
9/32 0.062 0.124 0.186 0.249 0.311 0.373 0.435 0.497 0.559
10/32 0.077 0.153 0.230 0.307 0.383 0.460 0.537 0.614 0.690
11/32 0.093 0.186 0.278 0.371 0.464 0.557 0.650 0.742 0.835
12/32 0.110 0.221 0.331 0.442 0.552 0.663 0.773 0.884 0.994
13/32 0.130 0.259 0.389 0.518 0.648 0.778 0.907 1.037 1.167
14/32 0.150 0.301 0.451 0.601 0.752 0.902 1.052 1.203 1.353
15/32 0.173 0.345 0.518 0.690 0.863 1.035 1.208 1.381 1.553
16/32 0.196 0.393 0.589 0.785 0.982 1.178 1.374 1.571 1.767
17/32 0.222 0.443 0.665 0.887 1.108 1.330 1.552 1.773 1.995
18/32 0.249 0.497 0.746 0.994 1.243 1.491 1.740 1.988 2.237
19/32 0.277 0.554 0.831 1.108 1.384 1.661 1.938 2.215 2.492
20/32 0.307 0.614 0.920 1.227 1.534 1.841 2.148 2.454 2.761
21/32 0.338 0.676 1.015 1.353 1.691 2.029 2.368 2.706 3.044
22/32 0.371 0.742 1.114 1.485 1.856 2.227 2.599 2.970 3.341
23/32 0.406 0.811 1.217 1.623 2.029 2.434 2.840 3.246 3.652
24/32 0.442 0.884 1.325 1.767 2.209 2.651 3.093 3.534 3.976
25/32 0.479 0.959 1.438 1.917 2.397 2.876 3.356 3.835
26/32 0.518 1.037 1.555 2.074 2.592 3.111 3.629
27/32 0.559 1.118 1.677 2.237 2.796 3.355 3.914
28/32 0.601 1.203 1.804 2.405 3.007 3.608
29/32 0.645 1.290 1.935 2.580 3.225 3.870
30/32 0.690 1.381 2.071 2.761 3.451
31/32 0.737 1.474 2.211 2.948 3.685
32/32 0.785 1.571 2.356 3.142 3.927

81
Recommended Bit Size vs. Casing Size

OD (in) Weight per foot ID (in) Drift diameter Recommended
with couplings (in) bit size (in)
(lbs)
4-1/2 9.50 4.090 3.965 3-7/8
4-1/2 10.50 4.052 3.927 3-7/8
4-1/2 11.60 4.000 3.875 3-3/4
4-1/2 13.50 3.920 3.795 3-3/4
5 11.50 4.560 4.435 4-1/4
5 13.00 4.494 4.369 4-1/4
5 15.00 4.408 4.283 4-1/4
5 18.00 4.276 4.151 4-1/4
5-1/2 14.00 5.012 4.887 4-3/4
5-1/2 15.50 4.950 4.825 4-3/4
5-1/2 17.00 4.892 4.767 4-3/4
5-1/2 20.00 4.778 4.653 4-5/8
5-1/2 23.00 4.670 4.545 4-1/2
6 5/8 20.00 6.049 5.924 5 7/8
6 5/8 24.00 5.921 5.796 5 5/8
6 5/8 28.00 5.791 5.666 5 5/8
6 5/8 32.00 5.675 5.550 5 3/8
7 17.00 6.538 6.413 6-1/4
7 20.00 6.456 6.331 6-1/4
7 23.00 6.366 6.241 6-1/8
7 26.00 6.276 6.151 6-1/8
7 29.00 6.184 6.059 6
7 32.00 6.094 5.969 5-7/8
7 35.00 6.004 5.879 5-3/4
7 38.00 5.920 5.795 5-3/4
7-5/8 24.00 7.025 6.900 6-3/4
7-5/8 26.40 6.969 6.844 6-3/4
7-5/8 29.70 6.875 6.750 6-5/8
7-5/8 33.70 6.765 6.640 6-5/8
7-5/8 39.00 6.625 6.500 6-1/4
8-5/8 28.00 8.017 7.892 7-7/8
8-5/8 32.00 7.921 7.796 7-5/8
8-5/8 36.00 7.825 7.700 7-5/8
8-5/8 40.00 7.725 7.600 7-3/8
8-5/8 44.00 7.625 7.500 7-3/8
8-5/8 49.00 7.511 7.386 7-3/8
9-5/8 32.30 9.001 8.845 8-3/4
9-5/8 36.00 8.921 8.765 8-3/4
9-5/8 40.00 8.835 8.679 8-5/8
9-5/8 43.50 8.755 8.599 8-1/2
9-5/8 47.00 8.681 8.525 8-1/2
9-5/8 53.50 8.535 8.379 8-3/8
10-3/4 32.75 10.192 10.036 9-7/8

82
Recommended Bit Size vs. Casing Size

OD (in) Weight per foot ID (in) Drift diameter Recommended
with couplings (in) bit size (in)
(lbs)
10-3/4 40.50 10.050 9.894 9-7/8
10-3/4 45.50 9.950 9.794 9-3/4
10-3/4 51.00 9.850 9.694 9-5/8
10-3/4 55.50 9.760 9.604 9-1/2
10-3/4 60.70 9.660 9.504 9
10-3/4 65.70 9.560 9.404 9
11-3/4 42.00 11.084 10.928 10-3/4
11-3/4 47.00 11.000 10.844 10-3/4
11-3/4 54.00 10.880 10.724 10-5/8
11-3/4 60.00 10.772 10.616 10-1/2
13-3/8 48.00 12.715 12.559 12-1/4
13-3/8 54.50 12.615 12.459 12-1/4
13-3/8 61.00 12.515 12.359 12-1/4
13-3/8 68.00 12.415 12.259 12-1/4
13-3/8 72.00 12.347 12.191 12
16 65.00 15.250 15.062 15
16 75.00 15.124 14.936 14-3/4
16 84.00 15.010 14.822 14-3/4
18-5/8 87.50 17.755 17.567 17-1/2
20 94.00 19.124 18.936 17-1/2
20 106.50 19.000 18.812 17-1/2
20 133.00 18.730 18.542 17-1/2

7 Drilling practices & window milling
Prepared by WEP
Author:
Version: Oct 2014
Verified:
2
7 Drilling practices and window milling .................................................................... 3

7.2 Preparations for drilling each hole section ...................................................... 3
7.3 Drilling Best Practices .................................................................................. 3
7.4 Soft drilling approach when drilling sensitive formations .................................. 4
7.5 Kicking off in top-hole.................................................................................. 5
7.6 Drill out shoe track and rat hole .................................................................... 6
7.7 Bottom hole pattern and drill off test ............................................................. 7
7.8 Connection and survey procedures ................................................................ 7
7.9 Torque and Drag road mapping .................................................................... 8
7.10 Shocks and vibrations................................................................................ 11
7.11 Equipment failures while drilling.................................................................. 13
7.12 Bit Balling ................................................................................................ 14
7.13 Drilling hard stringers ................................................................................ 17
7.14 Open hole sidetracking time drilling .......................................................... 17
7.15 Re-entry after a dedicated sidetrack ............................................................ 18
7.16 Whipstock operations Window milling ....................................................... 19
7.17 Precautions entering or exiting a casing window ........................................... 22
Appendix 1 13 3/8 Trackmaster Plus Sidetracking System Generic Procedure ......... 24

7 Drilling practices & window milling | Version:Oct 2014
3
7 Drilling practices and window milling

This section provides an operational overview of the drilling practices including drilling
ahead, making connections, sidetracking and window milling.

Task Responsible Check
Prepare daily drilling instructions WSDE DSV
Maintain optimum drilling parameters TP Driller - DD DSV
Monitor hole cleaning indicators
Torque and drag Driller DSV
Drag charts WSDE DSV
Mud properties Mud engineer DSV
Down hole measurements MWD engineer WSDE
Cutting returns Shakerhand mud DSV
engineer - WSDE
Deciding when to conduct check trips DSV DSV
Carry out flow checks Driller DSV
Report drilling problems All DSV
Well control Driller / TP DSV
Safe and proper operation of rig and equipment TP DSV
7.2 Preparations for drilling each hole section

1. The drilling crew shall be familiar with Petrom well control procedures as in the
chapter on Well Control, including carrying out kick drills.
2. Ensure at all times that adequate mud weighting materials, chemicals, LCM and
cement is available in sufficient quantities to support the drilling operation.
3. Sufficient chemicals and LCM material shall be on hand for drilling operations to
continue.
4. Chemicals required to make up 8 m of stuck pipe spotting fluid shall be at the rig
site during drilling operations with water-based mud.
5. All drilling tools and equipment required for the each hole section shall be on hand,
checked out and in a serviceable condition prior to commencement of casing drill
out operations.
6. Fishing tools relevant to the hole interval shall be made available at the well site or
on call off in town. Drilling Contractor fishing tools are to be available for all
contractor supplied down hole tools as per rig contract.
7. The ID of all downhole equipment shall be checked for free passage of a free point
indicator tool and survey instrument fishing tools.
8. All BOP equipment and drill string well control equipment shall be in a serviceable
and fully tested condition.
7.3 Drilling Best Practices

The following general practices shall be rigorously applied during all hole sections. The
DSV is responsible for ensuring all relevant Drilling Contractor and Service personnel are
aware of Petroms the standard procedures and drilling practices.
1. Flow checks and pre-kick calculations shall be performed.

4
2. Tripping procedures shall be followed.

3. The time spent with the pipe out of the hole shall be actively minimized wherever
possible.
4. Operations such as routine BOP testing, repairs and slipping and cutting of the
drill-line shall be performed with pipe run in at the casing shoe whenever possible.
5. When using a dart sub in the BHA (normally positioned two stands above the drill
collars, or above the heavy weight drill pipe if the latter is incorporated in the
BHA), the dart shall be checked for passage through the Kelly cock, the full
opening safety valve, and all subs used in the string. The dart and dart sub shall
be independently checked for compatibility.
6. All BHAs include Jars.
7. All string stabilizers shall be preferred of integral blade type.
8. When roller reamers are used instead of stabilizers, running hours shall be limited
to the maximum recommended by the manufacturer.
9. Solid float valves shall be used.
10. When drilling critical hole sections the following drilling fluid management practices
should be observed:
Minimize the active fluid surface area to ensure ease of kick detection.
An adequate stock of reserve mud should be held, typically 100 m3 or more.
Ensure all pit-monitoring systems are fully functioning and calibrated.
Keep all mud treatments and transfers to the minimum possible. The Driller
and Mud Logging Engineer shall be advised prior to commencement of any
transfer of the amounts and the approximate rate of transfer.
11. If an SLB Azimuthal density neutron tool (ADN) is run, make sure no totco ring is
installed, all IDs are checked so source fishing can be performed. At the end of the
run, no rabbit is dropped into the hole as this might cause an obstruction
preventing the source to be fished.
12. The maximum DLS in the hole needs to be considered as the maximum dogleg
severity for logging tools might be limited.
7.4 Soft drilling approach when drilling sensitive formations

1. Stage RIH by breaking circulation every 5-6 stands
2. Reciprocate string and try to rotate slowly Drill string prior to starting pumps
3. Start pumps slowly( with moving up Drill string) until returns confirmed and then
increase gently to desired rates
4. While increasing flow rates monitor both SPP and return flow and check pit levels
on different flow rates
5. Slow down flow rates in steps after circulating hole clean prior to turning off pumps
to POOH
6. When pulling out of open hole use gentle tripping speeds to avoid
surging/swabbing; high surge/swab spikes are a result of fast tripping speedsbe
careful!
7. Use minimum recommended flow rates to ensure adequate hole cleaning
8. Use PWD sub to closely monitor ECD behaviour
9. Use low viscosity mud systems as much as possible (min.YP/Gels).

5
10. Mud density should be minimum density at start of interval and should then be
slowly increased to maximum desired density near interval TD before POOH to run
casing
11. Make sure enough space between drilling tools( RSS pads, stabilizers etc.) and
hole to avoid annular restrictions
12. Avoid string/BHA vibrations and/or stick/slip by adjusting RPM and WOB (use
vibration monitoring devices whenever possible)
13. Consider roller reamers instead of stabilizers in hard formations only
14. Use bits with low vibration tendency
15. Install soft torque systems on rigs whenever possible to reduce string vibrations
16. Synchronize mud pumps
17. Avoid to build well trajectory with 40-70 degrees inclination through unstable
formations
18. Minimize check trips by drilling each section from shoe to next shoe depth
19. Ensure mud salinity is close to or the same as formation salinity to avoid hole
instability(osmotic phenomenon (break-out))
20. Use shale shakers only with correct screens to ensure maximum solids removal
(refer to API charts and cut points for optimum screen selection)
21. Use minimum ( slim) BHA when is possible less DCs combined with HWDP, less
stabilizers, (smaller size drilling tools)
22. The use of under reamers to enlarge the standard hole size is recommended to
avoid back reaming hole conditions
23. Back reaming is well known for destabilizing well bore conditions and poses a high
risk for potential stuck pipe. Back reaming is only recommended when other
methods to POOH are not successful
24. Pumping out of the hole is the preferred method using a minimum 50 75% of
drilling flow rate if hole conditions dictate
25. Consider using continuous circulating tool on critical wells as this tool permits
circulation whilst breaking or making up pipe connections
26. Use wellbore strengthening materials in WBM and SBM when drilling weak
formations (multi-fractured) .
27. WBM should always be used to drill down fault planes where formation breakdown
is expected and downhole losses are severe enough to make use of SBM
uneconomical
By applying most of these pointers, we can improve drilling performance when drilling
sensitive formations to avoid hole problems caused by either or a combination of
excessive flow rates, ECD values, high mud rheology, and high LGS. We can also avoid
annular restrictions caused by not having enough space between BHA and the hole, we
also avoid excessive string vibrations, and uneven pumping.
7.5 Kicking off in top-hole

In general, for kicking off in the soft formations in tophole use a 1.5 bend on the motor
housing. When attempting to kick off from vertical, start sliding preferably at the start of
the stand.

6
To initiate a kick off, at least 4-5 ton WOB must be applied. If this cannot be achieved the
flow rate must be reduced. After 4-5 inclination has been achieved, the WOB can be
reduced to 2 mT if required.
Keep pump rate moderate, typically 2000 2500 lpm. Only when kicking off just below
the conductor shoe, keep the flow rate to a minimum (max 2000 lpm). As soon as more
WOB can be applied, the flow rate can be increased. Project trajectory ahead to avoid
collision and to drill a smooth wellbore!
Typical Top hole Kick off (17 Comments

BHA) assembly:
1. 17 bit
2. Mudmotor 1.5 bend - 17
sleeve
3. Float sub # 3 & 4 can be exchanged
depending on local experience
4. 16 16 Stabilizer For a more holding BHA use a 17-
17 Stab.
5. NM Pony DC
6. MWD
7. 16 16 Stabilizer (NM)
8. Jar
9. Accelerator
10. Rest of BHA
7.6 Drill out shoe track and rat hole

1. M/U BHA & RIH 3 stands above theoretical top of cement.
Returns: by-pass Trip tank / sand traps and receive in slug pit
Fill up string every 500m whilst RIH
2. Break circ & Commence washing down to HUD note depth.
3. P/U string, set drilling parameters as follows to drill out top & bottom plugs, Float
collar, cement & shoe:
50-60 rpm, WOB 0-5mT, Flowrate 1500-3000 lpm
PU string every few meters at initial drilling to clear bit and to check if still free
upwards.
Observe torque & pressure trend, avoid packing off.
Directional driller on rigfloor prior to drilling out shoe
Ream drilled interval prior to connection
4. Continue with cleaning out rat hole & drill 5-10m fresh formation at reduced
parameters:
80rpm; WOB=5-10 mT; flow =2000 lpm; Observe Torque & pressure trend
Make passes across shoe: first with pumps & rotary, then with rotary & pumps
off. Ream any resistance in between passes away, reduce pump-rate when
doing so to avoid washing out the hole below the shoe.
5. Prepare for the next operations:

7
Drill ahead
Mud conditioning followed by a FIT
POOH for BHA change.
7.7 Bottom hole pattern and drill off test

To avoid damaging the new bit by inducing excessive vibration & whirl when it redrills the
previous bit imprint, feather in the new bit as follows:
Rotate the bit and wash down last two stands to bottom.
Lightly tag bottom with low RPM.
The first meter to drill, maintain low WOB (0-2 mT) with reduced RPM.
Gradually increase weight and RPM to the anticipated drilling parameters.
Use a Drill-off Test to Select Best Weight and RPM:

Select the RPM.
Select the bit weight. Depending on bit selected, refer to bit supplier information
data sheet for recommended maximum RPMs and weights
Lock brake.
Record drill-off time for 5 T increments of weight indicator decrease.
Repeat this procedure for different RPM.
Drill at weight and RPM giving fastest drill-off time.
7.8 Connection and survey procedures

The following procedure must be followed at connections, in order to minimise the
potential for getting stuck on a connection, to maximise hole cleaning, and to collect
consistent torque and drag data:
1. Drill the stand down. In soft formations do not drill off the WOB.
2. Work/Ream a minimum of one single; circulating cuttings above the BHA. More
reaming may be required depending on observed hole condition. The DSV
shall confirm reaming requirement every shift.
Example;
Minimum required reaming circulating time to get the majority of the cuttings above the
BHA;
Hole size: 17.5
Majority of BHA diameter: 9
Flowrate; 65 lps (3900lpm)
Annular velocity [m/min]: 34.2 m/min
Slip velocity: [m/min]: 0.1-1 m/min
Length BHA till HWDP [m]: 250 m/min
250/ (34.2-1) = 7.5 min
((0.1033*flowrate [lpm])/*(ID hole-OD pipe [in]))*60
3. Lower the pipe and ream the stand down, if necessary.

8
Note: The directional driller shall be notified before any reaming is carried out.
4. Begin collecting T&D data by stopping the pipe 5m above connection depth.
5. While pumping & rotating record:
Standpipe pressure.
ECD from the MWD display above the drillers console (when applicable).
Record rotating off bottom torque and string weight. (See below)
Stop rotary and pick up 5 meters at constant speed of 10 m/min, record up
weight. This will also release any trapped torque in the string.
Slack off at 10 m/min and record stabilized down weight. If tight hole (due
to cuttings), repeat same process until resistance is gone, but now with
pumps on and rotate and reciprocate.
6. Make sure the pipe is off-bottom. Weight indicator should display full string weight.
7. Stop the pumps and set the DP in the slips as low as possible. Bleed off residual
pressure from the standpipe manifold.
8. Break out Top drive, apply pipe dope to the saver sub pin, unlatch and clean
elevator, switch pipe handler to make-up mode.
9. Pick up a new stand. Stab in pipe at rotary, spin stand in with top drive, torque top
connection with pipe handler, and make up bottom connection with iron
roughneck.
10. Lift the pipe, remove the slips and break circulation slowly.
11. Start pumps slowly & pick up out of slips. Note: max surge occurs in first 15 sec,
so ramp up pumps slowly.
12. When out of the slips, bring pumps up to full strokes slowly. Start rotating once
returns established.
13. Take directional survey as per Directional Driller. MWD will advise the driller,
immediately the survey is satisfactorily received on surface. In the meantime the
driller can commence to work the pipe.
14. Directional driller will advise on commencement of drilling.
Note: When the pipe is in the open hole, always set the slips on a down stroke long
enough to insure that the pipe is actually moving down the hole when the slips are set to
ensure the pipe is free so to avoid becoming differential stuck.
7.9 Torque and Drag road mapping

Real time T&D monitoring on the drillfloor involves taking torque, rotating string weight,
pick up and slack off readings at every connection. The driller is filling in the connection
data together with the drilling data in the so-called trend sheet. Note that all readings are
off bottom. The data from the trend sheets are then plotted against predicted trends that
are based on previous experience.
If the actual results starts to diverge away from the predicted trends, than a hole-cleaning
problem may be developing. The combination of this data, and carefully monitored
cuttings, mud and drilling parameter data can then be used to optimize drilling ROP and
/or what remedial action is necessary.
To perform this operation in an adequate way, the T&D software model must be of a good
quality but also the way the readings are taken must be constant throughout the

9
operation using properly calibrated gauges. In order to make a proper T&D model the
following points must be considered:
1. Determine weight of travelling equipment, such as combined weight of top drive

and hook, before running in hole.
2. Enter all available input data in software program. Make sure that correct drill
string (pipe and BHA), mud, and survey data are active.
3. Derive a cased-hole friction factor based on torque field data measured in the
casing. Take readings at a few depths inside the casing, while tripping in. This will
allow the cased hole friction factor to be determined more accurately and so
reduce uncertainty in estimating the open hole factor.
4. Derive an open hole friction coefficient based on the basis of torque data measured
in the open hole section.
5. Derive an open hole and cased hole friction factor for RIH and POOH based on
hook load in open hole (use correct pump-rate) Rotating-off bottom.
The torque and drag simulation results should match with the measured values. Often the
error is caused by an incorrectly assumed weight of block, hook and top drive.

10
Example torque and drag simulation & actual data (road map)
Further guidelines for T&D road mapping

1. It is important that the string is not reciprocated while recording rotating weights,
but that the string is moved a few meters- say 5 at a constant speed and that
the stabilized weight is taken.
2. It is important to maintain a standardized procedure for measuring up/down
weights and torques. This is not only for measuring friction factors more
effectively, but also to give an indication of hole cleaning in the well. It is good
practice to measure up/down weights before the connection is made.

11
3. With the measured hookload data a drag chart can be plotted to compare the
actual and predicted values. A good initial quality check is to ensure that the
measured and predicted curves for rotating-off-bottom weight are lined up. There
is no upward or downward drag when rotating off bottom, so the weight should be
independent of friction factor.
4. If there is a significant difference in predicted and measured rotating weights at
this stage, there are various sources of error that can be checked out:
Is the estimate of hoist equipment weight correct?
Have all of the drillstring components been entered correctly?
Is the mud density as expected, are the weights being recorded accurately?
5. Ensure that correct tool joint outer diameters are entered in the torque and drag
software. For a given side load and friction factor the friction torque is proportional
to the tool joint outer diameter.
6. Be aware that the hook load reduces when the flow rate increases due to the
'pump out' effect.
7. Friction factor values:
For non-complex wells an open hole/cased hole friction factor of 0.2 - 0.3 is a
good starting point.
Generally, SBM will lead to lower friction factors than WBM. Typically SBM
yields 0.2 and WBM 0.3. For this reason, it is essential that the offset and the
planned well have the same mud type when using calibrated friction factors.
In chalk sections with WBM high friction factors can be expected. It is common
to have a friction factor of 0.4-0.5 for the open hole.
7.10 Shocks and vibrations

Shock and vibrations are great contributors of bit down hole tool and drill string failures,
also drilling performance is negatively influenced by it.
Down hole vibrations can cause the following:
Reduced ROP
Poor Borehole Quality
Erratic Bit Performance
Bit Impact Damage and Premature failure
Effect on Directional Drilling Control
Damage to BHA Components
Disruption of MWD Signal
BHA failures (mechanically and electronically)
Fatigue of drill string components
Over Stress of tool Joints
If vibrations occur adjust RPM and see if this helps, if not call for help.
For hole cleaning purposes high surface RPMs are required (>120 rpm). In practice it is
found that at high rpms the rotation is much smoother than at lower RPM, this is due the
harmonics or natural frequencies of the drill string and BHA. All efforts should be done to

12
avoid rotating at these natural frequencies, as this will result in excessive and rotationally
destructive vibrations.
Vibrations can be minimized or eliminated effectively by down hole monitoring, and

adjusting parameters and practices accordingly. Relying on surface monitoring only is of
little value as it is unlikely that all down hole vibrations will reveal at surface. In order to
adequately respond to the vibrations it is necessary to understand the different types of
vibrations and what causes them.
Drillers should be aware of the detection method of shock and vibrations and preferably a
traffic sign system should be used for the down hole measurements. Below a table is
given how to distinguish the different types of shocks and how to cure them.
Summary of Diagnosis and Potential Cures for Down hole Vibration

13
Relationship between drilling parameters and vibration types.
Stick-slip not only affects the ROP but also has also big influence on the logging quality.
Therefore stick-slip should be kept to a minimum.
Some of the LWD tools are equipped with full gauge straight bladed stabilizers; these
stabilizers can have increased effect on the down hole shock and vibrations.
7.11 Equipment failures while drilling

Because there are many combinations of problems that can be encountered on a drilling
rig and often there are several solutions for each problem, sound engineering judgment is
required. First action to failures are:
Swivel or Top Drive Wash pipe leaking

Reduce pump rate and pull off bottom.
Circulate clean at reduced rate.
Start pulling out of the hole to the shoe.
If hole conditions dictate and the leak is bad, re-establish circulation using a
circulating head.
Leaking mud manifold or mudpump

Slow the pumprate down
If 8 1/2 hole or smaller drill ahead with one pump.
For larger hole sizes, raise the string until first connection above RT.
Circulate, reciprocate and rotate the well clean whilst making repairs.
If the leak cannot be fixed quickly, pull back into the casing shoe.

14
Top Drive Failure

Reciprocate and circulate whilst troubleshooting.
Pull back to the casing shoe if repairs to the topdrive require the reciprocation to
be stopped.
Total Power Failure

Slack the string in stages until 75% of the string weight is reached or until the
string in the open hole section buckles slightly thus minimizing string wall contact.
Set the slips
Notes: During repairs where the top drive is disconnected install an internal BOP and a
circulation head on the DP and establish circulation. If no circulation is possible the hole
must be circulated through the trip tank.
Plugged bit nozzles

Bit plugging while RIH, surge & shock the pipe:
Attempt to unplug the nozzles by rapidly lowering the string and bringing it to a
sudden stop.
If pressure surges may break down the formation. pull back 5 to 10 stands and re-
run them without filling. The pressure differential may unplug the nozzles;
however, the fluid entering the nozzles from the wellbore may cause further
plugging.
If the pipe is free to move, try pressuring up to maximum pressure and suddenly
releasing the pressure.
If it is not possible to pull the bit to remove plugged nozzles, circulation can be re-
established by perforating the drill pipe above the BHA.
Pressure loss Washout

In order to prevent a washout, constant monitoring of flow rate versus the standpipe
pressure has to be done to detect an early wash out. All changes in pressure response
should be looked at and if surface equipment is ruled out the BHA should be POH to check
for washouts. In some cases, the MWD data (SLB PowerPulse ore TeleScope) can help
detecting a washout above the MWD by monitoring the Downhole RPM versus the flow
rate.
7.12 Bit Balling

Bit balling occurs due to cuttings aggregating around or sticking to the bit surface. For bit
balling to occur the cuttings must be impermeable, soft, and easily deformable and stick
to each other or the metallic surface of the bit. Bit balling most commonly occurs when
drilling a hydratable reactive shale/clay with water base mud.
If the cuttings are reported to be soft, ROP is slow, drilling torque is low or
reduced and there is an increase in the standpipe pressure, the chance that the
bit is balled up is high.

15
Symptoms of bit balling:

Loss of torque
Bit balling is always accompanied by a loss of drilling torque. This is because the
cutters are unable to dig into the formation. On a motor assembly, the loss of
torque can be masked, though a slight drop in differential pressure should give an
indication of the bitballing problem.
Reduction in ROP
The ROP may slow down gradually due to intermittent balling. Believing that the
formation is harder, increasing the WOB will in turn push the bit deeper into the
soft clay resulting in poor cleaning of the bit face causing the entire bit to ball up.
A balled bit can affect the force distribution, flow of cooling mud, leading to
accelerated wear and premature bit failure. ROP may return to normal after
cleaning but might be followed by another drop in ROP as the bit balls again.
Substantial increase in pump pressure.

The increase in pump pressure is due to the restriction in the flow.
Cleaning methods:
1. Spinning:
Position the bit as close as possible to the bottom of the hole or pick up the
string until the differential pressure diminishes.
Circulate at maximum rate for 15 mins.
Rotate the string at maximum RPM for 1 minute and reduce to drilling RPM for
1 minute varying the RPM maximizes the available centrifugal force to aid in
spin off soft sticky formation from the bit face. A cleaning pill will aid in the
cleaning the balled bit face.
2. Washing and Soaking:

Cleaning with fluid pills can either be spotted around the bit and/or circulated
through the bit nozzles depending upon the type of pills. Some pills cannot be
weighted and their use will depend on the reservoir pressure situation. Always
check the loss of overbalance prior to pumping these pills.
Pipe movement to be maintained to prevent pipe sticking while allowing the pill
to soak.
Soaking can be done in the casing if practical to eliminate the risk of hole
collapse. Although the use of cleaning pills is recommended, it should be noted
that the fluid pills can de-stabilize the wellbore and disturb the mud properties.
To minimize the effects, it is advisable that the contact time of the pills while
circulating up the annulus should be minimized. These pills are to be dumped
upon reaching surface or otherwise additional chemicals will be required to
treat the mud.
Spinning the bit at high RPM and circulating a cleaning pill at maximum rate is
the most effective technique in cleaning balled bit.

16
Fluid pills for cleaning a balled bit.

Selections of pills for reducing bit balling are outlined below. These pills function in
different ways, and can be used in combination as combined pill, to optimize the effect.
The volume of caustic and citric acid pill for washing should be calculated based on a
contact time of less than 3 minutes where the volume of pill for soaking should be limited
to around the bit and BHA.
1. Fresh Water Pill

A fresh water pill can be spotted around or circulated through the bit to disperse
the clays.
These pills work by allowing the clays to rapidly swell and disperse in the
freshwater environment. The mud system must be treated with extra chemicals to
compensate for water used (maintain chemical concentrations) if the pill is taken
back into the active mud system.
2. Brine Pill
A saturated KCL brine pill (1.15 S.G.) can be spotted around and soak for 10-15
minutes or circulated through the bit. The high concentrations of KCL will have
dehydrating and dispersing effect on the clays sticking to the bit. The best use of
such pills is by initially soaking the bit/BHA in the pill followed by rapid rotation
and circulation to wash off the adhering clays.
3. Detergent Pill
Usually such a pill is made up from active mud with 5 - 10 % detergent added and
circulated straight through the bit, or the entire mud system can be treated with 2
- 3 % as a preventive measure.
Detergent pills can also be made up in brine, where the bit/BHA should be allowed
to soak in the pill. The detergent acts by reducing surface tension thus reducing
the sticking tendency of the clay. These pills can readily be viscosified and weighed
as required. The detergent may have other negative effects on the mud system
(i.e. foaming, polymer performance etc.).
4. Caustic Soda Pill

A seawater or brine pill containing 10-20 kg/l of Caustic Soda can be spotted
around the bit/BHA and/or circulated through the bit at high rate. The rapid and
extensive swelling causes the clay to dis-integrate and disperse into the pill. The
best use of such pills is made by initially soaking the bit/BHA in the pill followed by
rapid rotation and circulation to wash off adhering clays. The mud system must be
treated with extra chemicals to compensate for high PH if the pill is taken back into
the active mud system
5. Citric Acid Pill

A fresh water or brine containing 100-200 kg/l Citric acid can be spotted around
the bit/BHA and/or circulated through the bit at high rate. It is designed to destroy
the adhesive bond between the clay solids, and any encapsulating polymers. The
low pH of the pill (+/- 2.5) will require extra treatments to the drilling fluid. This
type of pill will tend to disperse formation (washouts!), and will destroy drilling
fluid polymers if incorporated into the drilling fluid without rapidly buffering the pH.

17
6. Dispersant Pill
A highly concentrated dispersant pill using 35 kg/l of lignosulfonate with seawater
or brine can fully disperse balled up clays. Such a pill should be made with Caustic
Soda (or Lime/Soda Ash) to a high pH of 11. The best use of such pills is by
initially soaking the bit/BHA in the pill followed by rapid rotation and circulation to
wash off the adhering clays. This type of pill would not normally be used in a no
dispersed drilling fluid, as mixing it into the active mud can rapidly alter the mud
properties. The majority of polymer systems are run non-dispersed. Such pills can
create washouts in the wellbore.
7. Nut Plug Pill

Pill made with 60-120 kg/l of walnut Fine or 10 -20 kg/l of Walnut course, this can
also be added to the active system. The action of the Walnut is to physically erode
the clay sticking to the bit. The use of walnut may be restricted by the MWD tool.
Best use of the Walnut pill is rotating at maximum speed while pumping the pill
through the bit and past the BHA.
7.13 Drilling hard stringers

Locally hard stringers may be encountered. These stringers can be marble, hematite,
chert layers, iron carbonate. With the exemption of marble, hard stringers are usually
deposited as locally occurring lenses. Patience is best remedy.
Reduce RPM to 60-90 and WOB by 50% when hitting a stringer.

Increase WOB after +/- 0.5 m
o Be aware of Stickslip and bit wear
o Distance may be adjusted according to BHA components in the drillstring
such as near bit stabilizers or gauge pads on MWD.
Reduce circulation rate to avoid washout and ledges around the stringer
o If low circulation rate has occurred for a longer period of time, evaluate to
pull above and circulate hole clean
Combine RPM and WOB to avoid /minimize torsional shocks and risk of damage to
the tools. Change one parameter at a time
Reduce WOB, RPM and flow when breaking through stringer until bit and near bit
stabilizer have passed.
When through stringer, consider reaming ledges at the start and end of stringer or
of entire stringer, depending on resistance seen while passing.
Be aware of swabbing in stringer interval when POOH.
7.14 Open hole sidetracking time drilling

Selecting the location of the sidetrack is the most critical task when sidetrack is required.
Well bore characteristics such as a surrounding formations, inclination and dogleg severity
must be taken into consideration:
Select a point where a mini dogleg is situated in the opposite direction of the
proposed sidetrack.

18
Select Tool Face orientation 180 of the original TF when original drilled preferably
on the low side of the hole (TF 110 240)
Run in hole with a cement stinger and place a 100-meter cement plug as described in
cementing chapter of the manual.
Run in hole with an dedicated sidetracking BHA (PDM).
Preparation for time drilling:

Run in hole with minimum flow (to prevent plugged nozzle) and tag cement
When noticing resistance, increase flowrate and start rotary
Dress off cement till kick off point, space out DP to drill at least 2 singles without
having to make a connection
Create a ledge by reciprocation of the string with an orientated Tool Face for at
least half an hour (interval +/- 10 m )
Start time drilling
Time drilling sequence with orientated tool face:

0.15 m/hr for two hours
0.30 m/hr for two hours
0.50 m/hr until a minimum of 60% formation cuttings is reported
Continue at 1 m/h for one hour
If no positive indications of formation in the cuttings are seen, remain at 0.5 m/hr. If
indications of the start of a sidetrack are seen, the ROP can be increased with 0.3 m/h
each hour until the sidetrack is confirmed.
Calculate the slide distance required, drill the rest in rotary without picking up above the
kick off point.
7.15 Re-entry after a dedicated sidetrack

Re-entry with a PDM BHA, orientate the BHA above the kick-off point and run dry into the
kick off.
Re-entry with a rotary steerable tool, run in sidetrack dry and set rotary steerable tool 1
meter above bottom.
If resistance is encountered, then:

Pick up string to above the kick off point.
Turn the string 1/2 a turn and work down torque
Retry entering the Kick off

19
7.16 Whipstock operations Window milling

In order to achieve a successful casing window milling operation, the following points
must be addressed and situations resolved prior to commencing with the casing exit
operation:
Select the best place to set and to orient the whipstock so that the window is
opposite good cement and competent formation. Avoid casing connections.
Consider hole angle and radius of curvature (build, drop, left or right turn) in the
vicinity of casing exit.
Select proper whip face orientation methods ( MWD, gyro )
Consider length of sidetracking assembly, anticipated mill wear and sidetrack
section trajectory (dogleg, deviation, inclination) to determine the depth of rat hole
after milling window.
Choosing the location for Sidetrack

Selecting the location of the sidetrack is the most critical task when the well requires a
window. While the ultimate goal is to reach the desired target, simply choosing a
sidetrack location based on the target formation alone can prove to be very unproductive.
Well bore characteristics such as surrounding formations, casing condition, inclination and
dogleg severity must also be taken into consideration
Whipstock must be placed in such a way that:

1. During milling no casing collar will be encountered. Preferably no centralisers are
installed on the casing trajectory to be milled.
2. A good cement bond is behind the casing. Bad cement or lack of it may result in
chunks of cement dropping on the milling assembly causing it to get jammed.
3. Competent formation is drilled into.
Note: The requirements stated above might implicate that additional logging (CBL) needs
to be performed to assess the quality of the cement bond and to determine the location of
the casing collars.
Hole Angle
Well bore inclination needs to be considered because sidetracking equipment will tend to
lie on the low side of the hole. On holes with more than two degrees of inclination at the
setting depth the whipstock should be oriented. It is best to orient the whipstock face
0 deg to 90 deg to the right or left of high side. It should not be set at an angle
greater than 105 degrees. This will prevent the top of the whip from falling towards the
centre of the well bore.
Hole angle plays an important role in any directional drilling operation. The same goes for
a milling operation. Ideally, one wants the milling assembly to be able to build away from
the whip face. Keeping the mill from extensively cutting the whip will mean that fewer
metal cuttings need to be removed from the hole and the life on the mill will be extended.
Orientation

20
Proper positioning of the whipstock assembly in highly deviated well bores is necessary
for successful milling of window and retrieval of the whipstock assembly. It is best to
place the window in a section of casing with least amount of dogleg severity. Orientation
of the whipstock face relative to high side depends on the radius of curvature (build, drop
and/or turn) near the casing window.
Subsequent BHAs
All of the well bore characteristics must be considered when designing and then
navigating the subsequent assemblies through the well bore, window and the open hole
after completing the sidetrack.
An acceptable milled window can be quantified as one that allows uninterrupted passage
of drilling and completion assemblies from the casing into the open hole and v/v.
The length of the rat hole should be sufficient to accommodate the drilling assembly to be
used in the lateral. If a full gauge drilling assembly is to be used it is important that the
window is opened up to full gauge. If a more flexible and under gage assembly is to be
used then having a large window is not as important.
Dogleg Severity
It is crucial to check the severity of all doglegs between the surface and the location of
the window. If the whipstock assembly hangs-up or becomes stuck in the hole above the
desired location, this can lead to serious problems. Check that all equipment can freely
pass through the borehole. In general, be very careful if severe doglegs exist in the hole.
A good guideline to follow is: doglegs greater than 7 deg/30m in the well bore require
checking with the equipment manufacturers for specifications and recommendations.
Equipment capabilities will vary based on diameter, length, and flexibility of the
components within the system.
Orientation Method
Proper positioning of the whipstock assembly in highly deviated well bores is necessary
for successful milling of the window and retrieval of the whipstock assembly. It is best to
place the window in a section of casing with least amount of dogleg severity. Orientation
of the whipstock face relative to high side depends on the radius of curvature (build, drop
and/or turn) near the casing window.
The whipstock assembly can be oriented to the proper direction for the sidetrack with
either a surface readout gyro or MWD system. Both systems are used by the industry in
sidetracking operations. The whipstock face is aligned to the orientation sub or MWD
collar as the sidetracking assembly is picked up.The gyro surveying tool is used in vertical
and angles wells and in magnetic interference environments.
The MWD system is used with multi-cycle bypass valve (MCBPV) in angled wells to survey
inclination and high side tool face for orienting the whipstock assembly.
Casing Conditions
The casing must be in good condition from the surface to the sidetrack depth. Casing in
poor condition can cause problems with tripping of milling and drilling assemblies,
orientation of the whipstock assembly and obtaining a secure setting of the
anchor/packer. Whipstock assembly movement during milling could result in a crooked or
lost window, preventing passage of a full gauge assembly into the open hole or being
unable to complete the well.

21
There should be no obstructions or deformations in the casing that would cause

movement of the whipstock. Typically, gauge ring, casing collar locator and casing scraper
runs are made prior to running the whipstock and milling bottom hole assemblies to
identify potential problems. Mimicking the stiffness of the whipstock assembly is essential
i.e. use plenty full gauge stabilizers below/ above the scraper to stiffen it.
A cement bond log should be run. A good cement bond enhances milling rates, but is not
required for a successful sidetrack. Partial absence of cement may cause chunks of
cement to drop down and jam the milling assembly In older casing, the more information
that can be obtained on the condition of the casing, the better. If any problems are
detected, a full gauge milling assembly from surface down to the location of the sidetrack
has to be run. The milling assembly should be at least as long & stiff as the longest
portion of the sidetracking assembly. The whipstock is usually the longest component.
Formation
Formation logs such as Gamma Ray, Sonic, and drill bit records are useful in determining
the best location for the sidetrack based on drillability.
High compressive strength of certain formations may warrant a change in the location of
the window due to the probability of low penetration rates. Sidetracking in extremely hard
or highly consolidated formations can prove to be disastrous. Mills can wear very rapidly,
dictating multiple mill runs in order to achieve a good window and a limited length of rat
hole. This situation cannot always be avoided. When studying the bit records, it is
important to note what type of bit was used. How well a bit performed is a very good
indication of the drillability of the formation outside the casing.
In general, if the strength of the formation exceeds 30,000 psi, then getting the
sidetracking mill into the formation to produce a rat hole could be difficult.
When the formation is much harder than the cement surrounding the casing, the mill can
sometimes become trapped in this cement seam because it will follow the path of least
resistance. Once the mill is trapped in this position, it is very difficult to initiate a
sidetrack.
A mill designed to constantly push away from the whip along with a bottom hole assembly
that wants to build angle will greatly help this situation.
Selecting the Sidetracking Equipment

The downhole equipment must be tailored to the available rig site equipment, well bore
characteristics and tasks. The casing parameters, well profile and tortuosity, dogleg
severity and drilling objectives dictate the type, size and flexibility of the sidetracking
equipment to be selected.
Setting Method
The whipstock assembly anchors are set either hydraulic or mechanical. The hydraulic
activated anchor may include packer elements to provide a casing to anchor seal. The
hydraulic method employs high pressure transmitted from the surface through the drill
string to the anchor to move the slips to the casing to prevent rotation or vertical
movement of the whipstock. The mechanical set anchor is set down on a bridge plug, fish
or cement plug. Weight releases the trigger and the slips will bite in the casing. Additional
weight is then set down to shear the bolt between the mill and the whipstock causing the
slips to set set firmly in the casing. Milling can then begin.

22
Retrieval Equipment and Method

A whipstock assembly with a retrievable anchor can be retrieved using a tool that has a
box tap section that attaches and pulls the whipstock and a cut-lip guide to lift the
whipstock off the casing wall.
The whipstock anchor is released by applying overpull that results in the anchor slips
being retracted. A low jarring load may be needed should it not release.
If the anchor does not release, the hinge pin between the whipstock and anchor is
designed to shear. With the whipstock removed, a fishing neck is looking up that can be
engaged by standard overshot assembly.
Mud Properties
Milling mud is not required for a successful sidetrack, but the drilling fluid must be in good
condition, clean and compatible with formation surrounding the milled window. Drill pipe
filters screens and suction pit screens should be used to remove all forms of swarf and
debris. It is essential to circulate the well clean prior to drilling ahead to ensure that the
fluid is the hole is in good condition. Any debris that enters the drill string can cause
problems for the sidetracking systems, especially on MWD systems.
Post- Window Milling Precautions

Pick up the desired drilling assembly and continue normal drilling operations. It is
recommended that a bit or stabilizer is not rotated down the face of the whipstock. Doing
so may damage the edge or catch on the whipstock. Treat a whipstock window as a
casing shoe. Slack off and pull through the window slowly and carefully noting any
unusual drag. If drag is encountered when running bent housing motors through a
window, pull up, align the bend in the motor with the whipstock face and the bottom hole
assembly will pass through the window with minimal drag. This may require a few
attempts of string turns.
If the window and rat hole have to be cement squeezed, the window must be reopened
with a milling assembly and not a roller cone bit.
7.17 Precautions entering or exiting a casing window

Entering:
1. Always be aware of the Whipstock top, Bottom and Face orientation.
2. With directional or Bent BHA always orient bit towards opening before reaching the
Whipstock top.
3. Always enter very slowly watching weight indicator closely
4. Do not set down more than 4 mT on top of Whipstock
5. In case you tag the Whipstock top:
Pick up BHA above Whipstock top, rotate -turn bottom and try again (Repeat
5 to 15 times).
Pick up BHA above Whipstock top, begin slow rotation (approx. 15 rpm), slack
off slowly, and try again.
If cement or sand fill is suspected, pick up above Whipstock top, begin slow
rotation and circulation, and cautiously wash down and through the window.
Contact Whipstock supplier

23
Exiting:
1. Always be aware of Whipstock Bottom, Top, and face orientation.
2. Always exit very slowly, watching weight indicator closely.
3. With directional or Bent BHA, always orient bit towards window opening before
reaching Bottom of Whipstock.
4. If difficulty with exiting your window occurs, contact Whipstock supplier / Milling &
fishing specialist.
DO NOT:
1. Rotate stabilizers or bit across the Whipstock face.
2. Set weight down on the Whipstock and attempt to rotate.
3. Torque up on the Whipstock

24
Appendix 1 13 3/8 Trackmaster Plus Sidetracking System

Generic Procedure
Prepared by : Torodd Solheim - Smith Services Fishing & Remedial Services
Before Running the System

Ensure that for TrackmasterPlus Operations, a risk assessment has been done and that
a lifting plan has been completed by the rig and deck crew. Make sure a toolbox talk is
held with all crews prior to any operation being undertaken.
Perform a full bore and scraper run. It is recommended that this be done with the
following assembly: The mills and stabilisers would be sized to suit the casing drift.
Item Qty Description Connections Vendor

1 1 12 1/4" OD Window Mill 6 5/8 Reg Pin Smith
2 1 13 3/8 Casing Scraper 6 5/8 Reg Box x Smith
6 5/8 Reg Pin
3 1 12 OD Watermelon Mill 6 5/8 Reg Box x Smith
6 5/8 Reg Pin
4 1 12 OD Watermelon Mill 6 5/8 Reg Box x Smith
6 5/8 Reg Pin
5 1 Crossover 6 5/8 Reg Box x Smith
6 5/8 Reg Box
6 1 8 OD MWD Tool (Optional) 6 5/8 Reg Pin x Customer
6 5/8 Reg Box
7 9 8 Drill Collars 6 5/8 Reg Pin x Customer
6 5/8 Reg Box
8 1 8 Drilling Jar 6 5/8 Reg Pin x Customer
6 5/8 Reg Box
9 1 Crossover 6 5/8 Reg Pin x Customer
5 1/2 FH Box
10 12 5 1/2 OD Heavy Weight Drill Pipe 5 1/2 FH Pin x Customer
5 1/2 FH Box
11 TBC 5 1/2 OD Drill Pipe to Surface 5 1/2 FH Pin x Customer
5 1/2 FH Box
Note: It is strongly recommended that if possible the scraper be run past setting depth,
by 50 ft, then pulled back and circulation commenced. This is to ensure any debris is
pushed below the setting depth and not circulated back up past the scraper.
The TrackmasterPlus can be set at any depth. It is set hydraulically therefore there is no
requirement to interact with a cement or bridge plug to initiate the setting of the
Whipstock. As with any Whipstock sidetrack the TrackmasterPlus system should be set
between 2 casing collars.
This is to ensure integrity between the anchoring packer and the milling and the drilling
assemblies. Casing coupling positions may be pre-verified using a CCL or from the casing
tally (if this is sufficiently accurate). Should a CCL be used, correlation between drill pipe
and wire line depth will be necessary.

25
The Mud System

High viscosity "milling mud" is not required when side-tracking using the Trackmaster
System
Orientation of the Trackmaster

The Whipstock is usually orientated with a MWD. If the hole angle is less than 5 degrees
then a gyro may be used in conjunction with a UBHO sub. It should be noted that newer
MWD tools can read at angles of less than 5 degrees but this should be checked and
evaluated on an individual well basis.
Preparation
Check with the rig that ditch magnets have been installed. This will protect the
pumps from re-circulated cuttings.
Measure all component parts of the bottom hole assembly
Prepare whipstock assembly as per Smith procedure.
Test the MWD and Multi cycle By-Pass valve as per Smith procedure.
Note: If there is a problem with the signal or the pulse is interfering with the MCBPV it
may be necessary to run in the hole a further 5 to 10 stands to achieve a dampening
effect from the hydrostatic that will allow the tools to function. Normally the same flow
used for the MWD reading is sufficient for indexing the valve. As an example a cycling
rate expected with seawater would be 1100 lpm with 1 1/8" nozzle. One mud pump is
easiest and quickest for cycling valve. Switch pump off and when pressure is at zero,
bring pumps back on steadily to the previously recorded flow rate. Repeat until the fifth
cycle, remembering the valve starts in cycle 2. Ensure the driller notes the trend of pump
volume versus pressure.
Safety note: Ensure the driller is aware that when the by-pass valve closes he
will be pumping against a closed system with a small volume and the pressure
will rise very rapidly.
Running Procedure - TrackmasterPlus Fastrack Mill and Whipstock pick up

sequence:
1. Pick up the Trackmaster Mill and Running Tool horizontally to the drill floor using
the crane.
2. Install a lifting cap in the 6 5/8 Reg Box of the running tool.
3. Connect the tugger to the lifting cap and pick up while lowering on the crane. Once
in vertical position supported by the tugger remove the transit cover from the mill.
4. Check that there is a blank plug in the hydraulic connect. This will stop any ingress
of mud when lowered through rotary.
5. Run assembly through the rotary and secure with slips and dog collar.
6. Pick up the previously stood back assembly and make up the Kelly valve chain
tong tight. Pick up and torque up fully, the connection between the running tool
and the mill. Hold the assembly back, clear of the rotary.
Note: Do not sit the assembly down on the deck as the knock off plugs are exposed and
may be damaged.

26
7. Pick up the TrackmasterPlus Whipstock and Anchor Assembly horizontally to the

drill floor with the crane and once at the v-door entrance connect the rig floor
tugger to the certified lifting eye on the back of the Whipstock.
8. Pick up on the tugger whilst lowering on the crane to transfer the load from the
crane to the tugger. Ensure that the anchor does not come into contact with the
rig structure at any point to avoid damage to the anchor body.
9. When vertical set down lightly on the floor to stop movement of the suspended
assembly and then remove packer protection cover. Check the anchor visually for
any defects.
10. Run in the hole and when hook slot is level with rotary, slide the false rotary table
into position and install the support pin and then gently lower the assembly on to
the pin.
11. Remove the tugger from the transit hook (with the tugger still attached)
12. Stab the millhead per Smith procedure.
13. Have the driller pick up slowly and take the complete weight of the assembly with
the blocks.
14. Remove the blank cap from the mill and make up the hydraulic hose to the mill
and then to the Whipstock.
Note: For ease of fitting, the hydraulic hose may be fitted to the mill head while
suspended in the blocks, just prior to mating with the Whipstock face.
15. Remove the false rotary table and scribe a line from the Whipstock face to the top
of the running tool.
16. Run the assembly down and set the running tool in the rotary and secure with slips
and a dog collar.
17. Back out the Kelly valve, with it still closed, and stand the assembly to the side.
The valve can be opened at this point to allow any residual fluid to drain from the
string.
18. Fill up the whip, mill and running tool with clean base oil or water, depending on
well fluid.
19. Check the MWD for the offset correction and record this information. Run in the
hole with the rest of assembly.
20. Make up the remainder of the BHA and run in the hole under controlled conditions,
2-3 minutes per stand. Watch the weight indicator carefully and record up-weights
regularly. Monitor the trip-tank for the correct fill up. Extra caution should be
observed when at the BOPs and casing cross-overs etc.
Note: Ensure that when the string is being set in, or picked up out of, the slips that
there are no sudden shocks to the system. Continual shocking can weaken the
shear bolt in the system.
To mitigate the risk of the pipe slipping through the slips, the following is recommended:
a safety clamp should be used until ~ 25 T of assembly & pipe have been run
Slips Dies should be checked on a regular basis and cleaned as necessary
The backside of the slips and the I.D. of the Rotary Bowls should also be doped on
a regular basis.

27
Item Qty Description Connections Vendor

1 13 3/8" TrackmasterPlus 3rd party
Whipstock system c/w DPS
Packer Sub Assembly
2 1 12 1/4 OD Trackmaster Mill
6 5/8 Reg Pin 3rd party
3 1 Trackmaster Running Tool
6 5/8 Reg Box x 6 3rd party
5/8 Reg Box
4 1 X Over Sub 5 FH Pin x 6 5/8 Customer
Reg Box
5 1 5 1/2 OD Heavy Weight Drill 5 FH Pin x 5 1/2 Customer
Pipe FH Box
6 1 X Over Sub 5 FH Pin x 6 5/8 Customer
Reg Box
1 8" OD Multi-Cycle By Pass 6 5/8 Reg Pin x 6 3rd party
Valve 5/8 Reg Box
7 1 Crossover 6 5/8 FH Pin x 6 5/8 Customer
Reg Box
8 1 8 OD MWD Tool 6 5/8 Reg Pin x 6 5/8 Customer
Reg Box
9 9 8 Drill Collars 6 5/8 Reg Pin x 6 5/8 Customer
Reg Box
10 1 Crossover 6 5/8 Reg Pin x 5 Customer
1/2 FH Box
11 12 5 1/2 OD Heavy Weight Drill 5 FH Pin x 5 Customer
Pipe FH Box
12 TBC 5 1/2 OD Drill Pipe to 5 FH Pin x 5 Customer
Surface FH Box
Example 13 3/8" TrackmasterPlus Assembly c/w Trackmaster Tri Mill
HWDP may be used in place of the Drill Collars

Bottom Hole Assembly Weight should be at least 35,000 lbs.
Note: If no scraper run was performed and there is any doubt about the condition of the
mud or the cleanliness of the hole e.g. if it is thought that scale, settled barite or drilled
solids may be present, then consideration should be given to including a Float Valve in the
above assembly. This will ensure that there is no ingress of debris from the hole to the
string which could potentially pack-off the MCBPV and prevent the setting of the anchor.
The valve should be positioned between the MWD Valve and the MCBPV. If the valve is
installed then the string will have to top filled on the trip in the hole. This should be done
using a casing fill up line or similar the top drive should not be connected and circulation
should not be broken whilst RIH
Note: No Jars should be run with this assembly.
Setting & Milling Sequence for Hydraulic Whipstock
The bottom of the anchor should be positioned ~ 1 m above a casing collar.

28
1. At the required setting depth record the up and down weights and mark pipe for
the required setting depth.
2. Run the string 3-5 m down past the mark and then come back up to the mark.
3. Break circulation slowly, less than 10 spm, and once returns have been recorded
increase the flow rate steadily to activate the MWD. Keep the pumps running
during the orientation process to obtain continuous tool face readings and to avoid
unnecessarily cycling of the valve. This is not essential but it will save the cycles of
the valve should they be required in case of an unforeseen event.
4. Obtain a reading and record the direction of whip face. To achieve the desired
orientation turn the string as required and then work the torque through the
string, by first slacking off then picking up. Work the string up and down as
required to ensure the torque is transmitted to the Whipstock and then re-survey.
Patience is required at this time.
5. When whip is at required orientation, slack the string down past the setting depth
mark and then pick back up to it.
6. Cycle the pumps off and on and re-check the orientation. If it is okay continue to
index MCBPV to the closed position.
Note: High pressures may be experienced during the setting sequence. All
personnel must be made aware and all necessary precautions taken.
7. When the valve has closed switch off the pumps and allow pressure to settle, then
slowly pressure up to 240 bar. Hold and maintain this pressure while going
through the setting and shearing procedures.
8. Slack off to 10 12 T below previous down weight, then pick up to 10 12 T over
up weight.
9. Continue to pick up and shear off of the whip. If the bolt has not sheared off after
its rated value of 35 T plus 50%, then work the string by slacking off and picking
up several times to fatigue and weaken the bolt.
10. As soon as mill has sheared from whip, monitor for the pressure drop as the
hydraulic hose ruptures, and once observed bring the pumps back on and maintain
a circulating flow rate giving a pressure of around 140 bar +/-. This will stop
MCBPV opening and having to re-index through its six cycles to close it for milling.
This will be achieved with a minimal flow rate as the only means of circulating at
this point is through the ruptured hose
11. Pick up 3 m and then come down with 80-100 Rpm and observe the knock off
plugs breaking as the whip top is contacted. The pumps can now be increased to
the milling flow rate. Record the contact depth as the top of Whipstock.
12. Pick back up 3 m and record all the string parameters at the milling flow rates.
Start Milling
Mill through the window and then drill a rathole, usually 15 to 20 ft beyond the end of
whipface although this can be varied depending on individual requirements
Typical milling parameters for 13 3/8" Trackmaster

Rotary: 80 130 Rpm
Weight: Zero 12 T.

29
Maximum weight on mill 17 T.

Flow Rate: 1500 3000 lpm
Note: When the mill reaches the end of the whip face the quality of the cement/formation
must be assessed. If the ROP in the formation is unusually high i.e. greater than 7 m/hr,
then milling and washing should be kept to a minimum in case the formation in the
window area is washed out or made unstable.
Milling Completed
Check the passage of the mills through the window with different parameters, recording
any drag and torque observed.
Rotating with pumps on.
No rotation with pumps on.
No rotation and no pumps on.
Circulate bottoms up with the mill above the window then pull out of the hole. A
Formation Integrity Test, if required, can be performed prior to pulling out of the hole.
Out of the hole

Assess the mill condition to evaluate if a remedial clean up trip is required.
Allowable mill wear across the 3 mills is:
5/8" under gauge on the lead
3/8" under gauge on the follow mill
1/4" under gauge on the dress mill
Factors affecting the mill wear such as formation type and the length of rat hole drilled
should be taken into consideration
Drilling Assembly
Make up drilling assembly and run in the hole. Take care at all times when passing
through window with any bottom hole assembly.
Bent housing motors may require to be orientated in order to allow them to pass
the window without hindrance.
If it can be avoided, drill bits and stabilisers should not be rotated down whip face.
PDC Drill bits should not be rotated down the whip face if it can be avoided
For information
Various steerable drilling systems have been used, without problems, in conjunction with
our Whipstock systems. It has been observed that very occasionally a drilling assembly
requires to be orientated to allow the drilling assembly to pass the whip face.

30

1
8 Drilling fluids
Prepared by WEP
Author:
Version: Feb 2015
Verified:

8 Drilling fluids | Version:Feb 2015
2
8 Drilling fluids ..................................................................................................... 3

8.2 HSE........................................................................................................... 4
8.4 Drilling Fluids Management Guidelines ........................................................... 5
8.5 ECD management guidelines ........................................................................ 6
8.6 Lost Circulation Material............................................................................... 6
8.6.1 Loss Prevention Guidelines ..................................................................... 7
8.6.2 LCM Mixing Guidelines ........................................................................... 7
8.7 Functions of water based mud additives ......................................................... 8
8.8 Trouble shooting in fresh water drilling fluids .................................................. 9
8.9 Functions of oil based mud additives ........................................................... 10
8.10 Trouble Shooting in Oil based Drilling Fluids ................................................. 10
8.11 Solids Control Guidelines ........................................................................... 10
8.12 Quality Control of Bulk Materials at the Rig Site ............................................ 13
8.12.1 Water / Acid Test ................................................................................ 13
8.12.2 Weighing Method ................................................................................ 13
8.12.3 Sampling on Arrival ............................................................................. 13
Appendix 1 Generic PETROM drilling fluids systems and applications ....................... 14
Appendix 2 Contamination of water based drilling fluids ........................................ 19
App. 2.1 Carbonate / Bicarbonate contamination .................................................... 19
App. 2.2 Cement contamination ............................................................................ 20
App. 2.3 Hardness .............................................................................................. 21
Appendix 3 Formulation & Procedure for LCM Pills ................................................ 23
App. 3.1 Non-Reservoir Sections ........................................................................... 23
App. 3.2 Reservoir Sections ................................................................................. 24
App. 3.3 Formulation & Procedure for Gunk Squeezes ............................................. 24
App. 3.4 Formulation & Procedure for Barite Plugs, Synthetic Mud (1m3) ................... 25
Appendix 4 Petrom NADF handling procedures and responsibilities ......................... 26

3
8 Drilling fluids
The correct selection and maintenance of drilling fluids is a critical element in the Petrom
drilling operations. The drilling fluid main purposes are to maintain overbalance and to
give maximum hole cleaning and ROP performance.
The table below summarizes the different functions of drilling fluid and how these
functions can be optimized.
# Function Effective Control
a) Determine pump rates by hole cleaning requirements whilst
preventing discharge of mud across shale shakers.
Removal of b) Raise by adding viscosifiers e.g. bentonite or CMC HV.
1
cuttings c) Lower by dilution or adding dispersants, eg. CFL
d) Reduce PV by removing solids.
e) Viscous slugs (cleaning pills) may be circulated in top hole.
a) Raise mud weight by adding weighting materials never by
using drilled solids
b) Lower by dilution and effective use of solids removal
2 Pressure control
equipment.
c) Centrifuge to remove low gravity solids or barites.
d) Constant monitoring of all mud tank levels.
a) Lower by adding bentonite, stabilise etc.
b) For surface hole utilise the plastering effect of bentonite, or
soltex (air blown asphalt).
c) Maintain density by adding weighting materials or removal
of solids.
3 Wellbore stability
d) Solids removal or dilution.
e) Establish optimal mud weight. Increase mud weight
depending on geological conditions.
f) Observe returns and tank levels, and monitor drill speed
logs, torque etc.
a) Facilitate cementing operation by assuring proper
Cementing and displacement of drilling fluids and by using low rheology
mud, prior cementing.
4 wireline
b) Assure retrieval of correct reservoir and geological data.
operations
c) Facilitate wireline operations by having optimum (low)
rheology.
Suspend cuttings
Use viscosifier/ disperser to maintain properties, to avoid
5 and weighting
barite/solids sag and to reduce swab and surge pressures.
material
Hydraulic energy
Establish appropriate rheological parameters to ensure proper
6 transmission to
flow rate for directional tools and bit.
BHA
Cool and
a) Use flow rate as per bit company recommendations.
7 lubricate the bit
b) Mud cake should be thin and tough.
and drillpipe
a) Control by good use of solids control equipment/ addition of
Prevent dilution.
8 formation b) Use of non-damaging products (e.g. calcium carbonate).
damage c) Lower by adding additive or sized bridging agents.
d) Proper mud selection with respect to formation damage.
9 Environmental Use of environmental friendly products

4
Impact
Person
Responsible
Prepare and maintain the drilling
Mud Engineer Drilling Supervisor
fluid properties as per job program
Conduct routine mud testing,
monitoring and reporting
Ensure that rig personnel adhere
to the safe handling procedures for Driller, Asst Driller Drilling Supervisor
chemicals and equipment
Perform quality control checks of
drilling fluid, base oil & bulk Mud Engineer Drilling Supervisor
chemicals
Maintain inventory of all drilling
fluid chemicals and additives
Ensure that HSE requirements are
complied with on site
Prepare daily mud reports Mud engineer Drilling Supervisor
Ensure that solids control
Solids control
equipment are run efficiently and Drilling Supervisor
engineer
when needed
8.2 HSE
It is important that drilling fluids are mixed correctly and safely. A pre-job toolbox
meeting shall be performed before any fluid mixing operation. The following points shall
be covered in the meeting:
The job procedure and responsibilities for the personnel involved in the operation.
Personnel have the correct Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) for the operation
as per MSDS of the chemicals used.
How discharges shall be handled in an environmentally friendly manner.
Health risks associated with chemical usage shall be discussed.
Availability of Eye wash stations and First Aid kits.
Appropriate signs shall be used for hazardous substances, stating risks and First
Aid treatment.
All chemicals shall have a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).
MSDS shall be displayed in rig yard, close to the mixers/chemicals area.

The Mud engineer shall ensure that the mud inventory is correct at the load-out
point and that dry goods are as per program.
A detailed mud program shall be included for each hole section as an integral part
of the drilling program. No variation from the mud program is permitted without
approval of the PETROM Drilling Supervisor.
Ensure that mud program also covers contingencies for unplanned events.

5
The Drilling Supervisor shall as a matter of daily routine, discuss all mud
requirements/ treatments with the mud engineer.
Ensure that there are sufficient amounts of mud-treating chemicals and weighting
materials at the wellsite.
Ensure that there is adequate lost circulation material and cement at the wellsite.
Review mud testing requirements with the Mud engineer. Also verify that the mud
lab is adequate and equipment in good working condition.
Review mud sampling and weighting with rig personnel.
Review systems monitoring equipment and emergency shutdown systems with rig
crew, mudloggers and mud engineer.
Review piping and valves, pumps, all mud related equipment and tanks with all
relevant personnel.
Verify that data is available for system capacities and volumes.
Ensure that there is sufficient handling equipment for the anticipated mixing.
8.4 Drilling Fluids Management Guidelines

A correct and up-to-date inventory of the drilling fluid products must be kept at all
times.
Drilling fluid additives such as barite, bentonite etc should be checked for
contamination prior to use.
It is recommended that liquid emulsifiers be delivered to the rig site in bulk
containers to reduce handling risk of individual drums by rig personnel.
Several types of additives should be loaded-out.
Never transport barite in tanks that previously held cement, except in an
emergency.
If returns are lost, immediately fill the annulus with water. The hole must be filled
with a known volume of fluid. Do not pull the drillpipe out until the hole is full.
The Drilling Supervisor and Driller shall be notified immediately if there is change
in mud weight, chloride content, gas or any other property that may indicate
significant changes in the formation drilled and/ or entry into over-pressurized
zones.
A full mud check shall be carried out three times during a 24 hour interval whilst
drilling. Maintain the following generic guidelines:
o 6rpm = 1.2 -1.3 x hole size
o rpm = 1 -1.5 x hole size.
o Mudcake < 1mm
o 600 rpm = ~60
o Sand content < 0.5%
o ES(SBM) > 600 V
o Progressive gels
o HTHP filtrate As low as possible, without water in the filtrate
Mud weight and funnel viscosity shall be recorded at least every 30 minutes at the
flowline and suction pit.
When circulating gas cut mud and/ or bottoms up, the following data shall be
recorded: mud weight, maximum gas, pit level, interested volume, depth and
time.
The Mud engineer shall check mud weight at the shakers and downstream of the
degasser continuously when circulating gas cut mud and/ or bottoms up.

6
8.5 ECD management guidelines

Equivalent Circulating Density (ECD) is the effective density exerted by a circulating fluid
against the formation that takes into account the pressure drop in the annulus above the
point being considered. Fluid losses and kicks during drilling operations can be very
severe especially when drilling in slim holes, fractured formations or partially depleted
reservoirs where the margin between fracture gradient and pore pressure gradient is
small.
ECD is calculated as follows:
ECD = 0.981 x + P/0.1xD [bar/10m]
Where:
= density of mud [kg/l]
P = pressure drop in annulus between depth D and surface [bar]
D = true vertical depth [m]
ECD is used as a tool to ensure that formation fracture gradients are not exceeded
thereby reducing lost circulation and expensive non-productive rig time.
The following guidelines shall be followed for proper ECD management:

Ensure that all relevant personnel have a good understanding of ECD, to assist in
identifying well control situations and maximizing drilling time.
Review the drilling program for anticipated pore pressures and areas of anticipated
loss circulation.
Calculate the ECD each shift and update when entering critical intervals of known
and suspected loss potential i.e. fractured, high permeability or abnormally low
pore pressure.
If losses are anticipated (from experience), reduce mud weight by the calculated
ECD while staying above the expected pore pressure.
Further mud weight reductions, with the approvals, may be made cautiously
subject to required hydrostatic pressure required for the section.
If the annulus is slightly underbalanced, when pump is shut down for a connection,
the annulus will flow. In that case, consider the following:
o Increase mud density by ECD margin prior to making the connection.
o Making a connection by stripping through the annular with pressure on the
annulus. However, this is ONLY recommended if planned and approved.
Before tripping, make certain that the required drilling mud weight plus trip margin
is increased to accommodate the lack of ECD, if necessary.
8.6 Lost Circulation Material

Lost circulation is defined as the downhole loss of whole mud i.e. loss of all mud
components ranging from the mud filtrate to the weighting, bridging and drill solids.
It is one of the most expensive problems in drilling with the possibility of large quantities
of drilling fluid being lost before the losses are cured or reduced to a reasonable level. It
may occur at any time during drilling, running casing and cementing and can result in:
1. The loss of hydrostatic head may result in a wellbore instability or well control
situation.
2. The drop in mud level prevents accurate measurement and monitoring of the fluid
level in the hole.
3. Costs associated with rig time spent while curing losses will increase.
4. Costs associated with materials, treatments and contractor services needed to cure
losses and build replacement mud will increase.

7
Causes of Lost Circulation

Natural fractures taking drilling fluids.
Mud weight too high.
Solids build-up, causing high ECD.
Bridging, packing-off balled-up drilling assemblies and stabilizers
Closed in kicks with casing strings too shallow.
Abnormally low pressure gradients.
Running in drillpipe or casing too fast - surge.
Breaking circulation infrequently while running pipe.
Poor mud rheology from high yield points and gel strengths.
Measures for Mitigating Losses
Recognize initial indicators of lost circulation and take prompt action.
Identify the likely cause of the problem as quickly as possible. If the problem is
due to formation properties i.e. too high mud weight, high ECD take and/or
propose corrective action.
If possible, estimate pressure of any known thief or pressure depleted zones
from available information obtained by listening to the hole.
8.6.1 Loss Prevention Guidelines

The following guidelines shall be followed in order to help prevent losses:
Ensure annulus is kept full.
Start up pumps slowly.
Rotate the pipe before starting up pumps to break the gels.
Watch ECDs and control mud weight.
Maintain and report the amount of losses, if losses are detected.
To prevent losses, align ROP with good hole cleaning practices to minimize
unnecessarily high ECD.
Plan for preventive measures upon reviewing the drilling program and offset well
data, and have resources on the rig before starting to drill the section.
Flow check and keep trend sheets on well flow to distinguish ballooning from well
control situations. Ballooning occurs when formations such as shale give back
lost fluid when wellbore pressure is reduced. This may bring hydrocarbons with it
which may be interpreted as a kick.
Only use acid soluble LCM in reservoir sections.
Treat the drilling fluids with also to prevent losses in areas with high potential of
losses.
Optimize the concentration, type and size of LCM.
8.6.2 LCM Mixing Guidelines
The amount of LCM that can be added to a mud depends on the mud properties. High gels
and plastic viscosity will keep the material in suspension. Because LCM is generally of low
density, excess material will tend to float on top if too much is added.
The following guidelines shall be considered for mixing LCM pills and avoiding the problem
of flotation:
1. Ensure the pill has sufficient viscosity to keep the low density material in
suspension before addition of LCM. Add appropriate viscosifier if required.

8
2. Add the material in stages. Stop after the desired concentration has been reached,
or when it is observed that the material cannot be held in suspension, or if it is
floating.
3. If a higher LCM content is desired, leave the pill to soak for a period of time and
then try adding more material.
4. All rigs shall have an LCM pill pit available and connected to the mud pumps for
wells where losses are expected.
Formulations and procedures that can be taken for the different types of losses are given
in appendix 2.
8.7 Functions of water based mud additives

Appli-
Product Description Function Comments
cation
Bentonite Montmorillonite Viscosifier / All Prehydrate in fresh water. Addition
clay Suspension of dry powder is ineffective.
Caustic Sodium PH Control All Protective clothing must be worn.
Soda Hydroxide Strong alkali and irritant.
CMC-HV Carboxy- Fluid loss CMS / Must be added slowly to prevent
CMC-LV Methyl- /Viscosifier CMF formation of fish eyes.
Cellulose
Starch Polymer Fluid loss All Subject to bacterial attack.
derived from
potato or corn.
Resinex Sulphonated High temp All May also help support walls of hole
Resin fluid loss by plastering, tough filter cake.
Additions start when Starch and
PAC become less effective.
PAC-HV Poly-Anionic- Fluid loss / All Add slowly to prevent formation of
PAC-LV Cellulose Viscosifier fish eyes.
PHPA Partially Encapsulating PHPA Shear degradable -add directly to
Hydrolysed Polymer active. Powder or liquid.
Poly
Acrylamide
KCl Potassium Clay Swelling All Only when required due to poor
Chloride Salt Inhibitor hole condition/sticky cuttings etc.
Biocide Various Prevent PHPA Prevent bacterial attack - mainly in
chemicals usedbacterial Starch treated systems.
attack
Bicarb Sodium Cement All Pre-treat system before drilling out
Bicarbonate contamination cement
Treat
Hardness
Bio Xanthan Gum - Viscosifier PHPA Only polymeric viscosifier which
Polymer natural bio- provides gel strength. Expensive.
polymer
Barite Barium Weighting All Inert high gravity mineral of
Sulphate agent average SG 4.2.

9
8.8 Trouble shooting in fresh water drilling fluids

Symptoms Possible Causes Recommended Treatment
High water loss Inadequate fluid loss
Add starch or CMC to system
(normal viscosity) control
Run solids removal equipment.
High water loss (high Inadequate fluid loss Prepare batch of new drilling fluid
viscosity) control and solids build up with excess starch or CMC and
add slowly to the system.
High fluid loss, filter Poor dispersion of Treat with thinner and starch or
cake thick and spongy bentonite CMC
High viscosity (high
Build up drilled solids in
PV, YP, solids, and Run solids control and dilution.
drilling fluid
gels)
High viscosity (high
Build up drilled solids in
PV, solids, normal YP, Run solids removal equipment.
drilling fluid
Gels)
High viscosity (normal
Excess interaction of solid
PV, solids, high YP, Add thinner cautiously.
particles in drilling fluid
Gels)
High viscosity (high Possibly contamination of
Run solids removal equipment.
PV, YP, normal solids, excess drilled solids and
Dilution may also be needed.
Gels) excess particles
Flocculation (high Grouping together of
water loss, high YP, bentonite particles,
Treat with soda ash and thinner.
gels, increase in caused by cement or
hardness and pH) calcium contamination
Unstable drilling fluid, Fluid viscosity unable to Increase YP viscosity by addition
barites settling out support barites of bentonite/bioploymer
Usually it is necessary to convert
Salt contamination
to salt-saturated system. Very
(high viscosity, gels,
Drilling salt formation small contaminations may be
water loss increased
treated with thinners, CMC and
salinity)
dilution.
Maintain viscosity and gels at
Bit heavily packed with
Bit balled lowest possible values. Add
cuttings
phosphate soap.
To prevent differential sticking
keep fluid loss at a minimum and
String against permeable maintain a thin, slick filter cake
Differential sticking formation, high solids by addition of fluid loss materials.
content, high fluid loss If stuck pipe occurs, spot pipe-
freeing agent across zone where
pipe is stuck.
Sloughing shale
Drilling fluid weight
(excessive cuttings of Increase drilling fluid weight, if
and/or hole cleaning
splintered shale, tight possible. Maintain low fluid loss.
inadequate
connections)

10
8.9 Functions of oil based mud additives

Product Description Application Comments
Base oil Mineral oil NADF Non-aromatic
Primary emulsifier Fatty acid NADF Environmental friendly
Secondary emulsifier Modified fatty acid NADF Environmental friendly
Wetting agent Special surfactant NADF
Alkalinity control Lime NADF >2 kg/m3 excess lime
Fluid loss control Fluid loss control NADF Environmental friendly
Organophilic bentonite Viscosifier NADF
Weighting agent Density control NADF Barite, CaCO3
Water activity control Brine NADF CaCl2, NaCl
8.10 Trouble Shooting in Oil based Drilling Fluids

Symptoms Possible Causes Recommended Treatment
Wellbore instability High or low values of Maintain adequate brine
water activity compared concentration
to the formation water
activity.
Insufficient viscosity Low concentration of Increase the concentration of
organophilic bentonite. organophilic bentonite and water
High temperature addition
Too high viscosity High concentration of fine Efficient use of solids control
solids equipment
Inefficient use of solids
control equipment
Water wet solids Addition of base oil as dilution
Addition of weighting Addition of wetting agent
agents without addition of
wetting solids
Decrease of oil/water Water influx Addition of base oil
ratio and of electric Addition of emulsifiers
stability
Water wet solids Insufficient wetting agent Addition of wetting agent
Increase of electrical stability
Shale shakers blinding Insufficient wetting agent Addition of wetting agent and
Low ROP at high depths primary emulsifier
Improper selection of Increase flow rate
shaker screens
Decrease of electrical Insufficient emulsifier or Addition of emulsifier or lime
stability lime concentration
8.11 Solids Control Guidelines

Solids control is the key to performance drilling. Excess solids cause decrease in ROP and
bit life and increase in viscosity, loss circulation, differential sticking and shale swelling.

11
Solids control equipment is used to minimise the volume of mud required to drill an
interval by concentrating drilled solids in their discard.
The most important points of focus when we talk about solids control performance are:
What is the maximum flow rate going to be?
Do we have enough shaker units to handle that volume once screens have been
inserted into the shakers?
Good shaker management is based on having sufficient contingency in the event
that a shaker suddenly breaks down
Rule of thumb if you can drill with 2 shakers on a land rig and handle maximum
flow rates then make sure to install 3 shakers so you have that contingency. No
contingency means the rig operation will slow down as fewer shakers means the
ability to handle maximum flow rates is then reduced by 50% and it's unlikely the
hole can be cleaned properly if flow rates have to be reduced to allow fewer
shakers to cope with the flow rate until the damaged shaker is repaired and put
back online.
When you have the comfort factor that you have contingency you have the ability
also to not only cope with optimum flow rates but you can also run much finer
mesh screens and remove more solids by having an extra shaker for contingency.
You can also handle higher flow rates if needed.
The API D100 cut point tells you how much drill solids are removed in microns so
remaining drill solids below that micron cut size are allowed to pass through the
screen openings and back into the mud system, and consequently back into the
hole. This is why it's important to run the finest screen size as possible. This
ensures good optimum shaker screen performance however you still need to deal
with the smaller solids that bypass the shaker screens because they are too small.
(Always use API square mesh screens -DO NOT USE OBLONG MESH SCREENS
BECAUSE THEY ALLOW TOO MUCH SOLIDS TO PASS THROUGH THE LARGER
SCREEN OPENINGS. (2 SQUARES = 1 OBLONG)
Even the small particle drill solids that bypass shaker screens lead to serious hole
issues/problems if not dealt with properly. These particles must be arrested and
removed as early as possible and the only equipment on the rig to do this
effectively is the centrifuges. Make sure there are two centrifuges on the rig for
optimum efficiency and contingency. These small particles if not removed lead to
rapid build up of low gravity solids (LGS) and this can lead to high plastic viscosity
readings thus affecting not only the rheology but also the ECD.
The most efficient shakers on the market today are balanced elliptical motion
shakers such as the NOV Brandt VSM 300 which incorporates use of two screen
decks (Scalping plus Primary fine screen deck) and when drilling with SBM they
have an attachment secondary drying screen that can be connected at the front of
the primary deck to allow cuttings to have an extra surface area with retention
strip of silicone to slow down the movement of the cuttings just long enough for
them to shake of some of the mud. Mud recovered is put back into the mud
system so cost savings to be seen when these attachment screens are fitted.
There are other so called equivalent balanced elliptical motion shakers on the
market however be aware they do not have a scalping deck to deal specifically
with the larger sized cuttings. This means the single screen deck has to cope with

12
the full load of cuttings so screen wear will be an issue leading to frequent
repairing/changing of shaker screens.
Centrifuge Performance depends on the knowledge and skill of the operator so
ensure there is always a fully trained and experienced Solids Control Engineer on
all Petrom operated rigs. Solids Control Engineers know how much feed rate to use
to feed the centrifuge. They know what bowl and scroll speeds to use for any given
mud weight, and they know this is important to know to be able to process as mud
and solids efficiently and avoid having torque issues and plugged centrifuge bowls
as a result of not having sufficient knowledge and skills to deal with that issue.
Centrifuges must be run to control the level of LGS in the mud to ensure the level
of LGS meets Operators mud specifications. Centrifuge operating hours must be
highlighted in the daily mud report and the LGS values must also be highlighted in
the daily mud report as well. The mud report must always show the hours each
shaker has been running as well as show what size screens are being used. It is
the responsibility of the Drilling Supervisor and/or Wellsite Drilling Engineer to
make sure these values are reported before accepting the daily mud report. If not
reported give it back to the mud engineer and make sure he corrects the report
before sending.
Solids Control Guidelines

Shakers shall be switched on immediately before RIH, in order to cope with mud
displaced by drill string and BHA.
Verify shaker capacity with anticipated volume of fluids to be planned in a given
hole section.
Ensure that all equipment is sized for maximum anticipated circulating rates. This
should include centrifugal pumps feeding cleaning equipment.
Verify that shaker screen sizes are appropriate for a given operation and
anticipated drilled cuttings.
Initially shakers should be dressed with relatively coarse screens, such as 80 mesh
for RIH and breaking circulation.
Flow shall be distributed evenly over all available shakers.
Ensure proper operation of mixing equipment, tanks, paddle mixers, strainers,
transfer pumps etc.
Screens shall be inspected regularly and changed out immediately when identified
as defective.
Special care must be taken to install proper and clean-screen support cushions.
Shaker screens shall be washed down regularly.
A water spray is occasionally used on shaker screens to remove gummy particles
(gumbo) from the screens. It should not be used routinely.
Note: Never use water with NADF/SBM.
Never bypass the shaker even during a trip. Bypassing the shaker allows slugs of
large solids past the shakers and into the active mud system.
Shakers shall be switched off immediately prior to tripping out of the hole.

13
8.12 Quality Control of Bulk Materials at the Rig Site

Tests for Bulk Materials Offshore
The following tests shall be carried out, or fully supervised, by the WSDE to guard against
possible wrong delivery of bulk material from supply vessels.
8.12.1 Water / Acid Test

Take some of the sample and rub it between the fingers under a stream of water.
If it is Bentonite the sample will hydrate and become sticky between the fingers.
Pour some Hydrochloric Acid (15%, diluted) on part of the sample on a watch
glass. Bubbling indicates cement, no bubbling indicates Barite.
8.12.2 Weighing Method

Fill a 100 ml graduated cylinder, with sample, to the 100 ml mark.
Knock the cylinder gently on the bench during filling to remove air, densifying the
contents.
Weigh contents.
Identify contents using table below.
Material Approximate Weight of 100 ml
Bentonite 11.5 g
Cement 180 g
Barite 260 g
The WSDE shall ensure that the type of material is checked before the new
delivery is loaded into the rig bins.
8.12.3 Sampling on Arrival

A representative sample can only be obtained, when taken from the tanks of the supply
vessel. Samples should be handed over on arrival of the supply vessel. If no samples are
available the following procedure shall be applied:
Clean all transfer lines by blowing off.
Transfer a small amount of bulk product and take a sample from the line as soon
as it is certain that the product is coming from the right supply vessel tank and is
not contaminated.
All sampling and testing shall be carried out, or fully supervised, by the WSDE.

14
Appendix 1 Generic PETROM drilling fluids systems and

applications
The following mud systems are being used at PETROM. The application for each system is
briefly described.
Spud Mud
Can incorporate use of water, caustic and native clays from the formation or it can
incorporate use of water, caustic and bentonite, CMC or a chemical thinner.
Application: for drilling large hole, surface intervals.
Gel/CMC System
Uses a bentonite base for fluid loss control and viscosity and Carboxy-Methyl Cellulose
(CMC) is a technical grade polymer to aid in tighter control of fluid loss as well as boost
viscosity. CMC is a cheap alternative to using more expensive premium grade polymers.
Xanthan gum is also used to provide gels and yield point values. To reduce progressive
gels a chemical thinner can be used. This type of mud system comes under the category
of Dispersed Polymer mud system.
Application: For drilling shallow wells or surface intervals such as 26 and/or 17 hole
size however both bentonite and CMC polymer have temperature limitations and if
temperature limits are exceeded the mud system will quickly degrade. This system cannot
be inhibited properly with salt but it can be inhibited with gypsum. The type of clay in the
formation to be drilled is very important because if you drill a dispersive type of clay then
you must avoid using a dispersed mud system otherwise you can over disperse the clay
particles and convert the mud to toothpaste consistency!
Non-Dispersed, Low Solids Polymer Mud System

Is the classic water base mud system that is the base fluid used to drill non-reactive
formations and deliver exceptional rheology in comparison to dispersed bentonite/polymer
systems. The main advantage for using this type of mud system particularly on
exploration wells is that it offers a high level of flexibility. It permits you to easily convert
to calcium, potassium, salt saturated or mixed salt mud system. This enables you to deal
with various issues that can suddenly present themselves when drilling exploration wells
where there is not enough information about the mineral types present in the formations.
Application: Can be used to drill 17 , 12 , 8 and smaller hole size intervals

providing there is no reactive clays present. If not too much reactive clay to be concerned
about this system has a high tolerance for drill solids since no bentonite is used in this
system. The polymers used are XC Polymer and PAC -R (regular) & PAC - SL (superlo) for
rheology and API fluid loss control. All mud companies can provide these generic products
although they will have their own brand names. This system can also be used as a drill-in
fluid where barite can be replaced with graded calcium carbonate to minimize damage to
the formation. Calcium carbonate can be dissolved with hydrochloric acid easily thus
effectively unplugging pore throats in the reservoir for example. This system can be
quickly converted also to an inhibited drilling fluid by adding KCl, NaCl, Gypsum, PHPA or
Glycol without any problem.

15
KCl Polymer Mud System

Is the most inhibitive water base mud system that was used extensively in the North Sea
since the 1970s and it was also improved when Shell Oil Company identified PHPA co-
polymer to be incorporated into this system. KCL (Potassium Chloride) provides the
inhibitive potassium ions that fit perfectly between the lattice openings of the clay
platelets which then cause the platelets to collapse so they are unable to imbibe free
water from the mud that would otherwise cause swelling. These days mud companies are
using glycol to improve inhibition as well as lubricity instead of using PHPA polymer. I see
applications for using PHPA because it is an encapsulating polymer that gives extra
assurance the particles are inhibited especially when broken by the bit, as well as particle-
particle collision in the annulus. If you have a need for encapsulating polymer then specify
the KCL/PHPA system. You can drill moderate levels of water sensitive shales simply using
this KCL polymer system as a stand alone option with the need for any additional
products to extend the level of inhibition if deemed to be not necessary. This will enable
you to run a fit-for-purpose mud system. This can be easily established long before
tenders are issued by engaging in technical discussions with the mud company technical
representatives. We do however have extensive information from our technical library and
by communicating with our geologists, mud loggers etc. We also have extensive offset
field data to work with to help us make better, educated decisions on mud system choice.
Application: For drilling moderate to highly reactive clay formations successfully, through
use of chemical inhibitors to prevent clay swelling that can lead easily to stuck pipe
scenario.
KCL/PHPA Mud System

Is an extended version of KCl Polymer mud system which makes use of PHPA
encapsulating polymer which I have not seen used here in Romania but I have used it and
know other operators use it in many parts of the world. It is a very good system and a
cheaper option than Gylcol additives. In my professional opinion the PHPA polymer offers
more advantages without risk of accretion problems. Use of PHPA however is highly
dependent on having high speed shear mixers on the rig to avoid creating fish eyes cause
through poor mud mixing equipment
Application: It has the same application as KCl Polymer system depending on the reactive
level of the formation being drilled. If we have evidence we can drill without having to use
PHPA then we can elect to use KCL Polymer Mud System. KCL actually provides sufficient
levels of inhibition and its cheap. It is also corrosive to drill pipe and pump parts as well
as downhole tools even when using filming agents and corrosion inhibitors especially if
steel is exposed to the mud for extended periods of time.
KCl Glycol Mud System

Is a more recent 1990s extended version of KCl Polymer Mud System which makes use of
Glycol product to aid in inhibition as well as promote some levels of lubricity to make it
easier for tripping pipe out of hole. Use of glycol is limited to using 3% by volume as if
you add more you risk creating an accretion effect of drill solids being bound together
through excess use of glycol and when this occurs the drill solids will stick to the pipe as
well as particle-particle binding. Since Glycol itself does not provide enough levels of
inhibition, mud companies have found it necessary to add additional chemicals such as

16
shale stabilizers so you have to be sure you can justify using this system over cheaper
options because this system is very expensive due to the high costs for glycol and shale
stabilizer products.
Application: KCL Glycol can be used when experiencing excessive over-pull when
attempting to pull pipe out of the hole. By adding glycol this will aid in additional inhibition
and also provide a good level of lubricity that will help make it easier to pull pipe out of
the hole. KCL Glycol was never designed to replace KCL/PHPA it was designed as an
alternative to using SBM for environmentally sensitive areas. Once it became clear that
glycol additions are limited to 3% by volume then this cannot compete with the 75% base
oil for example used in 75/25 oil water ratio SBM mud systems. Glycol is handy to add if
you have niggling issues with tight hole.
Salt Saturated Mud System

Is specifically designed for drilling through large intervals or sequences of salt formations.
The system uses scientific logic which is if you put the maximum level of salt into water
you reach a level of saturation which means there is no more free water available in the
mud for the salt to dissolve into. Consequently as you drill salt formations using a salt
saturated mud system the salt from the formation cannot dissolve into the mud so it
remains intact as a solid particle instead of going into solution. If the salt formation were
allowed to go into solution then the remaining salt formation below contact area will
collapse as water comes into contact with the salt.
Application: Sodium Chloride is used to saturate the mud so you have a stable drilling
fluid for drilling large sequences of salt or drilling through salt domes for example. This
system is based on the Non-Dispersed, Low Solids Polymer Mud System which uses
premium grade polyanionic cellulose (PAC), thats designed to handle high levels of salt or
calcium ions to enable you to have good rheological mud properties. Xanthan gum is also
used. All the products are generic in the industry however mud companies choose
different brand names for their products so its important to know if the products being
offered are of technical or premium grade. This is important to help decide whether or not
you can get away with using the most economic option.
Technically graded products have a shorter life than premium graded products so you
have to consider the length of time the mud will be left in the open hole particularly if
there is a strong presence of highly reactive, water sensitive shales present in the
formation. The more reactive the formation, the higher the level of inhibition you need.
The more salt you add you will see less efficiency from mud properties if using technically
graded products. The purer the products are, then the longer mud properties remain
stable before requiring additions of product for maintenance. If we know we will drill
highly reactive shale intervals where we intend using high levels of salt for inhibition
purposes then we should specify that mud should be built using pure grade PAC polymers
as well as XCD polymer which is specifically designed to yield quickly in a high salt
content drilling fluid. If we are drilling only moderate levels of water sensitive clay where
a small amount of salt inhibition is required then we should specify that we require a
technical grade PAC. PAC is the generic industry name for Polyanionic Polymer. The mud
companies will provide either technical or premium grade products if you indicate clearly

17
what you want. Technical grade products are cheaper than premium grade products. Its
important to know the application first before deciding which product to use.
Gypsum/Polymer Mud System

Is a suitable alternative for drilling moderate levels of water sensitive clay formations. The
advantage being that you get enough calcium ions from the gypsum to provide a fairly
good level of inhibition and its a non-corrosive system since no salt is used. The system
should be built using a technical grade of Xanthan Gum (XC Polymer) and technical grade
PAC Products and the mud company can provide their equivalent brand name products.
Application: The technical limit of this system is that it cant be used to drill highly
reactive shale formations. Moderate reactive clay formations yes but highly reactive
formations-NO. If you know you will drill highly reactive formations then go with one of
the KCL polymer options instead. Moderately reactive means equivalent clay content or
MBI value up to 40 kg/m3, so if you know the formation will yield much greater than 40
kg/m3 equivalent clay content then you should select to drill with one of the KCL Polymer
options since potassium ions provide much higher levels of inhibition when drilling large
sections of highly reactive shales. This Gypsum Polymer system can be used on all hole
intervals, providing there are no large sections of highly reactive shales present, so its
not limited to hole diameter. It is a very suitable and economical alternative to Sodium
Chloride or Potassium Chloride mud systems so no need to use corrosion inhibitors and
filming agents. This means no risk either to washing out the drill string due to erosion
from the effects of lengthy exposure to salt inhibited drilling fluids. Ideal for use on
shallow wells similar to our Oprisenesti and/or Independenta wells.
NADF
Non diesel based, ultra clean paraffin based mud. This system has gone through
enormous evolution since diesel based mud came into use extensively in the North Sea
UK and Norwegian sectors during the 1970s. The evolutionary changes have been HSE
driven in order to come up with an acceptable low toxic/low aromatic base oil fluid that
has minimum impact on our environment and our health.
Application: The main application for using NADF is on our deeper wells beyond 2500m
where there is a long history of stuck pipe scenario due to well-bore stability issues.
By avoiding stuck pipe scenario you avoid the additional time and associated costs trying
to free stuck pipe where you can end up having to cement and side-track if unsuccessful
in freeing the stuck pipe. Drilling these high risk wells with water base mud (WBM) is not
recommended and should therefore be avoided.
This is where NADF is justified because this most certainly reduces the risk of getting
stuck in the hole. Its not just rig time and associated costs that get incurred whenever
we have a stuck pipe scenario. We also risk losing the entire bottom hole assembly which
can be enormously expensive to replace.
Other applications and advantages are that the mud filtrate going into the formation is
100% oil content so no risk of water sensitive clays imbibing free water from the mud
which is always the case when drilling with water base mud systems. This means no

18
water loss from the NADF filtrate to inter-act with formation clays so the risks of getting
stuck due to clay hydration is eliminated effectively just using NADF.
NADF also reduces the risk for water blocking of sensitive pore throats in the reservoir so
it can be an excellent drilling fluid for the reservoir interval as it can lead to higher levels
of production due to its non/damaging effect on the reservoir. Of course barite is always a
threat to reservoirs as it can plug up pore throats also however you can always use
graded calcium carbonate in place of barite if preferred but again this needs to be
indicated to the mud companies before the tender is issued or via a
statement/instruction/guideline in the mud tender documents.

19
Appendix 2 Contamination of water based drilling fluids

Contamination is a steady process while drilling, as drilled solids are continually entering
the mud. While much of the drilled solids are inert, there are certain materials which can
cause severe chemical and physical problems.
Contaminants tend to become apparent more quickly with lightly treated muds such as
CMS / CMF muds rather than with more highly inhibited varieties.
Any contamination must be treated immediately, so it is essential that careful and

frequent checks are maintained on the mud properties at all times.
Advance treatment to prevent contaminants affecting the mud can be made if, for
example, a complete geological prognosis is available or when drilling out cement.
Whenever the mud has been contaminated and a cure is required, careful pilot testing
should be carried out before treating the complete mud system.
App. 2.1 Carbonate / Bicarbonate contamination

Cause & Effects
One of the most unrecognised types of contamination is that due to Carbonate and
Bicarbonate ions. Usually such contamination is gradual, resulting in increased gel
strengths and yield point. It is often incorrectly diagnosed as increased solids but, in this
case, application of costly thinners have little, or no effect.
Concentration of Bicarbonate as low as 250 ppm can cause problems.
Sources of Carbonates
CO2 from drilled formations or air ingress.
Thermal degradation of organic additives.
Over treatment with Soda Ash or Sodium Bicarbonate.
Carbonate formations.
Diagnosis - Mud Alkalinity

Diagnosis of Carbonate / Bicarbonate contamination is routinely carried out by analysis of
the mud alkalinity, in particular the ratio of Pf to Mf. The following table shows how the
results should be interpreted and the effect of the differing types of alkalinity on the mud,
however, this method is rather unreliable and can be masked when buffers are used in
certain mud systems.
Ratio Type of Alkalinity Effect on Mud

Pf = 0 Bicarbonate only Unstable and very difficult to
control
Pf = Mf Hydroxide only Stable and in good condition
2Pf = Carbonate only Unstable but can be
Mf controlled
2Pf Carbonate and Stable and in good condition
>Mf Hydroxide
2Pf < Carbonate and Unstable and difficult to
Mf Bicarbonate control

20
Diagnosis - Garret Gas Train

This is the most accurate method. However, it gives carbonates/bicarbonates in terms of
total carbonates. Refer to manufacturers instructions for details of the test procedure.
Results should be interpreted as follows:
Carbonate Concentration Interpretation
300 500 PPM Background
600 800 PPM May cause problems
> 1000 ppm Will cause severe problems
Treatment
1. Increase pH to 9.5 - 10.0 with Caustic.
2. Add Lime at concentration shown in table.
3. If the required quantity of Lime exceeds 1.4 kg/m3, treat with Gypsum at
concentration shown in table.
4. Whilst treating with Gypsum, continue to add Caustic to maintain pH in 9.5 - 10
range.
Additive Treatment Level

(per 100 ppm carbonate)
Lime 0.123 kg/m3
Gypsum 0.285 kg/m3
5. When adding Lime or Gypsum, the mud will become very viscous if large
treatments are made.
6. Treatments should be made through a chemical barrel and must not exceed 1.4
kg/m3 over a 6 hour treatment period.
7. In areas where Carbonate contamination is known to be a problem, the pH should
be maintained with Caustic and Lime in the ratio 2 cans Caustic to 1 sack Lime.
App. 2.2 Cement contamination

Cause & Effects
1. This is contamination from Calcium Hydroxide which can result in severe
thickening and increased fluid loss of Bentonite based mud systems (flocculation of
the Bentonite clay). The severity of the problem will depend on the level of pre-
treatment and thinner concentration in the mud. In a highly treated
Lignosulphonate system, the viscosity may actually drop as the clays go to an
aggregated / de-flocculated state rather than a dispersed / flocculated state on the
introduction of cement.
2. In polymer systems (PHPA), cement contamination acts to raise both the Calcium
and pH which can lead to precipitation of polymers and loss of control over the
mud system. Thickening may also be observed if the mud contains significant
quantities of drilled clay solids.
Sources of Contamination
The main source of this contamination is the drilling of green cement or poor placement
procedures.
Diagnosis

21
Cement contamination will result in the following:

Increased pH.
Increase in Pf and Calcium.
A large increase in Pm.
Treatment
1. Prior to drilling cement, pre-treat the mud with 0.7 kg/m3 of Sodium Bicarbonate
and 0.7 KG/M3 of Citric Acid. If this is insufficient, treat cement contamination at
the rate of 0.43 kg/m3 Sodium Bicarbonate per 100 ppm Calcium (determine
Calcium using procedure below).
2. If Sodium Bicarbonate treatment levels are based on filtrate Calcium only, an
incorrect treatment level will be obtained. This is because the majority of the
cement will stay in suspension rather than go into solution due to the high pH. To
obtain the total Calcium level, the following procedure should be adopted:
Add 10 cm3 mud to 90 cm3 distilled water.
Titrate with 0.1N H2SO4 to a pH of 7.5 - 8.0.
Continue mixing for 2 mins to ensure no pH rise.
Filter the slurry on the standard filter press.
Titrate 10 cm3 of filtrate with standard Versenate (0.01 molar).
Calcium = ml Versenate x 4000.
3. The calcium level should be maintained below 400 mg/l. The high ph should be
reduced to below 10 by calculated addition of sodium bicarbonate and citric acid.
4. When large quantities of cement are drilled, it may not be practical to treat out the
contamination due to the large concentrations of Bicarbonate required. In this
case, the best course of action may be to change out the contaminated mud for
new mud.
App. 2.3 Hardness
Cause & Effects
1. Hardness in water is due to dissolved Calcium and Magnesium ions.
2. High levels of hardness will result in flocculation of Bentonite with associated
severe increase in viscosity. Subsequently, as the cation exchange process
continues, the clay particles will aggregate and the result will be a low viscosity
fluid.
3. The main effect of hardness on polymer fluids is precipitation of polymers at high
pH, in which viscosity may decrease and fluid loss increase.
Diagnosis
Calcium and Total Hardness tests should be used.
Treatment
1. Increase the pH to 10.5 with Caustic to precipitate out Magnesium as Magnesium
Hydroxide.
2. Treat Calcium with Soda Ash at 0.26 kg/m3 per 100 ppm Calcium.
3. Cement mix water must be checked and treated for hardness before use.
Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S)

22
H2S will cause no adverse effects to the mud. However the gas is highly poisonous and
corrosive.
App. 2.4 Summary of Chemical Treatment of Contaminants
Contaminant Contaminating Ion Treatment Chemical Concentration

(per 100 ppm
Contaminant)
Gypsum or Calcium (Ca++) Soda Ash if pH okay 0.265 kg/m3
Anhydrite
Sodium Bicarbonate if pH 0.419 kg/m3
too high
Cement Calcium (Ca++) Sodium Bicarbonate
Hydroxide (OH-) Citric Acid 0.419 kg/m3
Hard Water Magnesium (Mg++) Caustic Soda to pH 10.5 0.331 kg/m3
then add Soda Ash
Calcium (Ca++) Soda Ash 0.265 kg/m3
Hydrogen Sulphide (S--) Keep pH above 10 and add 0.351 kg/m3
Sulphide Zinc Basic Carbonate
Carbon Dioxide Carbonate (CO3--) Gypsum if pH okay 0.285 kg/m3
Lime if pH too low 0.123 kg/m3
Bicarbonate (HCO3-) Lime 0.121 kg/m3

23
Appendix 3 Formulation & Procedure for LCM Pills
App. 3.1 Non-Reservoir Sections
Losses Caused by Fractures

Seepage Losses Partial Losses Moderate Losses Severe Losses
Static: 0.2 1.0 m3/h Static: 1.0 10.0m3/h Static: 1.0 10.0 m3/h Static: >10 m3/h
Dynamic: < 10m3/h Dynamic: 10-30m3/h Dynamic: 30-50 m3/h Dynamic: > 50 m3/h
Sweep a pill Sweep a pill Sweep a pill Spot a pill containing:
containing: containing: containing: 40 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m)
14 kg/m3 Barofibre R 20 kg/m3 CaCO3 (f) 30 kg/m3 Barofibre R 50 kg/m3 Kwikseal M
14 kg/m3 Barofibre C 50 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m) 30 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m) 120 kg/m3 Steelseal
28 kg/m3 Steelseal 20 kg/m3 CaCO3 (c) 30 kg/m3 Steelseal
Sweep a pill Sweep a pill Spot a pill containing: Spot a pill containing:
containing: containing: 30 kg/m3 Barofibre R 50 kg/m3 Barofibre R
14 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m) 20 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m) 30 kg/m3 Barofibre C 50 kg/m3 Barofibre C
21 kg/m3 Barofibre R 30 kg/m3 Barofibre R 90 kg/m3 Steelseal 50 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m)
21 kg/m3 Steelseal 40 kg/m3 Steelseal 60 kg/m3 CaCO3 (c)
Add to the active Add to the active Spot before tripping on Spot before tripping on
system: system: bottom and at shoe: bottom and at shoe:
20 kg/m3 Steelseal 20 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m) 90 kg/m3 Steelseal 60 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m)
20 kg/m3 Barofibre R 3
30 kg/m CaCO3 (m) 30 kg/m3 Barofibre C
20 kg/m3 Barofibre C 30 kg/m Barofibre R 120 kg/m3 Steelseal
3
Increase Duratone HT
Concentration in the
system
Losses Caused by permeability

Seepage Losses Partial Losses Moderate Losses Severe Losses
Static: 0.2 1.0 m3/h Static: 1.0 10.0m3/h Static: 1.0 10.0 m3/h Static: >10 m3/h
Dynamic: < 10m3/h Dynamic: 10-30m3/h Dynamic: 30-50 m3/h Dynamic: > 50 m3/h
Sweep a pill Sweep a pill Sweep a pill Sweep a pill
containing: containing: containing: containing:
14 kg/m3 Barofibre R 20 kg/m3 CaCO3 (f) 40 kg/m3 Barofibre R 45 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m)
14 kg/m3 Barofibre C 30 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m) 20 kg/m3 Mica (m) 45 kg/m3 Barofibre R
28 kg/m3 Steelseal 40 kg/m3 CaCO3 (c) 90 kg/m3 Steelseal 120 kg/m3 Steelseal
Sweep a pill Sweep a pill Spot a pill containing: Spot a pill containing:
containing: containing: 30 kg/m3 Barofibre R 240 kg/m3 Steelseal
14 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m) 15 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m) 30 kg/m3 Barofibre C
21 kg/m3 Barofibre R 15 kg/m3 Barofibre R 90 kg/m3 Steelseal
21 kg/m3 Steelseal 90 kg/m3 Steelseal
Add to the active Add to the active Spot before tripping on Spot before tripping on
system: system: bottom and at shoe: bottom and at shoe:
20 kg/m3 Steelseal 20 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m) 90 kg/m3 Steelseal 120 kg/m3 Steelseal
20 kg/m3 Barofibre R 30 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m) 45 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m)
20 kg/m3 Barofibre C 30 kg/m3 Barofibre R 45 kg/m3 CaCO3 (c)
Sweep a pill
containing:
30 kg/m3 Barofibre R
60 kg/m3 CaCO3 (m)
120 kg/m3 Steelseal

24
The amount of LCM that can be added to a mud depends very much on the mud
properties. High gels and YP will help keep the material in suspension. Since LCM is
generally of low gradient, excess material tends to float on top if too much is added.
The following procedure may prove useful for mixing LCM pills and avoiding the problem
of flotation.
Ensure the pill has enough viscosity to keep the low gradient material in
suspension before addition of LCM. Add appropriate viscosifier if required.
Add the material in stages e.g. 14-28-42-56-70-84-98-112 kg/m3.
Stop after desired concentration has been reached, or when it is observed that the
material cannot be held in suspension.
If a higher LCM content is desired, leave the pill to soak for a period of time and
then try adding more material.
App. 3.2 Reservoir Sections

The use of LCM whilst drilling reservoir sections must be approved by the Senior Drilling
Engineer based on advise from the Technology Support Section. If Calcium Carbonate is
used it should be applied according to the following details:
Loss Rate < 2 m3/hr Loss Rate 2 - 3.5 m3/hr Loss Rate 3.5 - 7 m3/hr
Size Concentration Size Concentration Size Concentration
50 micron Add to circ. 50 micron 43 kg/m3 50 micron 43 kg/m3
system at 4-5 150 micron 43 kg/m3 150 micron 43 kg/m3
x 25 kg 600 micron 43 kg/m3
sacks/hr
The material is totally soluble in HCl.

Marble shall be used in preference to conventional Calcium Carbonate since it has
a higher compressive strength and therefore retains its original particle size
distribution.
App. 3.3 Formulation & Procedure for Gunk Squeezes

If conventional LCM pills prove ineffective, a gunk squeeze may be attempted. The
method utilises the swelling property of Bentonite in the presence of water.
Water Based Mud Synthetic Based Mud

Bentonite/Diesel-Synthetic Gel/Drillwater # 1
10 bbl batch 13.3 kPa/m 10 bbl batch 14.1 kPa
7.2bbl Synthetic Oil 7.14 bbl Drillwater
2,600 lbs Bentonite 33 lbs Q-Broxin II (CFL)
50 lbs Mica (course) 16.5 lbs Caustic Soda
50 lbs Mica (fine) 2500 lbs Geltone II
10 lbs Barofibre R Barite for density
Barite for density

25
Bentonite/Cement/Synthetic Gel/Drillwater # 1
10bbl batch 13.7 kPa/m 10 bbl batch 19.3 kPa
7.2bbl Synthetic Oil 5.9 bbl Drillwater
1,600 lbs Bentonite 10 lbs Caustic Soda
1316 lbs cement 5 lbs Q-Broxin II
LCM if required 16.5 lbs Caustic Soda
Barite for density 1625 lbs Geltone II
3000 lbs Barite
Procedure Gunk squeeze:

1. Thoroughly flush the cement pump and lines with base oil (DMA) to remove all
traces of water.
2. Prepare the gunk pill
3. With the bit just above the lost circulation zone pump a 1.5 m3 base oil spacer
downhole.
4. Pump gunk pill.
5. Follow this gunk mixture with another 1.5 m3 base oil spacer.
6. Proceed to displace to the bit using mud.
7. Pump simultaneously down drill pipe and annulus and apply a squeeze pressure of
700-2100 kPa.
8. Allow four hours for the plug to set. The Bentonite will hydrate after the base oil is
squeezed into the formation and it is allowed to come into contact with water from
the mud.
App. 3.4 Formulation & Procedure for Barite Plugs, Synthetic Mud
(1m3)
1. Start with 450 l of Ester base oil
2. Add 3 l of water
3. Add 1.5 l of surfactant eg. Drillfoam S-55
4. Add 3 l of Drilltreat oil wetting agent
5. Add 2300 kg of barite to reach a weight of about 26 kPa/m
6. Another 1 l/m of Drilltreat should be added to the pill just before pumping.

26
Appendix 4 Petrom NADF handling procedures and

responsibilities
1. Purpose
To ensure that correct handling procedures of NADF are in place in accordance with the
following procedures:
Reporting procedures for NADF spills and/or discharges to the environment for
both onshore/offshore rigs
All rig personnel are wearing proper PPE
Operation of dump-valves and integrity test of mud pits.
Maintenance and monitoring of mud transfer hoses.
Procedures for loading, back loading and pit transferring of NADF and Base Oil
Procedures for displacing NADF in or out of the hole
Pre-circulation checks/procedures prior to using NADF
SBM shale shaker losses
Loading cutting skips.
2. Responsibilities
OIM/Rig Manager:
Integrity of mud circulating and storage tank system to be maintained to a
reliable, acceptable standard
Pre-circulation check/spot on charge pumps and mud circulating system is
correctly lined up for drilling commencement to begin
Dump valves -Ensure that all mud pit dump valves are closed, chained and
padlocked to retain all the NADF in the mud pits. All padlock keys must be retained
by rig manager and issued only once a cold work permit has been approved by him
NADF displacements in or out of hole - Hold pre-job meeting with all involved key
personnel prior to displacing NADF on the rig floor, and be present on the drill floor
during the displacement until NADF M has been safely displaced
Have a full knowledge of the NADF handling procedures and ensure that all rig
personnel are familiar with them.
Drillers:
Use all equipment and personnel necessary to avoid any loss of NADF
NADF/Seawater/Drill-water displacement: Notify mud engineer and derrickman at
least 1000 pump strokes ahead before spacer returns at surface
Ensure proper use of the mud-bucket and drill pipe wipers if available during every
pipe trip
Adjust flow-rates as necessary for the shale shakers to cope with the feed rate and
avoid pumping excessively to reduce the risk of losing mud over the shakers
Monitor floor crew behaviour and their awareness level of NADF handling
procedures. Ensure that they wear proper PPE

27
Assistant drillers:
Pre-circulation check- inspect line-up of mud system, to ensure that NADF flow is
correctly routed from suction pit to rig pump, as well as routed correctly from
shakers to active pit via solids control system
NADF losses over shakers Call driller to reduce flow rates to stem losses then
assist shaker hand to replace and/or clean screens as necessary
Mud vacuum units and/or liquid recovery pumps-Check at the beginning of the
tour the condition and instruct all floorman on their use accordingly
NADF displacement-Pump-man and Mud engineers to be in the shaker/mud pit
area (offshore/onshore rigs) Mud Cop to supervise accordingly until NADF fluid is
successfully displaced in or out of the hole
Maintain constant vigilance over all floorhand operations to reduce any possible
NADF losses
Monitor condition and operation of drainage system and also trip tank/mousehole
recovery tank etc
To be fully aware of the NADF handling procedures and adhere to wearing proper
PPE
Derrickman:
Integrity test of pits- conduct tests as written down in procedures
Pre-circulation - Check that pumps are lined up correctly and always inform Driller
and mud logging company accordingly on any mud pit activity so they are aware of
what is going on
Transfer of NADF from mud delivery truck to pit to mud engineer at the end of the
transfer. Agree on volume received together and report same respectively to your
supervisor
NADF displacement Obtain cold work permit for fluid transfer permit. Check that
all valves and gates are correctly aligned. Remain in pit room to assist Mud Cop
and mud engineer with pit allocation and be onhand to transfer NADF returns when
necessary to additional storage tanks.
To be fully aware of NADF handling procedures and wear proper PPE
Shaker man:
Pre-circulation check -Inform the driller that the shakers are ready to be used as
soon as they have been inspected by mud engineers that the correct size screens
have been installed
Shakers -Monitor the shakers continuously during circulation. And wash screens
with base oil gun to prevent blinding. Inform driller ASAP whenever mud flows too
much over the shakers so he can reduce flow rates if necessary
Centrifuges - Check centrifuges are running properly and look-out for any leaks
every 15/20 minutes. Initiate centrifuge shut down immediately if required to stop
leak, by communicating with mud engineer on duty as well as solids control
engineer on duty and inform the driller accordingly

28
Ensure the shakers work correctly and that the screens are in good condition. Any
mechanical problem with the shakers must be brought to the attention of the mud
engineer and rig mechanic for proper action to be carried out
Clean the shaker screens during every connection if needed using Greco spray gun
To be fully aware of NADF handling procedures and adhere to wearing proper PPE
3. Reporting of Spillage or Discharge incident at land rig or offshore rig locations
Authorized people who must be notified:

Petrom Drilling Manager
o Onshore and/or Offshore Operations
Petrom Drilling Fluids Department Engineer
o Onshore and/or Offshore Operations
Incident Report to be done by the Rig Manager (with input from mud cop/mud engineers
on duty) for land rig and OIM for offshore rig. Incident Report must be submitted to
Petrom rig supervisors who will then verify and approve the report before it is sent to
Petrom office. This report should be simple and highlight only the facts and what
measures have been taken to deal with the spill as well as identify and highlight the cause
for the incident to occur
4. Operating of Dump valves and Integrity Testing of Pits
Personal involved:
Derrickman to carry out the operation.
Tool pushers/and or Barge Engineer.
Mud Cop
Procedure:
Ensure all pits have been fully cleaned and test each pit for leaks as well as inspect
all transfer, mixing equalizing lines and valves to make sure they do not leak. If
they do leak, alert the mud engineer and also alert the rig manager so he can
implement corrective action right away in order to repair any leaks in the system
Inspect all dump valves and replace leaking valves with new seals accordingly
Close the dump valves and fill the pits to 30% of total operating volume with water
to test the valves even when new seals have been fitted to be 100% sure against
leaks
Allow 15 minutes for integrity testing of valves for any leaks
Measure tank levels accurately and monitor same for 15 minutes and if no leaks
the valve seals are definitely working
Note:
The Rig Superintendent should monitor steps 5 and 6, as he should retain the keys for
the padlocks and issue same only on a cold work permit basis. The Rig

29
Superintendent/OIM shall only issue the keys once a cold work permit request has been
submitted and approved once he is confident of the following:
He is convinced that there is no risk of any surface mud loss or pollution to the
environment
5. Maintenance and monitoring of NADF transfer hoses supplied by rig contractor
Offshore Rigs
o Monthly: Visual inspection of all hoses (Results of the inspection to be
recorded)
o Six Monthly: Pressure test hoses with water to 8 bar.
When a hose is in use, it will be monitored permanently to detect damage for
potential leaks or poor connections.
Any damage to transfer hoses should be rectified immediately. Should a hose
require attention, it should not be used until it has been repaired or replaced,
tested and approved first
Signs of wear and tear, such as kinks, crushed or flat areas or tears or holes
should be investigated immediately so a decision can be made to repair or replace
any damaged hose used for transferring NADF
6. Procedures for Off-loading/Back-loading or Transferring NADF and Base oil
Personnel required:
Mud Cop
o Co-ordinates personnel and communications.
o Ensures the correct line up of pumps and valves.
o Designates a responsible person to stand by at the fill manifold and visually
observes hoses during transfer (Radio contact mandatory)
Deck foreman/Mud Cop
o Inspect hoses and connections prior to start transfer.
Derrickman
o Check mud pit levels prior to start transfer and during transfer up to
completion of transfer and note all volumes transferred
o Monitor and record transfer flowrate
Mud engineer
o Monitor all transfer operations closely and assist mud cop and/or
Derrickman as required
If NADF/BASE OIL Transfer hoses or valves leak during transfer-Take immediate action to
stop leak as follows:
Stop pumps and close all valves
Notify mud cop/rig manager of cessation of pumping
Take corrective action to repair or replace hose or faulty valves
Never stop a flow by closing a valve - Stop the pumps first

30
7. Procedure for displacing NADF
Personnel required:
Toolpusher:
o Remains on drill floor during the displacement.
o Ensures driller is fully briefed
Mud Cop/ Mud Engineer:
o Supervision in mud pit area near to the shakers
Assistant Driller/Derrickman:
o Under supervision of mud cop/mud engineer to ensure that the lines and
the valves are lined up correctly prior to starting up any pumps
Prior to displacement:
1. All personal involved to read and understand displacement procedures
2. Meeting to be held by Companyman and OIM/Rig Superintendent with all
personnel involved to discuss the following points and any others that may raised
at the meeting
Which tank is allocated for spacers to be mixed and pumped first (Provide
volume to be pumped in m3 and in pump strokes)
Which fluids will be pumped next and from which tanks in what order? Highlight
volume to be pumped in m3 and in pump strokes and make sure mud loggers
have a copy of the procedures, volumes etc
Any high-lights during displacement e.g. flow-check and who will be at the
shakers to monitor returns
Transfer procedures if NADF is transferred from rig pits to external storage pits
during displacement
3. Derrickman to obtain work permit and notify driller and mud cop of any changes in
pit volumes
4. An accurate volume calculation of the hole/casing and riser is mandatory prior to
start the displacement operations
5. All volume and stroke counters on rig floor and in the logging unit, if available to
be zeroed before starting the displacement
6. Mud pit preparation for brine, mud or seawater:
7. Pit to be emptied and cleaned in accordance with NADF handling procedures
making sure people wear proper PPE
8. Double check all valves and gates for leaks and proper alignment before starting
displacement operations and confirm to driller at the pre-displacement meeting
that everything has been checked and double checked with the mud cop. The mud
cop can then verify also that everything has been double checked at the meeting
before displacement commences so everyone receives proper assurance which is
important. This is a standard risk assessment task for NADF displacements /
transfers / mixing of NADF

31
During the displacement:
Driller to monitor the stroke counter to follow the spacer carefully and notify the Mud
Engineer/Shaker-man and Derrickman 1000 strokes before returns are due to arrive at
the shakers
Pumping should be slowed down prior to and stop completely when the interface fluid
reaches the surface.
The used spacers and /or contaminated mud to be diverted to a separate pit or tank for
treatment or back-loading
After displacement:
The Rig Superintendent will together with the Mud Engineer determine when normal
operations can resume.
Return all valves and gates to their normal positions.
Inform all personnel that the operation is completed.
Derrick man to sign off work permit and returns same to OIM.
BEWARE OF CHANNELING EFFECTS WHEN DISPLACING
8. Pre-circulating Checks/Procedures when using NADF
Prior to break circulation, the Assistant Driller should check that the following is lined up
correctly:
Drill floor standpipe manifold.
Mud pump discharge valves.
Mud pump suction valves.
Choke and kill manifold.
Shale shakers functioning and flow correctly diverted.
Cutting dump gutter and direct overboard from shakers blinded-off and isolated
All dump valves are locked closed
Driller should check that:

PVT sensors are working with alarms set.
Stroke counters are zeroed
Flow indicator is working and alarms are set.
Logging unit (if available) is informed about the operations.
The hole is full
Derrick man should check that:

All floaters on the PVT system are working correctly
The manual pit level indicators are set
Mud weight in the active pits meets with the program
Mud balance is accurate

32
The Driller shall not start pumping until he has received confirmation from the Assistant
driller/Mud Cop that all above checks have been properly carried out
The driller checks that:

Kelly cocks are opened.
Volume of string and hole capacities calculations are carried out.
Volume of sandtrap and other surface related equipment calculations are carried
out
Shaker man:
Function test the wash down unit near the shakers.
Inform the driller as soon as mud returns arrive on surface.
Note 1: Mud engineer to advise shaker man what size screens to use for the displacement
and once the mud warms up and gets fully sheared in it will be possible to change to finer
screen sizes when optimum flow rates are achieved.
Note 2: Mud Engineer to be present near the shakers to monitor the break of circulation
Note 3: It must be made clear to the shaker man that if any losses occur over the
shakers, he has to inform the driller immediately. Driller must then slow down pump rate
and maintain lower pump rates to avoid further shaker losses, until it is established that it
is possible to increase flow rates again
Note 4: Check and record the mud weights and viscosity every 15 min and record results
on a tour report. This report should be kept in a safe area away from water splashes or
shaker spray guns
No mud conditioning equipment should be started up until good circulation has been
established and the mud engineer confirms that it is clear to do such thing
If, for any reason, the volumes of the mud measured are doubtful, the pumps should be
shut down immediately and the reason investigated
No transfer of mud from either one of the pits or the trip tank should take place until good
circulation has been established and the driller confirms that it is clear to do such thing.
The Assistant driller will assist by communicating with driller and derrickman.
Note: It should be made clear to all personnel on the rig location that if they see or feel
something is not right and are unsure about anything, they should contact the MUD COP
immediately NO MATTER how small the problem may appear to be. The Mud Cop is
present on the rig for a reason which is to ensure we do everything correctly to avoid
spills or discharges of NADF into the environment
9. NADF Shale shaker losses - (UNACCEPTABLE)
At the start of the circulation with NADF losses across the shakers can easily occur
(cold mud).To limit these start-up losses, the Driller should work closely with the
Shaker hand and the Mud Engineer to control pump rates which will allow the
shakers to handle the flow

33
Mud Engineers and Shaker hands should also be ready to change screens or limit
the flow from the well to ensure that no fluid losses occur
In the event of mud losses across the shakers or through the solids control
equipment, the shaker hand shall:
o Inform the Driller and the Mud Cop/Mud Engineer immediately.
o Inform the Toolpusher.
o Adjust flow gates on shakers and/or clean the shaker screens with base oil
spray gun if this helps to correct the situation
o If still losing mud over the shakers reduce pump rates till the mud is fully
sheared-in where it is then possible to increase flow rates again
10. Back-loading of OBM cutting skips:
Back loading of cutting skips shall be organized by deck crew under supervision of
Barge Engineer
Any liquid on top of the cuttings in the skip shall be removed and special attention
shall be paid to the closing lids to avoid leaking skips during the transport over
the sea by crane and during the trip on deck of the supply vessel to the port
The weight of the cutting skips loaded with OBM cuttings will be carefully
measured with the hook-load indicator of the crane and shall not exceed 10 Ton
It is not allowed to fill the skips over 70% of their capacity to avoid spillage on
PUBLIC ROADS during transportation to waste site unless skips can be sealed tight
using bolt-down lids or fasteners
The skips shall not contain other disposable materials other than NADF cuttings to
avoid damage to disposal equipment
Only the new type of skip with the fixed lid is permitted to be used
Following information should be mentioned on inbound boat manifests:
o Serial no of the skip.
o Weight of the skip.
o Depth interval cuttings.
11. Deviation.
Deviation from these procedures is only possible after consulting with the Drilling
Contractors Office (Rig Manager) and PETROM Drilling Office concurrence.

34

1
9 Hole cleaning, tripping, preventing stuck pipe
Prepared by WEP
Author:
Version: June 2014
Verified:

9 Hole cleaning, tripping, preventing stuck pipe | Version: June 2014
2
9 Hole cleaning, tripping, preventing stuck pipe ....................................................... 3

9.1 Hole cleaning.............................................................................................. 3
9.1.1 Tasks and responsibilities....................................................................... 3
9.1.2 Dos, donts and checks for improving hole cleaning .................................. 3
9.1.3 Sub optimum hole cleaning .................................................................... 5
9.1.4 Hole cleaning indicators ......................................................................... 5
9.1.5 Hole cleaning optimization removing cuttings beds ................................. 7
9.1.6 Hydraulics optimization - flow rate ........................................................ 10
9.1.7 Hydraulics optimization - surface RPM ................................................... 12
9.1.8 Hydraulics optimization mud rheology................................................. 15
9.1.9 Remedial hole cleaning - sweeps / pills ................................................. 15
9.1.10 Considerations for ERD wells ................................................................ 17
9.2 Tripping ................................................................................................... 19
9.2.1 Pre tripping bottoms up circulation requirements .................................... 19
9.2.2 Tripping out of hole Drillers checklist .................................................. 19
9.2.3 Tripping out of hole checklist DSV ...................................................... 20
9.2.4 Back reaming ..................................................................................... 24
9.2.5 Tripping in best practices .................................................................. 26
9.3 Preventing stuck pipe ................................................................................ 26
9.3.1 Tasks and responsibilities..................................................................... 26
9.3.2 Avoiding stuck pipe - planning stage ..................................................... 27
9.3.3 Avoiding differential sticking - planning stage ......................................... 27
9.3.4 Avoiding mechanical sticking - planning stage ........................................ 27
9.3.5 General preventive procedures operations ........................................... 28
9.4 Stuck pipe mechanics and responses differential sticking, solids induced and
unstable well bore .............................................................................................. 28
9.4.1 First actions - Solids induced packing off ................................................ 28
9.4.2 Hole cleaning ..................................................................................... 29
9.4.3 Differential sticking ............................................................................. 31
9.4.4 Unconsolidated formations ................................................................... 34
9.4.5 Mobile formations ............................................................................... 36
9.4.6 Fractured and faulted formations .......................................................... 38
9.4.7 Naturally over-pressured shale collapse ................................................. 40
9.4.8 Induced over-pressured shale collapse .................................................. 40
9.4.9 Reactive formations ............................................................................ 42
9.4.10 Tectonically stressed formations ........................................................... 44
9.5 Mechanical & well bore geometry stuck pipe types - first action ...................... 46
9.5.1 Key seating ........................................................................................ 46
9.5.2 Undergauge hole ................................................................................ 47
9.5.3 Ledges and doglegs............................................................................. 49
9.5.4 Junk .................................................................................................. 51
9.5.5 Cement blocks .................................................................................... 52
9.5.6 Green cement .................................................................................... 54
Appendix 1 Stuck pipe decision trees .................................................................. 56

3
9 Hole cleaning, tripping, preventing stuck pipe

In this section a detailed description of the theory and practice behind hole cleaning is
given.
9.1 Hole cleaning

Cuttings which are not adequately removed will settle on the lower side of the hole and
form cuttings beds. This may result in the BHA becoming stuck in the solid beds when
pulling out of hole, or when cuttings and cavings slide down (avalanching) this causes a
pack off resulting in stuck pipe.
Because of the tendency of the cuttings to fall to the lower side of the hole, high angle
holes are more difficult to clean than vertical wells. For effective hole cleaning, the
circulation rate must be higher than the slip velocity of the cuttings.
Good hole cleaning means removal of sufficient solids from the wellbore to allow
reasonably unhindered passage of the drill string and casing.

Prepare daily drilling instructions TP-WDE DSV
Maintain optimum drilling parameters TP Driller - DD DSV
Monitor hole cleaning indicators DSV
Torque and drag Driller DSV
Drag charts WDE
Mud properties Mud engineer DSV
Down hole measurements MWD engineer WSDE
Cutting returns Shakerhand mud DSV
engineer - WDE
Deciding when to conduct check trips DSV DSV
Carry out flow checks Driller DSV
Report drilling problems All DSV
Well control Driller / TP DSV
Safe and proper operation of rig and equipment Drilling Contractor DSV
9.1.2 Dos, donts and checks for improving hole cleaning

Pre job preparations & checks
1. Determine the optimum cleaning pump rate for a given hole section and planned
mud.
2. Optimized hydraulics is the key to good drilling performance. Hence, ensure
system pressure losses are determined surface & BHA - and minimized and that
nozzle velocity is maximised. Ensure that extraordinary pressure losses are taken
into account, i.e. losses through motor, directional equipment or reamers.
3. Make a best estimate of required bit nozzle size based upon previous experience
and recommendations of the bit supplier and Directional Drilling contractor.
4. Ensure mud pumps are equipped with properly sized liners for anticipated flow
rates and pressures.

4
5. Use the highest possible annular velocity thus flow rate to maintain good hole
cleaning. If soft & unconsolidated formations are to be penetrated, the flow rate
must be tuned to avoid excessive erosion or washouts.
6. If the optimum flow rate for drilling cannot be maintained due to pump problems,
reduce ROP while monitoring for any indications of cuttings loading while repairing
the pump. If cuttings build up, stop drilling, clean well while rotating /
reciprocating.
7. Use the highest possible surface RPM to enhance good hole cleaning.
8. Monitor hole cleaning indicators:
While drilling, monitor cutting returns at the shakers to assess hole
cleaning efficiency. Be aware of correct hole volume and lag time for
cuttings to travel to surface.
Monitor Torque and Drag trends (road mapping).
i. In extreme case, excessive overpull on connections indicates
cuttings build up, leading to becoming stuck or hole pack off.
ii. Erratic and increasing torque while drilling: often this is caused by
bit whirl / stick-slip, but may originate from poor holecleaning.
iii. Reduced overpull when pumping (pump-off force): when this
happens, you are an instant away from getting a complete pack-off
and stuck pipe. Stop drilling & clean the hole.
9. When encountering hole cleaning problems, pump sweep pills. On high angle
holes, if viscous pills do not appear to improve hole cleaning, use low vis pills
(combo tandem pill).
10. Verify any torque and drag change after sweeping the hole. If improved, consider
maintaining sweeps.
11. Keep sand and silt content of the mud as low as possible, typically sand < 1%.
Vertical wells versus deviated wells
Cuttings movement in deviated wells.

5
Vertical and near-vertical wells (0-35)

1. Keep cuttings concentration less than 5% (by volume) in order to minimize drilling
problems.
2. For efficiency and cost considerations, use a mud viscosity selected based on hole
size and slip velocity calculations. Further increase yield point only when hole-
cleaning problems are encountered or are imminent.
3. Monitor the hole for symptoms of cuttings accumulation, fill and bridges.
4. Do not expect pipe rotation to help hole cleaning, especially in larger diameter
vertical holes.
5. Mud rheology must be designed to combat slip velocity.
Directional wells
1. Pay extra attention to hole cleaning for 35 to 60 hole sections (risk of
avalanching). Hole sections > 60 practices must be designed to move cuttings
over long stationary beds.
2. Pump at optimum flow rates, usually the highest.
3. Rotate pipe at recommended RPMs for the given hole size to prevent bed
formation and to help remove pre-existing beds.
4. Maintain the 6 rpm fann reading between 1.0 and 1.2 times the hole diameter in
inches.
5. Increase mud weight to correct wellbore stresses problems causing hole cleaning
problems.
6. Expect little help from viscous sweeps, unless they are accompanied by high flow
rates and pipe rotation and/or reciprocation.
7. Consider for drilling horizontal small-diameter holes in competent formation to use
low-viscosity mud to induce turbulent flow. Low-viscosity fluids enter a state of
turbulence at lower flow rates than viscous ones. Any cutting beds which form can
be eroded by turbulent flow.
9.1.3 Sub optimum hole cleaning

Some operations are restricted by the well design and/or rig capacity and we cannot drill
with the optimum parameters e.g. flow rate & RPM. In these cases the following
guidelines should be followed:
1. Raise awareness with the rig team that sub optimum drilling parameters are being
used and hole cleaning related problems could occur.
2. Keep the mud in good shape and as per program (weight, PV & YP, 6 RPM, sand
%).
3. Monitor torque and drag trends for excessive build up of cuttings.
4. Limit ROP. This may reduce the height of the cuttings bed.
5. Stop drilling and circulate the hole clean at maximum possible RPM and flow rate.
Perform short wiper trips to clean the hole and disturb the cuttings bed.
6. Minimize the amount of directional work e.g. sliding for steering.
7. Opt for the conservative directional philosophy e.g. two BHA runs instead of one.
9.1.4 Hole cleaning indicators

The following are indicators of hole cleaning problems:
1. T&D trend lines - ensure PU, SO, ROT weight pumps-off and torque data are
recorded each stand in a consistent manner. If the hole is loading up with cuttings,
the PU weight will diverge first from modelled trend, followed by the SO weight.
The PU/SO/ROT weights are to be monitored and interpreted real-time on the rig
floor.

6
2. Quantity & shape of cuttings. The shakers must be monitored continuously. In

general the following observations can be made about the shape/size/volume of
returned cutting over the shakers:
Cutting returns: monitor volume, size and shape of cuttings. Establish a
background cuttings level and compare on a regular basis; measurement
duties to be determined by DSV. A low cuttings return rate for the
penetration rate indicates that cuttings beds are forming or have already
formed.
Erratic cuttings returns indicate that cuttings beds are forming or have
already formed.
Large slugs of cuttings coming across the shakers followed by periods of
very few cuttings indicate a hole cleaning problem.
Drilling with a downhole motor in an inclined well without rotating the drill
string can result in formation of large, undisturbed cutting beds.
A high volume of fine cuttings return indicates that cuttings beds have
formed and cuttings are being mechanically broken up and reground (this is
most often associated with an increase in PV due to increasing Low Gravity
Solids in the mud).
3. Cuttings shape. Rounded and reground cuttings returns indicate that cuttings beds
have formed and cuttings have been in the hole for some time. Large angular
cuttings are, more often than not, bore hole cavings and indicate that the well bore
is becoming unstable.
4. Cavings. In many instances, particularly in deviated wells, poor hole cleaning is
diagnosed when the problem is one of mechanical hole instability. Mud and
hydraulics programmes are designed to transport cuttings, of average size.
Cavings which are significantly larger are much more difficult to transport and may
present significant cuttings transport difficulties. In this case, efforts must be made
to cure the instability by reducing the ECD, avoiding any pressure surges, or
possibly by increasing the mud gradient.
5. Down hole Measurement Systems. Another aid of confirming the effectiveness of
hole cleaning is the use of Down Hole Dynamics Measurement Systems run in the
MWD package. These systems can provide such information as:
Down-Hole Weight On Bit
Down-Hole Torque At Bit
Equivalent Circulating Density (ECD) of the mud or annular pressure loss.
All of these measurements, when correctly interpreted, can assist the rig team in
determining the effectiveness of both hole cleaning and the remedial actions of
wiper trips, reaming, circulating and pumping sweeps. The system is run
immediately below the standard MWD package. Real-time data is communicated to
surface to determine rotating friction factor, a drag coefficient and ECD which
together with actual drilling parameters can then be displayed alongside primary
drilling parameters in order to diagnose hole cleaning trends.
6. Combo Pills. Another means of confirming the effectiveness of hole cleaning is to
periodically pump a Low Viscosity - High Viscosity (High Weight) Tandem Pill and
monitor the amount of extra cuttings coming over the shakers when the pills
return back to surface.

7
7. Barite Sag. Evidence of Barite sag will be seen as uneven mud gradient measured
at the shakers. It is of the utmost importance to ensure that Yield Point and Gel
Strength are sufficiently high to suspend barite. Barite sag can be a particular
problem in deviated wells since the barite particles only have a very short distance
to fall before they form a bed on the low side of the hole. This bed tends to slump
down the hole thus promoting further barite sag.
9.1.5 Hole cleaning optimization removing cuttings beds

Hole cleaning or the reduction of the cuttings bed height is dependent on three main
factors:
1. Hydraulics optimization (flow rate)
2. Drilling parameters (surface RPM, Controlling ROP)
3. Low-end mud rheology / mud weight / mud type
Formation of cuttings beds

In deviated wells, with hole angles of greater than 35, cuttings will tend to form a
bed on the low side of the hole. Hole angles between 35 and 60 are termed critical
angle holes since, in practice, such holes are the most difficult to clean. Moreover,
when the pumps are shut off for any reason the bed tends to slide back down the
hole. Consequently, circulating the well clean before trips is of critical importance.
Removal of cuttings beds

The annular velocity is the single most important parameter in the hole cleaning
process. It must be optimized, at all times, remaining within any pressure constraints
imposed by surface equipment or ECD. In general, higher pump rates are required to
clean deviated wells than comparable vertical wells.
Mud rheology should not be adjusted in an attempt to improve hole cleaning in

deviated wells. In vertical wells an increase in rheology specifically the Yield Point
decreases the settling velocity of the particles, which can often improve hole cleaning
efficiency. In deviated wells, decreasing the settling velocity does little to improve hole
cleaning since cuttings only have to fall through a very short distance before they are
incorporated into the cuttings bed.
The ROP determines directly the amount of cuttings to be removed from the annulus.
Consequently, ROP may have to be controlled for reasons of hole cleaning efficiency.
High instantaneous ROP should be avoided as this may load up the annulus with
cuttings.
The effect of a cutting bed remaining when pulling out of hole

The risk of stuck pipe increases as the height of the remaining cutting bed increases.
The risk depends on a number of factors:
1. The height of residual cuttings bed.
2. Clearance between downhole drilling equipment and wellbore.
3. Tripping practices i.e. pulling speed, circulations etc.
The amount of clearance between the BHA and wellbore is extremely important
because in most cases cuttings beds are left in the hole. The trick is to have enough

8
annular clearance around the BHA to allow the upcoming BHA to pass over the
remaining cuttings bed without increasing the height of the bed. If the bed height
increases, cuttings build up around the BHA and the risk of pack-off increases and
stuck pipe incidents will occur.
Good tripping practices are required to stop cuttings building up to a height that can
cause the BHA to pack-off. A major factor is the speed at which the BHA is pulled out
of hole and the ability to recognize a build-up before it is too late.

9

10
9.1.6 Hydraulics optimization - flow rate

The primary objective for hydraulics is to achieve good hole cleaning by pumping at a
high enough rate. Once fulfilled, bit hydraulics can then be optimized.
The following input data are required to carry out complete analysis of hydraulics:
ROP
Total depth of hole section
Formation fracture gradient
Hole geometry
Hole angle
Drill string geometry
Mud gradient
Mud rheology
Lithology
Cuttings gradient
Cuttings size
Annular Mud Flow Rate is the PRIMARY HOLE CLEANING PARAMETER and every effort
should be made to maintain the programmed flow rate. The 17 1/2 and 12.1/4 hole
sizes are generally known as the most difficult with regards to hole cleaning since flow
rates (and consequently mud annular velocities) are relatively lower in these sections and
their deviation often increases towards horizontal. This is particularly the case on rigs with
reduced pump capacity. The annular Mud Flow Rate is dictated by three factors:
Pressure Losses in the System (pump pressure).

The pressure drops in the system is the SUM of: Surface pressure losses - Drill
string pressure losses - Annulus pressure losses. Of the three, surface pressure
losses are generally FIXED, whilst the other two can be altered be varying such
things as bit nozzle size, drill string size and configuration, use (or not) of
steerable mud motor systems.
Pump Hydraulic Horse Power.
The Pump Hydraulic Horse power available is limited by what mud pump
equipment is on the rig. It should be realized that this well design must assume
that the maximum mud pump capacity is maintained throughout the well.
Annular Cross-Sectional Area.
The Annular Cross-Sectional Area is the area of the hole at a given point, minus
the area of the drill string at that same point. It should be clear that by increasing
the size of the drill pipe, then smaller the annular cross-sectional area and
consequently the higher the annular velocity.
Table below gives rule of thumb optimum flow rates for different hole sizes:
Hole size Flow range Minimum flow rate
57 75 lps 50 lps (3000 lpm) with ROP at 20m/hr
17
(3400 4500 lpm)
16 53 70 lps 50 lps (3000 lpm) with ROP at 20m/hr

11
(3200 4200 lpm)

50 67 lps 45 lps (2500 lpm) with ROP at 10-15m/hr
12
(3000 4000 lpm) 50 lps (3000 lpm) with ROP at 20-30m/hr
29 39 lps 22 25 lps (1300-1500 lpm) with ROP at 10-
8
(1700 2300 lpm) 20m/hr
15-17 lps 15 lps (900 lpm) with ROP at 8 m/hr
6
(900-1000 lpm)
Note: The proposed flowrates are based on in gauge holes, if the hole is not in gauge be
alert!
Optimizing bit hydraulics

1. If unconsolidated formations are to be penetrated, in an effort to minimize the
potential for hole erosion, the flow regime shall be maintained in the laminar
range, and nozzle velocities shall be limited to a maximum of 90 m/sec (300
ft/sec).
2. If optimization requires an increase in nozzle size, due to too much pressure being
expended across the bit, then recalculate system pressure drop. Increase flow rate
if possible.
3. If smaller nozzles are required ensure that the increased pressure drop does not
result in the flowrate having to be reduced below the minimum for good hole
cleaning. If this is the case, do not optimize the bit hydraulics further.
4. Take into consideration minimum flow requirements recommended by the bit
supplier to clean the bit face and to cool the cutters. The values below may be
used as a guide for optimization:
Optimization Method % of total system pressure loss

expected at the bit
Maximum Hydraulic Horsepower at Bit 65%
Maximum Hydraulic Impact Force 50%
The chart below shows the detailed decision-based hydraulics optimisation process.

12
9.1.7 Hydraulics optimization - surface RPM

Drilling at a pre-selected ROP to control hole cleaning does not mean sticking at a
constant ROP, some common sense has to be used. For example if a drilling break occurs
and the ROP doubles, then ensure that the drilling system can cope. If not, reduce the
ROP and drill at a controlled rate.

13
If it is not possible to drill with the optimum parameters, implement procedures to cope
with the reduction in the hole cleaning efficiency. If this is not possible, stop drilling until
optimum parameters can be returned e.g. if one pump is down.
The instantaneous ROP shall be controlled to a level at which cuttings can be removed.
Pipe rotation
Pipe rotation is critical in cleaning the hole and therefore pipe rotation must be planned in
advanced. Factors affecting pipe rotation:
1. Dogleg severity requirement & tortuosity of the wellbore

2. Bottom hole assembly including X-overs and subs.
3. Topdrive or rotary table torque rating.
4. Connection rating mainly constrained to ERD wells.
5. Down hole mechanics such as vibration or slick slip.
In general, to maximize hole cleaning rotate the pipe as fast as possible within the limits
of the downhole tools and surface equipment.
There are some differences in opinion on the mechanism that causes the improvement in
hole cleaning, but there is no doubt that it has a huge impact. The different theories are:
Mechanical agitation: at low rpms the drill pipe rolls up the walls and slides back
down. At a certain threshold rpm, the pipe breaks out of the cutting bed and will
rattle around the wellbore and mechanically agitates the cuttings.
Hydraulic action: The pipe rotation creates fluid movement in the bed and the whirl
moves pipe around the wall creating additional velocity at the sides. This velocity
causes frictional drag and lifts the cuttings to where the mud is moving (viscous
coupling concept).
How fast to rotate the pipe?

There are different rules of thumb in the drilling industry. ERD hole cleaning experts K &
M promote that in a 12 hole, step improvements in cuttings returns are seen at 100-
120rpm and at 150-180rpm. The thresholds are not based on a theoretical model, but
rather on actual operational experience in high angle well bores.

14
The table below shows the recommended rule of thumb drill string rpm for different hole
sizes.
Hole size Minimum & desirable RPM

17 120 - 180
12 120 - 180
8 80 - 100
String RPM for each hole size.
The minimum rpms are a realistic target and if the string is rotated faster e.g. to the high
end of the desirable RPMs, then other problems may be created like more equipment
failures.

15
9.1.8 Hydraulics optimization mud rheology

Maintaining the correct rheology is important for any drilling operation. For high angle
wells it is essential. Of primary concern is the ability of the mud to remove drilled cuttings
from the well bore. In addition the mud should ensure borehole stability for extended
periods of time by means of an appropriate mud weight and also a non-reactive chemical
composition. For hole cleaning, the key mud properties should be as follows:
The 6 RPM FANN viscometer reading should be at least 1.2 times the hole
diameter.
The Plastic viscosity (PV) and Yield Point (YP) relation should be as PV : YP = 1 : 2
Mud weight should be that ECDs are not exceeding the formation strength at the
shoe.
9.1.9 Remedial hole cleaning - sweeps / pills

Proper use of mud pills may improve hole cleaning in vertical and deviated wells. High
viscosity (preferably weighted) pills are often effective in hole sizes larger than 8
whilst low viscosity pills are beneficial in smaller holes. When using a low viscosity pill, it
is important to maintain the normal high flow rate and minimize non-circulation time. Also
it is often necessary for a low viscosity pill be followed by a high viscosity (weighted) pill
in order to ensure adequate hole cleaning in the larger diameter vertical hole section. The
specific pill volumes should be determined based on the hole size and the calculated effect
on hydrostatic head. Typical volumes used are:

16
Hole Section Total Volume of Pills

17 1/2 6 12 m
12 1/4 4 8 m
8 1/2 2 4 m
Recommended total volumes (low viscosity + high weighted pills) for pumping sweep pills
in deviated wells.
The principal behind these pills is that the Low Vis pill, which is in turbulent flow, agitates
and lifts cuttings from the low side of the hole. These cuttings drop through the Low Vis
pill into the High Vis pill, which is in laminar flow. Once into the High Vis pill the additional
viscosity in the pill helps to slow down the gravitation of the cuttings towards the low side
of the hole.
Notes:
1. The best results are achieved if the High Vis pill is WEIGHTED since the additional
weight provides additional buoyancy to the cuttings, which in itself slows the
gravitation of the cuttings to the low side of the hole.
2. These COMBO pills should be used with caution, however, since their over-use will
very quickly affect the rheology of the main mud system.
3. It is recommended to pump no more than 2 COMBO pills per day whilst drilling and
one prior to tripping.
4. Check reduction in the loss of hydrostatic head vs. overbalance for the lo-vis pill.
5. After the pills enter the annulus, then the pumps are not stopped until they come
back at the shakers i.e. no connection allowed when circulating bottoms up !
6. Prior to the return of the pills, the shale shaker header boxes should be cleaned
out since a false impression of the hole condition can be the result of the pills
picking up large quantities of cuttings as they pass through Dirty header boxes.
7. The COMBO pill should consist of a Low Viscosity mud pill followed by a High
Viscosity, High Weight pill in 50:50 ratio.
8. The weight of the heavy pill should be at least 0.25 S.G. heavier than the mud
weight in use, and together, the low and high weight pills should equal the mud
weight in use.
9. The use of low viscosity, turbulent flow pills are not recommended in weakly
consolidated formations as washout or hole collapse may occur.
10. Pumping pills can have a serious impact on the mud rheology and are sometimes
counter productive.
Use pills with common sense. Monitor shakers carefully for increased returns. If no
increase is seen do not continue to pump pills. This will result in unnecessary building of
mud volume and make mud properties variable around the system. Use standard high
viscosity pills for vertical wells, and wells deviated up to an angle of 45.
Types of pills
Commonly used types of pills and the function is described below:
High Viscosity Pill. Viscosifiers (e.g. polyvis, HEC, starch) are added and pumped
around the well, the usual volume being 3 to 6 m. A highly viscous pill will be

17
effective at sweeping cuttings out of a vertical hole. Studies observing circulation

of viscous pills over cuttings beds at high angles have shown that the pill deforms
over the bed without disturbing the bed. Therefore the use of a viscous pill to clean
deviated wells is not recommended.
Low Viscosity Pill. The unweighted base fluid of the mud is often used for this pill.
The base fluid usually has a low viscosity and will therefore become turbulent at
lower flow rates. A low viscosity the pill will help to lift and remove a cuttings bed.
Use of a low viscosity pill alone may not be successful. It will not be able to carry
the cuttings up a vertical section of the hole or suspend the cuttings when the
pumps are stopped.
Weighted Pill. A weighted pill comprises of base fluid with additional weighting
material to create a pill weight 0.25 to 0.40 S.G. heavier than the mud. This type
of pill will aid hole cleaning by increasing the buoyancy of cuttings slightly. Heavier
mud also tends to be more viscous. This type of pill is usually used as part of a
tandem pill.
Tandem Pill (also called Combination pill). This consists of two pills, a low viscosity
pill followed by a weighted pill. The concept is that the low viscosity pill stirs up the
cuttings from the low side of the hole and the weighted pill sweeps them out of the
hole. The weighted pill is sometimes substituted for a viscous pill. Tandem pills can
be very effective at stirring up cuttings and should be used as a preventative
measure for hole cleaning problems. If the hole is full of cuttings and a tandem pill
is pumped, there is a chance the amount of cuttings stirred up can cause a pack-
off. If holecleaning problems are being encountered, initially use high circulation
rate, drill pipe rotation and reciprocation to clean the hole. After the hole has
apparently been cleaned up, then use a tandem pill for further cleaning.
9.1.10 Considerations for ERD wells

The well bore geometry of a typical Extended Reach Drilling (ERD) well involves a kick-off
from vertical in the 17 1/2 section, a build-up to the required tangent inclination (usually
between 75 and 80) at which point the 13 3/8 casing is set. The extended 12 1/4
tangent section is drilled to the required casing setting depth and 9 5/8 casing is set.
Thereafter 8 1/2 (and even 6) hole sections are drilled and cased. A number of factors
influence the choice of well path profile including such things as minimizing drilling torque,
casing running limitations, minimizing casing wear, well path anti-collision considerations
and target azimuth / inclination in the reservoir. The net result is a well profile which is
difficult to clean.
For the 17 1/2 section where the hole angle is built-up, this can often involve substantial
sections of oriented drilling with a steerable system during which the drill string is not
rotated assuming a Rotary Steerable System is not used. As discussed previously pipe
rotation is an important factor in hole cleaning and the lack of pipe rotation combined with
barely adequate flow rates can result in sub-optimal hole cleaning during this hole
section.
In addition it has been well established that the most difficult holes to clean are in the
range 40 to 60 of inclination since cuttings beds are almost certain to form in this

18
range. These cuttings bed are particularly unstable and once formed they can slide down /
avalanche the hole and even cause stuck pipe or packing-off.
In the 12 1/4 hole the high inclination extended tangent section is drilled, predominantly
in rotary mode. Despite this pipe rotation however, hole cleaning problems still occur as a
result of the built-up of extensive cutting beds on the low side of the hole any time the
pumps / rotary are stopped and this combined with barely adequate flowrates can result
in sub-optimal hole cleaning during this hole section.
In the 8 1/2 and smaller hole sections the tangent section may be extended to TD or the
hole built up to become horizontal, which will be drilled predominantly in rotary mode. In
general, hole cleaning in these hole sections should not cause the same degree of
problems as the larger hole sizes since flow rate limitations generally do not apply in
these sections. However well specific criteria such as weak formations (need to modify the
mud rheology / flowrates) or substantial azimuth / inclination changes (oriented drilling
mode with no pipe rotation) may result in sub-optimal hole cleaning during this hole-
section. It should be realized that any mistake in these hole sections will more often than
not result in struck pipe!
The most common sticking mechanisms in these wells are hole packing off, becoming
mechanically stuck when tripping, or a combination of both.
Extended Reach Drilling hole cleaning is an issue which cannot be over emphasized since
it is often the deciding factor between the success or failure of the well. It is a historical
fact that most, if not all, struck pipe incidents on extended reach wells can be attributed
to POOR HOLE CLEANING. Hole cleaning in extended reach wells is complicated by such
factors as:
Extended length of the larger hole sections.
Mud pump limitations
High hole angles for extended lengths of hole.
Time the hole is left open.
All of these factors impose considerable demands on the rig equipment and personnel and
it requires careful management to ensure that shortcuts are not taken which could
jeopardize the well.
Time spent circulating

From all of the above then it should be clear that the time spent circulating the hole clean
in an ERD well will be substantially more than in a conventional well. Regardless of
flowrate and mud rheology, extended high angle wells require more circulations to clean.
The old methods of circulating bottoms up or even circulating a high vis pill around are
not enough in an ERD well. Recent experience has shown that the long high angle 12 1/4
hole sections often require up to 4 times bottoms up circulations before the drill string can
be pulled, but trips are then trouble free. The circulating time can appear long, but it is
time well spent.

19
9.2 Tripping

Programme and monitor drilling parameters Drilling Contractor DSV
Safe and proper operation of rig and equipment Drilling Contractor DSV
Measure and tally tubulars Drilling Contractor DSV
Inspect and test BOP Drilling Drilling Contractor DSV
Primary well control Drilling Contractor DSV
Secondary well control Drilling Contractor DSV
Conduct drills Drilling Contractor DSV
Monitor well trajectory DD WDE - DSV
BHA design and bit selection DD-DSV DSV
Deciding when to conduct check trips Toolpusher / DSV DSV
Maintain Trip Sheets in and out of the hole Drilling Contractor DSV
Carry out flow checks Drilling Contractor DSV
Report tripping problems Driller, DD DSV
9.2.1 Pre tripping bottoms up circulation requirements

Circulating the hole prior to tripping is crucial in getting the hole clean enough to trip out.
In most operations people are impatient and see circulating on bottom as lost time. They
are too eager to POOH and stop circulating to soon. In most cases this is false economy
as they then encounter stuck pipe problems during tripping that far outweigh the time
saved on not circulating.
It cannot be emphasized enough that prior to tripping out of the hole, circulation must be
continued until the return of cuttings has genuinely reduced to a stable, minimal level.
The table below gives rules of thumb for the minimum bottoms up circulations required
for different hole sizes and angles. It assume that the circulation is taking place at the
minimum string RPM and pumprate for achieving hole cleaning.
Hole Size Inclination Circulation

17 to 12 > 45 deg At least 3-4 btm-up circulations at optimum parameters.
17 to 12 < 45 deg At least 2 btm-up circulations at optimum parameters.
8 to 6 > 45 deg At least 2 btm-up circulations at optimum parameters.
8 to 6 < 45 deg At least 1.5 btm-up circulations at optimum parameters
Circulating number of bottoms up prior to POOH.
9.2.2 Tripping out of hole Drillers checklist

1. Ensure that the well is clean before tripping:
see table above for number of bottoms up,
no more cuttings over the shakers,
mud weight in = out,
sufficient trip margin,
no light or heavy spots,
any connection gas removed

20
2. If necessary sweep the hole with hi-vis or tandem pills.

3. Ensure to reciprocate and rotate the drill pipe while circulating bottoms up: at least
minimum string RPM and flowrate for hole cleaning.
4. Ensure that there are normal hole conditions (torque and drag) before tripping.
Have pill tanks & mud engineer lined up to prepare for pumping any pills or lost
circulation materials.
5. Detail hole fill requirements and displacement expectations in preparing a trip
sheet.
6. Utilize the trip tank to fill the hole and monitor the actual displacement of the drill
string. This has to be compared to the calculated displacement to determine
whether the hole is taking the proper amount of fluid. Record the decrease or
increase in volume on the trip sheet.
7. Clear rig floor and deck of unnecessary equipment.
8. Ensure that the safety valves for DP and DC on the rig floor are in open position.
9. Have singles in the V-door in case downward motion is required to free the pipe
after a connection.
10. Calibrate rig floor equipment, torque gauges, weight indicator, etc.
11. Verify that the tripping equipment is ready, i.e. mud savers, handling tools, etc.
12. Verify that the trip tank is initially clean and calibrated and then fill as required.
Keep 15 to 20 bbl in the trip tank at all times. If there is a float in the tank, ensure
that it is cleaned regularly.
13. Review lay down procedures, if required.
14. Check and record all levels in mud tanks. Check that valves are properly lined up
and that transfer pumps are lined up.
15. Use a pipe wiper and mud saver bucket. Scrape off any excess mud or gumbo.
16. Unless otherwise indicated, do NOT pump a slug when tripping out of open hole,
only when in cased hole.
17. Flow check the well (10 minutes) prior to POOH and when the bit is above the
casing shoe.
18. As required and when possible, ensure that work such as slip and cut drill line and
servicing the top drive to be done with the bit near the shoe.
9.2.3 Tripping out of hole checklist DSV

1. Perform Toolbox meeting; discuss any special procedures, precautions required,
operational highlights, identify possible trouble spots or unexpected events and
review previous tripping in this section, or offset wells. Examples:
Where will we encounter a build-up of cuttings? Any need to circulate at
different inclinations to mitigate hole pack-off e.g. 75, 60 & 45
inclinations?
Any troublesome formations e.g. tight formations, ledges. Any need to
ream through these areas?
Mud loggers will record all parameters. Significant changes in trends should
be reported immediately to the driller and DSV, and then investigated.
2. Instruct for appropriate response by Drillers and Assistant Drillers when they
encounter:
Excessive over pull or resistance and the decision to pick up the Kelly or top
drive

21
Tendency of the hole to pack-off during circulation or when breaking

circulation
Likelihood of key seats developing over intervals with severe doglegs
Decision to ream or back ream.
3. The DSV has to be on the rigfloor when tripping the first five stands to ensure the
well is taking the correct fill up volume. Review the well kill criteria.
4. Record the depth of the top of the BHA while circulating bottoms up prior to
tripping. Take care when the top stabilizer reaches this depth and for the following
two stands, as this is the likely place the BHA will be pulled in to a cuttings bed if
one exists.
5. If well is not taking proper fill up volume at any time, pipe will be run back to
bottom, and the well circulated bottoms up. Be prepared to close-in if the well is
kicking.
6. Review pumping and back reaming out criteria and communicate to the Toolpusher
/ Driller, to include flowrate, RPM, hoist speed, overpull allowed, etc. Ensure that
driller is to notify of any problem during the trip.
7. Pull slowly and at constant speed. This allows the cuttings to flow around the BHA
junk slot area and stops the cuttings building up around the top of the BHA and/or
top stab.
8. Well control and well bore stability can be compromised due to Swab / Surge
Effect if care is not taken during tripping. Updated and accurate computer models
(from Mudlogger) should be used on the rig site to establish the safe tripping
speeds.
9. Verify proper placement of slugs, only when bit is above the casing shoe.
10. Ensure that limits are set to allowable overpull before requiring going back down.
11. Verify swab and surge criteria and specify running speed guidelines.
12. Ensure that breaks on stands are alternated between trips.
13. Ensure that a wiper rubber is used.
14. Ensure to install a safety valve if the trip is interrupted. The valve is to be left open
to monitor the well while circulating over the hole via the trip tank.
15. Ensure that the drill pipe is moved as much as possible while in open hole.
16. Should there be a break down on an item equipment (i.e. mud pumps) and
considerable repair time is expected, DO NOT attempt to trip back to the shoe
unless the hole has been ADEQUATELY CLEANED. This applies whether the repairs
take 2 hours or 2 days! It is recommended that the drill string be worked slowly
whilst maintaining best possible circulation rate, allow cuttings beds to form and
do not attempt to trip until sufficient power/pumps available to fully clean the hole.
should this occur then the drill string should be tripped back at least 2 stands,
break circulation SLOWLY and work the string. Circulate the hole CLEAN at this
point before resuming the trip.
17. Once out of the hole, confirm that the well is filled and the blind rams are open.
Monitor the well on the trip tank with the trip tank pump running. Record status on
morning report.
18. Once out of the hole, ensure that the Mudlogger resets all alarms and continuously
monitors the trip tank and notifies the Driller of any discrepancy.
If over pulls are encountered, apply max 15 mt overpull rule:

22
1. If a tight spot is encountered do not initially pull more than 15mt. Assume in
deviated wells all overpull exceeding 15 mt as hole cleaning related due to
cuttings bed build up. Always RIH until the BHA is clear of the obstruction -
typically 2 stands - and circulate either bottoms up or minimum of 30 minutes.
2. Always bring the pumps up slowly and watch for pack-offs. The best way to raise
the flow rate is in pre-determined steps once the circulating pressure has stabilised
for that step.
3. Pull up wet through the tight spot without rotation. If the tight spot has
disappeared, then it was caused by a cuttings pile that has now been moved up
the hole. Return to step 1 and circulate the cuttings out of the hole.
4. If the tight spot remains in the same place, then it is likely another mechanical
process (i.e key seating, ledge). If this is the case, ream through section and try to
eliminate the tight spot.
5. Pull up dry through the tight spot again without rotation to see if it has been
eliminated after reaming. If obstruction has been removed, continue with tripping
out.
6. If the resistance is still there after circulation, reaming can be considered. Back
reaming should be used as a last resort if a cuttings bed cannot be circulated out.
If back reaming due to cuttings bed is started, it very likely has to be continued
until hole inclination is < 30.

23

24
9.2.4 Back reaming

Back reaming is a high-risk operation, which accounts for a large proportion of stuck pipe
incidents. If reaming operations are conducted too fast, solids from washouts and cavings
are introduced into the circulating system at a faster rate than the hole is being cleaned.
This can result in a pack-off. Do not assume that any resistance is always at the bit;
stabilisers and drill collar contact may be indicative of a build up of loose material in the
hole and a potential pack-off situation.
Back reaming is extremely hard on equipment, especially motors e.g. shocks and
vibrations. Back Reaming whilst POOH should only be undertaken if all else has failed
(i.e.: circulating clean under the tight spot has already been attempted).
Best practices back reaming

When resistance is seen when pulling out, it can be due to tight spots (doglegs or
formation changes) or due to cutting build up. Prior to heavy reaming, slow rotation (<50
rpm) should be used in an attempt to "walk the BHA past mechanical ledges. If
unsuccessful, increase RPM and flowrate to those when drilling while carefully clearing the
tight spot.
1. Be aware of formation washout risk or accidental sidetrack in unconsolidated and

soft formations. Rule of thumb: when reaming down, always at least at twice the
ROP speed with halved string RPM.
2. Back Reaming out of the hole with full RPM and full pump rate should be executed
very carefully as there is no time to react if anything goes wrong.
3. To clear cuttings beds, the preferred back-reaming method is to:
Back ream the stand slowly all the way up using drilling pump rate and
minimum RPM for holecleaning (e.g. > 120 RPM in 12.1/4hole).
At the top of the stand, keep pumping and rotating at these rates for a few
minutes to clear cuttings from the BHA.
Go slowly down a few meters while observing slack-off weight and reducing
pumprate & RPM to break connection. When still too much drag is seen,
ream the stand down at double drilling ROP and reduce drilling RPM by half,
then up again. If no overpulls are seen, reciprocate at pumps off / no RPM
to observe for drag. If none, disconnect the stand. Repeat action if
overpulls / drag is seen at next stand.
Reaming weight (< 5 10 T either up or down) and pulling speed should be
kept low. This should reduce excessive vibrations and is less damaging to
the BHA and drill string.
4. Any increase in torque or worse, overpulls and increase in pump pressure while
backreaming- should be addressed immediately. This indicates that the annulus is
loaded up, and a pack-off may be forming. Immediately slack off, circulate and
clean the well bore before continuing reaming. Most drag problems can be reduced
by time spent circulating the hole clean.
5. If indications of a pack-off occur, immediately reduce the pump strokes (e.g. by
half) to reduce the pistoning effect. If, after several minutes the hole does not
pack-off, return to the original parameters and be prepared to circulate the hole
clean while rotating & reciprocating. If the hole packs-off (no returns & sharp
increase in pump pressure), immediately shut down the pumps and slowly bleed
the pressure under the pack-off down to less than 10 bars. Be aware of stored
energy in the string.
6. Control the speed of reaming operations: 4 joints an hour can be used as a rule of
thumb for the maximum speed. This should also reduce the mechanical damage
the drill string does to the well bore.

25
7. Large volumes of settled cuttings or new cavings can be introduced to the hole
when back reaming. It is critical that this material is circulated out of the hole.
Reaming speed and circulation time should be adjusted if the returning cuttings'
volume rate is excessive.
8. If the rig is equipped with Soft Torque, do not use this while reaming as it may
disguise torque trends since the torque feedback system is used to reduce
torsional vibrations.
9. When washing in, with a motor in the BHA, rotate the whole drill string at low rpm.

26
9.2.5 Tripping in best practices

1. Briefly review requirements for well vigilance during crew changes, proper
handover and crew change notes and other important information.
2. Ensure that all bits and stabilizers are gauged before running back in the hole.
3. Ensure that all special equipment is tested i.e. motors, MWD, etc. at the
surface and at other dedicated depths such as casing shoes. Typically MWD
pulsers are tested at 1000 m on trip in, depending on type.
4. Ensure to monitor the well on the trip tank.
5. Since a float valve is used, ensure that the drill pipe is filled and circulation is
broken at regular intervals, for instance every 10 stands.
6. Ensure that a trip schedule is monitored, noting the slack-off weights and
comparing to the drag trends and that any excessive hold-up is recorded. The
Driller is to report immediately any problem during the trip. Any hole problems
should be recorded, along with depths in the IADC report.
7. Determine the maximum trip speed to avoid surging the hole.
8. Break circulation slowly and wash down to bottom the last two stands. Start
the rotary first since this will assist in breaking the mud gels and thereby help
to minimize the risk of including loss. After reaching bottom, establish normal
circulation rate. Read and record the circulation pressure from the standpipe
gauge. Monitor for trip gas at bottoms up. If excessive trip gas may cause a pit
level gain, it has to be handled in the same manner as when handling a kick.
9. Ensure that slow circulating rates (SCR) are taken. If the mud is cold, the
SCRs are to be retaken when the mud is warmed up.
10. In soft formations be aware of accidental sidetracks when reaming down is
required.
11. The Directional Driller has to be on the rigfloor while in open hole to instruct
the driller on Tool Face setting and local DLS while encountering resistance.
9.3 Preventing stuck pipe

Stuck pipe is the single largest cause of non productive time in drilling operations and
there is a potential for improvement to better the non productive time with respect to
stuck pipe. Avoiding stuck pipe starts with the understanding/recognizing potential
problems, optimizing mud properties, good drilling practices and an alert drilling crew.
Almost all incidents of stuck pipe can be avoided. It is important to inform the Drillers and
Tool pushers of the potential problems and where they are anticipated. The Drilling
Contractor shall also be encouraged to ensure that all their drilling personnel:
Become familiar with the causes of stuck pipe.
Learn the warning signs.
Are pro active in avoiding stuck pipe.
Are adequately trained in quick initial response. Quick response to the warning
signs will have a major difference in the outcome of a potential stuck pipe incident.

The responsibilities for avoiding and overcoming stuck pipe.

Addressing potential problems in the DE Project Manager
drilling programme.
Conducting drilling operations to Toolpusher DSV
avoid stuck pipe.

27
Troubleshooting and freeing stuck DSV/Toolpusher DSV - Project Manager

pipe.
9.3.2 Avoiding stuck pipe - planning stage

1. A section of the Drilling Programme shall be dedicated to the likelihood of a stuck
pipe situation occurring via presentation of the Stuck Pipe Risk Factor. Potential
troublesome formations should be identified together with references to
appropriate preventative procedures.
2. The drilling contractors personnel must be made aware of the required tight hole
and stuck pipe procedures to be used during the drilling of the well.
3. A BHA containing only the essential components will result in less stuck pipe risk
than a BHA containing needlessly long assemblies. The number of drill collars and
large OD elements must be justified.
4. The amount of open hole time for each section of the hole must be kept to a
minimum.
5. The casing design should be planned to take into consideration casing off
troublesome formations.
9.3.3 Avoiding differential sticking - planning stage

1. An estimate of the formation pressure shall be made (using the best offset data
available) and shown together with planned mud gradient in the Pressure Profile
for the well. If unavoidable high overbalances are planned (i.e. depleted
reservoirs) the risk of differential sticking should be highlighted in the Drilling
Programme.
2. Careful consideration must be given to the number of pad type logging tools
employed in holes where differential pressures are known to be high. Any tools
which have high borehole contact areas should be considered very carefully prior
to programming in these hole sections.
3. The filter cake thickness can be reduced by the addition of speciality fluid loss
additives thus reducing the potential for differential sticking.
4. Solids Control Equipment must be selected to prevent a drilled solids build-up as
low gravity solids resulting in thick and sticky filter cakes and increased mud
gradient.
5. HTHP fluid loss must be run on the mud when drilling in an area where the
potential for differential sticking is high, regardless of the bottom hole
temperature.
6. The Drilling Programme shall state the maximum value for the HTHP fluid loss and
low pressure fluid loss.
9.3.4 Avoiding mechanical sticking - planning stage

1. Circulation rates are important and often need to be kept as high as possible in
large diameter hole sections. Where pump pressure is a limiting factor,
consideration should be given to the use of large ID pipe, short BHAs, and
minimum quantities of HWDP to reduce the friction losses. However there is a
balance to be struck between high flow rates required for hole cleaning and the
need to minimise hole erosion.
2. Recommended minimum and maximum circulation rates shall be included in the
mud program.

28
3. Study offset well data to identify any unstable formations which have caused
problems in the past. These formations shall be highlighted in the Well
Programme.
4. Ensure that the mud formulation is designed to cope with gumbos and swelling
shales where they are indicated.
5. Offset well data shall be reviewed for incidents of key seating and any occurrences
shall be noted in the Drilling Programme.
6. Do not plan a stiff assembly to follow a flexible BHA without flagging in the Well
Programme that care must be taken when tripping in. This is particularly important
when, and after, running core barrels.
9.3.5 General preventive procedures operations

1. Tripping and hole cleaning practices should be carried out at all times
2. Patience is of utmost importance in tight hole situations. Time needed to properly
condition the mud is time well spent although it may seem at the time that it is
time wasted. If hole conditions worsen during a trip, the sooner circulation is
undertaken the better. While there may be reluctance on the part of the Driller to
break circulation and disturb the slug, it is far easier to re-slug than to free the
pipe after it becomes stuck.
3. In open hole the drill string must be kept moving whenever possible.
4. In tight hole each stand must be reamed. If hole conditions are severe, more
frequent reaming may be required. Time spent improving conditions is not time
wasted.
5. Ensure that the Drillers have been told what action to take in the event of tight
hole or other problems.
6. The Driller shall inform the DSV and/or TP whenever tight hole is encountered.
7. The TP must know how each set of jars works in order to make rational decisions
when required. Any relevant information must be passed to the Driller.
9.4 Stuck pipe mechanics and responses differential sticking,

solids induced and unstable well bore
This section discusses stuck pipe situations caused by unstable wellbore or solids pack off:
Hole cleaning
Differential sticking
Unconsolidated formations
Mobile formations
Fractured & faulted formations
Naturally over pressured shale collapse
Reactive formations
Tectonically stressed formations
9.4.1 First actions - Solids induced packing off

The first actions taken when the drill string becomes stuck have a great influence on the
chance of success. The following points give guidance to the correct early response when
the pipe becomes stuck.

29
1. At the first signs of the drill string torque-ing up and trying to pack-off, the pump
rate must be reduced. This will reduce the risk of fraccing the formation should the
hole pack-off. Excessive pressure applied to a pack-off will seriously worsen the
situation as it compacts the cuttings and will form a solid, impermeable lump. If
the hole cleans up, return flow to the normal rate.
2. If the string packs off, immediately stop the pumps and bleed down the standpipe
pressure [not possible with a non-ported float valve]. When bleeding pressure
down from under a pack-off, control the rate so as not to "U" tube solids into the
drill string in case they plug off the string.
3. Leave low pressure (< 25 bar) trapped below the pack-off. This will act as an
indicator that the situation is improving should the pressure bleed off.
4. Holding a maximum of 25 bar on the standpipe and with the string hanging at its
free rotating weight, start cycling the drill string up to maximum make-up torque.
At this stage do not work the string up or down.
5. Continue cycling the torque, watching for pressure bleed off and returns at the
shakers. If bleed off or partial circulation occurs, slowly increase pump strokes to
maintain a maximum of 25 bar standpipe pressure. If circulation improves
continue to increase the pump strokes.
6. If circulation cannot be regained, work the pipe between free up and free down
weight. DO NOT APPLY EXCESSIVE PULLS AND SET DOWN WEIGHTS AS THIS
WILL AGGRAVATE THE SITUATION (25 MT max). Whilst working the string
continue to cycle the torque to stall out and maintain a maximum of 25 bar
standpipe pressure.
7. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO FIRE THE JARS IN EITHER DIRECTION.
8. If circulation cannot be established increase the standpipe pressure in stages and
continue to work the pipe and apply torque.
9. If the pipe is not free once full circulation is established, commence jarring
operations in the opposite direction to the last pipe movement. Once the pipe is
free rotate and clean the hole prior to continuing the trip.
9.4.2 Hole cleaning

In deviated wells cuttings and cavings settle to the low side of the hole and form layers
called solids beds or cuttings beds. The BHA becomes stuck in the solids bed OR cuttings
and cavings slide down the annulus when the pumps are turned off and pack-off the drill
string. Avalanching can also occur while the pumps are on. Good hole cleaning means
removal of sufficient solids from the well bore to allow the reasonably unhindered passage
of the drill string and the casing.

30

31
There are several main reasons for solids not being cleaned out of the well bore, these
are:
Low annular flow rate.
Inappropriate mud properties.
Inadequate mechanical agitation.
If any of the above are missing good hole cleaning will be very unlikely.
In 35-65 degree wells the cuttings bed will slide down the low side of the hole. This can
happen while pumping, not just when the pumps are off. In highly deviated wells of 65
degrees or more cuttings settle very quickly in spite of high flow rates. This is known as
avalanching. A cuttings bed of 10% of the hole diameter (4.5 cm in 17 1/2 hole) looks
harmless enough. Add a drill string and the situation looks very different.
Cuttings beds can also increase drag in the well and cause problems with applying WOB in
horizontal holes.
Preventative Action
Maximize the annular velocity.
Consider using larger drill pipe.
Ensure circulation times are adequate.
Monitor the cuttings returns at the shakers.
Maximize mechanical agitation of cuttings beds, Rotation and Reciprocation.
Optimize mud properties.
Increase YP in near vertical wells.
Rig site indications

Overpulls increasing while POOH from TD in deviated hole.
Erratic pump pressure
Poor weight transfer to bit.
Difficulty orienting toolface.
Absence of returns at shakers.
Presence of re-ground cuttings (LGS).
Overpulls inside casing.
Freeing
See First actions - Solids induced packing off
9.4.3 Differential sticking

Differential sticking occurs when the drill string is held against the well bore by a force.
This force is created by the imbalance of the hydrostatic pressure in the well bore and the
pore pressure of a permeable formation. When the hydrostatic pressure is greater than
the pore pressure the difference is called the overbalance. The resultant force of the
overbalance acting on an area of drill string is the force that sticks the string.
This mechanism normally occurs:

With a stationary or very slow moving string.
When contact exists between the drill string and well bore.

32
When an overbalance is present.

Across a permeable formation.
In a thick filter cake.
Preventative action
1. Any action taken to reduce or eliminate one or more of the above causes will
reduce the risk of differential sticking.
2. Where possible design casing setting depths to minimise overbalance across
potential sticking zones, i.e. design for minimum overbalance.
3. Limit mud weight to the minimum required for hole stability and well control.
4. Use OBM where possible. Keep fluid loss to a minimum.
5. KEEP THE STRING MOVING. Pre-plan to minimize the down time for operations
that require the string to remain static (surveys, minor repairs, etc .).
6. Minimise BHA length when possible. Maximise BHA stand-off. Use spiral drill
collars.
7. The rig team can be made aware of the depth of permeable formations and the
estimated overbalance in those zones.
8. Aim to keep differential pressures across permeable formations to a minimum by
keeping the mud weight at the lowest safe level. A 10 bar static overbalance is a
general rule of thumb.
9. All mud parameters must be maintained within the specifications of the Well
Programme. In particular the following points apply:
10. Maintain HTHP and low pressure fluid loss within specification. These values should
be measured 3 times per day at the minimum.
11. While maintaining consistency with suspension and hole cleaning requirements,
maintain the gel strengths at the minimum value possible. Pipe release agents are
adversely affected by high gel strengths. The 30 minute gel strength should be
measured as well as the 10 second and 10 minute value and should not be
significantly higher than the 10 minute value.
12. Drilled solids content should be minimised.
13. Maintain the lubricant concentration specified in the Well Programme.
14. Stabilisation and spiral drill collars should be used to centralise and minimise wall
contact.
15. In depleted formation, differential sticking is a greater concern. In addition to the
measures mentioned above, the following should also be considered:
Ensure that a pup joint or a single is readily available
Increase the stand-off across depleted zones by adding stabs or torque
reducing subs
While tripping out through the depleted zones try to have the stabs across the
depleted zones at all times, or pull slick section of BHA past the zones in one
move.
Have a lithology sketch available on the drillfloor to assist driller when tripping.
Overpulls on connections and after surveys
No string movement
Full unrestricted circulation
Losses
High overbalance
Permeable formation exposed in open hole
Freeing

33
1. Establish that Differential Sticking is the mechanism, i.e, stuck after a connection
or survey with full unrestricted circulation across a permeable formations
2. Initially circulate at the maximum allowable rate. This is to attempt to erode the
filter cake.
3. Slump the string while holding 50% of make-up torque of surface pipe.
4. Pick up to just above the up weight and perform step 2 again.
5. Repeat 2. & 3. Increasing to 100% make-up torque until string is freed or until
preparations have been made to either; Spot a releasing pill or conduct U" tube
operations to reduce the over pressure (only possible if there is no float sub in the
string)

34
9.4.4 Unconsolidated formations

Unconsolidated formation can fall into the well bore because it is loosely packed with little
or no bonding between particles, pebbles or boulders. The collapse of the formation is
caused by removing the supporting rock as the well is drilled. It happens in a well bore
when little or no filter cake is present. The un-bonded formation (sand, gravel, small river
bed boulders etc.) cannot be supported by hydrostatic overbalance as the fluid simply
flows into the formation. Sand or gravel then falls into the hole and packs off the drill
string. The effect can be a gradual increase in drag over a number of meters, or can be
sudden. This mechanism normally occurs while drilling shallow unconsolidated formations
in Top Hole.
Preventative Action
These formations need an adequate filter cake to help stabilize the formation.
Seepage loss can be minimized with fine lost circulation material.
If possible, avoid excessive circulating time with the BHA opposite unconsolidated
formations to reduce hydraulic erosion.
Spot a gel pill before POOH.
Slow down tripping speed when the BHA is opposite unconsolidated formations to
avoid mechanical damage.
Start and stop the pumps slowly to avoid pressure surges being applied to
unconsolidated formations.
Control-drill the suspected zone to allow time for the filter cake to build up,
minimize annulus loading and resultant ECDs.
Use sweeps to help keep the hole clean.
Be prepared for shaker, desilter and desander overloading.
A method successfully used in the North Sea is to drill 10m, pull back to the top of
the section and wait 10 minutes. Note any fill on bottom when returning to drill
ahead. If the fill is significant then ensure the process is repeated every 10m. It
may be impossible to prevent the hole collapsing. If so let the hole stabilize itself
with the BHA up out of harms way.

Fill on bottom.
Increase in pump pressure.
Overpull on connections.
Shakers blinding.
Freeing
Follow First actions - Solids induced packing off but be aware that the higher
pressure might not be achievable in shallow formations.

35

36
9.4.5 Mobile formations

The mobile formation squeezes into the well bore because it is being compressed by the
overburden forces. Mobile formations behave in a plastic manner, deforming under
pressure. The deformation results in a decrease in the well bore size, causing problems
running BHAs, logging tools and casing. A deformation occurs because the mud weight is
not sufficient to prevent the formation squeezing into the well bore.
This mechanism normally occurs while drilling salt, in particular when encountering KCl or
KMgCL or MgCl salts (Bischofite and Carnalite) or sometimes in unconsolidated clays.
Preventative action
Maintain sufficient mud weight.
Select an appropriate mud system that will not aggravate the mobile formation.
Plan frequent reaming/wiper trips particularly for this section of the hole. Consider
bi-centre PDC bits.
Slow tripping speed before BHA enters the suspected area.
Minimize the open hole exposure time of these formations.
With mobile salts consider using a slightly under-saturated mud system to allow a
controlled washout.

Overpull when moving up, takes weight when running in.
Sticking occurs with BHA at mobile formation depth.
Restricted circulation with BHA at mobile formation depth.
Freeing
Spot a fresh water pill if in a squeezing salt formation. Consider first the effect on
well control and on other open hole formations.
If moving up, apply torque and jar down with maximum trip load.
If moving down, jar up with maximum trip load. Torque should not be applied
while jarring up.

37

38
9.4.6 Fractured and faulted formations

A natural fracture system in the rock can often be found near faults. Rock near faults can
be broken into large or small pieces. If they are loose they can fall into the well bore and
jam the string in the hole. Even if the pieces are bonded together, impacts from the BHA
due to drill string vibration can cause the formation to fall into the well bore. This type of
sticking is particularly unusual in that stuck pipe can occur while drilling. When this has
happened in the past, the first sign of a problem has been the string torque-ing up and
sticking. There is a risk of sticking in fractured / faulted formation when drilling through a
fault and when drilling through fractured limestone formations.
This mechanism can occur:

in tectonically active zones.
in fractured limestone.
Preventative action
Minimize drill string vibration. Choose an alternative RPM or change the BHA
configuration if high shock vibrations are observed.
Slow the trip speed before the BHA enters a suspected fractured/faulted area.
Generally, fractured formations require time to stabilize.
Be prepared to spend time when initially drilling and reaming prior to making
significant further progress.
Circulate the hole clean before drilling ahead.
Restrict tripping speed when BHA is opposite fractured formations and fault zones.
Start / stop the drill string slowly to avoid pressure surges to the well bore.
Anticipate reaming during trips.
Ream fractured zones cautiously to avoid large rock fragments falling down and
possibly jam the drillstring.

Hole fill on connections.
Possible losses or gains.
Fault damaged cavings at shakers.
Sticking can be instantaneous.
Freeing
If packed off while off bottom then follow First actions - Solids induced packing off.
Otherwise JAR UP in an effort to break up formation debris. Use every effort to maintain
circulation. Circulate high density viscous sweeps to clean debris. Spot acid if stuck in
limestone.

39

40
9.4.7 Naturally over-pressured shale collapse

A naturally over-pressured shale is one with a natural pore pressure greater than the
normal hydrostatic pressure gradient. Naturally over-pressured shales are most
commonly caused by geological phenomena such as under-compaction, naturally removed
overburden (i.e. weathering ) and uplift. Using insufficient mud weight in these formations
will cause the hole to become unstable and collapse. This mechanism normally occurs in
prognosed rapid depositional shale sequences.
Preventative action
Ensure planned mud weight is adequate. Plan to minimize hole exposure time. Rigorous
use of gas levels to detect pore pressure trends. Use of other information to predict pore
pressure trends. Once the shale has been exposed do not reduce the mud weight. It may
also be the case that the mud weight will need to be raised with an increase in inclination

Cavings (splintery) at shakers.
Increased torque and drag.
Gas levels, D exponent.
Circulation restricted or impossible.
Hole fill.
An increase in ROP.
Cuttings and cavings are not hydrated or mushy.
Freeing
See First actions - Solids induced packing off.
9.4.8 Induced over-pressured shale collapse
Induced over-pressurised shale occurs when the shale assumes the hydrostatic pressure
of the well bore fluids after a number of days exposure to that pressure. When this is
followed by a reduction in hydrostatic pressure in the well bore, the shale, which now has
a higher internal pressure than the well bore, collapses in a similar manner to naturally
over-pressured shale. This mechanism normally occurs:
In WBM.
After a reduction in mud weight or after a long exposure time during which the
mud weight was constant.
In the casing rat hole.
Preventative action
Non water based muds prevent inducing over-pressure in shale. Do not plan a reduction
in mud weight after exposing shale. If cavings occur, utilize good hole cleaning practices.

Cuttings / cavings show no sign of hydration.
Cavings (splintery) at shakers.
Tight hole in casing rat hole.
Increased torque and drag.
Circulating restricted or impossible.
Hole fill.
Freeing

41

42
9.4.9 Reactive formations

A water sensitive shale is drilled with less inhibition than is required. The shale absorbs
the water and swells into the well bore. The reaction is time dependent, as the chemical
reaction takes time to occur. However, the time can range from hours to days. This
mechanism normally occurs:
When using WBM in shales and clays in young formations (Top Hole).
When drilling with an incorrect mud specification. Particularly, an insufficient
concentration of inhibition additives in OBM and WBM such as salts (KCl, CaCL),
glycol and polymer.
Preventative action
Use an inhibited mud system or use SBM.
Maintain the mud properties as planned. The addition of various salts (potassium,
sodium, calcium, etc.) will reduce the chemical attraction of the water to the shale.
Various encapsulating (coating) polymers can be added to WBM mud to reduce
water contact with the shale.
Monitoring mud properties is the key to detection of this problem.
Open hole time in shale should be minimized.
Regular wiper trips or reaming trips may help if shales begin to swell.
The frequency should be based on exposure time or warning signs of reactive
shales.
Ensure hole cleaning is adequate to clean excess formation i.e. clay balls, low
gravity solids .

Hydrated or mushy cuttings or cavings.
Shakers screens blind off and clay balls form, initially at the bell nipple and
flowline.
Increase in LGS, filter cake thickness, PV, YP, MBT.
An increase or fluctuations in pump pressure.
Generally occurs while POOH.
Circulation is impossible or highly restricted.
Freeing
POOH slowly to prevent swabbing.

43

44
9.4.10 Tectonically stressed formations

Well bore instability is caused when highly stressed formations are drilled and there exists
a significant difference between the near well bore stress and the restraining pressure
provided by the drilling fluid density. Tectonic stresses build up in areas where rock is
being compressed or stretched due to movement of the earths crust. The rock in these
areas is being buckled by the pressure of moving tectonic plates. When a hole is drilled in
an area of high tectonic stresses the rock around the well bore will collapse into the well
bore and produce splintery cavings similar to those produced by over-pressured shale. In
the tectonic stress case the hydrostatic pressure required to stabilize the well bore may
be much higher than the fracture pressure of the other exposed formations This
mechanism usually occurs in or near mountainous regions.
Preventative action
Plan to case off these formations as quickly as possible.
Maintain mud weight within planned mud weight window.
Well bore instability shows itself as a hole cleaning problem.
If possible drill these formations in smaller hole sizes. This will minimize the impact
of a hole cleaning problem.
Ensure that the circulation system is capable of handling the additional volume of
cavings often associated with this mechanism.
Use offset data to establish optimum inclination and azimuth as these are key
factors in reducing the extent of the problem.
Rig site indicators

Pack-offs and bridges may occur.
Cavings at the shakers (splintery).
Increase torque and drag.
If stuck, circulation is likely to be impaired or non-existent.
Increase in volume of returns at the shakers relative to the hole volume drilled.
Freeing

45

46
9.5 Mechanical & well bore geometry stuck pipe types - first action
Guidelines for freeing stuck pipe other than Pack-offs and Differential sticking.
1. Ensure circulation is maintained.
2. If the string became stuck while moving up, jar down.
3. If the string became stuck while moving down, do not apply torque and Jar up.
4. Jarring operations should start with light loading (25 T) and then systematically
increased to maximum load over a one hour period.
5. Stop or reduce circulation when; a) cocking the jars to fire up and b) jarring down.
6. Pump pressure will increase jar blow when jarring up, so full circulation is
beneficial. Beware of maximum load at the jar.
7. If jarring is unsuccessful consider acid pills, if conditions permit.
9.5.1 Key seating

Key seating is caused by the drill pipe rotating against the bore hole wall at the same
point and wearing a groove or key seat in the wall. When the drill string is tripped, the
tool joints or the BHA are pulled into the key seat and become jammed. Key seating can
also occur at the casing shoe if a groove is worn in the casing. This mechanism normally
occurs:
At abrupt changes in angle or direction in medium-soft to medium hard formation.
Where high side wall forces and string rotation exist.
While pulling out of the hole.
After long drilling hours with no wiper trips through the dogleg section.
Preventative action
Minimize dogleg severity.
Perform reaming and/or wiper trips if a dogleg is present.
Consider running string reamers or a key seat wiper if a key seat is likely to be a
problem.
Rig Site Indications

Occurs only while POOH.
Sudden overpull as BHA reaches dogleg depth.
Unrestricted circulation.
Free string movement below key seat depth possible if not already stuck in key
seat.
Cyclic overpull at tool joint intervals on trips.
Freeing
If possible, apply torque and jar down with maximum trip load. Back ream out of the hole.
If present use key seat wiper.

47
9.5.2 Undergauge hole

Drilling hard abrasive rock wears the bit and the stabiliser gauge and results in a smaller
than gauge hole. When a subsequent in-gauge bit is run, it encounters resistance due to
the undergauge section of hole. If the string is run into the hole quickly without reaming,
the bit can jam in the undergauge hole section. This mechanism normally occurs:
After running a new bit.
After coring
When a PDC bit is run after a roller cone bit
When drilling abrasive formations
Other sticking mechanisms may give similar effects particularly mobile formations.
Core heads are often slightly smaller than bit sizes and cored sections should be reamed
when running in with a bit to drill ahead. Failure to ream in to the hole can result in the
bit jamming in the undergauge section of cored hole.
Preventative action
Use suitably gauge-protected bits and stabilisers. Consider the use of roller
reamers. Always gauge all BHA components both when running in and
pulling out of the hole. Ream suspected undergauge sections. Slow the trip
speed down before the BHA enters an undergauge zone.

Pulled bit or stabilizers are under gauge.
Occurs only when RIH.
Sudden set down weight.
Circulation is unrestricted or slightly restricted.

48
Bit stuck near the bottom of the hole or at the top of a cored section.
Freeing
Jar up with maximum trip load. Do not jar down. Consider the use of an acid pill. Consider
applying torque as a lastresort.

49
9.5.3 Ledges and doglegs

Ledge: The well bore passes through rock of varying types and ledges develop at the
interfaces between layers of differing hardness.
Doglegs: While drilling a well bore, the characteristics of the rock cause the bit to be
deflected and can result in a change in direction. Likewise when drilling with a directional
BHA, sudden changes in angle can cause a kink in the well bore direction. Sharp
deviations in wellbore direction are called doglegs.
This mechanism usually occurs:

When an unsuitable BHA is run.
After a change in BHA.
Prognosed hard soft interbedded formations.
Prognosed fractured / faulted formations.
After direction changes.
While POOH.
Preventative action
Ledging will be reduced by running a packed hole assembly.
Minimise direction changes in the well bore.
Minimise BHA configuration changes when in formations likely to produce ledges.
Consider reaming trips.
Make a log of depths of ledges and other anomalies.
It can help to get a large scale printout from the mud loggers and to draw a scale BHA on
a separate piece of paper. The paper BHA can be positioned at the depth of any overpulls
and it is easy to see if any of the stabilisers are hanging up at the same point. By using
this technique it is simple to keep track of multiple problem zones and to communicate
expected problem depths clearly to the driller.
Survey with sufficient frequency. Increasing the well bore survey frequency will
Assist in evaluating/reducing well bore tortuosity
Reduce the number of BHA changes.
Slow trip speeds before BHA enters the suspected ledge zone or dog leg.
Avoid prolonged circulation across soft interbedded formations.
Limit initial setdown weight to less than 50% of down drag to minimise momentum
effects when running into a tight zone.
Do not start angle building operations too close to the shoe (start at least 30m
below old hole TD).

Sudden erratic overpull or setdown.
Problems are at fixed depths.
Full circulation is possible.
Freeing
If moving up when sticking occurred, apply torque and jar down with maximum
trip load.
If moving down, jar up with maximum trip load.
Do not apply torque.
If able to, backream or ream very slowly past problem as rotation will assist the
stabilisers and/or other tools to roll past the ledge.

50

51
9.5.4 Junk
Debris that has fallen into the hole from surface or from downhole equipment, which falls
down the well bore and jams the drill string. This mechanism usually occurs:
Due to poor housekeeping on the rig floor.
The hole cover not being installed.
Downhole equipment failure.
Preventative action
Encourage good housekeeping on the rig floor and regular inspection of handling
equipment.
Keep the hole covered at all times.
Inspect downhole equipment before it is run in the hole and again as it is being run
through the rotary table.
Inspect slip and tong dies regularly.
Install drill string wiper rubber as quickly as possible.

52

Repair/maintenance work recently performed on the rig floor.
Missing hand tools / equipment.
Circulation unrestricted.
Metal shavings at shaker.
Sudden erratic torque.
Inability to make hole.
Freeing
Ensure circulation is maintained.
If the string became stuck while moving up, (apply torque) jar down.
If the string became stuck while moving down, do not apply torque and Jar up.
Jarring operations should start with light loading (50k lbs) and then systematically
If jarring is unsuccessful consider acid pills, if conditions permit.
9.5.5 Cement blocks

The drill string becomes jammed in the hole by cement blocks falling around the string.
This mechanism normally occurs when hard cement becomes unstable around the casing
shoe or when drilling off open hole squeeze plugs and kick-off plugs.
Preventative Action
Allow sufficient curing time for cement before attempting to kick off or drillout.
Ream casing shoe and open hole plugs thoroughly before drilling ahead.
Limit casing rathole length to minimise a source of cement blocks. Slow the trip
speed down before the BHA enters the casing shoe or the plug depth.
Use of fibre additives to the cement can increase its integrity. Maintain sufficient
distance between the paths of platform wells to reduce the
possibility of cement blocks from adjacent well bores.
Circulation unrestricted.
Cement fragments.
Rotation and downward movement may be possible.
Erratic torque.
Freeing
Ensure circulation is maintained.
If the string became stuck while moving up, (apply torque) jar down.
If the string became stuck while moving down, do not apply torque and Jar up.
Jarring operations should start with light loading (25 T) and then systematically
If jarring is unsuccessful consider acid pills, if conditions permit

53

54
9.5.6 Green cement

When the drill string is inadvertently run into wet cement, the cement can flash set. This
can occur for instance when the top of the cement is higher than prognosed. The increase
in pressure generated by the surge of the BHA causes the cement to flash set. Attempting
to circulate has to be initiated very carefully as circulation pressure aggravates the
problem. This can also happen when drilling out recently set cement at a high penetration
rate, below which is un-set cement.
Preventative action
Do not rely solely on surface samples.
Know the cement setting time, but do not assume it will be set when you trip in to
the hole. Know the calculated top of cement (Theoretical TOC) before tripping in
hole but always expect it to be higher.
Do not rely on the weight indicator to find the top of the cement. If the cement is
not set you may not see any indication on the weight indicator when you run into
it.
When approaching TTOC begin washing down two stands above the theoretical top
of the cement.
Consider to wash through 3-4 stands above the theoretical cement top in small
hole sizes (< 8.5).
If set down weight is observed when tripping in hole after a cement operation, pull
back 2 stands before attempting circulation.
Control ROP when drilling / washing / cleaning out soft cement.
Increase in pump pressure leading to inability to circulate.
Loss of string weight.
Sudden decrease in torque.
Green cement in mud returns, discoloration of mud.
Freeing
Bleed off any trapped pump pressure.
Jar up with maximum trip load.
Attempt to establish circulation.

55

56
Appendix 1 Stuck pipe decision trees

The variety of causes of mechanical sticking make diagnosis of the exact cause more
difficult than with differential sticking. The following decision trees or flow diagrams are
provided to assist in the diagnostic process after getting stuck after the following actions:
Rotary drilling
Connection
Trip in
Trip out
Ream in
Ream out
Circulating
Running casing

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

1
10 Casing and liner running
Prepared by WEP
Author:
Verified:

10 Casing and liner running | Version: September 2014
2
10 Casing and liner running ................................................................................. 3

10.1 HSE........................................................................................................... 3
10.2 Pre-job checklists & pre-job calculations ........................................................ 3
10.2.1 Tally procedure ..................................................................................... 3
10.2.2 Equipment and accessories checklist ....................................................... 5
10.2.3 Drift standard ....................................................................................... 6
10.2.4 Running casing/liner good practices & lessons learnt .............................. 7
10.3 Specifics for small rigs HH 75 and HH 102 ...................................................... 9
10.4 Procedures ................................................................................................. 9
10.4.1 Step by step casing running procedure .................................................... 9
10.4.2 Step by step liner running procedure ..................................................... 10
10.4.3 Procedures for stabbing and making up ................................................. 11
10.4.4 Placing centralisers ............................................................................. 13
10.5 Examples ................................................................................................. 14
10.5.1 13 3/8 casing running ........................................................................ 14
10.5.2 7 liner running .................................................................................. 15
Appendix 1 Example casing running tally ............................................................. 20
Appendix 2 List of references for tubular information ............................................ 21

3
10 Casing and liner running
10.1 HSE
All personnel must be informed of and observe the following safety and environmental
requirements for handling casing:
Never walk under loads suspended in the crane or high line.
Always wear gloves and eye protection when cleaning joints.
Never get between loads and another object.
Adhere to proper lifting practices when handling tubulars: always have taglines on
pipe bundles or when lifting individual joints through the V-door to the rigfloor.
Have pinch-points identified.
Ensure bundles with casing or tubing are properly slung and secured with clamps.
Be careful rolling casing across racks to ensure feet do not get trapped.
Never use diesel oil for cleaning connections.
Maintain good communication between rig floor, deck crew and crane operator.
Well control equipment shall be tested and ready.
10.2 Pre-job checklists & pre-job calculations
10.2.1 Tally procedure

Tally errors can be relatively easily introduced due to human error, crew changes or
logistics. Below approach eliminates single failure points by introducing multiple
independent checks. Note that this instruction applies to casing and completion tallies.
1. Hold pre-job safety meeting discussing HSE checklist issues.

2. When tubulars arrive at the rigsite lay them out in rows where convenient. Check
weight, grade and connections as per specification. Also check hanger & attached
pupjoints.
3. Drift pipe, check casing thread condition and clean connections, remove storage
pipe dope. Drift sizes are to be as per the API standard, and the size and length of
the drift is to be confirmed by the DSV.
4. WSDE to measure drift size and verify correct value prior to drifting.
5. Number the joints as required. Different tubular sizes or grades should be
numbered starting at the next hundred. Pup joints are to be labelled
alphanumeric (I.e. A1, A2, and B1.). Check with the DSV prior to numbering.
6. WSDE to check his measuring tape is in good condition, accurate and clear.
7. Joints will be measured from end to end: including the pin end threads. Ensure
tape is straight to body of pipe, not curved or sloping.
8. The measuring party will consist of 4 persons: two to hold the measuring tape, 2
who read and record the lengths. The two taking measurements do so individually
without talking numbers have to be compared per row of pipe. If data conflicts,
re-measure pipe.
9. WSDE to witness measuring of the joints of pipe. WSDE and lead roughneck to
perform regular spot checks independently from measuring party. If a conflict in
measurement is found, both WSDE and measuring party re-measure pipe.

4
10. All lengths will be written down in a tally list.

11. Paint the joint number and the length (including threads) on the joint.
12. Mark all joints to be left out and store on separate pipe rack.
13. Mark landing joint(s).
14. Continue this process row by row until all joints have been measured and checked.
Replace thread protectors (handtight).
15. If for some reason it is not possible to compare the numbers row by row, this can
be done at a later stage but before finalizing the tally.
16. The WSDE is to enter all the numbers in a computer tally.
17. The WSDE is to ensure the make-up loss is entered and deducted from the joint
length (M/U loss is to be confirmed by the DSV at this point).
18. Ensure the following columns are filled: measured length, running length (incl m/u
loss), cumulative length, depth top of item (when in final position). In case of
sidetracks or re-completions, great care must be taken about using different
elevations. Always use BODF (below original drill floor).
19. When measurements are completed, WSDE to count total number of joints and
compare with tally and shipping manifest.
20. After all the numbers are entered in the computer the WSDE is to ensure that all
the joint lengths are compared with the paper copy. Calculate, by hand, the length
of the complete handwritten tally and crosscheck with the spreadsheet. Best
practise is to check the sum each individual column after each correction. From
here, all errors must have been resolved.
21. Additional info that is required on a tally are: (for every type of connection or pipe
size):
A table indicating joints on site, joints to be run in hole, joints left on site
A table with spare joints and pupjoints available
OD, ID and drift size
Weight, grade and connection type
Tensile yield, burst- and collapse strength
Make up torque: min/opt/max
Depths of interest: Top of liners, open hole, seal bore, known hold-up depths or
tight spots.
Location of centralizers, pipe tags, clamps etc.
Expected hook load
Displacement volumes
22. In case of a completion tally the WSDE will give an electronic version of the
measurements to the Well Services Supervisor (WSS) who will space out all the
accessories as per completion design.
23. Once the completion tally is ready, a draft copy is given in due time by the WSS to
the DSV/TP and WDE to be checked.
24. WSS will supply supporting documents, such as an updated completion status and
a hard copy of all accessories.
25. Once all parties are in agreement the WSS will give an electronic version to the
WSDE who will be the owner of the tally, and the only who prints and hands out
copies of the tally.

5
26. The final copy of the running list will be signed off by the WSDE, the WSS, the DSV
and the TP. Copies will be distributed to DSV, Toolpusher, senior roughneck/crane
operator and driller.
27. Every time a joint is rejected the WSDE shall be informed and the tally updated
accordingly.
28. When a tally error is found, the job shall be stopped and all signatories shall be
informed. Supervisors shall investigate what the impact is of the error.
29. Any time the tally requires updating, it is the responsibility of the WSDE that all
relevant parties are given an updated tally, and that the old tallies are destroyed.
30. Every tally shall have a version number, and in the footer of the tally there shall be
a statement of date and time of print.
An example of a tally sheet can be found in the appendix.
10.2.2 Equipment and accessories checklist

The following equipment and accessories should be on site when running casing.
Casing/liner accessories
Float shoe and collar
Casing / liner
Pony casing / liner to ensure proper space out to cover the base of the perforations
and to be able to rig up and anchor the cement head at an appropriate height
above the rig floor
Stage cementing collar (if required)
Centralisers type (e.g. spiralizers, bowspring)
Stop rings
Casing thread lock compound (for shoetrack)
Landing joint
Spare Couplings
Casing hanger
Radioactive pip tags, if required
Running Equipment
Elevators; single joint/side door/slip type
Bails, ensure they fit in the elevator ears
Slings, ensure rating of slings is sufficient for the job
Slips, check condition of dies
Spider elevator
Spare dies for slips and spider elevator
Casing tongs
Power tongs, ensure that powerpack is properly functioning and not leaking
hydraulic oil from powerpack or lines.
Torque gauges
Clamp-on thread protectors

6
Casing rams for BOP

Drift mandrel
Casing spear
Properly sized stabbing guides.
Stabbing board, in good order.
Casing circulating head with proper X-over and casing fill up tool.
Landing joints and related handling equipment, if different from casing.
Wellhead Equipment
Casing head housing (clamp-on or threaded)
Casing head spool
Slip and seal assembly or integral type casing hanger; when using integral type
hanger have a slip & seal assembly available on site for back-up.
Wear bushing, seal bushing, plastic sticks and injection tool.
Ring joint gaskets
Studs and nuts/clamp assembly
Steel gate valves/companion flanges
Plug type tester/wear bushing running tool
Cup type tester
Pre-job calculations checklist

Drilling line ton-miles: enough left for running next casing string? Slip and cut
before running casing if necessary.
Measure IDs from at least 10 casing joints and use these figures to calculate the
average casing ID to determine the total strokes to pump during cement job.
Float shoe and collar is pressure rating enough to allow pressure test at bump.
Total weight of string before and after cementation.
Maximum hookload and safety factor. (if safety factor is too low, consider stringing
more lines)
How much overpull will be allowed to reciprocate the pipe or to pull free if stuck.
Maximum pull on stuck casing shall not exceed 85 % of the yield strength.
Will some of the BHA need to be laid down to allow the overpull mentioned above.
Estimated crown load; compare to allowable derrick design load.
Check substructure loading with drillstring set back in the derrick and casing
landed in table. Lay down drill collars and drill pipe if required to allow for space or
if substructure rating may be exceeded during casing running.
Check actual hole depth to casing shoe depth.
Pump pressure shall never exceed 80 % of internal yield of the casing.
Maximum pull on stuck casing shall not exceed 85% of the yield strength.
10.2.3 Drift standard

API drift mandrels for standard casing are made from steel, for coated casing they shall
be made of hardwood or plastic with tolerances of +0.00 mm - 0.03 mm.

7
The drift lengths used shall be:

Casing/Liners 8.5/8" and smaller = 0.15 m.
Casing/Liners 9.5/8" and larger = 0.30 m.
Tubing, all sizes = 1.07 m.
Special clearance drift required for narrow tolerance (e.g. 6 bit through 7 32# casing or
8.1/2 through 9.5/8 47#)
10.2.4 Running casing/liner good practices & lessons learnt

The items below are important to discuss in the pre-job safety meeting and while
preparing the casing job. The rig team DSV, WSDE, toolpusher, driller, casing running
lead operator- need to fully understand the items below prior to running casing to agree
on the decisions to be taken upfront in case of deviation from the plan. It is strongly
recommended that the onsite teams discusses the various what-ifs in order to be
prepared.
Make preparations for cementing, refer to the cementing chapter.

A wiper trip is recommended unless
o There were no hole problems while drilling the section or during logging
o The new bit and logging tools always went with relative ease to within a
short distance of bottom after a trip
o Ledges or tight spots were reamed away on way out with drilling assembly.
Only run casing if hole is clean and in good condition as per drilling program.
Review rig maintenance
Mast alignment is mandatory to be done prior starting casing running operations.
Install: casing tongs, rotary table insert or casing spider.
Install: CRTi device with Swivel Sub where technically possible.
Ensure cementing head c/w plugs have been prepared and checked.
Prior to running casing, the wellhead and SOVs shall be flushed clean.
Function and test all BOP parts, as required.
Discuss the well shut-in procedures to be used during running casing.
Ensure that the casing running gear is of sufficient strength to handle casing
weight.
Confirm proper calibration and rig-up of all test & torque verification equipment.
Ascertain whether torque gauges are the correct gauge for tongs being utilized.
Differential pressure readings are not adequate.
Casing tongs are to be in good working condition prior to being hoisted to the rig
floor.
Communicate the importance of all thread makeup and alignment to minimize
thread damage. Use of stabbing guide is strongly recommended.
The tong operator and drilling supervisor are to agree on the recommended make-
up torque prior to running casing. Also specify minimum and maximum make-up
torque.

8
Torque turn or equivalent joint analysis makeup computer equipment should be

utilized on premium thread connections.
Ensure stabbing board is in place properly and safe.
Communicate sections of hole instability and have work instructions in place before
running casing.
Prepare special instructions, as necessary, for running procedures; possible
shallow gas, kill operations, etc.
Ensure proper handling tools on the rig floor, and make any necessary risk
assessments.
Ensure that on flush-joint pipe, a safety clamp is installed before disconnecting the
elevators and removing the lift plug.
Inspect trip tanks, mud tank levels and condition. Verify operation of transfer
pumps.
Communicate and post maximum over pull allowed on casing during running or
pulling operations.
Clamp-on or inflatable thread protectors are recommended.
All joints are to be tailed in to the table with a rope to prevent thread damage.
Ensure all equipment is properly functioning and has been tested offline.
Change top pipe-rams to casing rams
Use thread locking compound on both pin and coupling threads of all float
equipment and stage cementing equipment as well as the first connection above
the shoe track for ease of drilling out.
All threaded accessories shall be made up on casing pin ends to ease fishing
operations in case the casing should fall into the hole.
Visually check each joint of casing to ensure all joints are clear of foreign matter.
The following precautions should be observed to prevent foreign matter entering
whilst running: all rigfloor personnel to wear chin straps and all dope brushes etc.
to be tied to the wrist of the user.
Ensure proper doping techniques are utilized. Consider using a paintbrush. Casing
thread dope is to be applied to the pin ends only; refer also to manufacturers
specifications.
Run in at controlled speed to minimise pressure surges (approximately 30
sec/joint)
Minimise stationary pipe in open hole > long blank pipe sections, high risk of
becoming stuck!
Check returns constantly
Ensure circulation at the last casing shoe.
Verify wash down / rotating criteria, if any, along with circulating and conditioning
(staging) criteria while running in the hole.
Washing down the casing can be considered in order to assist the casing to pass a
tight spot. In some cases this might be necessary continuously; in these cases it
may be prudent to pull the casing back for a reaming trip.
Use hand slips until casing hanging weight exceeds 20 ton or when at shoe of last
casing before changing to automated slips.

9
Communicate circulation and conditioning requirements with appropriate

personnel.
o Recommended to reciprocate and rotate casing or liner after RIH and during
circulation.
Communicate swab and surge criteria to all appropriate personnel. Casing shall be
run in the hole at a controlled rate (30sec/jnt) to avoid excess surge pressure on
the bottom hole.
Confirm whether bottom hole location survey is required, prior to POOH to run
casing.
Drift all tubulars in the landing string, including the running tools to a greater
diameter of the pump-down plug-releasing dart.
10.3 Specifics for small rigs HH 75 and HH 102

The following applies for rigs HH 75 and HH 102:
On casing jobs, due to the rig's small dimensions, the cementing head can't be
rigged up and the cementing job is performed by CRTI.
Casing length has to be in range 2 to be able to use CRTI
10.4 Procedures
10.4.1 Step by step casing running procedure

1. Conduct Toolbox meeting for all relevant rig personnel to review and discuss the
casing program and safety issues.
2. Remove wear bushing if present.
3. Make up shoe track with threadlock.
4. Check float valve operation on initial insertion into the hole.
5. Fill-up casing at a minimum of every 5-10 joints, unless planned to float in casing.
An accurate pick up and slack off weight shall be recorded whilst filling the pipe.
6. Communicate wash down criteria, if any, along with circulating and conditioning
(staging) criteria while running in the hole.
7. Wash down last 2 joints break circulation slowly! Use slow to moderate flowrates;
be aware of packing off!
8. Check all casing joints left on deck against casing tally prior to picking up the
casing hanger to ensure the correct number has been run in.
9. Check string weight, upward and downward stroke.
10. Check length of landing joint to be sure the collar of the preceding joint can be set
below the casing head flange while still leaving adequate pipe above the rotary
table to clear elevators.
11. Land casing hanger and verify correct landing in wellhead.
12. Install cementation head/plug housing.
13. Break circulation slowly! Observe returns.
14. Check for losses. Do not exceed Drilling Annular Velocity until at least bottoms up.
15. Circulate at least 120% of casing contents
16. Record circulating rates and pressures.
17. Review circulating and mud conditioning criteria before cementing. (e.g. mud
weight in =out)
18. The job is not finished until all reporting has been completed!

10
10.4.2 Step by step liner running procedure

Note: Liner setting is very important and must performed 1st time right, because the well
has already cost a lot of money.
1. Conduct Toolbox meeting for all relevant rig personnel to review and discuss the
liner program and safety issues.
2. In case of a rotating liner:
Check the torque rating of the running tool.
Do not use centralizers unless of rotating type, such as spiralizers.
3. In case of a sliding liner centralizers are allowed. In principle no rotation is
allowed, check torque rating of running tool in case of emergency rotation
required.
4. Assure liner and drillpipe displacements are monitored and compared to trip chart.
5. Verify landing criteria.
6. Verify circulating and conditioning criteria before cementing. Refer to the liner
(cementing) program.
7. Verify the proper slips for the weight of the liner string.
8. Ensure that all joints in the casing-liner overlap are centralized. When there are
close clearances, minimum-clearance centralizers should be used. Casing
centralizers shall be installed in accordance with the cementing contractors
centralization software program.
9. If liner is slotted, ensure that the crew understands how to drop the liner in the
hole in the event of well control procedures.
10. Make up the liner hanger and visually inspect it to ensure that the slips will operate
and that there is no damage to the slips, the J-slot, or other components. A prior
check of the OD's on the hanger should indicate the need for special-size tong
heads or rotary slips to handle the liner hanger.
11. Check casing float valve operation on initial insertion into the hole.
12. Ensure that any singles which must be picked up to allow tagging bottom on an
even stand should be picked up, and stood back if possible, before the liner is run
into open hole.
13. Verify that after all of the liner assembly has been picked up, it is possible to
circulate through the entire assembly before proceeding to go in the hole.
14. Verify the correct amount of casing run by counting liner left on the deck /
location.
15. Check of the actual liner weight after picking up the first stand of drillpipe. Be sure
that the liner is completely full of mud and take into account the weight of the
blocks and the stand of drill pipe.
16. Pipe must be filled at a minimum every 5 10 joints.
17. An accurate pick up and slack off weight shall be recorded whilst filling the pipe.
18. Ensure that the bottom is tagged with the cement head high enough above the
rotary to allow for the activation of the liner slips.
19. Before the liner is run into the open hole, a cementing standpipe and the cement
lines should be rigged up with long enough bails to allow maximum pipe
movement or washing down.
20. Ensure drill string is spaced out to put the surface cementing equipment as close
as possible to the rotary table when shoe is on bottom (keep in mind additional
slack off weight required).

11
21. Ensure that reciprocation of the liner begins immediately. While reciprocating to
break the mud gel strength, break circulation as slowly as possible (40 to 80 lpm).
The speed of reciprocation should not exceed that of the recommended lowering
speed.
22. Ensure that the place where bottom is to be tagged is marked on the drill pipe.
23. Record the exact liner and DP string weights including drag (hook load down and
up) to calculate the exact neutral point for the setting tool release (10-15t max).
24. Ensure that prior to setting hanger that all drill pipe on surface is counted and
matches with correct number from original count.
25. Ensure that before running tool is released, the hanger has had set down weight
applied that is equal to or greater than weights applied during the cementing,
rotating or packer setting process.
26. Ensure that the Drilling Supervisor or Toolpusher supervise the running of the liner
into the open hole.
27. Gradually increase the circulating rate to the maximum rate to be used, as per the
liner procedure.
28. The job is not finished until all reporting has been completed!
10.4.3 Procedures for stabbing and making up

Running with a Stabber
To work correctly, the position of the stabbing board should be checked to ensure the
stabber can reach the pipe. If a stabbing basket is to be used, be sure it can reach high
enough, and will not be in the way of either the elevator/blocks or cat lines.
Also check to see that the blocks are aligned directly over the well. If not, be aware that
this may cause some problems in running the pipe. For example: a misalignment of 0.40
m for 10 3/4" VAM SL and 0.50 m for 10 3/4" VAM HW ST are sufficient to get the threads
crossed with a length of 11 m.
Running with a Stabbing Arm

The use of such a system must be made with the greatest care possible and used by an
operator only if he has a perfect control of the system. Fix the device at the proper height
because the pipe height can vary. Make sure that the pipe can move freely. Check that
the penny yoke doesn't hinder the working of another device. The pipes must be as
straight as possible. Check the correct pipe alignment with the well axis.
Stabbing
1. Install the stabbing guide.
2. Stab the pipe either with the help of a skilled stabber or with a penny yoke.
Note: the stabber must ensure that the connection is properly stabbed, and once this is
done, he must also maintain the joint in a vertical position.
3. Descend the pipe slowly (more slowly if working by stand).

4. Guide the pipe. During stabbing, avoid allowing the pin end to hit either the mating
coupling or any other equipment on the floor. If accidentally hit, check again the
pin end to ensure the seal and shoulder have not been damaged.

12
5. Fit the pipe into the box.

6. Remove the stabbing guide.
Note: avoid obscuring the driller operator's view during pipe running and ensure he is able
to see the stabbing. Ensure that the pipe does not move too much during initial thread
engagement.
Caution: the stabbing operation is particularly critical, with pipe of 9%Cr, 13%Cr and
above.
Make up
1. Start to make-up by hand or with a strap wrench for at least two turns.
2. It's up to the discretion of the field engineer and customer to decide starting by
hand or not for large diameter tubulars.
If it is difficult to make-up by hand at the beginning, make sure that the stabber is
keeping the pipe in vertical position so that it may turn freely.
When making up, the main elevator shall remain off the pipe and sufficiently far enough
away to avoid hindering the stabbing work.
Important: as steels with 9%Cr, 13%Cr and above have more tendency to gall than
carbon steels, the initial make-up is critical. For high alloy material the make-up must be
made by hand until it becomes difficult to turn.
3. Put the power tong in place (back up tong should be placed below the coupling).
4. Remove the single joint elevator
5. Only after this, use the power tong.
6. Make-up to required torque.
Once torque increase is noted, change the make-up speed to a low speed in
order to obtain the final torque.
Any torque increase before 1.5 turns from shouldering is indicative of a
problem in make-up (such as a cross threading or galling), and rotation should
be stopped and the connection broken-out.
Torque build-up does not normally start until six or seven complete turns are
obtained.
When the connection is made-up, check the torque graph on the monitoring
system.
During all the make-up the stabber should take an active part in the operations
to keep the pipe in the best position.
7. When the make-up is finished and the torque/turn graph is accepted, disengage
the power tong.
8. Set the elevator.
Important: it is essential to close the main elevator only when the makeup is
completed and accepted.
Caution: If a connection needs to be broken-out because of non-acceptable criteria, the

connection must be completely broken-out. Clean and dope again before remake-up.

13
10.4.4 Placing centralisers

The centralisation of casing and liners as well as the correct positioning of the centralisers
are essential parts of any casing or liner job. The main reason for centralisation is to
ensure a homogeneous distribution of cement around the casing. No or poor centralisation
will cause channelling of the cement and hence produce a poor cement bond.
Furthermore, when running casing, adequate use of centralisers reduces the chance of
wall sticking. In a deviated well a more dense distribution of centralisers is required than
in straight holes to keep the casing in the centre of the hole. This is especially true in
build-up sections.
Spring Type Centralisers

For large annuli (diameter difference above 2" [50.8 mm]) the centralisers are installed
over a stop collar. For close tolerance annuli (diameter difference less than 2"[50.8 mm])
the centralisers are installed between stop collars such that they can fully collapse. In the
case of a collard coupling, the upper stop collar is replaced by the coupling.
Rigid Centralisers
Rigid centralisers are used inside casing only. They are installed over stop collars or
between stop collars or collared couplings and stop collars. The method of installation
depends entirely upon the centraliser design.
When specifying rigid centralisers for surface casing, care must be taken to ensure that
they will pass through the riser/landing ring.
Centraliser placement
The number of centralisers needed per joint depends on hole conditions, well trajectory,
well dimensions, etc. The cementing service company will usually perform the calculations
and provide advice. The following can be used as an initial guideline:
1 centraliser per 1-3 joints in a vertical well
1 centraliser per 1-2 joints till 45 degrees inclination
1 centraliser per joint over 45 degrees inclination
The centralizer scheme should be optimized in discussion with the cement

supplier/contractor.
Centraliser installation
Whenever possible, centralisers should be installed over stop collars. It is however
necessary to fit centralisers above and below stop collars in the following cases:
When using close tolerance centralisers in case of a spring type.
When the design of the centraliser does not allow the installation over a stop
collar, e.g. in the case of solid sleeve centralisers.
Where possible, centralisers shall be pre-installed on the rack to save time. Stop collars
are available in sizes from 4 1/2" to 20". The type may be advised by the supplier.

14
10.5 Examples
10.5.1 13 3/8 casing running

This example was used to run 13 3/8surface casing offshore.
Offline work:
Install Centralisers as per tally
Install hose on 20 casing head side outlet to take returns back to pit during
cement job
Dowell to pressure test cement unit and surface lines up to the last LTV to
cementing head. Complete the Pre-job check list and discuss with DSV.
WSDE to calliper 10% of casing and use the calliper ID for displacement.
Fluff the tank prior to cementing operation and stick to agreed surge tank setting
level.
Check the vent line a day prior to cementing job.
Clean the threads on joint to be baker locked. Wrap pin connection with rags.
Cameron to check the O ring in 13 5/8 compact head & confirm condition ok.
Check and confirm housing orientation.
Check, confirm compatible cement head. Count and note number of turns for
release pin.
Note:
Establish a clear signalling strategy between stabber and driller.
Ensure X-over from 13 3/8 BTC to 5 7/8 XT-57 DP & to 2 Weco on the rig floor.
No casing rams, shut in procedure to close annular preventer and strip with X-over
and drill pipe.
Float collar is rated to 34,500kpa.
Model for casing hook load whilst RIH must be used for an early indication of hole
problems.
Slightest deviations from trend to be highlighted and discussed for remedial action.
Run 13 3/8 Casing:

1. Hold Pre-Job Safety Meetings.
2. Retrieve wellhead bushing. Jet wash wellhead.
3. Rig up to run 13 3/8 casing including circulation tool.
4. Pick up compact housing made-up with rotary tool. Lay down the top 1.5 m pup
joint and install marked landing joint.
5. RIH housing to hang off point and mark landing joint. Stand back the same.
6. Make up the shoetrack and check the floats are holding.
2 joint shoe track. Float shoe 1 joint 1 joint Float collar 1 joint
Bakerlock the first 3 connection
7. Make up and Run 13 3/8 72# L80 BTC casing as per tally.
Use safety clamp until string weight is greater than 10kdaN.
BTC connection to be made up to the triangle (torque as high as 25 kftlb was
required for make-up while running the same casing on EG-14).

15
Be careful while running through the window @ 840 to 847 m.

Also be careful across a soft patch from 950 to 1100 m.
Use the fill up tool to fill each joint of casing with mud while running in.
Break circulation to fill casing full prior to enter open hole.
Continuously monitor hook load as RIH each joint.
If tight hole is encountered, attempt to wipe past by max set down 10 tons.
A steady momentum and running speed should be maintained throughout the
job.
In no progress, wash down at max 2 m3/min. (annular velocity limited to at the
time of drilling 48 m/min). Make sure to continuously monitor hole for losses at
all times.
Geoservices to monitor pit volumes for losses or gains throughout the job.
TP/WSDE to count the joints remaining on deck before picking up casing
hanger.
8. Make up 13 5/8 compact housing to the last joint. Confirm orientation-ok. Paint
orientation stripe on the compact housing.
Wash down and land compact housing on 20 casing housing. Confirm
orientation by observing the paint mark through the casing head outlet.
Record pick and slack off weight prior to landing. Record landing wt.
Circulate 115 m3 of (circulate 15 m3 system mud and follow up with 100 m3 of
new mud). Watch for bottoms-up and report findings. Bottoms-up at 93 m3.
Circulation rate not to exceed 2 m3/min. Monitor for losses whilst circulating.
Record SCRs.
Rate Pressure
40 SPM
50 SPM
60 SPM
Pressure test compact housing to casing head seals to 20,700 kPa through test
port.
9. Next operation will be Cementing 13 3/8 casing
10.5.2 7 liner running

Procedure below was used to successfully run a 7 liner of record length of 3400 m to a
record depth of 8000 m in Brunei. Open hole was horizontal and the liner contained swell
packers. A Baker Oil Tools ZXP linerhanger system was used. Note: 1 kdaN = 1 mT.
Liner Depth ID Drift

7 26# L-80 Hydrill 513 7990m 6.276 6.151
Liner is made up to torque of minimum 7900, Optimum 9500 ft-lbs.

If a major well control event occurs during making up the liner there may be no
option but to close the shear rams.

16
Prepare well control X/O to Kelly Cock c/w 7 HYDRIL 513 Pin XT-57 Box Water
Bushing (for circulation).
The Setting Sleeve/PBR has a screen type debris barrier (Pal mix polymer already
added) in PBR ID annulus for further debris isolation.
Ensure all TDS inspections are done & slip /cut minimize exposure of swell
packers in mud.
Make up HWDP in stands in derrick use all 45 joints (22 in drilling BHA). Ensure
HWDPs are cleaned and drifted.
Drift all drillpipe to 2 on way in.
Minimise stationary pipe in open hole > long blank pipe sections, high risk of
becoming stuck!
Main Risks to People:

Slippery surface due to DIF mud,
allergic reaction when in contact with mud,
finger injury while M/U tubular, lifting & handling of 7 liner,
trapped torque while m/u connection after rotating down
Tight Spots: ref to annotated MWD log WSDE.
Detailed instructions
1. Hold PJSM running liner.
2. Rig-up to run 7 26# HYDRIL 513 pre-drilled liner.
3. Make-up Reamer Shoe joint -without float valve / drilled holes- and RIH the 7
pre-drilled liner as per signed off tally to first swell packer.
Before running in, WSDE to count liner joints on deck & check against tally. All
spare joints must be marked & isolated. Counter check no.of joints left on deck
after RIH.
4. Make up Swell packer assembly.
Remove protection without touching the rubber with a knife, inspect packer for
damage prior to running through Rotary DSV to witness.
Drift the OD of the packers with OD drift, confirm as 8.2.
Avoid prolonged contact with base oil, diesel or other oil-based fluids.
Do NOT run centralizer on the upper packer pup joint. Centralizer must be run
just below the box of the joint below.
5. Continue to run 7 pre-drilled liner as per signed off tally.
6. Repeat installing Swell packer assemblies acc. tally.
Important:
Be aware the liner running tool will release mechanically by LH turn with 5000 ft-lbs.
The HRD running tool will be released hydraulically at 17,236 kpa (2500 psi).
Hanger setting pressure 10,350 kPa (1500 psi).

17
7. Make-Up 7 x 9 5/8 liner hanger assembly as per procedures.

Liner hanger run below setting sleeve 7.50 ID polished Bore. Max OD: 8.312
(slips).
Setting tool is pre-made up to liner hanger.
8. Break circulation to ensure pack-off integrity - limit to 6,200 kPa (~900 psi). Do
not set slips on setting sleeve.
Reciprocate string and hang off in upstroke to ensure string is in tension prior
to commencing circulation, else risk activating HRD tool.
Return shall be noted at surface prior to commencing rotation.
Record up/down weight and rotating weight / torque
RPM Torque (ft.lbs)

10
20
30
9. RIH 7 liner on 5 7/8 DP, at 2 min/stand to 1 stand above 9 5/8 casing shoe at
4194 m.
Run in slowly through BOP & wellhead.
Record actual up/down hook load every 15 joints in cased hole and compare to
the modelled hook load plot.
10. At 4150 m (inside shoe), break circulation - limit to 800-900 lpm or 6,200 kPa
(~900 psi), which ever is achieved first.
Reciprocate string and hang off in upstroke to ensure string is in tension prior
to commencing circulation, else risk activating setting tool.
Return shall be noted at surface prior to commencing rotation.
Record up, down & rotating weight and Torque:
RPM Torque (ft.lbs)

10
20
30
With updated drag data, update the drag model and provide updated road map
to driller as soon as possible.
Important: Do not exceed 50 kftlbs at any stage when rotating at 20-30 rpm. Be aware
the liner running tool will be release mechanically by LH turn with 5000 ft-lbs. The HRD
running tool will be released hydraulically at 17,236 kpa (2,500 psi). Hanger setting
pressure 10350 kPa (1500 psi).

18
11. RIH 7 liner at 2 minutes/stand in open hole to 5250 m. Representative to be at

Drill floor.
Connection: Make up each stand, pick up to neutral and break over with
rotation weight, take reading, stop rotation and RIH.
Minimise stationary time when running in.
Above helps to run in smoothly by breaking friction.
Record actual down hook load every stands in open hole and compare to the
modelled hook load plot. Deviation from the modelled curve may be a warning
of worsening hole condition. Do not take upweights.
12. Continue RIH on 45 joints of HWDP, already racked back in stands. Use same
practice as above.
13. After HWDP (~ 5670 m), continue RIH on DP.
14. If the string buckles earlier than expected (estimate around 7400m ~ 0.25FF),
commence rotating 7 liner at 20-30 RPM (no pump), aim for 4-5 minutes/stand.
BOT rep to be at DF.
Ensure engineer at rig floor to monitor hole condition at all time
Ensure there is no crew / driller change during critical part of the operation
where reaming down is required
Adhere to following procedure for making a connection when rotating down is required:
Rotate liner at 20-30rpm. Take static rotating weight.
Rotate 7 liner down at 20-30 rpm, limit surface torque to max 50 kft-lbs.
Release torque from top drive in a controlled manner, NO LH torque !
Set on slip (Rotary locked) and Break connection from topdrive.
Make up another stand of 5 7/8 D/P and Make up to the topdrive.
Apply break on topdrive, Remove slip, unlock topdrive break and pick up to rotary
weight, rotate string first then continue rotating liner down.
Do not keep string stationary for long. If required, keep string in slow rotation
15. Rotate down liner to 7950 m (one stand before liner setting depth @ 7990m BDF).
Confirm pipe tally and depth of packer is correct, report last rotating weight.
Record Free Rotating hook load on each stand prior to start reaming down
Take up weight when safe as per Engineer / Tool pusher
16. Drop 1.5 ball. Make up new stand. Start rotary and record free rotating weight.
Slowly rotate down liner and pump down ball as per engineer, limited pump
pressure to 6,200kpa (~900psi). Meantime, slowly rotate down liner (20-30 rpm)
to setting depth while pumping. Once on depth, stop rotation & any movement in
the string. Release residual torque in string. Slow down pump to 400 lpm at 500
strokes prior to seating the ball to prevent premature shear of the ball seat.
17. Once the ball is on its seat, pressure-up to 12,400 kPa (1,800 psi) to set the liner
hanger. Hold pressure for 5 minutes. Set down with 27 kdaN, to ensure slips are
set on the casing & confirm hanger set (NOTE: Hanger setting pressure 10350 kPa
(1500 psi).

19
18. Continue pressure-up to 20,000 kPa (2,900 psi) to release running tool. Bleed off
pressure. Pick up 1-2 m more than Up Weight before setting to confirm tool is
released. Record Pick Up weight & loss of liner weight.
Contingency: In case the running tool does not release, apply 5000 ftlbs left
hand torque and work down the string. Repeat with 8000ftlbs, 9000 ftlbs and
etc until tool is released.
19. Once released, set down ~ 14 kdaN. Pressure up to 25,000 kPa (3,600 psi) to
shear ball seat in ported ST landing sub. Expect shear at 23,800 kPa (3450 psi).
20. Pick up Running tool to above liner hanger and circulate well gas free, at least 1.5
bottoms up.
21. Flow check well. Might see back flow due to mud imbalance. Preferably no slug.
22. POOH to surface and lay out running tool, report status.
If plug has to be pumped, POOH very slow initial 20-30 meter. Contd POOH to
surface.
Do not rotate string when POOH.
Ball is still inside > careful handling.
Service break running tool & lay out same.
23. Prepare for drift run.
Interval lengths At TD Running in
5 7/8 DP 622 0 622 7368 7990
5 7/8 DP + NRDPP 1700 622 2322 5668 7368
HWDP 423 2322 2745 5245 5668
5 7/8 DP 1400 2745 4145 3845 5245
7 Liner 3845 4145 7990 0 3845

20
Appendix 1 Example casing running tally

21
Appendix 2 List of references for tubular information
Vallourec & Mannesmann http://www.vamservices.com/

TenarisHydril http://www.tenaris.com/

22

1
11 Casing and liner cleanout
Prepared by WEP
Author:
Version: Feb 2015
Verified:

11 Casing and liner cleanout | Version: Feb 2015
2
11 Casing and liner cleanout ................................................................................ 3

11.2 HSE........................................................................................................... 4
11.4 Generic casing cleaning procedure ................................................................ 5
11.5 Running a casing clean out BHA .................................................................... 6

3
11 Casing and liner cleanout

Well productivity can be significantly impaired by drilling and cementing operations due to
solid particles from the drilling mud and cement. Installation of the upper completion
often requires a debris-free completion fluid. It is therefore important to remove as much
of the debris as possible when switching from drilling mud to completion fluid. Casing
cleaning involves the removal of debris by the use of scraper, magnets, baskets and
brushes, and complemented by the action of surfactants, gels, acids and caustic batches
circulated downhole.
There are two phases of casing/liner cleaning:
1. Mechanical: Is performed while RIH with scraper and brushes sized as per the well
configuration. These tools are used to remove solid debris, cement, scale or rust
which might be on the casing. Casing cleaning operations are improved by the
mechanical action of scraper and brushes.
2. Chemical: Once the cleaning BHA is on bottom, a sequence of fluids is pumped to
remove any build-up on the casing which could not be removed by the mechanical
action of the scraper and brushes and to remove any debris loosened from the
casing face by the scraper and brushes run in hole.
The objective of the casing cleaning program is to minimise the potential formation
damage from drilling mud or other solids such as formation fines, particles or rust present
in the wellbore prior to installing well completion equipment. An efficient wellbore cleanup
should:
Eliminate risk of completion tools, packers and slickline tools from obstruction or
becoming inoperable.
Eliminate particle invasion to the formation.
Enhance productive capability of the well.

Person
Responsible
Arrange call-out of well cleaning Drilling
Drilling Supervisor
equipment and personnel Supervisor
Ensure that casing cleaning BHA is made-
up in the right sequence
Ensure that all dimensions OD,ID, length
are available for all components of the Toolpusher Drilling Supervisor
BHA
Ensure that all necessary chemicals WSDE / DSV
required for displacement are available at / Mud Drilling Supervisor
the wellsite Engineer
QA/QC of fluids and pills Mud Engineer Drilling Supervisor
Ensure that casing cleaning operation is
performed as per program

4
11.2 HSE
A toolbox meeting shall be held and the following topics discussed:
Job operational procedures including contingency plans.
Job co-ordination and responsibilities.
Emergency procedures.
An agreed Muster point in case of emergencies and designated smoking areas.
Location of First aid facilities.
Secondary well control equipment like stab-in valves and BOPs shall be tested and
ready in case there is a well control issue.
Returns from the well shall be monitored and managed to avoid environmental
pollution.
Handling and lifting of equipment for instance Razorback scraper or barrels
containing hazardous chemicals and identification of pinch-points.
Chemical hazards i.e. actions required if hazardous contact occurs. Show & discuss
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) of unusual or hazardous chemicals.
Required personal protective equipment (PPE) for chemical handling on location as
per MSDS.
For acids and caustic fluids, ensure correct PPE is in good condition and is worn!
Please note that HF Hydrofluoric (extremely hazardous chemical) should NOT be
used in our operations. IF, by exception, this chemical is to be used, then the
drilling company and supervisors on location must mandatory have the following in
place:
o A special approval sent by Drilling Team and HSE Team of Well Engineering
Department.
o A particular Company with special HSE procedure and emergency response
plan will be involved in transportation/manipulation/cleanout operational
program.
o Drilling company will be involved on easier working while cleaning operation
will be unrolled.
o Safety measures made on location- recommendations:
o Understand the specific danger of HF and always treat it with the greatest
respect, knowing how to protect and how to apply first aid.
o Ensure MSDS (material safety data sheet) is available and known in detail
and always respected.
o Rigorously control the knowledge and competency of everybody including
contractors personnel - who deal with it.
o Treat all HF containers the same whether they are full, partly full or empty.
o Speed in First Aid is essential; Have sufficient amounts of water and
Calcium Gluconate Gel available.
o Ensure that nearby medical facilities are capable of treating persons injured
by HF contamination, before commencing work with this chemical.
o Test and verify that those measures are being followed.

5

Ensure that the correct information is available for casing and/or liner including
casing weight, volumes and capacities.
Ensure that the casing/liner cleaning BHA is run as deep as possible. Ensure
scrapers are sized correctly for casing size & weight!
Space out tools, particularly when with two casing weights, needs to be double
checked.
Always ensure that hoisting equipment is fit for purpose and function tested.
Ensure that the BHA includes a float valve, only if all circulation required is
straight.
Ensure that displacement fluids are mixed as per requirement and fluid
displacements are organized. Ensure that there is enough working mud volume
and tank capacity.
Drilling mud must be conditioned prior to its displacement.
When displacing to synthetic-based mud (SBM), ensure at least two mud pumps
are primed with mud and ready (strainers clean etc.).
Ensure that separate tanks are lined up for neutralising the spent acid.
Check well control equipment is on the rig floor i.e. inside BOP, Kelly cock etc.
Ensure that all necessary crossovers for well control are available on the rig floor
and that the Kelly cock has been made up to the proper crossovers and that the
handle bar or tugger line lifting point is in place.
Function test the alarm panel and ensure that it is operative (in case hydrocarbons
come to surface).
Pump at highest available rate (may have to change pump liners) and reciprocate
the clean-out string to maximize hole cleaning efficiency. Depending on tool types
used, the cleaning assembly may be rotated: verify with supplier first!
Acids are recommended if there is presence of scale on the tubulars. Prior to
pumping acids, a surfactant should be pumped to ensure tubulars are water wet.
When pumping acids, ensure a clear plan has been made where to take the returns
in, how to neutralise the acid and which PPE to use.
Avoid shutdowns as these will lead to solids settling, a decrease of casing cleaning
effectiveness and an increase of pumping times.
11.4 Generic casing cleaning procedure

Below a clean-up program is given that can be used is all well regardless of mud type in
hole.
1. Backload as much surface mud as possible to mud company mud plant prior to
clean-up program commencing.
2. Clean up all mud pits except the single pit that will be used to receive mud returns
from the hole.
3. Fill up clean tanks with water and cleaning detergent.
4. Fill up a small pill tank with water and mix in 3ppb HEC VISCOSIFIER.
5. If SBM in hole, pump 2m3 base oil spacer from cement unit. (If only WBM in hole
then no need to pump base oil spacer)
6. Immediately follow and chase with 5m3 of HEC spacer from pill tank.

6
7. Chase HEC spacer with water/detergent from the clean mud tanks to displace mud
out of hole.
8. Ensure mud tanker truck is hooked up and ready to receive mud returns from hole
then once tanker truck is full, leave remaining mud in the mud tank so it can be
collected later by tanker truck.
9. Clean up mud pit when empty.
10. While using water/detergent to clean casing continue reciprocating string with
clean-up tool assembly taking water returns back to the same tank pumping water
downhole. Use opportunity to clean flow ditch from flow-line to mud pits.
11. Fill tanks with clean water then mix the brine in the empty water/detergent tank.
Alternatively brine already mixed can be transported to the site and be transferred
into the tanks.
12. Check that the solids content of the clean brine is below 0.002% and if not, filter
the brine using 2 micron filters.
13. Ensure corrosion/scale inhibitor and oxygen scavenger is added to the brine.
14. Continue well clean-up using more HEC pills from the pill tank if necessary to
remove debris from the hole.
15. Once ready to displace hole to clean filtered brine, pump 3m3 of HEC pill followed
by clean filtered brine and take care to route the pill when it comes back at surface
to the pill tank.
16. Commence completion program.
17. Use the flocculation and filtration units to clean up the dirty cleaning water prior to
recycling this water for spud mud or for abandonment fluid.
Note: Pure Hydroxethylcellulose (HEC) is used to viscosify water or brine and/or brine pills
and this product should be mixed in neutral pH 7.0 to avoid forming "Fish Eyes"
(unsheared polymer). Corrosion/Scale inhibitors and oxygen scavenger should also be
added to brine prior to pumping and leaving brine in the hole. Be sure mud company
always has a pallet of this product available for all well clean-up programs.
11.5 Running a casing clean out BHA

Different types of clean up components are available for inclusion in the BHA. The type
needed varies per well, depending on the situation and the desired effect. For cleaning the
entire inside of a casing of mud residue a simple casing brush might be enough. For
cleaning the liner setting depth a more solid scraper could be needed.
Ensure the size of the scraper/brush is compatible with the casing/liner to be

cleaned.
Make up the BHA
Run in hole, scraping the casing on the way in
If a specific interval needs to be cleaned, scrape the interval several times, both up
and down
Circulate the hole clean
Pull out and lay down the BHA

1
12 Cementing
Prepared by WEP
Author:
Version: Feb 2015
Verified:

12 Cementing | Version: Feb 2015
2
12 Cementing .................................................................................................... 3
12.1 HSE........................................................................................................... 3
12.2 To do list prior to cementing......................................................................... 3
12.3 Mud circulation and conditioning prior to cementing ........................................ 6
12.4 Cementing best practices ............................................................................. 6
12.5 Operational sequence for cementing operations .............................................. 8
12.5.1 Stab-in / stinger cementing for surface casing only ................................ 8
12.5.2 Plug-type casing cementing.................................................................... 9
12.5.3 Liner cementing .................................................................................. 11
12.5.4 Balanced cement plug ......................................................................... 14
12.5.5 Squeeze cementing ............................................................................. 15
12.6 Additives.................................................................................................. 16
12.7 Cementing graphics................................................................................... 19
Appendix 1 Cement design information sheet ....................................................... 21
Appendix 2 Petrom cementing checklist............................................................... 23
Appendix 3 Cementing recipe form example ...................................................... 27
Appendix 4 Summary........................................................................................ 28

3
12 Cementing
12.1 HSE
Perform Toolbox talk before starting operation. Designate responsibilities.
Permit to work and JSA must be made.
Surround the working area with warning tape.
Required personal protective equipment (PPE) shall be worn for chemical handling on
location. Wear dusk masks when mixing cement.
Chemical hazards i.e. actions required if hazardous contact occurs
12.2 To do list prior to cementing

Design must dos:
For intermediate and production casing: use lead and tail slurries.
Excess volumes: Normally plan for 50 to 100% excess. Generally 10-20% excess
volume is calculated after a calliper has been run. Excess volume has to be
discussed with town and has to be agreed on jointly by the DSV, Senior DE and
Cementing Company prior to the job. Consider:
o Historical best practices for the area or field
o Section type: tophole, intermediate or production string
o Behaviour of formation drilled: losses, cavings
o Mud type used: WBM tends to create an overgauge hole
o How hole size has been callipered: viscous pill, carbide, MWD calliper. If 2-
or 4-arm callipers are run, refer to table in Cementing Checklist (appendix
2) which specifies excess for hole size and mudtype.
Top of cement:
Casing string type Cement coverage
Surface casing TOC at surface for all wells
Intermediate and TOC at least 100 m and preferably 150 m inside previous
Production casings casing shoe.
Note 1: For wells drilled with NADF mud TOC should be
approx 200 m below surface, to recover most of the NADF
mud. For long cement columns a tail slurry and a lead-type
scavenger can be used to recover all the mud in the annular
space.
Note 2: If log data is available which conclusively
identifies the shallowest hydrocarbon zone and if hole allows
(no losses, gauge hole), then TOC can be reduced to a
minimum of 150m above top of shallowest hydrocarbon zone.
If losses have occurred while drilling, use fibres in the first 8 m3 cement.
Cement thickening time (BC-40 time) has to be as short as possible while still
allowing to circulate out 50% of the total cement quantity. In practice this means
1-2 hours safety margin for the pumptime.
The shoetrack shall consist of 2 full joints, where practicable. Note that for some
applications short shoe tracks will be considered.

4
All casing shall be reciprocated or rotated (where possible) while displacing the
cement until a significant increase in drag is seen; then hang off while ensuring
that no collar is opposite the slip-seal hanger area.
Verify and or calculate the following:

Calculate casing string weight before, during and after cementing. Keep in mind
that large surface casings can start floating during cementations.
Circulation volume.
Cement slurry volume including excess.
Volume and density of preflush.
Mixwater, cement and additives requirement for all slurries. Include sufficient
quantity to take into account the tank dead volumes.
Reduction of hydrostatic head due to preflush. Ensure minimal overbalance is
maintained.
Calculate pressure differential prior to bumping plugs.
Hydrostatic pressure when cement fully displaced. Check against expected frac
pressure of formation.
Capacity of cement lines & displacement volumes. Use tool joint corrected values
for drill pipe displacement cementations.
Volume to displace top plug to float collar, convert to pump strokes and time. A
maximum displacement excess of half the shoetrack volume is allowed.
Calculate annular velocity during cement displacement and cross check against
required pre-flush exposure time.
Theoretical pumping pressures versus slurry & displacement volumes.
Maximum possible returns and the maximum displacement volume required to
catch up with "U" tubed cement.
Slurry mixing time and total job time compared to thickening time (BC 40 time).
Casing centralization
Ensure sufficient centralizers are installed for proper casing centralization. Refer to
chapter on casing and liner running.
Ordering Cement
Type and quality as specified in programme
Specify additives required.
o Accelerator or retarder (if required) water loss control agent
o Friction reducer
o Lost circulation material
o Slurry density reducer
o Slurry density enhancer
o Antifoam and de-foam agents
o Gas control agents
o Anti-settling agents
o Spacers
o Pre-flush

5
Cementation Accessories
Cementation head/plug housing
High pressure lines and valves.
Top and bottom plugs > DSV to witness proper installation in cement head!

6
12.3 Mud circulation and conditioning prior to cementing

Hole conditioning prior to cementing is very important in order to get a proper cement
job. Drilling mud is designed to facilitate drilling operations and provide cuttings
transport, but not necessarily conducive for efficient mud displacement. Three mud
properties can be changed: density, rheology and salinity. For proper displacement it is
desirable to reduce the mud density to the minimum wellbore density limit. Reducing the
muds gel strength, yield stress and plastic viscosity is recognized as being very
beneficial, because the driving forces necessary to displace the mud are reduced, and it
mobility is increased.
With the casing installed and mud conditioned the hole should be circulated for at least
one hole volume. Circulating rate should be equal or higher than the planned
displacement rate during cementing so that the risk of losses during cementing can be
assessed.
The mud company can provide recommendations on the optimal flow rate for mud
conditioning and hole cleaning.
Circulation is important in order to:

Make sure all the cutting are circulated out
Maintain primary well control and reduce gas content in mud to a minimum.
Have a homogeneous mud on surface after conditioning the mud.
Reduce mud rheology because most drilling muds are thixotropic.
12.4 Cementing best practices

1. Perform toolbox meeting with all relevant personnel to review and discuss the
operational and safety aspects of the job. Job co-ordination, responsibilities and
operational procedures including contingency plans must be discussed. There
should be a detailed cementing program available on location for the DSV,
approved by the drilling manager or drilling engineer in charge.
2. All (excess) cement volumes to be discussed and agreed prior to cement job.
3. Ensure good communications between the rig floor and the cementing unit.
4. All cement lines are to be pressure tested (at least 1.5 times maximum working
pressure) prior to use and high pressure warning signs are to be placed over the
cementers lines and at high pressure area throughout the duration of the job.
5. Perform physical checks of the required pumps and the back-up pumps.
6. A circulation test is always required prior to performing the cement job. To reduce
the risk of losses, it is important that the mud is thinned and the hole is
reasonably clean of cuttings. In case of expected losses during the cement job
effective loss prevention chemicals are added to the slurry or lightweight slurries
have been designed. This is usually combined while circulating 120% of casing
contents when the casing is hung off.
7. In case of expected gas migration the cement slurry is designed to prevent gas
migration (gas block added). Verify if this additive requires premixing.
8. Fluff the cement tanks well ahead in time (typically 2-4 hours before cement job).
Ensure that every effort is made to keep the air dry for blowing the cement.
9. Ensure the mix water is clean and salinity and temperature are within the design
parameters. Warm or salty mix water can reduce the thickening time. The mud

7
Engineer has to confirm that the Chloride concentration is acceptable. Cementing

engineer will take sample of water and will test Chlorides concentration.
10. Ensure that the program volumes been adjusted based on the caliper information.
11. The Mud Engineer and Mud logging crew shall record initial pit levels. He shall be
present at the mud pits during the whole cementing and displacement operations
reporting any loss and gains on returns. He is also to identify cement returns and
route them to a waste pit.
12. Check the bulk delivery rate to ensure sufficient feed rate. Monitor the ventline to
ensure the cement is not being discharged through it.
13. Visually inspect all tanks to be used for cleanliness.
14. Wash the pumping line before pumping cement to avoid contamination.
15. Batch mix all cement slurries if possible. Mix energy from batch mixing can affect
key cementing parameters i.e. reduced thickening time. Avoid using jet mixers.
Alternatively, use re-circulating type mixers or equivalent continuous mix systems
with auto density control.
16. Collect dry cement samples during the cement job, aim for a total of 3 samples for
each stage (lead & tail) of the cement job.
17. Collect a sample of the mix water w/ additives during job.
18. Ensure to take samples of the mixed cement at the START, MIDDLE and END of
each stage (lead & tail) of the cement job.
19. Verify slurry density with pressurized balances. Mud Engineer to ensure that they
are calibrated.
20. Wash the pumping line after pumping cement to avoid pumping cement after the
top plug.
21. Confirm the sequence of additives to be added to the mix water or cement.
22. Ensure that dry additives are premixed prior to the job. They do not wet mix
satisfactorily in a short period of time.
23. Preflush, spacer and wash volumes are compatible and agreed upon as per job
design.
24. Ensure that the pumping simulation schedules are used to determine optimum flow
rates and identify downhole reactions (i.e., freefall & U-tubing).
25. If returns are lost while displacing, the pump rate shall be reduced in an attempt
to regain circulation. During certain stages of the displacement partial or a
complete lack of return flow might be apparent. Most of the time this is due to the
mud catching up with the U-tubed cement.
26. During the job check the volumes pumped using the barrel counters on the
cementing unit and mud tank displacements.
27. Ensure swab/surge calculations have been performed and reviewed with rig
personnel. Know fracture gradient limitations.
28. Confirm and communicate the pumping pressure limitations due to fracture
gradients with all relevant personnel.
29. Displacement volume must be checked from the displacement tanks.
30. Wellsite Supervisor & Cementer must prepare & compare independent mixing &
displacement calculations.
31. Surface samples are to be placed in a hot water bath to simulate downhole
temperature.
32. Ensure to prepare a plan for activities to be done while WOC.

8
33. Upon conclusion verify that cement & mix water volumes match with material
balance to confirm that the cement was pumped as designed.
34. Follow design procedure for waiting on cement. Complete all company & regulatory
reporting, immediately. The report should include at least:
Calculated top of lead and tail cement
Cement volume returned to surface
Losses
Plug bump pressures
Note: When cementing intermediate and production casings in wells drilled with WBM with
a mud weight less than 1.3 SG, a scavenger slurry of 1.45 SG will be used as spacer.
Note: Mix water and spacers will be prepared 2 hours before reaching the casing/liner
setting depth, especially in wells where the open hole is in good condition.
This rule is applicable also in casing drilling jobs.
Note: For production casing, the displacement of slurries will be made with brine (or
formation water) when the mud density used for drilling is lower than 1.3SG.
12.5 Operational sequence for cementing operations
12.5.1 Stab-in / stinger cementing for surface casing only

1. Ensure Power and Backup tongs, false rotary table or C-plate and spider slips are
available.
2. Set the last joint of casing as low as practically possible in the rotary table.
3. Circulate bottoms up.
4. Ensure the work string is drifted before being run in the hole.
5. Make up stab-in sub on first stand of DP. DSV to check stab-in sub seals.
6. RIH DP to just above stab-in shoe or stab-in float-collar.
7. Space out DP with pup joints to have a tooljoint at a convenient height above the
drill floor.
8. Stab in with stab-in sub. Avoid tagging while pumping since this can blow off the
seals from the stab-in sub when stabbing in.
9. Make up circulating head on DP.
10. Break circulation. Proper sealing of the stab-in sub is established when there is no
flow from the DP x Casing annulus.
11. Pump spacer.
12. Pump cement as per cementing programme. Aim for 5 m3 cement returns at
surface.
Note: Stab-in tools must be used with caution. In case the hole bridges off, pressure
could exceed casing collapse pressure.
Note: When the pressure starts to exceed expected pressures and a flash cement job is
suspected, stop mixing, un-stab stinger and circulate cement out. The rig mud pump shall
be ready to pump at all times throughout the cement job.

9
13. When cement returns are seen at surface, drop the plug and displace the stinger
contents. Do not overdisplace more than half the shoetrack.
14. After landing the plug, check for backflow.
15. POOH DP stinger & WOC.
16. In case of (expected) losses, be prepared to take returns to the cellar and to pump
such returns from the cellar to the shale shakers, using either a deep well or fly
pump, or venture pump system
17. If no cement returns are seen, a topfill shall be conducted.
12.5.2 Plug-type casing cementing

1. Surface lines should be manifolded in advance to facilitate plug release without
having to break connections. Most cement heads have an integrated manifold.
2. DSV must witness the loading order of plugs in the cement head.
3. DSV to verify the cementing head for proper operation of the plug release
mechanism and of the tell-tale.
4. Decide upfront to chase the top plug with the rig or with the cement pump. To
ensure effective displacement, the recommended displacement rates are:

10
13 3/8 casing - Optimum displacement rate 1900 2200 liter/min

9 5/8 casing - Optimum displacement rate 1300 1600 liter/min
7 casing - Optimum displacement rate 800 1200 liter/min
5. Hold pre-job safety meeting prior to the start of the cement job.
6. Pump spacer.
7. Pressure test lines.
8. Release bottom plug. If a two plug cement head is not available, the top plug will
be loaded into the head after the bottom plug is kicked out with the spacer.
9. Mix and pump lead and tail cement slurry as per cementing programme.
10. Release top plug. To be witnessed by the DSV.
11. Pump spacer behind.
12. Displace the cement with the rig pumps or cement unit.
13. During cementing and displacement, reciprocate or rotate (where possible) the
casing to ensure a better cement bond. If the driller notices an increase in hole
drag, he is to move the pipe immediately down to prevent the casing being landed
off depth. Typical amplitudes for reciprocating are 8-12 m with a complete cycle
being completed in 1-5 minutes. Consider historical results which may vary by
area.
14. Record final pressure just prior to bumping the plug to be able to determine the
theoretical TOC.
15.All casing: pump to bump!
16. Bump plugs with +/- 35 bar over differential pressure.
17. Check for backflow. If the floats in the casing string do not hold, the string shall be
pressured up - after pressure testing - to the differential pressure between the
cement and the displacement fluid and held until surface cement samples have
hardened.
18. Pressure test casing. Test pressure shall not exceed 80% of casing or float shoe
burst pressure or maximum axial loading, whichever comes first.
19. If the pressure test fails for some reason, do NOT repeat the full pressure test
after cement has hardened out. This will crack the cement sheet and results in
annular pressures. Call town to discuss with Senior Engineer.

11
12.5.3 Liner cementing

Liners have to be rotated & reciprocated while displacing cement. Amount and degree of
rotation depends on liner hanger type in use.
For depleted formations (with possible losses) where the mud was treated with LCM, it is
recommended to use conventional liners with a dart and a wiper plug.
1. Ensure that the pumping simulation schedules are used to determine optimum flow
rates and identify downhole reactions, besides freefall and U-tubing, also calculate
the extra ECD caused by restriction between liner hanger and the casing.
2. Ensure the use of pump down plug cementing head for liners. Check head for
proper operation.
3. Have rotating liners!
4. Ensure that the surface lines are manifolded in advance to facilitate plug release
without having to break connections to drop plugs.
5. Hold pre-job safety meeting.
6. Pump spacer.
7. P/T lines if not pressure tested prior to linerhanger setting procedure.
8. Pump lead and tail cement as specified in the programme.
9. Drop DP wiper plug.
Slow the pump down to 300 l/min prior to the DP wiper plug landing into the
Liner wiper plug. If the shear is observed, use the calculated liner volume from
the time the shear was seen.

12
Displace until both plugs land on the landing collar or upon reaching the
calculated displacement volume.
Bump the plug with 300 l/min. If the liner wiper plug shear out was not seen,
use calculated displacement volume only. Only pump half the shoetrack
capacity if plug fails to bump.
Record pre-bump static differential at calculated theoretical displacement
volume. Compare with pre-calculated theoretical pressure.
10. Bump the plugs with +/- 35 bar over differential pressure.
11. Check for backflow.
12. Pressure test the liner to the programmed test pressure.
13. Pull back to pull setting dogs above liner top.
14. Set liner packer with weight as per manufactures recommendation and observe
shears.
15. Pull running tool above liner top 1 to 2 joints.
16. Circulate out excess cement. Reversing: The decision to reverse must be clearly
decided and communicated in advance of the job and can only be done when the
plugs have bumped and the liner packer has set.
17. POOH with liner running tool.

13

14
12.5.4 Balanced cement plug

1. Clean, tally, and inspect tubulars. Verify tubular weights and actual dimensions for
displacement and capacity volumes. Use DP displacement volumes that include the
tool joints.
2. Check Power/Backup tongs.
3. Ensure that the work string is drifted. Preferably on the last trip out. Ensure rabbit
is hollow and has a 30 meter, or appropriate length steel wire attached.
4. For holes 8 and smaller a 2 7/8 cement stinger is used. For larger hole sizes a
3 cement stinger may be used. The length of the stinger should exceed the
height of the cement plug by +/- 25 m. The bottom of the cement stinger should
be fitted with a mule shoe or a bull nose bottom. The bottom should be blind and
has +/- 6 holes with a minimum of 1 diameter and have to be made evenly
spaced in the lower 2 meters above the mule shoe. Expendable tubing (fiber glass)
should be considered for stingers in deep, hot holes.
5. If the cement plug is set in open hole or on top of a fish a 100 meter very viscous
pill will be spotted below the bottom of the cement plug. The weight of viscous pill
needs to match the mud weight in use or be slightly above. A minimum volume of
3 m3 pill is considered practical.
6. Hold pre-job safety meeting.
7. Make up mule shoe, sufficient length of cement stinger and x-over.
8. RIH with DP to 100 m below the anticipated bottom of the cement plug.
9. Pump and displace the hi-vis pill.
10. Pull back to the bottom of the cement plug depth.
11. Circulate out excess viscous pill. Meanwhile pre-mix cement slurry.
12. Pump spacer ahead and pressure test cement line.
13. Pump cement.
14. Pump spacer behind to balance.
15. Displace cement with mud. Underdisplace cement with 1 m3.
16. Reciprocate the pipe during circulation, cementing and displacement.
17. Pull out of the plug slowly (< 10 m/min) to minimize disturbance of the cement
plug and to reduce any intermixing and contamination as the pipe is pulled out.
This is extremely critical in highly deviated wells.
18. Pull above the theoretical top of cement.
19. Drop a sponge ball or wiper plug and circulate clean. Circulate at the highest rate
without inducing losses. Be prepared to dispose of cement returns in an
appropriate manner.
20. Test the cement plug by one of or a combination of the following:
Weight test of at least 100 kN (~10.2 ton)
Pressure test of at least 50 bar / 15 min.
Inflow test
21. POOH with cement stinger. Most API connections have a dead area between the
pin base and host box base which can fill with a cement ring. Its recommended
when POOH to Break-Make each connection to break this cement ring.
Note: If well starts to flow during the setting of a cement plug, close in the BOP and
bullhead both string and annulus volumes into the formation. When the well has been
killed and the cement has been pumped into the formation, open the BOP and ensure the
string is free to move.

15
Note: For abandonment plugs and for plugging the perforations, use cement slurries of
1.8 1.9 SG density and a minimum 2.0 SG density for sidetrack plugs.
12.5.5 Squeeze cementing

Two types:
1. Low pressure squeeze, the bottom hole pressure is kept below formation fracturing
pressure.
2. High pressure Squeeze, the bottom hole pressure exceeds formation fracturing
pressure.
For both types plan for 30-60 minutes extra time only between planned pumping time and
hardening (BC 40) time.

16
Low pressure squeeze (balanced method)

A low pressure squeeze can be performed without setting a packer. This is basically the
same procedure as a balanced cement plug with the following additions:
1. Follow the procedure for a balanced cement plug until the cement is spotted, the
stinger is above the cement and the well is circulated clean.
2. Close the annular BOP and apply pressure to squeeze the cement into the
formation.
3. After completion of the squeeze job the decision can be taken to remove excess
cement by lowering the stinger and reverse circulating out the cement. For
practical reasons excess cement can be left in place and drilled out at a later
stage.
High pressure squeeze

A high pressure squeeze can be performed by setting a packer or drillable cement retainer
when the casing can withstand the squeeze pressure. The main objective of using such a
tool is to isolate the casing and wellhead while high pressure is applied downhole.
Use of a retrievable packer provides more flexibility as it can be set and released many
times. A drillable cement retainer is used to prevent backflow if no cement dehydration is
expected or when a high negative differential pressure may disturb the cement.
1. Injection rates and pressures should be determined prior to start of squeeze job.
2. Verify any staging requirements.
3. Become familiar with isolation tools prior to running, i.e. permanent or retrievable
tools.
4. Beware of casing collapse when using isolation tools on large casing.
5. Reversing out must be decided in advance since thickening time may need to be
increased if circulating out conventionally.
12.6 Additives
The following information concerning additives is intended only to illustrate the function of
the various classes of cement additives and also to highlight which chemicals are used for
which purpose. The recipe supplied shall be followed. Refer to the cement
contractor/supplier for more detailed information.
Accelerators
Accelerators are added to reduce the thickening and setting times of the slurry, to
avoiding unnecessary time spent waiting on cement.
Salt is the most common type of accelerator, typically added in the form of
seawater or Sodium Chloride. Calcium Chloride is most commonly used, and
Potassium Chloride less commonly.
In general accelerators increase the viscosity of the cement slurry and decrease
the effectiveness of most other additives.

17
Retarders
Increased depths and formation temperatures may require the use of retarders in order to
extend the pumpable time of the cement.
Thixiotropic slurries may require retarders at shallow depths and low
temperatures.
Most retarders affect the viscosity of the cement as follows:
Lignin Derivative Increase
Organic Acids Reduce
Cellulose Derivatives Increase
High density additives

There are two main methods of increasing the gradient of the cement slurry.
1. Reducing the water / cement ratio. This is the preferred method, particularly when
cementing across gas zones. A maximum gradient of approximately 2.0 bar/10m
can be attained by this method.
2. Addition of a high gradient material.
The preferred materials are hematite or Micromax but barite may also be used.
It is preferable to batch mix the cement and the material of high gradient.
Low density additives (extenders)

Low gradient slurries are used for cementing weak formations or when there is a
possibility that the casing could collapse or float if heavier slurry was used.
A low gradient slurry is prepared by adding extra mixwater.
Bentonite is usually premixed at a concentration of 1 - 2% w/w of dry cement in
the mixwater to reduce free water separation of the resultant slurry.
Foam slurries
As a result of the decreased cement concentration of extended slurries, the
compressive strength of the hardened cement will be lower than that of neat
slurries.
Friction reducers (dispersants)

Friction reducers are dispersing agents which can be added to the slurry to reduce its
viscosity and thus the frictional pressure losses in the system while displacing the cement.
As a result, higher pumping rates are possible and higher displacement efficiencies may
be achieved.
Fluid loss control additives

Fluid loss control additives are added for the following reasons:
Reduce the possibility of dehydration opposite porous zones.
Loss of fluid from the slurry will result in increasing slurry viscosity and gradient
and higher circulating pressures.
Excessive fluid loss will reduce slurry volume and give less cement fill.
When squeeze cementing, to get an effective squeeze against the entire formation,
not just squeeze cement filtrate into it.
Note: Most fluid loss additives tend to viscosify the slurry and consequently, dispersants
are often added at the same time.

18
Additives for thixotropic slurries

The main application of thixotropic slurries is cementing in lost circulation environments.
During pumping, the slurry behaves as normal; however, a gel structure develops rapidly
when static. Such slurries also find application in cementing across gas zones.
The major disadvantage of thixotropic slurries is their relatively high viscosity which may
adversely affect displacement efficiency.
Defoamers and antifoams

While mixing cement, and/or when preparing mixwater foaming is often experienced. To
control such problems antifoams and defoamers are available
Antifoams should be used before adding any other chemicals.
Defoamers remain effective when added after foam-causing chemicals.
In practice, such distinction may be difficult to ensure and therefore both antifoams as
well as defoamers should be added in advance.
Gasblocking additives
During the hardening process, the cement slurry passes through a semi / solid phase in
which the liquid has gelled up. As a result, the overburden pressure will be lost thus
permitting gas influx into, and in some cases migration through, the cement matrix.
Surfactants added to the slurry will form a stable foam with the gas bubbles preventing
their transport through the cement slurry.
When gas is anticipated to be a problem during cementation, surfactants should be
added to slurries
Additives may be incorporated into the slurry which act to block the gelled cement
pore structure preventing gas migration.
High temperature additives

If static bottom hole temperatures exceed 110C, it is necessary to add silica flour/silica
sand to the cement slurry.
Typical concentration of silica required is 20 35 % bwoc. The silica prevents so-called
strength retrogression, i.e. the phenomenon that cements loses strength and becomes
permeable at elevated temperatures.

19
12.7 Cementing graphics

20

21
Appendix 1 Cement design information sheet

22
Drilling Team Manager Senior Drilling Engineer
___________ _______ ___________________
Cementing Coordinator Cementing Engineer
__________________ ________________

23
Appendix 2 Petrom cementing checklist

Well:
Date:
Pre-job checks
Float collar and float shoe have been checked for proper function. As minimum two (2)
joints of casing have to be installed between float shoe and float collar.
Sufficient tank space for the expected volume of returns of the cement job is
available.
Monitor tank volumes of all mud tanks before pumping anything and to continue to
monitor tank levels closely throughout the job to check for losses or gains.
Stage Pumped volume (m3) Returned volume (m3)

Spacer 1
Spacer 2
Lead slurry
Tail slurry
Displacement
Total
Report losses or gains during the cement job and time of occurrence. This information
is useful when analysing the job. In case of losses during the job, consider lowering
the pump rate based on the predicted ECD, the remaining volume and thickening time
of cement slurry.
Mud engineer at the shakers to empty the cuttings waste pit before the cement job to
accommodate any cement returns at surface. Discuss and have available chemicals
which will be used to neutralize the cement slurry returns into the cuttings box.
Mud engineer at the shakers during cement displacement to identify cement returns
and to route these directly to a waste pit.
Calibrated Halliburton mud balance ready for measuring the cement during the job.
Take sample of dry cement and mix fluids to check quality with lab analysis. A sample
of the mix water must be taken and Chloride content reviewed on site before the job,
this result must be compared against the Lab report and any deviation should be
noted Minimum quantity of 12 kg dry cement, 4 liter of fresh water and 4 liter mix
water.
Detailed cement program is available approved by drilling manager or drilling engineer
in charge.
Lab test conducted and report available. Check that the lot numbers for chemicals
used in the Lab report and on site are the same.
Thickening time (BC-40 time) of lead and tail slurry should exceed the total pumping
time and allow for circulating cement out but should be as short as possible.
Recommended is minimum 1 hour or the required time to pump/displace out the
cement with the estimated circulation rate for displacement.
Preflush and spacer volumes and composition are agreed and compatibility with the
drilling fluid tested.
Perform physical check of pumps and lines prior to the cement job.

24
Check BHCT of mud, as well as flowline and active mud tank temperatures then
compare with simulated temperatures.
Circulation test performed prior to the cement job. To reduce risk of losses, it is
important the mud is thinned and the hole is reasonably clean of cuttings. Check
values with Cementing Program and Mud Engineer.
Calibrate stroke counters and pit level indicators whilst conducting the circulation test.
Perform volumetric efficiency test with rig pumps and determine pump efficiency in
case rig pumps need to be used in any stage of the cementing operation
Pump 1 Pump 2
Pump efficiency % %
Stroke volume l/stk l/stk
Drilling fluid circulated and conditioned prior to the cement job (use prejob circulating
time and flowrate for bottom hole circulating temperature estimation).
Check number of casing centralizers available on location, which must be the same as
the number programmed. The cement job must not proceed unless the programmed
number of centralizers is onsite.
Cement engineer and Drilling Engineer have agreed on the casing centralization and
all centralizer and stop collar are available. Consider pre-installing centralizers.
Hot water bath must be available for every production casing and liner cement job.
Calliper log has been run prior to cement job and is used for volume calculations. Use
the excess percentage of the table below for calculations.
Based on Excess Excess

Based on
theoretic based on based on
Hole size tracer/pill
Mud type hole 2-arm 4-arm
(inch) volume
volume calliper calliper
(%)
(%) (%) (%)
>30 200 160 80 50
30 26 100 80 60 40
26 17 80 60 50 30
WBM
17 - 16 60 40 40 30
16 12 50 30 30 20
<12 30 20 15 10
>30 - - - -
30 26 - - - -
26 17 50 30 20 15
SBM
17 - 16 40 25 20 15
16 12 30 20 15 10
<12 20 15 15 10
On-job checks
Detailed pre-job meeting conducted prior to the job.
All cement lines are pressure tested prior to use (1.5 times maximum working
pressure) and have been secured with safety wire.

25
High pressure warning signs placed over the cementers lines and at high pressure
area throughout the duration of the job.
Mud transfer pump with sufficient volume is connected to the cementing unit to avoid
stopping to pump while displacing the plug. The mud pump is not to be used to
transfer mud.
DSV to witness loading the bottom plug in the cement head and to function test the
telltale in the cement head.
DSV to witness loading the top plug in the cement head and to function test the
telltale in the cement head.
Decide upfront to chase the top plug with the rig pump or cement unit. If it is decided
to use the rig pump ensure that a quick change over is achievable. To ensure effective
displacement, the recommended displacement rates are:
Optimum displacement rate

13 3/8 casing 1900 2200 liter/min
9 5/8 casing 1300 1600 liter/min
7 casing 800 1200 liter/min
The spacer or scavenger slurry must reach turbulent flow (if possible)!
DSV, Senior Drilling Engineer and cementing company shall calculated all cement
volumes prior to the job, compare the results from their calculations, discuss and
agree prior to starting the cement job.
DSV, Senior Drilling Engineer and cementing company shall calculated all excess
volumes prior to the job, compare the results from their calculations, discuss and
agree prior to starting the cement job.
DSV, Senior Drilling Engineer and cementing company shall calculated the
displacement volume prior to the job, compare the results from their calculations,
discuss and agree prior to starting the cement job (the displacement volume shall
include the surface line volume).
Calculated top level of lead and tail cement are reported in the DDR. Top of Cement
(TOC) for intermediate and production casing shall be a minimum 150 m above
shallowest hydrocarbons. If shallowest HC are not known TOC shall be a minimum of
100 m into last casing.
Surface samples (minimum 3 samples of each slurry) are placed:
o in an open cup and then into sealed plastic bags or
o in sealable cups
And then in a hot water bath with the temperature regulated to the BHST to simulate
downhole temperature. Based on the lab test results (and this surface sample as a
reference) the waiting time on cement is defined. The surface samples are not very
accurate on deep wells because pressure and downhole temperatures above 85 C can
not be simulated with the water bath.
In case of expected gas migration the cement slurries have been designed to prevent
migration. Consider self healing cement or cement insurance packers for critical jobs.
In case of expected losses during the cement job effective loss prevention chemicals
like fibres are added to the slurry or lightweight slurries have to be designed.

26
Count the number of tank volumes pumped while displacing, in addition to using flow
meters and/or stroke counters (applicable when using displacement tanks on cement
unit while displacing).
Monitor and estimate cement volume returned to surface by using rig stroke counters
and/or displacement tanks and report on DDR.
Reciprocate production casing while displacing the cement to ensure a better cement
bond. If an increase in hole drag is noticed, the pipe has to be moved immediately
down to prevent the casing be landed off depth. Reciprocating casing depends on
historical results and may vary by area.
Rotate production liner while displacing the cement to ensure a better cement bond.
Plug bump pressures monitored closely and noted in the DDR. The pressure shall not
exceed 80% of casing or float shoe burst pressure. Do not exceed the plug pressure
rating as per table below or as per manufacturers specification.
Plug Size
20 to 16 14 to 10-3/4 9-5/8 to 7 5-1/2 to 5 4-1/2 to 4 3-1/2
[inch]
Plug pressure
207 414 552 469 414 345
rating [bar]
After bumping the plug casing and liner shall be pressure tested. Increase the bump
pressure to the calculated casing test pressure and test for minimum 5 minutes. As far
as possible no test pressure shall be applied to cemented casing.
If on liner jobs the plug is not bumped after theoretic displacement volume is pumped,
pump maximum half of the shoetrack volume as additional displacement. For surface,
intermediate and production casing we pump until we bump.
If the floats in the casing string do not hold, the string shall be pressured up to the
differential pressure between the cement and the displacement fluid and held until
surface cement samples have hardened.
If returns are lost while displacing, the pump rate shall be staged to attempt to regain
circulation but no more than 30 minutes shall be taken. Be aware of U-tube effect
when cement is displaced inside casing or stinger. (In case of losses, consider
lowering displacement rate based on remaining volume of displacement and
thickening time of cement slurry).
Cementing parameter (slurry density, pump pressure, pumping time) have been
recorded during the job and print outs are available.
Comments:
Petrom representative Drilling fluids company rep.
___________ _______ _____________________
Cementing company rep.
____________________

27
Appendix 3 Cementing recipe form example

28
Appendix 4 Summary
Casing Type of
Application Density Additives
size slurry
(inch) (sgu) (ppg)
Bentonite and Antifoam,
20, Lead 1.5 1.55 12.5 12.9 Calcium Chloride, if
Surface
13 3/8, necessary
casing
9 5/8 Antifoam, Calcium
Tail 1.8 1.9 15.0 15.9
Chloride, if necessary
Bentonite and Antifoam,
Lead 1.5 1.6 12.5 13.3
Retarder, if necessary
Intermediate 13 3/8, Antifoam, UniFLAC at 2
casing 9 5/8 kg/t (providing moderate
Tail 1.8 1.9 15.0 15.9
FL control < 200 ml API),
Antifoam, Bentonite,
UniFLAC at 3.5 kg/t
Lead 1.5 1.7 12.5 14.2 (providing moderate FL
control < 200 ml API),
7,
Production Retarder, if necessary
6 5/8,
casing Antifoam, Bentonite,
5
UniFLAC at 5 kg/t
Tail 1.75 1.9 14.6 15.9 (providing excellent FL
7, UniFLAC at 5 kg/t
Liner 5, Tail 1.75 1.9 14.6 15.9 (providing excellent FL
4 control < 50 ml API),
Futur, Antifoam, GASBLOK
7 Lead 1.7 1.8 14.2 15.0 MT (120 l/t), Dispersant (2
l/t), Retarder
9 5/8, Antifoam, GASBLOK LT (80
Gas
7, l/t) < 72 degC or
migration
6 5/8, GASBLOK MT (180 l/t) 72
Tail 1.8 1.9 15.0 15.9
5 , 150 degC, Dispersant (3-
5, 5 l/t), Retarder, if
4 necessary
Antifoam, FLAC 8%,
Bentonite 1.5%, Perlite
9 5/8, Lead 1.25 10.4
6.8%, Calcium Chloride
7,
3%
Lost 6 5/8,
circulation 5 ,
UniFLAC at 5 kg/t
5,
Tail 1.7 1.9 14.2 15.9 (providing excellent FL
4
Retarder, LCM added

29
LiteCRETE, Antifoam,
GASBLOK MT (150 l/t),
7 Lead 1.4 1.45 11.7 12.1
Dispersant (2 l/t),
Lost Retarder, LCM added
circulation 9 5/8,
and gas 7, Antifoam, GASBLOK LT (80
migration 6 5/8, l/t), GASBLOK MT (180
Tail 1.8 1.9 15 15.9
5 , l/t), Dispersant (3-5 l/t),
5, Retarder, LCM added
4

30

1
13 Formation integrity test
Prepared by WEP
Author:
Verified:

13 Formation integrity test | Version: September 2014
2
13 Formation integrity test .................................................................................. 3

13.2 Risks and opportunities................................................................................ 4
13.4 Job procedure Static FIT ........................................................................... 5
13.5 Analysis of test results ................................................................................. 6
13.6 Calculations................................................................................................ 7

3
13 Formation integrity test

Formation Integrity Test (FIT, also called leak-off test, or formation strength gradient
test) is used to measure the formation strength below the casing shoe (or outside milled
casing windows for sidetracks) without fracturing the formation. It is also used to check
the competency of the cement bond at the casing shoe and pressure integrity of the new
formation.
In case the expected formation strength is low and tolerance for error is very small, a
Limit test can be carried out. The limit test is a FIT to a fixed pre-set number and has to
be high enough to demonstrate that the next section can be safely drilled ahead.
Formation strength tests are justified for a majority of cases below all casing shoes, they
may however be unnecessary if no hydrocarbon-bearing or over-pressured formations are
to be penetrated in the following hole section, and when drilling in an area with good
knowledge of the formation strength.
The information obtained will provide data for calculating the maximum allowable annular
surface pressure (MAASP, for casing setting depth) and the maximum mud weight
equivalent (for kick tolerance). The FIT shall be carried out below each pressure
containing casing shoe on exploration and production wells.
Generally two methods for taking an FIT are commonly used: static and dynamic.
Sometimes the static method is called the Hesitant method. The dynamic or continuous
pumping method is has an increased risk to fracture the shoe.
Petrom standard is to carry out a static FIT i.e. where small increments are pumped and
each accompanying pressure increase and remaining static pressure is plotted on a scaled
paper to detect a deviation from the straight line.

Person
Responsible
Ensure mud in the well is of equal
mud weight same weight in=out
Ensure all necessary equipment
Cementing
available on cementing unit incl. Drilling Supervisor
Supervisor
testing equipment
Pressure test of cementing unit Cementing
Toolpusher
and pump lines Supervisor
Pressure test of surface equipment Driller Toolpusher
FIT according to static procedure Drilling Supervisor Drilling Supervisor

4
13.2 Risks and opportunities

The main risk when performing an FIT is to fracture the shoe and thus to create or
propagate fracture. This creates a weak-point in the well before drilling the next section
and also may cost plenty of rig time curing the resulting losses.
The point at which the pressure/ volume plot deviates from a linear relationship (leak-off
point) should be taken as the last measure point on the straight line. No extrapolation
should be performed that would yield an increased formation strength.
All formation strength tests should be carried out with the lowest drilling fluid density
necessary for primary well control of the formations exposed during the test i.e to achieve
an overbalance at the anticipated reservoir pressures below the shoe by approx. 15 bars.
In one case a failed FIT led to hydrocarbons migrating along the created fracture to
surface. The reason the failure occurred was because the mud weight was not verified and
the job was not properly supervised.
On another occasion the FIT was continued until the formation broke because it was
thought to be correct procedure. Better training, awareness, basic understanding and
proper supervision would have prevented this.
When insufficient new hole is drilled, the FIT will be taken from a cemented hole. For
shallow set casing shoes, this results in an unrealistically high FIT, up to lithostatic
gradient (~2.2 bar/10m). Thus always keep a good check on the drillpipe tally, casing
tally vs. amount of rathole, signs of when the shoe was drilled (punch through) and
ROPs.
When drilling out 3-5 m of rathole, the BHA or near-bit stabilizer may become stuck due
to loose cement fragments falling from just underneath the shoe or because of unmilled
sections from the float shoe itself. Hence, reduce drilling parameters (WOB, RPM,
pumprate) when drilling out last few meters of the shoetrack and rathole.
In situations where good zonal isolation behind the casing is critical to the wells success
in both short and long term, it is recommended to carry out the formation strength test
using a retrievable packer to avoid the creation of micro-annuli.
When testing below the intermediate casing strings, the annulus outside the casing being
tested should be left open and observed for returns. Do not forget to close the side outlet
valves following the test.

Review lessons learnt from any previous FIT job. Expected leak-off and pre-set
maximum pressure to be plotted on a graph prior to commencing the test. Plan the
operation such (pump-rate) that sufficient static pressure points can be taken to
establish a base line.
Ensure all pump equipment, lines and valves have been pressure tested and are
leak-free have test results on chart and to be verified by DSV.

5
Ensure that the hole is circulated clean and that the mud in use is properly
conditioned to have uniform density: mud weight in = out.
Ensure that the cement pump is operational and in good working condition. It
should also have a calibrated gauge tank and the capability to pump small volumes
(25-50 litres/minute) in small steps.
Ensure that table and graph are prepared prior to job to record and plot pumping
pressure vs. volume of mud pumped.
Cement pump gauge to be confirmed in good working order and ensure data is
recorded electronically or on a chart recorder.
Ensure that a shut-off valve is installed between pump and pressure gauge.
Ensure that a bleed valve is installed between shut-in valve and pump. This valve
will be opened during shut-in period to bleed off pressure.
Ensure that a well calibrated pressure gauge is available for the job.
Ensure that on surface and intermediate casing, pressure test is performed with
the casing-casing annulus filled up and the valve open to observe for possible
channelling or communication.
13.4 Job procedure Static FIT

1. Drill out cement and float equipment plus 3 - 5m of new formation.
2. Circulate hole clean and condition mud to a consistent density in and out. Mud
weight should be known and recorded.
3. Pull back the bit into the casing shoe. Stop circulation.
4. Ensure that the hole is filled with mud.
5. Make-up a circulating head to the drill string and line-up the low volume high
pressure cement pump to the kill line, thus to pump and bleed off from the
annulus.
6. Close Low-Torque valve at rig floor and pressure test line from cement pump to
the maximum anticipated pressure + 50 %.
7. Close the upper pipe Rams or annular BOP. Ensure that it does not close on a tool
joint.
8. Open the HCR (ensure valve upstream of the choke is closed) such that the driller
can record the annulus pressures.
9. Cementer to top up displacement tanks with mud. Record mud volume in
displacement tanks and pressure (hydrostatic head to rig floor).
10. Pump mud slowly until surface pressure reaches 5 bar. Stop and record volume in
the tank.
11. Start pumping slowly at 25-50 lpm at a constant pumprate with 2 minutes
between the different stages. For each increment, the following is recorded:
a. Pressure immediately after pumping ceases (final pumping pressure).
b. Static pressure after waiting 1 minute for stabilization.
c. Cumulative volume pumped
12. If the pump pressure suddenly drops, stop pumping! This indicates cement failure,
leak in surface lines or formation breakdown. In this case, record pressure until it
stabilizes.
13. Plot both pressures for each time interval against volume pumped.
14. Continue step-wise until a pre-determined limit pressure has been reached
15. The static pressure line deviates from a straight line, when leak-off is observed.

6
16. Stop pumping. Do not increase the leak-off pressure to formation fracture!
17. Check pressure to stabilize for a maximum of 15 minutes. Record the volume
pumped.
18. Bleed off pressure until 5 bars and take returns back into cementing displacement
tanks. Stop and record volume in the tank, determine volume lost into the
formation. If there is a float valve in the drillstring, the pressure has to be bled
down from the annulus via the choke manifold.
19. Note the cumulative mud volume pumped, volume lost to the formation, the final
pumping and final static pressures.
20. Keep well closed in to verify that a constant pressure has indeed been obtained.
21. Bleed-off remaining pressure, check annulus pressure is zero.
22. Open BOPs when all pressure is bled off.
23. Rig down lines and line up for drilling ahead.
13.5 Analysis of test results
Formation Integrity test: when line deviates, at leak-off, stop pumping!
Graph below explains fracturing and other definitions. Unless otherwise indicated, do NOT
exceed leak-off! An extended leak-off test is only carried out if specific data is required for
certain types of borehole stability or fracture mechanics analysis.

7
Pressure Types Definitions

Leak-off pressure (outcome from FIT Pressure at which fluid starts
or LOT) leaking-off into the formation
Pressure at which a fracture is
Formation breakdown pressure (FBP)
initiated in the formation
Pressure required to propagate fluid
Fracture Propagation Pressure (FPP)
further into the formation
Instantaneous pressure drop once
Instantaneous Shut-in Pressure (ISIP)
pumping is stopped
Do NOT exceed the leak-off pressure!
13.6 Calculations
Effective Mud Gradient (EMG):
EMG = { LOP + (CSD x MG)} / CSD [bar/m]
Max Allowable AnnularSurface Pressure (MAASP):

MAASP = LOP (CSD x MG) [bar]
Where:
LOP = Leak Off Pressure [bar]
CSD = Casing Shoe Depth [TVD m with reference to Rig Floor)]
MG = Mud gradient [bar/m]

AREA WELL NAME WATER DEPTH DATE
RIG NAME
CASING SIZE GRADE
EST BLEED PRESSURE MASP
SHOE DEPTH MUD VOL. PUMPED MAX PRESS OBS
TVD PUMP RATE MUD FLOWBACK

SURF. PRESS AT BLEED OFF BLEED OFF PRESS. AT SHOE
EQUIVALENT MUD WEIGHT AT BLEED OFF
Example plot: Pressure vs Volume for FIT

MUD PROPERTIES
M.D. Y.P. GELS
PRESSURE

VISC P.V. W.L.
VISC P.V. W.L. W.L.
VOLUME PUMPED
8
1
14 Well logging
Prepared by WEP
Author:
Version: Feb 2015
Verified:

14 Well logging | Version: Feb 2015
2
14 Well logging .................................................................................................. 3

14.3 Guidelines .................................................................................................. 5
14.3.1 General ............................................................................................... 5
14.3.2 Pipe conveyed logging ........................................................................... 5
14.3.3 Generic PCL execution procedure ............................................................ 5
14.4 Specific logging requirements ....................................................................... 8
14.4.1 Formation pressure tests ....................................................................... 8
14.4.2 Highly deviated wells ............................................................................. 8
14.5 Quality assurance and quality control ............................................................ 8
14.5.1 QAQC best practices .............................................................................. 8
14.5.2 Reference depth and depth control .......................................................... 8
14.5.3 Log quality ........................................................................................... 9
14.5.4 Log data handling ................................................................................. 9
14.6 Stuck logging tool and overstripping............................................................ 10
14.6.1 Wireline fishing overstripping procedure .............................................. 10
14.7 Quicklook evaluation and tool summary ....................................................... 11
Appendix 1 Service company wireline procedures - example .................................. 13
Appendix 2 TCL procedures - example ................................................................ 15

3
14 Well logging
Logging is the systematic way of recording the information required to evaluate formation
characteristics of a well being drilled. Logging tools measure certain properties of the
formation, the interpretation of which can yield information on properties such as density,
porosity, permeability, lithology, formation pressure etc.
It is the plan of PETROM to obtain the formation evaluation information in the most
economical and efficient manner with due regard to safety of personnel and the
environment. Target is to log the hole in one run by using multiple logging tools in one
toolstring. It is important to place radioactive tools at the front of the toolstring to avoid
activation of the formation before non-radioactive tools have logged the formation.
The data obtained from well logs shall be used:
To obtain the information for drilling engineering purposes including presence of
shallow gas or hydrocarbons and pore pressure analysis
To obtain reservoir and production engineering data

Person
Responsible
Arrange call-out of logging
Drilling Supervisor Senior Drilling Supervisor
equipment and personnel
Ensure that make-up sequence of
the tool is as per the logging Logging Engineer Drilling Supervisor
program
Perform well logging as per program Logging Engineer Drilling Supervisor
Ensure data accuracy Wellsite Geologist * Drilling Supervisor
Logging Engineer/
Prepare fishing diagram & tools Drilling Supervisor
Driller
Ensure safety requirements are met Wellsite Geologist/
Drilling Supervisor
for the logging program Toolpusher
* In case a Wellsite Geologist is not present at the rig site, a logging witness shall take all
responsibilities to ensure date accuracy.

The PETROM Wellsite Geologist/Logging witness and Drilling Supervisor shall ensure that
the following tasks are carried out prior to logging operations:
An agreed logging program must be available on the rig before rigging operations
begin. The program shall specify the order of logs, combination of tools, intervals
to be logged etc.
A toolbox meeting shall be held prior to any logging operation. Lessons learnt from
previous similar operations shall be discussed.
All wireline logging tools shall be checked prior to rigging up, including inter-tool
connections and connection to the cable.
Before the job begins, ensure that all tripping related work is completed and the
rig floor is as clean as possible. Wiper trips may have been run at the discretion of

4
the PETROM Drilling Supervisor to ensure the hole and mud condition remain
stable.
The Drilling Supervisor shall verify that the hole is dead and in good condition prior
to logging operations.
The hole shall be circulated over the trip tank during logging operations. The Driller
must ensure that the hole is maintained full throughout and record the trip tank
volume every 15 mins and monitor the trends whilst running in and pulling out of
hole. The mudloggers should also monitor fluid levels during this period.
The required logging interval shall be discussed and confirmed with the Logging
Contractor. Any special requirements shall also be noted.
Review with the logging engineer the previous log suites or correlation logs to
determine expected Spontaneous Potential values in clean sands, Gamma Ray
values in shale and expected resistivities and porosities in zones of interest.
The scope of responsibilities for the different parties involved in the logging
operation shall be known and clearly communicated.
It is important to list all the reference depths before commencement of logging.
The drilled depth at which wireline logging is to be performed will be advised by
Petrom following evaluation on all available data.
Ensure the run order is optimized in order to reduce NPT (Petrom DSV
responsibility).
Ensure that the log header information is correct. This should include information
on well name, field name, latitude & longitude, RKB elevations, well depth, casing
sizes and weights, mud type etc.
If fluid samples are to be taken, ensure that an adequate supply of containers are
available.
Also ensure that a liquid measuring vessel, a gas meter and resistivity meter are
available.
A copy of the printouts for both the master calibrations and the wellsite
calibrations performed on the logging tools should be available.
Only the Logging Contractor shall handle radioactive material and explosives.
The logging cable strength, calculated tool weight and maximum pull limits shall be
given to the Drilling Supervisor prior to start of logging operation.
The logging contractor shall ensure that fishing equipment is available on the rig
for all logging tools.
Mud samples shall be taken from both the pits and flow line just before the end of
circulation prior to a logging job for analysis and resistivity measurement.
A logging report shall be delivered at the end of logging program by Wellsite
Geologist/logging witness.

5
14.3 Guidelines
14.3.1 General
The following guidelines should be adhered to during all logging operations:
Calibration records must be made before and after each logging run.
The wireline logging depths shall be set to zero at surface and checked when
pulling out to surface. Additional check shall be made at casing depths and at TD.
Always switch on the logging tools (except density and neutron pad tools) while
RIH and make a log down. This is to ensure that the logging tools are functioning.
If tools hangs up while running in and the section has not been logged before, log
out of the well. When anticipating poor hole conditions, always log in and out of
the well to secure data.
It is recommended to run the repeat section prior to the main log, so any tool
problems can be immediately apparent. This should be run at or near the casing
shoe or over any reservoir interval.
If running cable in drillpipe, the drillstring should be monitored for compression or
buckling especially if tight holes are encountered.
A tension curve should be presented on every log run.
If the well is very hot, the likelihood of tool failure is increased. In such cases, it is
important that a downlog is performed as the tool is run into the hole and the main
log started as soon as the tool reaches the bottom of the well.
The cable head weak point shall not be broken when radioactive sources are in
hole.
14.3.2 Pipe conveyed logging

Pipe Conveyed Logging (PCL) is performed when conventional wireline operations are not
feasible such as in high angle/horizontal wells.
The following basic information is required for the PCL job preparation:
Casing and liner data
Directional data
Mud type, weight, temperature, additives
Drill pipe data (tooljoint ID)
Tubular handling equipment information
14.3.3 Generic PCL execution procedure
1. Strap drill pipe on previous trip out.
2. Drift the drill pipe with an OD greater than max OD of the logging tool, typically
2.5.
3. Rig up snatch blocks to aid in holding the cable away from drill pipe during make-
up
4. Rig-up wireline sheave in derrick.
5. Make up logging tool string, attach wet connect assembly and set toolstring in the
slips with dog collar clamp installed.
6. Stab in the female wet connect on drill floor and test logging tool string.
7. While running in hole and if not already done, drift the drill pipe prior to make-up.
The rotary table should be locked. Use minimum pipe dope because dope is
conductive and can cause problems with electrical connections of the wet connect
assembly.
8. Run in hole with drillpipe in casing at 2 min/stand.
9. When the end of the tool is approximately 60m above the casing shoe, install the
cable side entry sub (SES) and the female wet connect.

6
10. Lower SES below drill floor. Run in hole wireline to 150m above downhole latching
assembly.
11. Circulate slowly through downhole latching assembly with approx. 10 bars and
spot 150m of fresh water pill through the drill pipe above the lower latching
assembly.
12. Latch onto toolstring, check resistance of conductor pairs to confirm proper latch,
then power up and check that the tool is functioning correctly.
13. Pull SES above drill floor and install SES line clamp. Install cable clamp above SES
at bottom of first joint of drill pipe. Toolstring is now ready to be lowered into
open-hole. Constant clear communications should be maintained between the
driller and the winch operator. The cable must not slack off.
14. Run in hole with drill pipe in casing at 2 min/stand and 3 min/stand in open hole.
Pipe rotation must be avoided to prevent damaging the wireline.
15. The winch operator will follow the pipe in hole and maintain a tension of 450 kg
above line weight at all times. Start logging at rate of 1 stand every 3 minutes.
16. Fill up drill pipe every stand and break circulation every 15 stands. Stop drill pipe if
any indication of being stuck.
17. Stop the drillpipe when the bottom of the toolstring is approx. 5m above TD. Do
not tag to avoid accidentally crushing the toolstring.
18. Log up (repeat section). Pull out of hole and continue to connect the top drive and
circulate every 15 stands for 5 minutes. Unlatch and retrieve wet connect.
Disconnect SES and laydown cable.
19. Pull out of hole with drill pipe and logging tools.
20. Rig down wireline sheaves.
Wet connects

7
Side entry subs

8
14.4 Specific logging requirements
14.4.1 Formation pressure tests

1. When taking pressures the tool should initially be set for maximum of 5 minutes. If
the pressure does not build up properly the tool must be unseated and another
attempt made.
2. Plot both the formation pressure and mud pressures as they are taken and check
for inconsistencies in the mud gradient. The mud hydrostatic pressure plot should
be a straight line.
3. Seal failure and probe plugging are two problems that can occur when measuring
pressures. Seal failure occurs if after the tool is set the strain gauge and/or quartz
gauge is not isolated from the mud hydrostatic via the seal pad. Probe plugging on
the other hand occurs when the filter in the probe becomes plugged with either
mud cake or formation resulting in the formation pressure not being passed to the
measuring device.
14.4.2 Highly deviated wells

The following guidelines shall be followed to improve data quality in highly deviated wells.
Before entering open hole the normal logging tension must be recorded. It is
typically higher than that of a vertical hole.
Short tool combinations are easier to get down the hole, particularly in areas of
high dogleg.
Checks shall be made to ensure that the tool is moving down the well as the
wireline is being run into the hole.
For difficult holes, consideration may be given to other techniques e.g drill pipe or coiled
tubing conveyed logging tools or use of evaluation while drilling.
14.5 Quality assurance and quality control
14.5.1 QAQC best practices

The Induction/ Sonic log should be logged down, at least over any zones of
interest.
In highly deviated wells, consideration should be given to logging the
Density/Neutron down.
All logs over any reservoir should be run at the recommended running speed. In
washed-out holes, the log quality can be improved by slowing down the logging
speed.
The CBL should be run from TD to a minimum of 30m above the top of cement.
A 100m repeat section of logs shall be made on each run and a 100m overlap with
previous logging runs shall be made across an interval of interest.
Run a 30m section over the shoe to check the shoe depth and calliper gauge when
running a calliper log from a section where the top of the logged interval is below
the casing shoe.
If running logs on drillpipe (high angle wells), it is best to log down and log up
without repeat sections.
14.5.2 Reference depth and depth control

Wireline logs are usually the standard depth reference for all future operations in the well
and all the evaluations of that well. It is therefore important that the depth is as accurate
as possible. The following guidelines should be followed for depth control:

9
The primary depth control is the logging contractors depth measurement system,
with a secondary check being the casing shoe depth and the cased hole overlap
from a previous logging run.
Depths measured with drillpipe may be significantly different from Wireline depth.
Depths measured using casing information are much closer to Wireline depths. The
driller, mud logger and wireline engineer should agree within about 1m to the
correct depth.
On the first logging run into the well, the tool should be zeroed at the Rotary Kelly
Bushing (RKB) or the Derrick floor. Subsequent logging runs over the same
interval should be tied into the first run.
In the event of a significant difference between the drillers and loggers casing shoe
depths, always look at the encoder wheels. Nothing should be allowed to be deposited on
the wheels. Additionally, the following checks should be undertaken:
Were the logging contractors depth control procedures applied correctly?
Was an excessive shift applied to tie-in to the previous run?
Is the casing tally correct?
The difference between loggers depth and Drillers depth shall be established immediately
after logging operations. When discrepancies exist between these depths (such as during
washing perforations or tagging bridge plugs or packers), logging depths shall be reported
as Wireline (W/L) in the Petrom daily drilling report.
A reference depth run (GR-CCL) shall be performed before perforations.
14.5.3 Log quality

Quality control is critical in order to obtain accurate formation evaluation results. The
quality control checks for logs are specified as follows:
The depth correlation of the curves on the log must be checked with each other.
The repeat section (100m) must be checked with the main log for agreement. The
curves must be examined to see if the values make sense.
The correct logging speed must be verified. The speed can be verified from the
breaks in the lines at the edges of the log.
Verification shall be made that there is 100m overlap between successive logging
runs.
The depth discrepancies between successive logging runs shall be less than 0.5m.
Plot both the formation pressure and mud pressures of RFTs as they are taken.
Inconsistencies in the mud gradient must be checked immediately.
For the cement bond log, a 50m section of the free pipe reading during logging
must always be recorded (if uncemented sections exist).
14.5.4 Log data handling

Log data should be transmitted as soon as it is available (i.e. while pulling out of
hole).
The log data transmission requirement shall be specified in the logging
programme.
All relevant data shall be accurately reported on the drilling morning report by the
PETROM Drilling Supervisor both in terms of activity and of timing.
Logging Contractors Service report shall be fully completed on the wellsite. It
should contain all relevant information covered in the morning report and any
remarks regarding log quality, tool failures etc.

10
14.6 Stuck logging tool and overstripping

Logging tools may become stuck downhole for several reasons. This includes:
Hole collapsing or loose formation
Hole bridging
Torpedo or cable head caught in a key seat
Cable or tool differentially stuck
Tool hung up at the casing shoe or stopped in a split casing shoe
The following procedures define the immediate action which shall be taken once a logging
tool has become stuck.
1. Follow the action below:
Position stuck Action

Pull to maximum safe tension to keep the weak point
Stuck on bottom
intact (75% of weak-point).
Try to go down:
If free to descend, make several attempts to pass
Stuck during logging upward the bridge
If not free to descend, ensure all personnel are
clear and pull to maximum safe tension to keep
weak-point intact (75% of weak-point)
2. If a tension meter is installed in the top of the tool and does not register overpull,
then the cable or top part of the logging tool above the tension meter is stuck. If
this happens, continue the following:
Make a stuck point estimation by stretch measurement.
Pull up to cable tension limit slowly, checking for any response on the cable
head tension meter.
3. If the tool does not come free after the actions described above, additional
attempts to work the tool shall be considered in consultation with the Logging
Contractor.
If tool is still stuck, perform overstripping do NOT pull weak-point.
14.6.1 Wireline fishing overstripping procedure

The wireline fishing technique of overstripping involves using drillpipe to recover the fish.
The procedure is described below:
1. Set the cable under tension to remove any slack with the cable hanger clamped on
the cable.
2. Cut the cable 2-3 m above the hanger.
3. Connect a spearhead rope socket on the end of the cable inside the well. Allow for
sufficient excess line.
4. Hang-off upper sheave wheel under crown block.
5. M/U a rope socket, sinker bar and spearhead overshot on the other end of the
cable hanging in the derrick.
6. Replace the cable hanger with a C-plate.
7. Release the spearhead overshot and pull to the monkey board.
8. Connect an overshot to the stand of drillpipe to fish the logging tool. The drillpipe
is then held over the rotary table.
9. The Derrick man guides the spearhead overshot down the stand of drillpipe. The
spearhead overshot is attached to the spearhead in the rotary.

11
10. A little strain is pulled on the cable and the C-plate is removed.
11. Lower the drillpipe through the rotary and set it in slips.
12. The C-plate is then placed on top of the drillpipe tool joint sticking up in the rotary
table.
13. Release the spearhead overshot pulling it to the monkey board and feed it into the
next stand of drillpipe.
14. Repeat the above procedure until the overshot is within a short distance of the
fish.
15. A special circulating head or stuffing box is installed on the last stand.
16. Break circulation to clean the end of the pipe, the overshot and the top of the fish.
17. Record pump strokes per minute versus pressure to get indication of when the fish
is caught in the overshot.
18. Once it is confirmed that the fish is caught, clamp the cable hanger on the cable
below the rope sockets.
19. Remove the rope sockets and set the hanger in the elevators.
20. The weak point is broken by pulling on the cable with the elevators.
21. The cable is pulled out of the drillpipe and the string pulled out of hole with the fish
attached.
NOTE: It is unsafe to break the weak point in a wireline by pulling the winch. This is
because the greatest tension in a wireline is at surface. If the line breaks at surface in
comparison to underground the recoil will be violent.
14.7 Quicklook evaluation and tool summary

Upon completion of the first logging suite, the wellsite Geologist should perform a
quicklook analysis over any potential intervals. This is not a comprehensive analysis of the
entire log suite, but an approach used at the wellsite to permit the wellsite Geologist to
quality control the logs and to identify any potential hydrocarbon-bearing intervals.
1. Indications of Permeability
Several logs give indication of permeability. Though permeability cannot be directly
calculated from logs, these indications will give a basis for further analysis.
SP deflection away from the shale baseline (the direction depends on the Rmf /
Rw ratio).
Invasion profile on resistivity logs (Rxo / Rt on the Rmf / Rw ratio).
Low Gamma Ray counts.
Mudcake indications of the Caliper log.
Separation of the Micro-Normal and Micro-Inverse curves.
2. Porosity Estimation
The quickest way to calculate porosity is by using the Density and/or Neutron logs
depending on the lithology. Density is generally scaled in g/cc while the Neutron is in
porosity units. In sandstones, porosity is calculated from the density log using a matrix
density of 2.65 g/cc. In carbonates, the FDC/CNL crossplot (provided in chart books) is
used to estimate the matrix density. The fluid density is estimated based on the salinity of
the mud filtrate.
3. Lithology Indicators
A potential reservoir rock can be differentiated from a non-reservoir rock using the GR,
SP, calliper and porosity logs. The best way to determine lithology, formation tops and
exact formation depths is through a combination of wireline, MWD and mud logs. It is
always the best to use as many logs as possible.

12
Device/Sample Qualitative Use Quantitative Use

Detection of reservoirs Formation water salinity
SP Log
Correlation Thickness determination
Correlation
Conventional Formation water resistivity
Bed delineation
Resistivity Log Water saturation
Locating lost pipe
Correlation Formation water resistivity
Latero Log
Locating lost pipe Water saturation
Correlation (OBM) Formation water resistivity
Induction Log
Locating lost pipe Water saturation
Correlation Flushed zone resistivity
Micro resistivity Log
Lost pipe Water saturation
Cement bond inspection
Lithology
Correlation Porosity
Sonic Log
Detection of fractures Seismic velocity
Locating lost pipe
Lateral prediction
Porosity
Identification of minerals
Formation Density Log Density
Lateral prediction
Seismic velocity
Neutron Log Correlation Porosity
Complex lithology
Density + Neutron Log Porosity in complex lithologies
Gas detection
Correlation
Shale content
Distinction between shale
Depth control
Gamma Ray Log and non-shale
Net/ Gross ratio in reservoir
Detection of radioactive
section
minerals
Calliper Survey Corrosion, wear detection Hole diameter
Repeat Formation PVT analysis
Fluid samples
Tester Pressure data
Gamma Ray Collar Locating lost pipe Depth measurement for
Locator Casing collar detection perforation
4-arm Dipmeter Formation dip
Continuous Directional
Deviation and azimuth
Survey
Free Point Indicator Depth of free point
Cuttings Lithology, fluid type
Sidewall Samples Lithology, fluid type
Formation homogeneity Porosity
Cores Show fractures, fossils Calibrate porosity logs
Deposition patterns Formation permeability

13
Appendix 1 Service company wireline procedures - example
RA material storage / handling on wellsite

A neutron meter shall be used at the wellsite where required to establish barrier
placement and radiation levels. Once this barrier placement is established, the neutron
meter need not be used on every occasion; hence need not be present on every rig site
where barrier placements have previously been established and recorded.
Location of transfer of sources to tool is determined by crew (either catwalk or rig floor).
This area is to be cleared during the transfer process.
Explosives storage / handling on wellsite

Storage of explosives on wellsite depends on local regulations or service company,
whichever is stricter.
The wireline crew shall ensure that the area in which explosive systems is connected to
the wireline, armed, disarmed or shot and disconnected from the wireline is cleared of all
personnel not necessary for the operation. The line of fire shall be kept clear of all
personnel while performing these functions.
Risks and preventive measures using wireline

Risks include: cable spooling from wireline drum across the rig floor & catwalk could cause
injuries to pedestrian and struck by wireline cable, which is under tension.
Preventive method: wireline cable area to be barricaded and only service company
personnel to deal with cable.
Mobilization, driving and working hours

Mobilization: Ensure minimum 1 hour arrival prior to expected rig up time.
Driving: Take into account service company rules regarding driving times.
Working hours: Operations above 12 hours require 2 crews on site.
Devices used to increase chances of RIH and reducing risks of stuck tools
To prevent sticking, the engineer carefully plans the job, determining the conditions of the
well and adapting the speed and technique to run in and pull out safely.
If, while evaluating the logging environment, the engineer thinks that there might be
some risks, the client shall be advised of the dangers of such jobs, and the engineer and
the client shall agree on the right actions to be taken.
Guidelines for when TCL is recommended

TCL operations allow logging tools to be passed through difficult borehole conditions, such
as rugose holes or horizontal wells. Additionally, it allows more control of tools in station
applications, for instance, MDT samples or packer operations. Note that the tools are
guided down only; this is not a means of forcing tools down a difficult hole.
Securing data for clients

14
It is the responsibility of the service company field engineer or field specialist to ensure
that:
1. Data acquisition shall be performed following standard operating procedures.
2. Data processing shall be performed following standard operating procedures. Data
resulting from processing shall be clearly marked and traceable.
3. Data interpretation shall not intentionally produce results inconsistent or biased
with the measurements or processed data. Due to the inherent element of
judgment involved in data interpretation, employees performing such services are
permitted to make choices of parameters or interpretation methodology, provided
it is not done to alter or bias the final product intentionally. Results of
interpretation activities shall be clearly marked and traceable.
4. Data storage and delivery shall conform to pre-defined standards. Data storage
shall ensure no degradation of the intrinsic quality of the data.
Guidelines for QC of caliper data

Caliper logs are used for the following applications:
Borehole diameter
Borehole shape
Borehole volume
Environmental corrections for log output
QC of caliper data are as following:

Do a minimum 10m caliper log in casing (known ID).For volume computation, ensure that
the following inputs are correct: total depth, casing depth
Tool sticking prevention

The following will help in preventing tool sticking and minimize the chance of fishing
operations:
1. Tools are kept moving in open hole
2. Head and cable tension is monitored
3. Do not spud with logging tools
4. Do not put too much slack in cable and sit at the bottom
5. Adjust hardware requirements to hole conditions
6. Adjust speeds according to hole conditions
Avoiding unintentional weakpoint breakage

The following will help in avoiding unintentional weak-point breakage:
1. Follow the Safe Winch Operations Placard
2. Apply alarms and shutdowns
3. Follow speed guidelines
4. Never pull more than 75% of Lower Weak-point Rating

15
Appendix 2 TCL procedures - example
CSES = Cable Side Entry Sub

DWCH = Downhole Wet Connector Head
PWCH = Pump down Wet Connector Head
Make up toolstring
1. Move tools from wireline unit to catwalk using wireline cable. Flag man on the
catwalk giving hand signals to winch operator.
2. Move CSES, Stabilizer, DWCH and sheave wheels to catwalk. Flagman present on
the catwalk giving signals to crane operator.
3. Pick up tools from the catwalk using a tagger line. Install on sling in elevators with
shackle to lower the WL tools into the well.
4. Make up toolstring using elevators
5. After making up the DWCH hold in rotary table using 4 slips and dog collar.
Remove top hat and makeup plate.
6. Connect PWCH (pump down head) for tool checks at surface
7. Remove head (PWCH)
8. Connect 3 IF lifting sub (pup-joint) to lift toolstring.
9. Clear rig floor for personnel. Lift toolstring and load RA sources.
10. Lower the toolstring up to the DWCH.
11. Disconnect lifting sub and connect first stand of pipe.
12. RIH as per instructions below.
Running in hole
1. Do not rotate drill pipe - Lock Rotary
2. 3 min/stand RIH speed.
3. Minimum dope to be used only on the pins.
4. Rabbit all pipe / cross overs etc. min 2.4.
5. Stop every 10 stand stands and circulate and fill pipe
6. Service company crew to prepare CSES readily available on catwalk.
7. If any hang-ups observed STOP and contact service company engineer.
8. Ensure pipe remains topped up
9. Avoid landing string heavily in the slips and sudden starts / stops
10. Take care going past crossovers and BOPs.
11. Max allowable compression on service company tools 3000lbs
12. Stop 2 stands above casing shoe.
13. Circulate 1,5 Bottoms/Up or as necessary to eliminate gas. FLOW RATE 1000l/min.
Check the flow rates to detect packing of ports.
14. While circulating service company crew rigs up the sheave wheels, Stabilizer, CSES
and snatch pulley.
Latching head (PWCH) to toolstring

1. Rig up wireline, install slotted bushings (if available).
2. Install non-magnetic stabilizer using chain tongs (NOT IRON ROUGHNECK!!!!) to
the drillpipe
3. Lift cable side entry sub (CSES) to aprox. 10 m above drill floor.
4. Feed the PWCH trough the stabilizer and drill pipe aprox 100-200 m by hand.

16
5. Make up the CSES into the stabilizer.

6. Make up first drill pipe stand to the CSES as to pump down the cable wet connect
PWCH when instructed by service company.
7. CSES not to go below rotary table, without informing service company. When
ready, lower CSES to just below Rotary Table
8. Latch on cable. Power up / Check service company tools.
9. Maximum circulation rate after latching is 200 l/min.
10. Pumping down rates to be indicated by the service company TLC specialist.
11. Clamp the cable to CSES, pull-test the clamp 3000 lbs. for 5 min Clear Rig Floor
12. Bring bottom of CSES at same level with Drill floor to reset service company Depth
13. Driller to always advise service company e.g.: One meter to setting the
slips....setting slips....all stop. Coming out of the slips.... going down
14. RIH half a stand, install snatch block to keep iron rough neck clear of the cable
15. Take extreme care not pinch or damage the WIRELINE CABLE while making up
pipe (slips etc..) it is VERY FRAGILE
16. While latched, RIH speeds to follow service company winchman. Communication
with the driller will be kept via radios provided by the rig.
17. RIH gently through casing shoe
18. GOOD COMMUNICATIONS at all times between driller and winch operator, steady
speed, gentle starts and stops
Logging
1. Log down from 2 stands above casing shoe to 5 m above TD (DO NOT TAG TD with
the TOOLSTRING)
2. Log up back to 1 stand above casing shoe.
3. Geologist to take decision on the repeat section.
4. RIH below the repeat section bottom depth
5. If required, dependant on gas shows, start circulation as per company man
decision. Flow rate not to exceed 200 l/min as cable damage may result.
6. POOH until the CSES reaches drill floor. Snatch block to be removed one stand
before.
7. Service company will unlatch and POOH the cable and PWCH.
8. Unlatch procedure as per instructions below
Unlatch - POOH
1. Disconnect CSES and stabilizer (use only chain tongs).
2. POOH drill pipe. 2 min/stand excluding connections
3. When DWCH reaches surface service company crew to be announced and present
on drill floor.
4. Clearing of all personnel from drill floor for unloading of RA sources.
5. Tools at surface.
6. Rig down tools using reverse procedure of rigging up.

1
15 Fishing and backing off
Prepared by WEP
Author:
Version: Feb 2015
Verified:

15 Fishing and backing off | Version: Feb 2015
2
15 Fishing and backing off ................................................................................... 3

15.1 Guidelines and best practices ....................................................................... 3
15.2 Checklist .................................................................................................... 5
15.3 Tools ......................................................................................................... 6
15.3.1 Standard Fishing Assembly .................................................................... 6
15.3.2 Tools for 26 17 holes .................................................................... 6
15.3.3 Tools for 12 - 8 holes ................................................................... 6
15.3.4 Tools for 5 7/8 or 6 holes .................................................................... 7
15.3.5 Selection of fishing tool ......................................................................... 7
15.3.6 Mills .................................................................................................... 8
15.4 Guidelines for fishing operations ................................................................... 8
15.5 Backing off a stuck drillstring...................................................................... 10
15.6 Tool joint backing off procedure .................................................................. 10
15.6.1 Safety precautions .............................................................................. 10
15.6.2 Job preparations ................................................................................. 10
15.6.3 Determining the free point ................................................................... 10
15.6.4 Determining string tension required to back-off ...................................... 13
15.6.5 String shot charge size ........................................................................ 13
15.6.6 Working right hand torque down the hole .............................................. 13
15.6.7 Load the string shot ............................................................................ 14
15.6.8 Working left-hand torque down the hole ................................................ 15
15.6.9 Running the string shot and backing off ................................................. 15
Appendix 1 Determining string tension required to back-off Example ................... 16
Appendix 2 Pre-job fishing information sheet ....................................................... 17

3
15 Fishing and backing off

Successful fishing jobs start with excellent job planning. Appropriate paperwork must be
maintained throughout all phases of the job, including the planning stage. Proper
preparation ensures that the best option for fishing is determined, time and money are
not wasted on an unfishable job, equipment, personnel, and other assets are available
when needed. In planning for a job, you will need to, gather important information about
the job, determine the dimensions of the fish, develop a fishing plan and obtain approval
for the fishing plan, schedule personnel and equipment for the operation.
1. The type of fish (e.g. drill pipe, collars, junk etc.)

2. The condition of the hole and mud.
3. Probable cause of stuck pipe mechanism
4. What is the weakpoint / max pull?
5. Can tools be run inside the fish (wireline / spear) or outside the fish (overshot)?
6. What is the anticipated rig time and costs to free the fish?
7. Are there open reservoirs below the fish?
In the appendix a Pre-job information sheet can be found that needs to be filled in before
any fishing job.
15.1 Guidelines and best practices

The PETROM Drilling Supervisors shall ensure that the following guidelines are adhered
to:
A successful fishing job considers the economics of fishing. Confirm with the office
the number of days that can be spent fishing before it is cheaper to re-drill the
section.
Maximum days to fish calculation:
+ +
=
+
= ( )
The above formula does not consider the reduced probability of each attempt.
Or:
= +
1.43
=
( )
= 0.4003 0.7847

4
Time is of the essence in fishing operations. Keep a tank of premixed spotting fluid
on location if working in areas where differential sticking often occurs. Spotting
products are all different and have various methods of working from lightening the
annulus fluid, loosening or removing filter cake and increasing viscosity. Once the
fluid is placed there should be no jarring or working pipe.
Dimensions and assemblies

Ensure all fishing tools have been identified & inspected prior to beginning drilling.
All items in BHA should be fishable with external catch tools.
Verify that the Drilling Contractor has all required basic fishing tools for the
complete drillstring and BHA being utilized e.g.
o Overshots: short and long catch with appropriate grapples and guide shoes.
o Spears.
o Basic milling tools and burning shoes.
Supplement the rig contractors fishing tools to be able to catch other BHA
components.
Depending on remoteness of location, consider having auxiliary fishing tools such
as jet baskets, ITCO junk basket, cone busters etc on location.
Review the drilling program to anticipate any additional basic fishing tools that
could be required for specific operations.
Have all drillstring data available such as ID/ODs, drill string weights, grades and
tool joint types and ensure that BHAs have sufficient IDs to run string shot or
chemical cutters.
Verify that all tools and BHAs can be fished by checking the net IDs, ODs and
lengths for in-hole fishing tool tolerances and fishing necks.
Fully tally, caliper and measure all fishing tool assemblies. Verify that complete
schematics with all dimensions are available.
Ensure that the pre-job fishing data sheet has been filled in and sent to the fishing
company or as needed internally.
Backing off
For backing off, check that all required crossovers, subs and handling equipment
are available to apply left-hand torque and overpull while having the back off shot
run in with E-line.
Consider maintaining string shot equipment on the rig in remote locations.
In cased hole, dont mill too long in one place.
Never rotate the fish out of the hole since it may unwind and drop out of usually
right-hand release overshots.
Twist off
If a twist-off occurs and conditions allow, the hole shall be circulated clean and
mud conditioned prior to pulling out of the hole.
Where a twist-off has occurred, the fish shall be tagged prior to pulling out of the
hole and the pipe shall be strapped on the trip out.

5
Stuck tools prevention

The following guidelines will help to prevent incidents of stuck tools.
Ensure all tool joints are clean before make-up, apply only API pipe dope.
Keep mud properties in good condition at all times.
Keep pipe moving & avoid slow connections.
Ensure all rig personnel are fully aware of all sticking hazards and early
identification techniques.
Encourage rig floor vigilance for identifying any problems in make-up of overall
pipe integrity.
Remember to regularly inspect and change the Kelly saver sub as it mates with
every joint of drill pipe in the string.
15.2 Checklist
Make detailed diagrams of Top Fish prior to running in the hole: determine size,
shape and condition of the fish.
The maximum allowable pull for all fishing tools and associated equipment shall be
determined.
Internal diameters of fishing tools to be run shall be checked to verify that back-off
tools can pass through.
Discuss with fishing company the fishing BHA: grapple size, jar & accelerator
placement and weakpoint. Fishing jars should be placed as close to the overshot as
possible, accelerators in collars to allow needed hammer mass below. Consider
including a bumper sub. When running spears or overshots, bumper subs must be
run, and in open hole lubricated bumper subs are recommended.
Soft blade or non-rotating stabilizers are required inside casing, only when milling.
Stabilizers can interfere with jarring and cause additional problems.
The pull shall be limited to 85% of the minimum yield strength of the weakest tool
joint in the string.
Be aware of all drilling string and components and fishing tools fatigue life (mean
hours between failures).
Remember to rotate drillpipe connections on trips.
Always be aware of the capacities of the entire string and BHA. Ensure that
displacements are always known. In particular when fishing large OD components
or balled up assemblies, be aware that hole fill may be problematic.
Prior to connecting to the fish, the following information shall be obtained:
o Establish circulating pressures and rates
o String weight up/down and rotating string weight (with and without
circulation)
o Free rotating torque of string.
o Pipe stretch and stroke of bumper sub, jars, etc.
After freeing the fish, circulate bottoms up before POOH, if circulation is possible
through the fish.

6
15.3 Tools
Below is a list of fishing tools that are commonly kept on the rig site for various hole sizes
or which can be loaded out on very short notice.
15.3.1 Standard Fishing Assembly

A typical fishing assembly will consist of the catching tool plus fishing bumper sub,
hydraulic jar, drill collars and accelerator. An overshot is also required except if back-off is
achieved before the fishing in which case a screw connection is preferred. A circulating
sub should also be included in the fishing assembly if losses are expected. Using heavy
weight drillpipes is optional. When a non-releasing tool such as a die collar is being
employed as the catching tool, it should include a safety joint between the catching tool
and jar. Since the safety joint will release when applying left hand torque it is not possible
to back-off below it using a string shot. Die Collars and Taper Taps rely on friction catch
and generally should not be jarred on.
15.3.2 Tools for 26 17 holes

8 Hydraulic jar 6 5/8 Reg. pin x box
8 Accelerator 6 5/8 Reg. pin x box
8 Fishing bumper sub 6 5/8 Reg. pin x box
11 Overshot, c/w extension subs and 15 & 22 guides, to catch 9 & 8
DCs, 5 DP & 6 5/8 tool joints.
11 Reverse circulating basket 6 5/8 reg. box
12 Magnet 6 5/8 Reg. pin (optional)
9 Junk sub 6 5/8 Reg. box x box
8 1/8 Overshot, c/w extension sub and 11 guides to catch 5 DP + 6 3/8 tool
joints
11 Globe basket grapple (or equivalent)
8 Circulating sub 6 5/8 Reg. pin x box
15.3.3 Tools for 12 - 8 holes

6 Hydraulic jar 4 IF pin x box
6 Accelerator 4 IF pin x box
6 Fishing bumper sub 4 IF pin x box
8 1/8 / 7 7/8 Overshots, c/w extension subs to catch 5 DP, 6 DCs & 6 3/8
tool joints
7 7/8 Reverse circulating basket 4 IF box
8 Magnet 4 Reg. pin
6 5/8 Junk sub 4 Reg. box x 4 IF box up
7 7/8 Globe basket grapple (or equivalent)
6 Circulation sub 4 IF pin x box

7
15.3.4 Tools for 5 7/8 or 6 holes

4 Hydraulic jar 3 IF pin x box
4 Accelerator 3 IF pin x box
4 Fishing bumper sub 3 pin x box
7 Surface jar 4 IF pin x box
Sub 3 IF pin x 4 IF box
Sub 4 IF pin x 3 IF box
5 5/8 Overshot, c/w extension subs to catch 3 DP, 4 DCs and tool joints
5 5/8 Reverse circulating basket 3 IF box
5 Magnet 3 Reg. pin (optional)
5 Junk sub 3 Reg. box x 3 IF box
5 7/8 Junk mill 3 Reg. pin up
4 Circulation sub 3 IF pin x box
15.3.5 Selection of fishing tool

Type of Fishing
Type of Fish Names of Tools
Tool
Recovery of tubular Connecting tools
fish External catch 1st choice: Screw-in sub
2nd choice: Overshot
Last choice: Die collar
Internal catch Taper tap (poor class of tool; overshot
always preferable if available)
Spear (provides very good connection)
Accessories Bent drillpipe single
Hydraulic knuckle joint
Hydraulic wall hook
Wall hook
Washover tools Washover safety joint
Washover pipe
Washover shoe
Force multiplier tools Jar, hydraulic or mechanical
Bumper sub
Surface bumper-jar
Accelerator
Hydraulic pulling tool
Recovery of fish Disengagement tools Safety joint
Bumper safety joint
External tubing/ drillpipe cutter
Internal tubing/ drillpipe cutter
Flash cutter / Jet cutter
Chemical cutter
Electrical cable back-off
Information tools Impression block
Free-point indicator

8
Type of Fishing
Type of Fish Names of Tools
Tool
Recovery of non- Junk basket
tubular fish Circulating junk basket
Reverse circulating basket
Magnet
Wireline spear
Junk sub
Fish destruction Milling shoe
Packer retriever
Section mill
Jet bottom-hole cutter
15.3.6 Mills
Mills are extremely varied and have multiple uses and designs, this is where the
knowledge and skill of the fishing company (operator) should be used to pick specific mills
to meet the needs of the fish, well and other issue at the time.
Ordering information required for mills:

Dress diameter.
Size and weight of casing to be milled.
Fishneck length.
Size and weight of casing to run through.
15.4 Guidelines for fishing operations

Confirm the exact top of the fish and draw a diagram with all the dimensions (i.e.
OD, ID and length of each piece).
Confirm and record the following: weight of mud in hole, formation type, all casing
and tubing sizes and weights, depths and deviations at liner tops, casing shoes etc.
Confirm if circulation is possible, and if so, is it full or partial.
If pipe is stuck calculate approximate stuck point utilizing stretch.
Circulate as required before latching on to the fish and avoid tagging the top of the
fish.
If an overshot is run it is good practice to run an extension. Running an extension
is only done in the case of upper extensions, when there is need to swallow part of
the fish above the fish. Upper extensions are sized for basket grapples only and
will not work for spiral grapple catches unless special ordered. This is especially
important after the fish has been milled over, so that the grapple can catch on to
the unmilled, full body of the pipe.
In washed hole attempts should be made with either a bent single or a wall hook
in a washed out hole.
Know the limitations of derrick, substructure (include pipe in derrick) and all
hoisting equipment.
Know the limitations of the drill pipe and tools on each job.

9
Prior to jarring always mark the string at the level of the rotary table.
Tie off drill pipe in the derrick that will not be needed, clear the V-door and cat
walk of un-needed pipe and get all pipe on location accounted for and stowed. You
must know your exact count for all pipe, heavy weight, and collars on location.
Before jarring, clear rig floor of unnecessary personnel.
Every 6 hours of jarring, inspect derrick equipment and check for loose and
unscrewed nuts and bolts.
If utilizing spotting fluids, caution should be taken to prevent reducing hydrostatic
pressure and allowing an influx of wellbore fluid or gas.
Always run a pack off in the overshot.
Circulate over fish with the pump at idle, watch for pressure increase as an
indication of latching on.
Attempt to circulate through fish prior to jarring.
Jar with kelly or top drive on string. When this is not possible, elevator latch
should be secured with rope or chain.
First attempt at back-off should be done one full joint above stuck point. If
unsuccessful, attempt back-off one stand above stuck point.
Ensure to plan the fishing operation with the relevant rig personnel and hold a
toolbox meeting to discuss procedure and safety
Taper taps are made of very brittle material and break easily. They should only be
run as a last resort, together with a safety joint, since they do not have an
emergency release.
Spiral grapple type overshots and spears will handle heavier loads than the basket
types. However, the spiral grapples are easier to damage and break while getting
onto the fish, due to the brittleness of the spiral grapples. A mill guide should be
run below the grapples if possible in order to dress off the top of the fish before
engagement.
If string shot equipment is not available, consider manual back-off only as last
resort. Drill collars are seldom if ever backed-off this way.
If the circulating sub is run into the fishing string, strip down sub and install new
shear pin prior to use (especially during round trip after jarring).
Ensure that elevators are latched around the pipe and slackened off under a tool
joint with the hook locked when torque is being applied to the string.
Care should be taken when applying torque or releasing it from the string. Ensure
that no torque remains in the string when it is picked out of the slips, unless the
pipe is properly held with a back-up tong.

10
15.5 Backing off a stuck drillstring

Drill pipe or drill collars can be backed off (unscrewed) down hole by exploding a charge,
known as a string-shot, inside a selected tool joint connection above the stuck point. A
connection should be selected which had been broken during the last trip in hole prior to
the pipe becoming stuck.
A successful back-off depends upon having the following:

Zero or slightly positive tension at the tool joint to be broken.
Sufficient left-hand or reverse torque at the joint, maximum at 80% of make-up
torque.
A sufficiently large explosive charge, accurately located opposite the tool joint. The
E-line or Fishing contractor has to specify the amount of primer cord (number of
wraps) to be used.
15.6 Tool joint backing off procedure

Back-off operations must be carefully planned and executed in order to achieve success
on the first attempt, while at the same time ensuring the safety of all of the rig floor
personnel.
Backing off is a non-routine operation and as such, all procedures must be performed
under the direct supervision of the Fishing Tool Supervisor and Toolpusher.
15.6.1 Safety precautions

Prior to beginning the back-off procedure, a toolbox talk with all rig personnel who will be
involved with the operation must be conducted. All personnel involved need to be briefed
on the hazards of back-off operations, off limit areas while torque is being applied or held
in the string and how equipment should be handled and operated. All non-essential
personnel should be warned to stay clear of the rig floor until the back-off operation is
completed.
Wireline safety procedures should be followed while making up and running the string
shot in hole.
15.6.2 Job preparations

The connection to be backed off should be chosen after discussions between the Drilling
Supervisor and Contractor Representatives. To establish the depth the following points
should be taken in to consideration:
Choose a connection broken on the last trip.
Limits of the drill string components, due to grade and condition.
Next operation, wash-over or jarring assemblies.
Method of applying the left-hand torque and crew safety.
Final string weight applied to affect the back off.
15.6.3 Determining the free point
There are two techniques commonly used to determine the free point of the stuck
assembly. The first technique involves the measurement of pipe stretch for a given
overpull and then the calculation of the length of free pipe. The second technique for
determining the free point requires the use of an electronic free point indicator system
run in hole on wireline. It is possible to run the free point indicator tool and back off shot
in the one tool string run.

11
Determining the free point based on pipe stretch data

Free point calculations using pipe stretch data are most accurate when used in vertical
wellbores where the impact of hole drag is minimal. This method can be used in
directional wells but it is likely that the length of free pipe will be underestimated due to
the drag downhole.
The following procedure describes how to determine the free point based on pipe stretch
data:
Calculate the maximum allowed pull on the drill pipe.
Pull on the drill string until the weight indicator shows a pull of 5 Ton over the
string weight, T1. Mark the drill pipe at the rotary table.
Pull on the drill string until the weight indicator shows a pull of 35 Ton over the
string weight, T2. (Do not exceed 90% of the maximum over pull allowed). Make a
mark on the drill pipe at the rotary table.
Measure the distance, l, between the two marks in millimeters.
Calculate the length of free pipe, Lf, using the equation:
2.675
=
2 1
where:
Lf = length of free pipe (m)
l = differential stretch between two marks from overpull (T2 T1 in (mm))
Pdp = weight per meter of pipe (kg/m)
T2 = Overpull two (Ton)
T1 = Overpull one (Ton)
Lf, will give you the length of free pipe thus allowing you to determine the location
of the stuck point.
Note: this method does not give a high accuracy on Lf.
Determining the free Point using electronic free point indicator
When possible the fishing tool operator should be on location during the electronic free
point indicator run.
The most accurate and commonly used technique for determining the free point is
through the use of an electronic free point indicator. The electronic free point indicator
measures the axial and torsional strain in the pipe body through application of tension
and torque to the drill string. Provided the pipe is completely free, a fixed and measurable
degree of strain will be recorded by the system's electronics. Once the degree of strain
diminishes, or reduces to zero, the pipe is stuck. To achieve a successful back-off, the
pipe must be 100% free!
The following procedures and guidelines are to be followed to determine the free point
using electronic instruments. The free point indicator can be run in combination with the
back off shot to reduce the number of wireline runs required.
Hold toolbox talk (TBT) before commencing the wireline job.

Prepare rig floor.

12
Pick up the free point tool assembly.

o When using a bow spring anchored free point tool, be certain a wireline
swivel/expansion joint has been fitted to isolate possible cable movement
from the measuring device. This is critical, particularly in directional wells,
where the cable will tend to move upward as the pipe is stretched. Lowering
the free point tool on depth and then picking up on the logging cable to
open the tool to mid-stroke most effectively uses the expansion joint. If the
strain indicating needle jerks when the pipe is tensioned, then the
expansion joint will have to be collapsed slightly until the correct space-out
is achieved for the amount of pipe tension that is applied.
o If an expanding arm free point tool is used, the expansion joint can still be
used, however it is not so critical since these tools firmly anchor the free
point tool inside the pipe and are less prone to slippage. Generally the cable
is slackened to provide the necessary allowance for pipe movement.
Run in hole with free point indicator tool.
Take free point reference readings.
o When free point readings are being taken, the Drilling Supervisor should be
present in the logging unit to witness and supervise the operation. Be
certain to maintain a written record of all tool readings as well as tension
and torque applied to the drill string.
o The free point instrument is to be run into the drill string to 300m below the
surface and reference free point readings should be taken in both tension
and torque. These figures will then be used to indicate the degree of free
pipe for readings taken close to the stuck point.
Continue to RIH with free point indicator tool to 150m above the estimated free
point (calculated using the above calculation).
Take free point readings with the string in tension.
o With the pipe tensioned on surface to the estimated pick-up weight at the
stuck point, apply over-pull to the pipe in even load increments (20 Ton)
until pipe movement is noted at the free point tool. Smooth deflection of
the strain indicating needle should be noted if the tool is functioning
properly. If the needle jerks erratically, the cable has probably moved or
the springs have slipped causing interference with the instrument reading.
Repeat readings as required until a consistent deflection of the free point indicating
needle is noted.
o The repeatability of the reading may not be precisely consistent and, in
these cases, the average of the measured readings should be used.
o If the pipe is found to be 100% free at a given survey point, drop down the
pipe in 30m increments repeating the procedure until the meter deflection
reduces to zero.
Once the free point in tension has been located, repeat the procedure working up
the hole taking torque measurements.
o Be certain to apply the same amount of torque at each depth, taking note
of the number of turns required to achieve the desired torque. Once a
reading has been taken at a given depth, completely release the torque
prior to taking the next reading.
The depth where both the torque and tension readings indicate 100% free pipe is
taken as the free point. This is the depth above which the pipe should be backed-
off. Stuck point should also be determined and that is the point where there is zero
movement of the pipe, stretch and torsion. The back off point is then determined
and can be below the free point or above. However remember to leave at least
one full joint above the back off where if the jarring attempt does not work another
joint below the overshot or screw-in sub can be backed off.

13
15.6.4 Determining string tension required to back-off

Under ideal conditions the desired pipe tension at the back-off point is zero. Recognising
that this cannot be achieved in practice, it is preferred to have the pipe slightly in tension
at the back-off point as opposed to compression.
Calculating the required surface tension and how this tension is applied, prior to firing the
string shot, is critical to successfully backing off the pipe at the intended depth. If too
much tension is applied, or if the pipe is in compression, it may not back off. If it does
back off, it will most likely be further up the string and not at the planned depth.
To determine the necessary surface tension to optimise the tension at the back-off point,
the following information is required:
Pickup, slack-off and off bottom rotating weights of the drill string prior to
becoming stuck.
o These measurements should have been taken with the pumps off. If the
pipe became stuck while tripping, the required figures may have to be
estimated based on previously recorded pickup, slack-off and rotating
weights recorded while drilling at the depth of the stuck point.
The weight per foot and length of individual components of the drilling assembly.
The density of the drilling fluid in the well
Once the hook load required to put the back-off point in zero tension has been
determined, an additional 2 Ton of overpull should be applied to ensure that the pipe is in
tension rather than compression.
A generalised equation for determining the correct weight indicator reading when the
string shot is fired is as follows:

= +
100000
where:
T = Weight indicator tension (103 daN)
P = Weight in mud of free length of drill pipe plus traveling block, hook, etc. (103 daN)
HP = Hydrostatic pressure at back-off point (kPa)
S = Area of mating surface of tool joint (cm2)
(From Drilling Data Handbook, K24 and K25)
Example is given in the appendix.
15.6.5 String shot charge size

The size of the explosive used to make-up the string shot is critical to creating sufficient
'hammer effect' to cause the tool joint to break at the desired connection. The service
provider will calculate the amount needed and often a bit more is used to ensure the
desired effect is reached. The exact amount of primer cord by grain is known for each
connection and should not be exceeded if the object is to screw back into the connection.
Adding more can swell the connection and make this impossible. Once recovered the
joint is taken out and not used again.
15.6.6 Working right hand torque down the hole

Prior to performing a downhole back-off it will be necessary to be certain sufficient make-
up torque has been applied to the pipe to avoid a shallow back-off or a deep open hole
back-off at an incorrect depth.

14
The correct amount of right hand torque to work down the drill string will depend on
several factors including well depth, wellbore profile, and degree of hole drag in both
tension and torsion. The correct string tension to be applied at the surface in order to
effectively work torque down to the back-off point should have been determined while
locating the free point. In this regard, it does not necessarily follow that the pipe should
be worked between the calculated pickup and slack-off weights at the back-off point. For
this reason the torque measurements taken while determining the free point should be
used as an indicator of the correct surface tension to use for applying both left hand and
right hand torque.
When working right hand torque down the hole, the following practices are to be followed:
The amount of right hand torque that must be worked into the pipe should be
sufficient to generate a full scale torque reading on the free point tool at the
planned back-off depth plus 30%. This will ensure that maximum left hand torque
can be applied to the pipe when the string shot is fired. In general there should be
one round per 1000 ft, the pipe should be worked until all of the rounds placed
into the string return, if 9 rounds are placed in the pipe, nine rounds should come
out when released.
The torque is to be worked down the pipe from surface to the free point. Since tool
joints can only be torqued correctly with minimum axial tension, the pipe is to be
raised and lowered between the calculated free pipe pickup weight at the planned
back-off point and zero surface tension while progressively increasing the applied
right hand torque.
The torque is to be applied in 3 - 4 steps until the maximum make up torque has
been worked into the string. Be certain to record the number of total turns
necessary to achieve maximum make up torque, as well as the number of turns
that can be anticipated when the required left hand torque is applied.
Complete make up of all connections will be indicated when no loss of trapped
torque occurs as the pipe is cycled between the range of pick-up and slack-off
weights being used.
Release the right hand torque gradually to avoid unscrewing connections higher up.
15.6.7 Load the string shot

The string shot is to be loaded into the drill string prior to applying any left hand torque at
surface. Do not load the string shot into the drill string while torque is trapped in the pipe.
This could result in serious injury to personnel if the pipe were to break prematurely and
backlash at surface. The string shot can be loaded into the pipe in and run in hole to
300m below surface. If the string shot was run in combination with the free point
indicator then the tool assembly should be pulled back to 300m prior to working left hand
torque in to the string. It is important to have the wireline cable at a shallow depth before
applying any left hand torque in case the pipe backs off at a shallower location, and
potentially damaging the wireline cable.

15
15.6.8 Working left-hand torque down the hole

The amount of left hand torque to work down the hole should be the maximum possible
within the constraint of avoiding a premature or shallow back-off. This is a hazardous
operation and safety precautions as outlined must be closely followed. When working left
hand torque down the hole the following guidelines and procedures are to be followed:
As a rule of thumb, the amount of left-hand torque applied at surface should not
exceed 70% of the right hand make-up torque.
Since a tool joint is more inclined to break when the axial tension on the
connection is zero, left hand torque should be worked down the hole starting with
maximum surface tension and working progressively down to planned back-off
tension. This should be performed in several stages starting with approximately
half of the required left-hand torque. Only when a given amount of torque has
been worked into the entire string should the torque be increased to the next
stage.
Be certain to maintain a record of the number of cumulative left hand turns that
have been put in the pipe as the torque is worked down to the planned back-off
point.
If holding the torque with the rotary or a top drive, be certain to lock the rotary
table or power swivel once the final torque is achieved.
15.6.9 Running the string shot and backing off

Run in with the string shot and position the charge opposite the planned back-off
point.
Clear all personnel from the rotary table area.
Fire the string shot and monitor the torque gauge for a loss of torque. If
successful, Do Not unscrew the pipe.
Pull the wireline cable back to 300m.
Release the trapped left-hand torque and make note of the number of right hand
turns necessary to reduce the torque to zero.
POOH with the wireline and pull the logging cable clear.
Reduce string tension to anticipated rotating weight at back-off point and rotate
pipe to the left to complete back off. Pick up on string and check the pickup
weight. If the pipe has backed off at planned depth, pull out of the hole.
If the pipe has backed off high, screw back into the connection and repeat the
entire back-off procedure.
o Since the pipe backed off high, it may be necessary to increase the amount
of right hand torque, working the torque down for a longer period and/or
adjusting the string tension to be held when the string shot is fired.
o If the pipe backed off close to the planned back-off point, check the pickup,
slack off and rotating string weights prior to screwing back into the fish.
These measurements should then be used to determine the correct pickup
and slack off weights for working torque down the hole, as well as the
correct tension to hold when the string shot is fired.
In certain cases where the pipe has backed off high, it may be desirable to pull out of the
hole and run an alternative fishing assembly. This will be decided on a case-by-case basis
following consultation with the Drilling Superintendent.

16
Appendix 1 Determining string tension required to back-off

Example
In this example it will be assumed that the drilling assembly has become differentially
stuck while drilling on bottom.
Information
Well depth 2500 m MD
Hole size 12
Drill string 100 m of 8 DC (150 lb/ft)
150 m of 5HWDP (50 lb/ft)
2250 m of 5 DP (19.5 lb/ft, NC50, Premium, X95)
Mud weight 1.4 SG
Buoyancy factor 0.822
Weight of blocks 8000 daN *
Stuck point 2000 m MD
* Includes weight of blocks, hook, etc.
In this example it will be assumed that the hole drag is distributed uniformly along the
length of the drilling assembly, that 2000 daN of tension will be maintained in the pipe
at the back-off point when the string shot is fired, and that the pipe will be backed off at
the stuck point (i.e. 2000 m MD).
Weight of drill free drill pipe:
Weight per meter of drillpipe 31.83 kg/m

Buoyancy factor 0.822
Weight per meter of drillpipe in mud 26.16 kg/m
Weight of 2000 meter of drillpipe in mud 52000 daN
Hydrostatic pressure (HP) at 2000 m:
= 9.81 = 9.81 2000 1.4 = 28000
Area of mating surface of tool joint (S) (cm2):
From table K25 (drilling Data Handbook).

For NC50 connection the tool joint mating surface area = 43.34 cm2
Calculated weight indicator reading (T) when string shot is fired (103 daN):
28000 43.34
= + = (52 + 8) + = 72 103
100000 100000
Therefore, prior to firing the string shot, the pipe will be slacked off to below the initial
slack-off weight and then picked up and tensioned to a weight indicator reading of 72 + 2
= 74 x 103 daN.
It should be noted that in order to apply the correct pick-up weight, the weight of all tools
and equipment that were suspended below the hook are accounted for in this pickup
weight calculation. For instance, if the Kelly has been removed, this weight must be
subtracted from the required pickup weight.

17
Appendix 2 Pre-job fishing information sheet

18

Prepared by WEP
Author:
Version: June 2014
Verified:
2
16 Conventional coring procedures ........................................................................... 3

16.1 Objectives of coring..................................................................................... 3
16.2 Coring risks and risk mitigations ................................................................... 3
16.3 Making up and running in the core barrel assembly ......................................... 4
16.3.1 Assembly of the core barrels .................................................................. 4
16.3.2 Tripping in the hole and preparation for coring ......................................... 5
16.4 Detailed operations ..................................................................................... 6
16.4.1 Coring and making a connection ............................................................. 6
16.4.2 Terminating the core run ....................................................................... 8
16.4.3 Tripping out of the hole ......................................................................... 8
16.4.4 Laying down aluminum inner barrels containing the core ........................... 9
16.4.5 Laying down the outer core barrel ........................................................... 9
16.5 Core recovery and handling ........................................................................ 10
16.6 Core stabilization ...................................................................................... 11
16.6.1 Freezing cores .................................................................................... 11
16.6.2 Chilling method .................................................................................. 11
16.6.3 Transportation of frozen cores .............................................................. 11
16.7 Trouble shooting ....................................................................................... 11
16.8 LCM recommendations............................................................................... 12
Appendix 1 Example of required equipment ......................................................... 13

16 Conventional coring procedures | Version:June 2014
3

This manual is to serve as a guideline. Operations and weather conditions may dictate
changes to procedures.
Safety is a priority and obligation of all the personnel involved with the coring equipment
and coring operations.
3rd Party coring technicians will hold Safety Procedure Meetings with the operator and
drilling contractors personnel before any part of the operation is carried out.
The Safety Procedure Meetings will address concerns of the rig personnel and clarify any
issues regarding the hazards related to the coring operation. These meetings with the
operator and drilling contractors personnel on the rig will ensure that the safest practices
for the job are adopted.
16.1 Objectives of coring

The objectives of a coring operation are the following:
Complete coring operation in a safe manner without any accidents, incidents or
near misses.
Obtain quality core(s) to assist in evaluation.
To core the target interval in most efficient, cost effective means possible whilst
obtaining high recoveries and core quality.
16.2 Coring risks and risk mitigations

The risks related to coring operations are:
Core jamming is the single most common cause of early termination of a core run
which results in unscheduled trips and increased cost to the Operator in rig time.
The potential for core jamming is considered high in interbedded formations.
Inappropriate break out or surface handling procedures may result in damage to
the core which will be detrimental to the data quality of the analyses ultimately
derived from it.
The following mitigating steps are to be followed:

Specialist procedures for the recovery and lay down of the cores should be
employed
Coring parameters shall be optimized in order to prevent potentials of core jam
without inducing vibrations
Inner core barrels should be fitted with shoes, catchers and inner tube stabilizers
for the critical path of the well prior to pick up of the assembly. Sufficient spares
will be on hand to prevent re-use of these items in the event of continued coring.
The use of specialist non rotational break out and handling procedures / equipment
is recommended for the core recovery process to minimize the potential for
mechanical damage to the cores.
Tool box talks will be conducted by the Coring Supervisor.

4
16.3 Making up and running in the core barrel assembly

Note: Ensure that there are no restrictions in the drill string to stop the passage of the
coring drop ball. Verify the minimum ID of the drill string.
16.3.1 Assembly of the core barrels

It is important to minimize the swinging motion of the core barrel in adverse weather
conditions. Make sure elevators are completely latched when picking up tubular. Rig
Assembly procedures for a 9 meter (30 foot) core barrel including the make-up of a top
section, middle section and bottom core barrel section.
1. Pick up the 9 meter (30 foot) outer core barrel bottom section from the catwalk
using the drill floor winch.
2. Hoist the core barrel into the V-door and latch the drill pipe elevators around the
elevator lift sub.
3. Slack off on the upper lifting sling and remove the sling from the core barrel.
4. Ensure that the top stabilizer and lift sub connections are chain tong tight and that
each joint is chalk marked for safety.
5. Hoist the core barrel into the vertical position using the blocks or top drive.
6. Control the motion of the core barrels lower end while coming off of the V-door
onto the rig floor.
7. Break out and remove the outer barrel protector using chain tongs.
8. Screw the Core Bit onto the bottom section of core barrel and install the bit
breaker.
9. Set the core barrel down in the rotary table and make up the connection between
the Core Bit and bottom stabilizer, and the connection between the bottom
stabilizer and outer barrel to the recommended torque. (See specifications for
recommended torque specs).
Note: Ensure the rig tongs are positioned correctly above and below the connection of the
outer barrels (at least 6 below the box) during all make-up procedures
10. Remove the bit breaker and lower the core barrel into the hole. Set the slips 23
feet below the connection between the outer barrel and the top stabilizer. Leave
enough room to install the drill collar clamp.
11. Make up the connection, between the outer barrel and the top stabilizer, to the
recommended make up torque using the rig tongs. Lower the core barrel to
position the drill collar clamp 2 above the slips. Make up the drill collar clamp
below the stabilizer blade.
12. Break out the elevator lift sub and hoist the blocks or top drive to expose the inner
barrels approximately 1 foot. Install the inner barrel clamp one foot from the top
of the inner barrel. Break and screw out the elevator lift sub.
13. If a core barrel longer than 9 meters (30 feet) is required, repeatedly pick up the
required amount of 9 meter (30 foot) middle sections from the catwalk using the
drill floor winch to make up the required amount of core barrels.
14. After picking up the bottom section and required amount of middle core barrel
sections, install the elevator lift sub into the top section of the core barrel on the
catwalk. Follow the above procedures to pick up the top section of core barrel onto
the rig floor.
15. Using chain tongs, remove the outer barrel protector exposing the inner barrel.
Remove the inner barrel protector. Lower the blocks to mate the upper and lower
sections of inner barrel. Use chain tongs to screw the inner barrels together and
pipe wrench them tight using a 6 snipe. Do not use rig tongs to tighten the
inners as this may crush the inner barrels.
16. Lift the inner barrel assembly and remove inner barrel clamp. Lower the blocks or
top drive to mate the outer barrels. Use chain tongs to screw the outer barrels

5
together. Use the rig tongs to torque the outer barrels to the recommended torque
specs.
17. Lower the blocks and proceed to torque all remaining connections on the core
barrels up to and including the safety joint using the above procedures. (If running
a barrel that is longer than the rigs hoisting limit, a 12 lead sub must be installed
between the safety joint and inner barrels in order to check lead).
18. If capable, hoist the core barrel out of the hole, install the hole cover and inspect
the lead. With steel inner barrels, the lead should be 1/8- 1/4. When using
aluminum inner barrels bottom hole circulating temperature must be determined
to allow for thermal expansion. Correct thermal expansion rates for aluminum
inners can be obtained from the Thermal Expansion Compensation Chart. Adjust
the LAS for a normal lead plus the correct amount of thermal expansion. If there
is any doubt as to the amount of thermal expansion, a slightly greater lead would
be preferable to a smaller lead. Ensure that the inner barrels turn inside the outer.
16.3.2 Tripping in the hole and preparation for coring

1. Run coring assembly in Hole.
2. Run the core barrel in the hole as per 3rd party Coring Services guidelines,
ensuring that the drill pipe is filled with drilling fluid according to the operator's trip
procedures.
Proceed through the casing shoe and other obstacles such as doglegs with
caution.
If it is necessary to ream into the hole, do so with maximum flow rate and
minimal weight on bit and RPM.
3. Preparation for Coring
Note: It is essential that the coring drop ball is NOT dropped until bottom has been
tagged and it is determined that the hole is in good condition.
4. Wash the last 9 meters (30 feet) down to bottom.

5. Break circulation slowly. Once circulation has been achieved, slowly increase the
pump strokes to optimum flow rate. Lower the drill string to find bottom. Once
bottom has been determined, compare the hole depth showing on the Pason with
the pipe strap. Report any substantial discrepancies to the geologist and company
man.
6. Record flow rates and off-bottom circulating pressures.
7. If necessary circulate bottoms up at the maximum possible flow rate for the
specific core barrel size.
8. Hold A Safety Procedure Meeting When Circulating Bottoms Up. Cover The
Following Points:
What action to take if coring has to stop due to rig equipment failure.
The procedure to follow for making a connection.
The potential use of breathing apparatus, in case of H2S
What parameters to observe while coring.
The importance of keeping all parameters as constant as possible (except for
changes requested by the 3rd party Coring Technician).

6
9. While circulating bottoms up, record the following information:

Pump pressure / flow rate.
Off bottom rotary torque.
Drill string weight.
Hole drag up.
Hole drag down.
10. Calculate the surface to bit pump strokes. This calculation will be required for
circulating the drop ball down to the ball seat.
11. Break the Kelly or top drive once the gas levels are at an acceptable working level,
and drop the coring drop ball. Pick up pup joints if required to start coring with a
full Kelly or stand.
12. Circulate the coring drop ball down using maximum flow for 80% of the surface to
bit flow time.
Note: Reduce the flow rate so that the standpipe pressure is no more than 6000 kPa until
the ball seats. This procedure will eliminate any shock on the formation and the aluminum
inner barrels (if used) when the ball reaches the ball seat. It is possible to collapse the
inner barrels if the flow ports of the core head are plugged when reaming to bottom and
the flow rate is too high.
13. A pressure increase will be observed when the ball is seated.

14. Allow the pressure to stabilize and record the pressure increase.
15. Take Slow Circulation Rates (SCR) and record these in the drillers tour book and in
your personal notebook.
16. Adjust the flow rate to the desired rate for coring and record the off bottom
pressure.
16.4 Detailed operations
16.4.1 Coring and making a connection

If at any point a kick is encountered while coring, coring will be terminated, the core will
be broken and the drill string lifted off bottom. The operator's well control procedures will
be immediately adopted.
1. Rotate the drill string at approximately 40-60 RPM and adjust the flow rate to the
rate desired for coring.
2. Ensure the weight indicator has been zeroed.
3. Slowly lower the core barrel to bottom.
4. Tag bottom and start coring. Mark the Kelly or drilling stand with a meter stick
while coring. This will be beneficial in the event that the Pason malfunctions.
5. Apply a starting WOB of 2000daN (4400 lbs) to allow the Core Bit to cut a pattern.
6. Maintain these parameters until approximately 0.6 of a meter of core has been cut.
Note: Do not allow WOB to drill off as this may damage the core or cause jamming.
Record the differential of the off and on bottom pump pressure
7. Increase the WOB in increments of 1000daN (2200 lbs) while observing the rotary
torque response.
8. Adjust the RPM to the desired level.

7
Note: 3rd Party Coring Services representatives are on site to determine optimum coring
parameters.
Note: If drilling fluid becomes gas cut and reaches an unacceptable level, coring will cease
until the gas levels have dropped to an acceptable operating limit. This will require the
core barrel to be lifted off bottom to circulate the gas cut drilling fluid out of the well bore.
9. Making a Connection
It is required to break the core off bottom to make a connection on drilling rigs
without a top-drive.
10. To make a connection the following steps should be taken
Stop rotating the drill string, minimizing any backspin.
Slow the mud pumps.
Slowly pick the weight off of the core bit until an over pull is observed.
Pull to approximately 10,000daN (22,000 lbs) over the total of string weight
and hole drag. If the core does not break, hold the string at this level and wait
a few minutes for the core to break. If the core still does not break, kick the
mud pumps out and back in. This should in most cases break the core. If no
over pull is observed, pick the drill string up slowly. If core seems to be slipping
in the catcher, lower the string back to bottom and try again to get a core
break.
If excessive over pull is applied it may not be possible to release the core
catcher off the core to resume coring.
Once the core has broken pull the drilling stand up out of the bushings. Stop
the mud pumps and make the connection as per drilling contractor's
procedures.
Note: It will be necessary to make the connection as quickly as possible to reduce any
differential sticking and gas entering the well bore.
11. Once the connection has been made, start the mud pumps and re-establish the
same coring parameters as before the connection.
12. Compare the pump pressure and torque to before the connection and record the
differences and any observations.
13. Continue coring, keeping all the parameters constant, until the barrel is nearly full.
Note: It is poor practice to completely fill a core barrel. If the core is compacted into the
inner barrel it could be damaged by compression.

8
16.4.2 Terminating the core run

1. Stop rotating the drill string, minimizing any backspin.
2. Pick up to neutral weight.
3. Mark the Kelly or drilling stand.
4. Break the core off bottom as when making a connection.
5. Confirm the core is broken by picking up about 4 to 5 meters (12 to 20 feet) while
observing any irregular weight indicator changes, then slowly lowering to about 1
meter (5 feet) off bottom.
6. Record the coring interval in the Pason.
7. Take SCRs. This is necessary as there may be core protruding from the core head
or the flow ports in the core head may be blocked, changing the flow area.
16.4.3 Tripping out of the hole

1. Once the coring has been completed it will usually be necessary to circulate
bottoms up.
Note: Ensure the core barrel has been pulled out of the cored hole before circulating
bottoms up. The coring technician and the operators well site supervisor will determine
circulation rate.
2. Circulation should continue until gas levels are at an acceptable level and sufficient
geological samples have been collected.
3. CAODC and Company Specific Flow check and trip procedures apply.
Note: The tool joints must be broken with tongs and NOT the rotary table. Tool joints
should be rotated out slowly. If core is expected to be unconsolidated, or if there is no
break off bottom, chaining out is recommended. Under no circumstances should string be
dropped suddenly or set into slips with a bang. This could cause core to become
dislodged from core catcher.
4. Hold a safety procedures meeting with the bit in the casing and review well
control, and the core recovery procedures.
Note: If the well starts to flow, notify the drill site supervisor immediately and prepare to
implement well control procedures. This may include tripping back to bottom.
5. Once the core barrel is at surface, set the slips and install the drill collar clamp.
6. Retrieve the drop ball. If necessary, check for H2S and be aware of the possibility
of H2S trapped below the ball.
Note: If there are obstructions on top of the drop ball caution must be taken when digging
it out to remove it. Be aware of gas trapped below the ball.
7. Screw the elevator lift sub into the top of the core barrel and torque to
recommended specs.
8. Break the safety joint connection and back out until the connection is completely
disengaged.
9. Hoist the inner barrels out of the outer barrels and lower them to the rig floor.
10. Break off the shoe with pipe wrenches and install the core tong shoe and handle.

9
11. Recover the core keeping in mind the safety topics discussed in the pre job safety
meeting.
16.4.4 Laying down aluminum inner barrels containing the core

rd
The 3 party coring technician will facilitate a Safety Procedures Meeting with all
personnel involved in recovering core. It is imperative to limit the number of personnel
who will be on the rig floor during core recovery.
1. Screw the elevator lift sub into the top of the core barrel chain tong tight. Break
the connection of the safety joint and back out until the connection is completely
disengaged. Hoist the safety joint to expose the top aluminum inner. Install the
inner barrel clamp with sling at least 15 cm below the inner barrel box. Break the
swivel assembly out of the inner barrel and lay it down. Attach the winch line to
the lifting chain on the inner barrel clamp and hoist the inners to the next
connection.
2. Install the inner barrel double clamp on the bottom inner approximately 4 below
the connection. Take the pipe cutter and cut the aluminum, this prevents the tube
turning and fracturing the core.
3. Install the guillotine boot which is hydraulic for smooth breaking of the core. Install
the core into the core lay down cradle and carefully lay the inner barrel down on
the catwalk with the winch line.
4. Repeat the process for the remaining inner barrels.
5. Mark the Inner Barrels Clearly with Permanent Marker for Identification.
16.4.5 Laying down the outer core barrel

Note: The lay down procedure for the core barrel is simplified when using disposable inner
barrels. The inner barrel assembly is laid out during the core recovery process.
1. If steel inner barrels were used, unfasten the winch line and lower inner barrels
back inside outer barrels.
2. Make up the safety joint pin to the safety joint box using chain tongs only.
3. Break the connection between the safety joint and the elevator lift sub using the
rig tongs.
4. Remove the drill collar clamp.
Note: Ensure that all the connections in the following procedures are loosened so they can
be unscrewed with chain tongs in the workshop.
5. Pick up the core barrel and service break the connections between the safety joint
box and the stabilizer, and between the stabilizer and the outer barrel.
6. Pick up the core barrel and set the slips below the blades of the top stabilizer on
the bottom section of the core barrel leaving enough room to install the drill collar
clamp. Install the drill collar clamp.
7. Break the connection between the outer barrel of the top section and the stabilizer
of the bottom section.
8. Unscrew the outer barrel using chain tongs only.
9. If steel inner barrels were used, install the inner barrel clamp one foot below the
top of the bottom inner barrel. Break the connection between the inner barrels,

10
and lower the top section of the core barrel till the inner barrel clamp is just above
the stump. Screw the inner barrels apart.
10. Fit the inner barrel protector to the pin end hand tight. Fit the outer core barrel
protector to the pin end and tighten with the chain tongs.
11. Turn the elevator handles opposite the V-door.
12. Lay the top section down onto the catwalk using the drill floor winch.
13. Remove the elevator lift sub. Screw an API box protector into the outer barrel box.
Note: Drill floor personnel under the direction of the driller perform the lay down
procedures for lowering the core barrels to the catwalk.
14. Screw the elevator lift sub chain tong tight into the next inner barrel section in the
rotary table. Attach the elevators. Lift the core barrel and remove the inner barrel
clamp. Screw the lift sub into the outer barrel and make it up chain tong tight.
15. Remove the drill collar clamp.
16. Pick up the core barrel and break the connection between the stabilizer and the
outer barrel.
17. Pull the core barrel all the way up out of the bushings.
18. Ensure the hole cover is fitted prior to fitting the bit breaker on the core head.
19. Fit the bit breaker on the core head, holding the handles for safety, and install the
bit breaker plate in the rotary table.
20. Break the connections between the bottom stabilizer and the core head.
21. Hoist the barrel out of the rotary table, install the hole cover and remove the core
head. Screw the core barrel protector on to the stabilizer pin.
22. Tighten the protector with chain tongs.
23. Lay down the bottom section to the catwalk using the drill floor winch.
Note: The 3rd party Coring Technician will ensure that all coring equipment and handling
tools will be cleaned and packed away in the Coring Services Container.
16.5 Core recovery and handling

The core recovery in aluminum inners is done in the following way:
1. With the aluminum inners laid out on the catwalk, the 9m tubes should be marked
out in 1 meter sections starting from the top of the core and working towards the
bottom. Each 1m section of core should have the appropriate depth marked
clearly. In addition, each tube should have the well name and number written on
it.
2. Unless otherwise instructed, intervals corresponding to the top and bottom
markings on each 1m core section should be avoided especially when core loss is
encountered. Once all core marking has been completed, proceed to cut the tubes
with an acceptable chop saw (gas, electric or manual) while keeping well control
and safety regulations in consideration. It may be required to move the core an
acceptable distance from the well bore with a loader.

11
16.6 Core stabilization

The rig site handling of unconsolidated core is a risky process that can compromise core
integrity. Despite significant advances in coring systems and methods, some problems
remain as challenging as ever. Stabilization of extremely friable unconsolidated
formations, where the annulus is clearly defined, is one of those problems.
16.6.1 Freezing cores

By exposing the core to temperatures as low as -80C, Lithofreeze (ALS Petrophysics)
stabilizes the core, preventing fluids from migrating in highly permeable materials, and
preserving volatile and semi-volatile hydrocarbons.
The Lithofreeze technique consists of the following:
Pre-conditioning of core using a full-length core basket with multi-channel sensors
where the core is first frozen at correct temperature for correct amount of time
Core is processed using adapted and standard coring equipment
Core is packed into specially-designed core containers - monitored from the
moment the core is in the thaw cycle
16.6.2 Chilling method

This technique chills the fluid inside the rock sample, preventing its migration during
transportation. This technique is also used for preserving unconsolidated rocks.
16.6.3 Transportation of frozen cores

ALS Petrophysics has developed Frost Box, a specially-designed container ensuring safe,
auditable core transportation. The innovations thermal properties guarantee the core
remains frozen for a significant period of time.
This transport box is able to monitor and record data regarding the temperature of the core
to have a complete view of how the core was handled from the recovery until the moment of
processing in the laboratorium.
16.7 Trouble shooting

This basic guide is purely for quick reference and is not designed to indicate the actual
cause of any occurrence.
Sudden Gradual Pressure fluctuation Pressure Gradual

pressure pressure decrease pressure
increase increase decrease
Ringing of Ringing of Indication of jammed Indication of Washout in

core head. core inner barrel. Pressure jammed core thread
head. fluctuation due to the barrel. The core connection
Blockage of jammed core taking cannot enter the of drill
face discharge weight, causing the inner barrel, string or
ports in core core head to drill off causing the inner core barrel.
head and stop or reduce barrels to raise
penetration rate. and increase the
lead.

12
Before any assumption that the core barrel is jammed, check that all surface equipment is
functioning correctly and that no additives into the mud system are causing pressure
fluctuation.
16.8 LCM recommendations

In zones with the risk of potential lost circulation, LCM can be pumped if required through
the coring assembly.
The following LCM products & particle sizes are recommended as most suitable.
NOV Baroid MI INTEQ Description Fine Med Coarse
Mica Micatex Mica Milmica (Muscovite) Graded Yes Yes No

mica
Nut-plug Nut-plug Mil-plug Ground pecan shells Yes Yes No
NOV-seal Baro- Kwick seal Mil-seal Blended LCM Yes No No
seal contains paper, cedar
splinters &
cellophane
Walnut- Wall-nut Nut-plug Wallnut Ground walnut shells Yes Yes No
plug shells
Baracarb Calcium Mil-carb
Calcium carbonate Yes Yes No
carbonate (CaCO3)
Note that only Fine to Medium particles are recommended in most cases.
40 lbs/bbl is the maximum concentration recommended well mixed and pumped at
reduced rates.

13
Appendix 1 Example of required equipment
The following is an example of the equipment required for:

cutting 80 meters of core
in a 8 section
Item Quantity Description
1 2 x 9 meter 7 x 4 DuraTeQ core barrel ( cw LAS system )

2 1 Chocked transportation baskets
3 1 Coring container c/w spares & handling tools including non-
rotational breakout equipment, pipe cutters etc.
4 20 9 Meter lengths slick aluminum inner barrels with standard
shoe assembly
5 2 Inner tube laydown cradle (including guillotine and transfer
beam)
6 1 4 Point spreader beam cradle
7 2 Hydraulic guillotine shear boots
8 1 Petrol core saw
9 200 End caps & clips
10 2 8 x 4 CDPFX 713 PDC core head
11 1 8 x 4 CCPR 513 PDC core head
12 90 Wooden core boxes

14

1
17 Plug and Abandonment
Prepared by WEP
Author:
Version: June 2014
Verified:

17 Plug and Abandonment | Version: June 2014
2
17 Plug and abandonment ................................................................................... 3

17.1 General issues ............................................................................................ 3
17.2 Safety requirements .................................................................................... 4
17.3 Cement plug requirements ........................................................................... 4
17.3.1 Reservoirs ............................................................................................ 4
17.3.2 Cased hole with open-hole from the bottom of the shoe, liners, casing
section and annulus. .......................................................................................... 9
17.3.3 Wells abandoned after production test or out of production ...................... 14
17.3.4 Special cases ...................................................................................... 16
17.3.5 Surface zone ...................................................................................... 17
17.4 Verifying cement plug quality ..................................................................... 18

3
17 Plug and abandonment

This procedure contains the minimum requirements regarding the safety of abandoned
wells.
Specific cases may require specific ways of assuring safety. Specific cases are for instance
damaged casings, pressure and / or accumulation of hydrocarbons in the annular space
between casings, long intervals crossing salt, etc.
The occurrence of specific cases must be verified prior to the preparation of the
abandonment plan.
All activities concerning abandoning wells must comply with the existing HESQ
instructions, best practices and methods of operation.
17.1 General issues

Plug and abandonment means all the work leading to the closure of a reservoir of oil /
gas, including restoration work and environmental rehabilitation.
The plug and abandonment program for a well contains complex technical documentation,
economic, social and environment reasons for closure of the well and contains the
necessary actions to secure funding and to ensure effective fulfilment of this program in
compliance with HSEQ.
The environmental rehabilitation program represents all measures to restore and

rehabilitate the environment of the exploration / exploitation area, taking into account the
use by the local communities of the area after the abandonment and contains a technical
program and the implementation thereof in a special procedure.
Ensure that the abandonment procedure is executed so that it achieves a hermetic seal
over the liquid and/or gas under any circumstances, and that any undesirable changes to
groundwater and/or soil are avoided.
The program for plug and abandonment must specify the following:
Well name and number, field name, all hydrocarbon bearing layers behind casing
The history of the well; production data, flow rates, initial and final pressure, total
volume produced
A schematic drawing of the well, showing construction of the well, including
casings, cement tops and geological sections
Reason for abandonment
Depth of the well and depth of the cement plugs
The program to restore the land for normal use

4
17.2 Safety requirements

The abandonment shall provide a good seal of the wellbore with cement plugs placed at
the appropriate depth to:
1. Prevent any migration of fluid to or communication with sources of potable water
2. Prevent undesirable surface conditions
It is necessary to seal off the following:

Oil, gas and salt deposits
Layers with useful water accumulation
Layers under high pressure
Top of liners
Shoe of deepest casing
Open hole sections
Top of hole
17.3 Cement plug requirements
17.3.1 Reservoirs
The cement shall cover a section from 50 m below the reservoir to 50 m above the
reservoir. See figure 1.
Figure 1

5
In addition to below mentioned circumstances it might be advisable to put cement plugs

across geological boundaries (different hydrodynamic pressure, fresh water, salt water) to
prevent any later cross flow.
Perforations must be sealed with a squeeze cementing job. If for this job a cement
retainer is used, it is enough to place a 50 m cement plug on top. See figure 2 and 3.
Figure 2

6
Figure 3
If a squeeze job as above is not possible or only possible under difficult conditions, a
mechanical isolation (packer/bridge plug) must be inserted, if possible directly above of
the screen (of the perforation zone), with a 50m long cement plug on top. See figure 4.

7
Figure 4
Gas wells (Fig. 4)

In gas wells a packer shall be placed above the perforations with a 50 m cement plug on
top.
The packer has to be tested before the placing of the cement plug.

8
Salt deposits (Fig. 5)

Exception on the statements above is in the case of a large salt deposit. Full cementation
of the interval is not required. Instead cement plugs shall be placed covering the
following:
100 m above the lower boundary of the salt layer plus 50 m under the salt layer
100 m under the top boundary of the salt layer plus 50 m above the salt layer
Figure 5

9
17.3.2 Cased hole with open-hole from the bottom of the shoe,
liners, casing section and annulus.
Wells abandoned in the drilling phase (Fig. 6)

Fill the hole with drilling mud at the same density as used in the drilling phase;
Place a 50m length cement plug above the well objectives;
Place 50m length cement plugs in open hole every 200 m;
Place a 100m length cement plug in open hole under last casing shoe and a 50m
cement plug in the casing
Figure 6

10
Wells with an affected section of casing (Fig. 7)

Will be cemented from 50 m under the affected zone to 50 m above this zone.
Figure 7

11
Liner hangers
The liner hanger must be isolated with a cement plug from at least 50 m below to 50 m
above it (Fig. 8); if the larger diameter casing is mechanical sealed directly above the
section respectively liner hanger, a cementing job of 50m above the packer/bridge plug is
enough (Fig. 9).
Figure 8

12
Figure 9

13
Lost in hole / Fish left in hole (Fig. 10)

In wells with lost in hole tubular materials place a 50m length cement plug above the top
of fish.
Figure 10

14
Non-cemented casing (Fig. 11)

If non-cemented casing cannot be cut or pulled out, then the annulus between non-
cemented casings will be cemented after perforation.
Figure 11
17.3.3 Wells abandoned after production test or out of production

Fill the hole with drilling mud with the same properties as used in the drilling
phase;
Place a cement plug with top of cement at 50m above perforations;
Liner hanger must be isolated with a cement plug from at least 50 m below to 50
m above it (Fig. 8); if the larger diameter casing is mechanical sealed directly
above the section respectively liner hanger, a cementing job of 50m above the
packer/bridge plug is enough (Fig. 9).
Wells with an affected section of casing (Fig. 7)

Will be cemented from 50 m under the affected zone to 50 m above this zone.
Wells with partially non-cemented casing

Wells with partially non-cemented production casing, with pressure in the annulus, the
production casing will be perforated and a squeeze cement job shall be performed, to
obtain proper isolation of the annulus from 100m under the shoe of the last casing that
was cemented to surface to that shoe.

15
Lost in hole / Fish left in hole (Fig. 10)

In wells with lost in hole tubular materials place a 50m length cement plug above the top
of fish.
Open hole production zone (Fig. 12)

In wells with an open hole production zone, a cement plug will be placed in open hole
from 100 m under the last casing shoe cemented to surface to 50 m inside it.
Figure 12

16
Gas migration (Fig. 13)

If a gas is migrating in a cemented annulus it might be necessary to cut a window above
the gas source and squeeze cement through that window. The window will be cut across
an impermeable zone (10-20 m) and where necessary will be enlarged to ensure good
bonding.
Figure 13
17.3.4 Special cases

In case of wells whose technical condition doesnt permit re-entry in the well, with
N.A.R.M. approval, the casing will be removed to the depth of 2.5m below ground level, a
cement plug of minimum 50m will be placed, a lid will be welded on the remaining stump
with well name stamped on it and it will be covered with topsoil;
In case of wells affected by landslides/floods etc. (broken casing/wrenched in the ground,

left in streambeds etc.), the well abandonment program will be subject to a special
analysis for each well in cooperation with N.A.R.M.

17
17.3.5 Surface zone

The well must be cemented from the surface to a depth of minimum 50 m. If under this
depth there are layers of fresh water, the length of the cement plug will be increased to
cover 50 m below these layers as well.
At surface all the casing will be removed to the depth of 2.5m, in order to prepare for
future use of the area.
On top of the remaining casing, a lid will be welded which will be covered with topsoil
(Fig. 14).
Figure 14

18
17.4 Verifying cement plug quality

Every cement plug that is being set as a barrier in the well must be tested for its quality.
The strength of the cement slurry shall be verified through observation of representative
surface samples from the slurry under a representative temperature and pressure.
The cement plug can only be considered a barrier once one the following tests, or a
combination thereof, is successful:
Weight test of at least 100 kN (~10.2 tonne)
Pressure test of at least 50 bar / 15 min.
Inflow test
Furthermore a job performance report shall be made for each cement pug set to provide a
record of volumes pumped, volumes returned, cement recipe, etc.


Drilling Operations Manual Combined - V5Feb2015' PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drilling Operations Manual Combined - V5Feb2015' PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drilling Operations Manual Combined - V5Feb2015' PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the document?

What is the purpose of the document?

What are the requirements for plugging and abandoning a well?

What are the requirements for plugging and abandoning a well?

Drilling Operations Manual

Prepared by Well Engineering Partners

Publication date: Feb 2015

Your partners in value creation

Table of Contents, Glossary & Abbreviations

Prepared by: Well Engineering Partners

Version: Feb 2015

Well Engineering Partners (WEP) B.V.